Sei sulla pagina 1di 588

FOR RS2300 ONLY JP903 X903 US ONLY JP901

WARNING SEE NOTE FROM STANDBY X`FORMER (SECONDARY) D903


2

WARNING SEE NOTE RLY901

FROM STAND-BY X`FORMER

P802 D902

1 3

(PRIMARY)

D904
TO N802 2
GND1

D905

R901 3M3 1/4W

C903
470uF 25V

D901 C902 4700pF 250V


R903
10R 1/4W %%%

%%%

L901
2 1

GND1

US ONLY C901 4700pF 250V

X901

TO AMP BD
GND1

N L X902
L

R902
10K 1/4W %%%
GND1

Q901

EU ONLY

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE

NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety
WARNING SEE NOTE WARNING SEE NOTE
US:3.0A EU:1.6AL 250v 250V

X904

F901

JP902

FOR RS2300 ONLY

NOTES: COMPONENTS DESIGNATED BY THE SAFETY

components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

FOR RS2300 ONLY JP903 X903 US ONLY JP901

WARNING SEE NOTE FROM STANDBY X`FORMER (SECONDARY) D903


2

WARNING SEE NOTE RLY901

FROM STAND-BY X`FORMER

P802 D902

1 3

(PRIMARY)

D904
TO N802 2
GND1

D905

R901 3M3 1/4W

C903
470uF 25V

D901 C902 4700pF 250V


R903
10R 1/4W %%%

%%%

L901
2 1

GND1

US ONLY C901 4700pF 250V

X901

TO AMP BD
GND1

N L X902
L

R902
10K 1/4W %%%
GND1

Q901

EU ONLY

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE

NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety
WARNING SEE NOTE WARNING SEE NOTE
US:3.0A EU:1.6AL 250v 250V

X904

F901

JP902

FOR RS2300 ONLY

NOTES: COMPONENTS DESIGNATED BY THE SAFETY

components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2622/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:48:59 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2025/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:00 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2620/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:00 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RTD101/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:00 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2020/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:01 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2605/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:01 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2028/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:01 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RTD130/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:02 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2302/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:02 AM]

ALIGNMENT INDEX

Alignment Index

file:///D|/RS2300/Menus/ALIGNMENT.HTM[12/19/2010 10:49:02 AM]

Electrical Characteristics.
Complete Pre-Aligned Tuner Available Under Part Number: 257177

Adjust Point.

Electrical Characteristics.
Complete Pre-Aligned Tuner Available Under Part Number: 257177

Adjust Point.

RS2622 ALIGNMENTS Tuner Board Alignment


FM IF Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Output: TP001 TP001G TP003 TP009G RFGND AGND FM Oscillator and RF Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: TP001 TP001G Output: TP007 TP008 TP009G Tuning Voltage (VT): TP002 TP009G RFGND AGND AGND

1. Send a FM IF signal through a 1nF capacitor series with a 10K resisitor to TP004 (Pin 39 of U1). 2. Detect the IF signal output at TP009 (Pin 10 of U1) through a 4.7 uF capacitor. 3. Align TF006 to obtain a clear display on the osilloscope without interference. 4. Ensure that the curve is not staturated. 5. Tune the set to 98.10MHz. 6. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with a RF input level of 0.1uF. 7. Connect a frequency counter to TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) through a 0.1uF capacitor. 8. Check TP003 and align TF006 to get 10.7MHz 10KHz.

Oscilloscope

1. Set the frequency to 87.5MHz. Adjust FM OSC coil (L004) to obtain 1.0 - 1.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 108.10MHz. Adjust CV002 to obtain 7.00.5 at TP002. 3. Repeat the above procedure until the band coverage is within the specified VT voltage. 4. Feed a FM RF signal to a matching balanced pad of 50 ohm - 75 ohm at TP001 and RFGND. 5. Detect signal from TP007/008 through the following circuit shown in figure 3 (See Page 3-2). 6. Set frequency to 90.10MHz and adjust L003 until maximum amplitude is reached. 7. Set frequency to 106.10MHz and adjust trimmer CV001 until maximum amplitude is reached. 8. Tune back to 90.10MHz to check for any mistracking. Tune back to 106.10MHz, as well, to check for any mistracking. 9. Check the amplitude of 98.10MHz for equal sensitivity.

1nf TP004 TP004G TP009 TP009G 4.7uF 10K

IN

OUT

Fig. 1

FM IF Alignments

10.80

10.70 10.60

Fig. 2

FM IF Alignments

3-1

RS2622 ALIGNMENTS

Oscilloscope Tuner TP-001 1.00V DC Voltmeter TP-009G TP-002 TP-001G 4.7uF TP-007/008 TP-009G FIGURE 3 IN OUT

3-2

RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
FM Stereo Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: TP001 TP001G Output: TP005 TP010G RFGND DGND

1. Remove VT probe during search. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with RF input level of 1mV. 2. Search to 98.10MHz. 3. Connect a frequency counter to TP005 (Pin 24 of IC001), short TP010 (Pin27 of IC001) to ground TP010G (Pin 26 of IC001) and across a 10K resistor from TP005 to GND. 4. Check TP005 and align RV001 to get 152KHz 1KHz. 5. After the FM stereo alignment, send a stereo signal to the set. Ensure that the Stereo indicator lights up. The signal strength must not be more than 32dB.

Fig. 4

FM Stereo Alignment

3-3

RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
AM Oscillator Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND) AM IF and AFC Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP011 TP006 TP004G

1. Set the frequency to 530KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.4 0.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 1710KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 8.0 1V. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND)

1. Set the frequency to 150KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.51 0.01V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 283KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 4.6 1V.

1. Send an AM IF Signal to TP012 (pin 6 of IC001). 2. Detect the signal out at TP009. 3. Adjust TF005 and TF008 until maximum amplitude is reached. 4. Send an unmodulated RF signal at 1000KHz with RF level of 100mV. 5. Search Up/Down the receiver. It will stop after the signal is aquired. 6. Connect a frequency counter to TP011 (Pin 36 of IC001) through a 1uF capacitor. 7. Check TP011 and align TF007 to get 450KHz 1KHz.

Fig. 5

AM IF and AFC Alignment

3-4

RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
AM RF Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)

Main Board Tape Alignment


Azimuth Alignment 1. In tape transport 1, playback a test tape (TCC-153) at frequency 10 KHz. 2. Connect each of speaker outputs of the unit under test to channels 1 and 2 of a dual-trace oscilloscope. 3. Adjust the azimuth screw at the tape head to obtain maximum amplitude on both channels. (Both channels must be in phase). 4. Repeat the above procedure with tape transport 2. Tape Speed Adjustment 1. Rewind test tape (MTT-111DN) until both the left and right hubs are equal on each spool. 2. Connect the output to the WOW-FLUTTER meter. 3. Adjust the trimmer in motor to obtain feedback frequency of 3 KHz 60Hz if necessary. 4. Stop transport 1 and playback the same test tape on transport 2. 5. Check the output and result must be the same as transport 1, if not repeat step 3. Record Bias Oscillator Adjustment 1. Insert a tape. Ensure that the tape is not record protected. 2. Select Tape mode and engage Record button. 3. Monitor TP60 and TP60G (as ground). Ensure that the scope/meter does not have an activated low pass filter. Adjust the L302 & L303 to obtain a voltage of 12Vrms 5% and frequency should be 63khz + 5%.

1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 630 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF001 until maximum amplitude is reached. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)

1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 170 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF002 until maximum amplitude is reached.

3-5

ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


SERVICE ADJUSTMENT
Lubrication The mechanical parts are factory coated with a thin coat of light grease and should not require further lubrication. If a light grease is applied, be careful not to get any grease on the play/record head or erase head, hubs, pulleys, tapes reels, drive belts, or switches. Use a good lubricant such as Silicon Lube G322L or Lubricate (00). Service Check Before aligning the mechanism, wipe off any accumulated dirt with denatured alcohol. Wipe around parts where the tape contacts and around all rotating parts. Drive belts are specially processed. Do not clean them with alcohol. Mechanical Torque Use a cassette type torque gauge and check the tape mechanism. Take-up torque 35 to 80 g-cm Rewind torque 65 g-cm min. Fast forward torque 65 g-cm min. Pinch Wheel Pressure No adjustment to the pinch roller spring is necessary. It should be sufficient to give at least 40 g-cm pull force. Tape Head Servicing Each time the unit is serviced, the face of all heads should be thoroughly cleaned with denatured alcohol or commercial head cleaning solution. The playback head should be demagnetized with a commercial demagnetizer. Accumulation of tape oxide during normal operations can cause problems, including loss of high frequencies and wow and flutter. Erase Head The erase head is properly aligned when the tape rides directly between the tape guide on the head without crinkling the tape.

Play/Record and Playback Head Azimuth Adjustment To adjust the play/record and playback head azimuth screw: 1. Connect two (2) VTVMs and a dual trace scope to the stereo headphone jack (as shown) with a 32 ohm dummy load. (See Figure 1.)

SCOPE

CH1

CH2

VTVM

VTVM

DUMMY LOAD

Figure 1. Azimuth Adjustment

2. Insert a 6.3 KHz test tape (such as TEAC MTT-113 or equivalent) into the tape mechanism and play it back. 3. While playing back the test tape, slowly turn the azimuth adjusting screw until the amplitude of both channel output waveforms is maximum and in phase. (See Figure 2.) 4. Secure the azimuth screw in place with glue or paint after making the adjustment.

Figure 2. Head Output Signal

Tape Speed Adjustment 1. Set the function switch to TAPE. 2. Connect a frequency counter with a 32 ohm dummy load to the stereo headphone jack. (See Figure 3.)

FREQUENCY COUNTER

DUMMY LOAD

Figure 3. Tape Speed Adjustment

3. Insert and play back a 3 KHz test tape (TEAC MTT-111 or equivalent) into the tape mechanism. 4. Insert an insulated alignment tool and adjust the tape speed potentiometer (MOTOR) until the frequency counter indicates 2940 Hz to 3090 Hz. Bias Oscillator Frequency and Level Adjustment 1. Set the function switch to TAPE and the record and play tape mechanism to RECORD. 2. Connect a VTVM and frequency counter to test point R/P HEAD. 3. Adjust bias oscillator coil T301 until the frequency counter indicates 60 KHz 2 KHz.(Oscillator voltage is 25V 5V)

TUNER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE Equipment needed: 1. AM Signal generator 2. FM Signal generator 3. DC Voltage meter 4. Oscilloscope 5. Output meter (VTVM) AM Alignment: Use AM S/G and loop antenna Step 1 S/G Frequency 450 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) Dial Setting Indicator Adjust 603 KHz Connect T402 oscilloscope or VTVM to speaker jack Low end Connect DC voltage T407 meter to test point Vt and ground Same as step 2 Nil Remarks Adjust for maximum output Adjust until Vt equal to 1.1 0.1V Confirm Vt: 8 0.5V Maximum output Maximum output Offset is less than 3 dB.

520 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.)

3 4 5 6 7

1720 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) High end

600 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) 600 KHz Same as step 1 L404 1400 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) 1400 KHz Same as step 1 CT402 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to minimize tracking error 1000 KHz 1000 KHz Same as step 1 Nil (1 KHz 30%mod.)

RM LOOP ANT AM SIGNAL GENERATOR TEST UNIT

VTVM

DUMMY LOAD

60 cm

Figure 4. AM IF/RF Tracking

10

FM Alignment: TEST UNIT Vt GROUND DC

Figure 5. FM Band Frequency Coverage Alignment

Connect FM S/G to ANT inputs (mod 1 KHz 22.5KHz dev.) Step 1 2 3 S/G Frequency 10.7 MHz 87.5 MHz 108 MHz Dial Setting 98.1 MHz 126 dB Low end High end Indicator Connect oscilloscope or VTVM to speaker jack Connect DC Voltage meter to test point Vt and ground Same as step 2 Adjust T403 Remarks The Voltage Between IC401 Pin3 and IC401 Pin22 is 0 10 mV Confirm Vt: 2.2 0.1V Confirm Vt: 8.2 0.3 V

VTVM OSCILLOSCOPE FM GENERATOR TEST UNIT

TP1 DUMMY ANTENNA

DUMMY LOAD

Figure 6. FM Band/Tracking

11

Alignment location and test point (Main PCB)

A1

A2 TC402 T407 T402 T406

T403

T408

T409

T301

12

RS2620 ALIGNMENTS Tuner Board Alignment


FM IF Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Output: TP001 TP001G TP003 TP009G RFGND AGND FM Oscillator and RF Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: TP001 TP001G Output: TP007 TP008 TP009G Tuning Voltage (VT): TP002 TP009G RFGND AGND AGND

1. Send a FM IF signal through a 1nF capacitor series with a 10K resisitor to TP004 (Pin 39 of U1). 2. Detect the IF signal output at TP009 (Pin 10 of U1) through a 4.7 uF capacitor. 3. Align TF006 to obtain a clear display on the osilloscope without interference. 4. Ensure that the curve is not staturated. 5. Tune the set to 98.10MHz. 6. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with a RF input level of 0.1uF. 7. Connect a frequency counter to TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) through a 0.1uF capacitor. 8. Check TP003 and align TF006 to get 10.7MHz 10KHz.

Oscilloscope

1. Set the frequency to 87.5MHz. Adjust FM OSC coil (L004) to obtain 1.0 - 1.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 108.10MHz. Adjust CV002 to obtain 7.00.5 at TP002. 3. Repeat the above procedure until the band coverage is within the specified VT voltage. 4. Feed a FM RF signal to a matching balanced pad of 50 ohm - 75 ohm at TP001 and RFGND. 5. Detect signal from TP007/008 through the following circuit shown in figure 3 (See Page 3-2). 6. Set frequency to 90.10MHz and adjust L003 until maximum amplitude is reached. 7. Set frequency to 106.10MHz and adjust trimmer CV001 until maximum amplitude is reached. 8. Tune back to 90.10MHz to check for any mistracking. Tune back to 106.10MHz, as well, to check for any mistracking. 9. Check the amplitude of 98.10MHz for equal sensitivity.

1nf TP004 TP004G TP009 TP009G 4.7uF 10K

IN

OUT

Fig. 1

FM IF Alignments

10.80

10.70 10.60

Fig. 2

FM IF Alignments

3-1

RS2620 ALIGNMENTS

Oscilloscope Tuner TP-001 1.00V DC Voltmeter TP-009G TP-002 TP-001G 4.7uF TP-007/008 TP-009G FIGURE 3 IN OUT

3-3

RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
FM Stereo Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: TP001 TP001G Output: TP005 TP010G RFGND DGND

1. Remove VT probe during search. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with RF input level of 1mV. 2. Search to 98.10MHz. 3. Connect a frequency counter to TP005 (Pin 24 of IC001), short TP010 (Pin27 of IC001) to ground TP010G (Pin 26 of IC001) and across a 10K resistor from TP005 to GND. 4. Check TP005 and align RV001 to get 152KHz 1KHz. 5. After the FM stereo alignment, send a stereo signal to the set. Ensure that the Stereo indicator lights up. The signal strength must not be more than 32dB.

Fig. 4

FM Stereo Alignment

3-3

RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
AM Oscillator Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND) AM IF and AFC Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP011 TP006 TP004G

1. Set the frequency to 530KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.4 0.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 1710KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 8.0 1V. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND)

1. Set the frequency to 150KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.51 0.01V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 283KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 4.6 1V.

1. Send an AM IF Signal to TP012 (pin 6 of IC001). 2. Detect the signal out at TP009. 3. Adjust TF005 and TF008 until maximum amplitude is reached. 4. Send an unmodulated RF signal at 1000KHz with RF level of 100mV. 5. Search Up/Down the receiver. It will stop after the signal is aquired. 6. Connect a frequency counter to TP011 (Pin 36 of IC001) through a 1uF capacitor. 7. Check TP011 and align TF007 to get 450KHz 1KHz.

Fig. 5

AM IF and AFC Alignment

3-4

RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
AM RF Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)

Main Board Tape Alignment


Azimuth Alignment 1. In tape transport 1, playback a test tape (TCC-153) at frequency 10 KHz. 2. Connect each of speaker outputs of the unit under test to channels 1 and 2 of a dual-trace oscilloscope. 3. Adjust the azimuth screw at the tape head to obtain maximum amplitude on both channels. (Both channels must be in phase). 4. Repeat the above procedure with tape transport 2. Tape Speed Adjustment 1. Rewind test tape (MTT-111DN) until both the left and right hubs are equal on each spool. 2. Connect the output to the WOW-FLUTTER meter. 3. Adjust the trimmer in motor to obtain feedback frequency of 3 KHz 60Hz if necessary. 4. Stop transport 1 and playback the same test tape on transport 2. 5. Check the output and result must be the same as transport 1, if not repeat step 3. Record Bias Oscillator Adjustment 1. Insert a tape. Ensure that the tape is not record protected. 2. Select Tape mode and engage Record button. 3. Monitor TP60 and TP60G (as ground). Ensure that the scope/meter does not have an activated low pass filter. Adjust the L302 & L303 to obtain a voltage of 12Vrms 5% and frequency should be 63khz + 5%.

1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 630 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF001 until maximum amplitude is reached. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)

1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 170 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF002 until maximum amplitude is reached.

3-5

RS2622

POWER SUPPLY/AMP SCHEMATIC


10 11 12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

A
SCHEMATIC NOTES 1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS; K=X1000, Meg=X1,000,000. RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5%, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/8W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/16W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. m F, 2. CAPACITANCE VALUES 1.0 AND ABOVE ARE IN pF, VALUES BELOW 1.0 ARE IN EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. VOLTAGE RATING IS 50V EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT. 3. DENOTES CHASSIS GROUND. INDICATES CONNECTION VIA POINT-TO-POINT WIRE. -INDICATES JUMPER WIRE. -INDICATES ZERO OHM CHIP COMPONENT.

ALL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND MANY OTHER SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED UNDER "ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES" IN THE SAFETY AND SERVICING PRECAUTIONS PUBLICATION.

COMPONENTS WITH A ! HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS IMPORTANT TO SAFETY. BEFORE REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE IN THIS SERVICE DATA. DO NOT DEGRADE THE SAFETY OF THE SET THROUGH IMPROPER SERVICING.

PRODUCT SAFETY NOTE

PAGE 9-1

PAGE 9-1

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

This Material Copyrighted By Its Respective Manufacturer

Features
Fast Read Access Time - 70 ns Dual Voltage Range Operation
Low Voltage Power Supply Range, 3.0V to 3.6V or Standard 5V 10% Supply Range Compatible with JEDEC Standard AT27C010 Low Power CMOS Operation 20 A max. (less than 1 A typical) Standby for VCC = 3.6V 29 mW max. Active at 5 MHz for VCC = 3.6V JEDEC Standard Packages 32-Lead PLCC 32-Lead TSOP (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead VSOP (8 x 14 mm) High Reliability CMOS Technology 2,000V ESD Protection 200 mA Latchup Immunity Rapid Programming Algorithm - 100 s/byte (typical) CMOS and TTL Compatible Inputs and Outputs JEDEC Standard for LVTTL Integrated Product Identification Code Commercial and Industrial Temperature Ranges

1-Megabit (128K x 8) Low Voltage OTP EPROM AT27LV010A

Description
The AT27LV010A is a high performance, low power, low voltage 1,048,576-bit onetime programmable read only memory (OTP EPROM) organized as 128K by 8 bits. It requires only one supply in the range of 3.0V to 3.6V in normal read mode operation, making it ideal for fast, portable systems using battery power. (continued)

Pin Configurations
Pin Name A0 - A16 O0 - O7 CE OE PGM NC Function Addresses Outputs Chip Enable Output Enable Program Strobe No Connect PLCC Top View
A12 A15 A16 VPP VCC PGM NC A11 A9 A8 A13 A14 NC PGM VCC VPP A16 A15 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TSOP/VSOP Top View Type 1


32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 OE A10 CE O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 GND O2 O1 O0 A0 A1 A2 A3

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 O0

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

4 3 2 1 32 31 30

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21

A14 A13 A8 A9 A11 OE A10 CE O7

Rev. 0548C10/98

O1 O2 GND O3 O4 O5 O6

Atmels innovative design techniques provide fast speeds that rival 5V parts while keeping the low power consumption of a 3.3V supply. At V CC = 3.0V, any byte can be accessed in less than 70 ns. With a typical power dissipation of only 18 mW at 5 MHz and V C C = 3.3V, the AT27LV010A consumes less than one fifth the power of a standard 5V EPROM. Standby mode supply current is typically less than 1 A at 3.3V. The AT27LV010A is available in industry standard JEDECapproved one-time programmable (OTP) plastic PLCC and TSOP packages. All devices feature two-line control (CE, OE) to give designers the flexibility to prevent bus contention. The AT27LV010A operating with V CC at 3.0V produces TTL level outputs that are compatible with standard TTL logic devices operating at VCC = 5.0V. The device is also capable of standard 5-volt operation making it ideally suited for dual supply range systems or card products that are pluggable in both 3-volt and 5-volt hosts. Atmels AT27LV010A has additional features to ensure high quality and efficient production use. The Rapid Programming Algorithm reduces the time required to program the part and guarantees reliable programming. Programming time is typically only 100 s/byte. The Integrated

Product Identification Code electronically identifies the device and manufacturer. This feature is used by industry standard programming equipment to select the proper programming algorithms and voltages. The AT27LV010A programs exactly the same way as a standard 5V AT27C010 and uses the same programming equipment.

System Considerations
Switching between active and standby conditions via the Chip Enable pin may produce transient voltage excursions. Unless accommodated by the system design, these transients may exceed data sheet limits, resulting in device non-conformance. At a minimum, a 0.1 F high frequency, low inherent inductance, ceramic capacitor should be utilized for each device. This capacitor should be connected between the V CC and Ground terminals of the device, as close to the device as possible. Additionally, to stabilize the supply voltage level on printed circuit boards with large EPROM arrays, a 4.7 F bulk electrolytic capacitor should be utilized, again connected between the VCC and Ground terminals. This capacitor should be positioned as close as possible to the point where the power supply is connected to the array.

Block Diagram

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Temperature Under Bias .................................. -40C to +85C Storage Temperature ..................................... -65C to +125C Voltage on Any Pin with Respect to Ground .........................................-2.0V to +7.0V(1) Voltage on A9 with Respect to Ground ......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) VPP Supply Voltage with Respect to Ground .......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) Note: 1. Minimum voltage is -0.6V dc which may undershoot to -2.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. Maximum output pin voltage is VCC + 0.75V dc which may be exceeded if certain precautions are observed (consult application notes) and which may overshoot to +7.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability

Operating Modes
Mode \ Pin Read
(2) (2)

CE VIL X VIH
(3)

OE VIL VIH X VIH VIL X VIL

PGM X X X VIL VIH X X


(1)

Ai Ai X X Ai Ai X A9 = VH(4) A0 = VIH or VIL A1 - A16 = VIL

VPP X X X VPP VPP VPP X

VCC VCC VCC


(2) (2)

Outputs DOUT High Z High Z DIN DOUT High Z Identification Code

Output Disable Standby(2)

VCC(2) VCC VCC VCC


(3) (3) (3)

Rapid Program PGM Verify


(3) (3)

VIL VIL VIH VIL

PGM Inhibit

Product Identification(3)(5) Notes: 1. X can be VIL or VIH.

VCC(3)

2. Read, output disable, and standby modes require, 3.0V VCC 3.6V, or 4.5V VCC 5.5V. 3. Refer to Programming Characteristics. Programming modes require VCC = 6.5V. 4. VH = 12.0 0.5V. 5. Two identifier bytes may be selected. All Ai inputs are held low (VIL), except A9 which is set to VH and A0 which is toggled low (VIL) to select the Manufacturers Identification byte and high (VIH) to select the Device Code byte.

DC and AC Operating Conditions for Read Operation


AT27LV010A -70 Operating Temperature (Case) VCC Power Supply Com. Ind. 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10% -90 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10% -12 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10% -15 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10%

DC and Operating Characteristics for Read Operation


Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units VCC = 3.0V to 3.6V ILI ILO IPP1 ISB ICC VIL VIH VOL VOH
(2)

Input Load Current Output Leakage Current VPP


(1)

VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.0 mA IOH = -2.0 mA 2.4

1 5 10 20 100 8 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4

A A A A A mA V V V V

Read/Standby Current

VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage

VCC = 4.5V to 5.5V ILI ILO IPP1 ISB ICC VIL VIH VOL VOH Notes:
(2)

Input Load Current Output Leakage Current VPP


(1)

VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4

1 5 10 100 1 25 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4

A A A A mA mA V V V V

Read/Standby Current

VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage

1. VCC must be applied simultaneously with or before VPP, and removed simultaneously with or after VPP . 2. VPP may be connected directly to VCC, except during programming. The supply current would then be the sum of ICC and IPP .

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
AC Characteristics for Read Operation
VCC = 3.0V to 3.6V and 4.5V to 5.5V
AT27LV010A -70 Symbol tACC(3) tCE(2) tOE
(2)(3)

-90 Max 70 70 40 35 Min Max 90 90 50 40 Min

-12 Max 120 120 50 40 Min

-15 Max 150 150 60 50 Units ns ns ns ns

Parameter Address to Output Delay CE to Output Delay OE to Output Delay OE or CE High to Output Float, whichever occurred first Output Hold from Address, CE or OE, whichever occurred first

Condition CE = OE = VIL OE = VIL CE = VIL

Min

tDF(4)(5)

tOH

ns

AC Waveforms for Read Operation(1)

Notes:

1. Timing measurement references are 0.8V and 2.0V. Input AC drive levels are 0.45V and 2.4V, unless otherwise specified. 2. OE may be delayed up to tCE - tOE after the falling edge of CE without impact on tCE. 3. OE may be delayed up to tACC - tOE after the address is valid without impact on tACC. 4. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. 5. Output float is defined as the point when data is no longer driven.

Input Test Waveforms and Measurement Level

Output Test Load

tR, tF < 20 ns (10% to 90%) Note: CL = 100 pF including jig capacitance.

Pin Capacitance
f = 1 MHz, T = 25C(1)
Symbol CIN COUT Note: Typ 4 8 Max 8 12 Units pF pF Conditions VIN = 0V VOUT = 0V

1. Typical values for nominal supply voltage. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested.

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Programming Waveforms(1)

Notes:

1. 2. 3.

The Input Timing Reference is 0.8V for VIL and 2.0V for VIH. tOE and tDFP are characteristics of the device but must be accommodated by the programmer. When programming the AT27LV010A a 0.1 F capacitor is required across VPP and ground to suppress spurious voltage transients.

DC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.25V
Limits Symbol ILI VIL VIH VOL VOH ICC2 IPP2 VID Parameter Input Load Current Input Low Level Input High Level Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage VCC Supply Current (Program and Verify) VPP Supply Current A9 Product Identification Voltage CE = PGM = VIL 11.5 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4 40 20 12.5 Test Conditions VIN = VIL, VIH -0.6 2.0 Min Max 10 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4 Units
A

V V V V mA mA V

AC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.2V
Limits Symbol tAS tCES tOES tDS tAH tDH tDFP tVPS tVCS tPW tOE tPRT Notes: Parameter Address Setup Time CE Setup Time OE Setup Time Data Setup Time Address Hold Time Data Hold Time OE High to Output Float Delay(2) VPP Setup Time VCC Setup Time PGM Program Pulse Width(3) Data Valid from OE VPP Pulse Rise Time During Programming 1. VCC must be applied simultaneously or before VPP and removed simultaneously or after VPP . 2. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. Output Float is defined as the point where data is no longer driven see timing diagram. 3. Program Pulse width tolerance is 100 sec 5%. Output Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Rise and Fall Times: (10% to 90%) 20 ns Input Pulse Levels: 0.45V to 2.4V Test Conditions
(1)

Min 2 2 2 2 0 2 0 2 2 95

Max

Units s s s s s s

130

ns s s s ns ns

105 150

50

Atmels 27LV010A Integrated Product Identification Code(1)


Pins Codes Manufacturer Device Type Note: A0 0 1 O7 0 0 O6 0 0 O5 0 0 O4 1 0 O3 1 0 O2 1 1 O1 1 0 O0 0 1 Hex Data 1E 05

1. The AT27LV010A has the same Product Identification Code as the AT27C010. Both are programming compatible.

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Rapid Programming Algorithm
A 100 s PGM pulse width is used to program. The address is set to the first location. VCC is raised to 6.5V and VPP is raised to 13.0V. Each address is first programmed with one 100 s PGM pulse without verification. Then a verification / reprogramming loop is executed for each address. In the event a byte fails to pass verification, up to 10 successive 100 s pulses are applied with a verification after each pulse. If the byte fails to verify after 10 pulses have been applied, the part is considered failed. After the byte verifies properly, the next address is selected until all have been checked. VPP is then lowered to 5.0V and VCC to 5.0V. All bytes are read again and compared with the original data to determine if the device passes or fails.

Ordering Information
tACC (ns) 70 ICC (mA) VCC = 3.6V Active 8 Standby 0.02 Ordering Code AT27LV010A-70JC AT27LV010A-70TC AT27LV010A-70VC AT27LV010A-70JI AT27LV010A-70TI AT27LV010A-70VI AT27LV010A-90JC AT27LV010A-90TC AT27LV010A-90VC AT27LV010A-90JI AT27LV010A-90TI AT27LV010A-90VI AT27LV010A-12JC AT27LV010A-12TC AT27LV010A-12VC AT27LV010A-12JI AT27LV010A-12TI AT27LV010A-12VI AT27LV010A-15JC AT27LV010A-15TC AT27LV010A-15VC AT27LV010A-15JI AT27LV010A-15TI AT27LV010A-15VI Package 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V Operation Range Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C)

0.02

90

0.02

0.02

120

0.02

0.02

150

0.02

0.02

Package Type 32J 32T 32V 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) (8 x 14 mm)

10

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Packaging Information
32J, 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC STANDARD MS-016 AE

32T, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)*
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BD

.045(1.14) X 45

PIN NO. 1 IDENTIFY

.025(.635) X 30 - 45 .012(.305) .008(.203) .530(13.5) .490(12.4) .021(.533) .013(.330) .030(.762) .015(.381) .095(2.41) .060(1.52) .140(3.56) .120(3.05)

INDEX MARK

.032(.813) .026(.660)

.553(14.0) .547(13.9) .595(15.1) .585(14.9)

18.5(.728) 18.3(.720)

20.2(.795) 19.8(.780)

.050(1.27) TYP

.300(7.62) REF .430(10.9) .390(9.90) AT CONTACT POINTS

0.50(.020) BSC

7.50(.295) REF 8.20(.323) 7.80(.307)

0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)

1.20(.047) MAX

.022(.559) X 45 MAX (3X) .453(11.5) .447(11.4) .495(12.6) .485(12.3)


0 5 REF

0.15(.006) 0.05(.002) 0.20(.008) 0.10(.004) 0.70(.028) 0.50(.020)

*Controlling dimension: millimeters

32V, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BA

INDEX MARK

12.5(.492) 12.3(.484)

14.2(.559) 13.8(.543)

0.50(.020) BSC

7.50(.295) REF 8.10(.319) 7.90(.311)

0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)

1.20(.047) MAX

0.15(.006) 0.05(.002) 0 5 REF 0.20(.008) 0.10(.004) 0.70(.028) 0.50(.020)

11

Atmel Headquarters
Corporate Headquarters
2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 TEL (408) 441-0311 FAX (408) 487-2600

Atmel Operations
Atmel Colorado Springs
1150 E. Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd. Colorado Springs, CO 80906 TEL (719) 576-3300 FAX (719) 540-1759

Europe
Atmel U.K., Ltd. Coliseum Business Centre Riverside Way Camberley, Surrey GU15 3YL England TEL (44) 1276-686677 FAX (44) 1276-686697

Atmel Rousset
Zone Industrielle 13106 Rousset Cedex, France TEL (33) 4 42 53 60 00 FAX (33) 4 42 53 60 01

Asia
Atmel Asia, Ltd. Room 1219 Chinachem Golden Plaza 77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui East Kowloon, Hong Kong TEL (852) 27219778 FAX (852) 27221369

Japan
Atmel Japan K.K. Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg., 9F 1-24-8 Shinkawa Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033 Japan TEL (81) 3-3523-3551 FAX (81) 3-3523-7581

Fax-on-Demand
North America: 1-(800) 292-8635 International: 1-(408) 441-0732

e-mail
literature@atmel.com

Web Site
http://www.atmel.com

BBS
1-(408) 436-4309
Atmel Corporation 1998. Atmel Cor poration makes no warranty for the use of its products, other than those expressly contained in the Companys standard warranty which is detailed in Atmels Terms and Conditions located on the Companys website. The Company assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this document, reserves the right to change devices or specifications detailed herein at any time without notice, and does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. No licenses to patents or other intellectual proper ty of Atmel are granted by the Company in connection with the sale of Atmel products, expressly or by implication. Atmels products are not authorized for use as critical components in life suppor t devices or systems. Marks bearing

and/or

are registered trademarks and trademarks of Atmel Corporation. Printed on recycled paper.
0548C10/98/xM

Terms and product names in this document may be trademarks of others.

Features
Fast Read Access Time - 70 ns Dual Voltage Range Operation
Low Voltage Power Supply Range, 3.0V to 3.6V or Standard 5V 10% Supply Range Compatible with JEDEC Standard AT27C010 Low Power CMOS Operation 20 A max. (less than 1 A typical) Standby for VCC = 3.6V 29 mW max. Active at 5 MHz for VCC = 3.6V JEDEC Standard Packages 32-Lead PLCC 32-Lead TSOP (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead VSOP (8 x 14 mm) High Reliability CMOS Technology 2,000V ESD Protection 200 mA Latchup Immunity Rapid Programming Algorithm - 100 s/byte (typical) CMOS and TTL Compatible Inputs and Outputs JEDEC Standard for LVTTL Integrated Product Identification Code Commercial and Industrial Temperature Ranges

1-Megabit (128K x 8) Low Voltage OTP EPROM AT27LV010A

Description
The AT27LV010A is a high performance, low power, low voltage 1,048,576-bit onetime programmable read only memory (OTP EPROM) organized as 128K by 8 bits. It requires only one supply in the range of 3.0V to 3.6V in normal read mode operation, making it ideal for fast, portable systems using battery power. (continued)

Pin Configurations
Pin Name A0 - A16 O0 - O7 CE OE PGM NC Function Addresses Outputs Chip Enable Output Enable Program Strobe No Connect PLCC Top View
A12 A15 A16 VPP VCC PGM NC A11 A9 A8 A13 A14 NC PGM VCC VPP A16 A15 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TSOP/VSOP Top View Type 1


32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 OE A10 CE O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 GND O2 O1 O0 A0 A1 A2 A3

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 O0

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

4 3 2 1 32 31 30

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21

A14 A13 A8 A9 A11 OE A10 CE O7

Rev. 0548C10/98

O1 O2 GND O3 O4 O5 O6

Atmels innovative design techniques provide fast speeds that rival 5V parts while keeping the low power consumption of a 3.3V supply. At V CC = 3.0V, any byte can be accessed in less than 70 ns. With a typical power dissipation of only 18 mW at 5 MHz and V C C = 3.3V, the AT27LV010A consumes less than one fifth the power of a standard 5V EPROM. Standby mode supply current is typically less than 1 A at 3.3V. The AT27LV010A is available in industry standard JEDECapproved one-time programmable (OTP) plastic PLCC and TSOP packages. All devices feature two-line control (CE, OE) to give designers the flexibility to prevent bus contention. The AT27LV010A operating with V CC at 3.0V produces TTL level outputs that are compatible with standard TTL logic devices operating at VCC = 5.0V. The device is also capable of standard 5-volt operation making it ideally suited for dual supply range systems or card products that are pluggable in both 3-volt and 5-volt hosts. Atmels AT27LV010A has additional features to ensure high quality and efficient production use. The Rapid Programming Algorithm reduces the time required to program the part and guarantees reliable programming. Programming time is typically only 100 s/byte. The Integrated

Product Identification Code electronically identifies the device and manufacturer. This feature is used by industry standard programming equipment to select the proper programming algorithms and voltages. The AT27LV010A programs exactly the same way as a standard 5V AT27C010 and uses the same programming equipment.

System Considerations
Switching between active and standby conditions via the Chip Enable pin may produce transient voltage excursions. Unless accommodated by the system design, these transients may exceed data sheet limits, resulting in device non-conformance. At a minimum, a 0.1 F high frequency, low inherent inductance, ceramic capacitor should be utilized for each device. This capacitor should be connected between the V CC and Ground terminals of the device, as close to the device as possible. Additionally, to stabilize the supply voltage level on printed circuit boards with large EPROM arrays, a 4.7 F bulk electrolytic capacitor should be utilized, again connected between the VCC and Ground terminals. This capacitor should be positioned as close as possible to the point where the power supply is connected to the array.

Block Diagram

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Temperature Under Bias .................................. -40C to +85C Storage Temperature ..................................... -65C to +125C Voltage on Any Pin with Respect to Ground .........................................-2.0V to +7.0V(1) Voltage on A9 with Respect to Ground ......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) VPP Supply Voltage with Respect to Ground .......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) Note: 1. Minimum voltage is -0.6V dc which may undershoot to -2.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. Maximum output pin voltage is VCC + 0.75V dc which may be exceeded if certain precautions are observed (consult application notes) and which may overshoot to +7.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability

Operating Modes
Mode \ Pin Read
(2) (2)

CE VIL X VIH
(3)

OE VIL VIH X VIH VIL X VIL

PGM X X X VIL VIH X X


(1)

Ai Ai X X Ai Ai X A9 = VH(4) A0 = VIH or VIL A1 - A16 = VIL

VPP X X X VPP VPP VPP X

VCC VCC VCC


(2) (2)

Outputs DOUT High Z High Z DIN DOUT High Z Identification Code

Output Disable Standby(2)

VCC(2) VCC VCC VCC


(3) (3) (3)

Rapid Program PGM Verify


(3) (3)

VIL VIL VIH VIL

PGM Inhibit

Product Identification(3)(5) Notes: 1. X can be VIL or VIH.

VCC(3)

2. Read, output disable, and standby modes require, 3.0V VCC 3.6V, or 4.5V VCC 5.5V. 3. Refer to Programming Characteristics. Programming modes require VCC = 6.5V. 4. VH = 12.0 0.5V. 5. Two identifier bytes may be selected. All Ai inputs are held low (VIL), except A9 which is set to VH and A0 which is toggled low (VIL) to select the Manufacturers Identification byte and high (VIH) to select the Device Code byte.

DC and AC Operating Conditions for Read Operation


AT27LV010A -70 Operating Temperature (Case) VCC Power Supply Com. Ind. 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10% -90 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10% -12 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10% -15 0C - 70C -40C - 85C 3.0V to 3.6V 5V 10%

DC and Operating Characteristics for Read Operation


Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units VCC = 3.0V to 3.6V ILI ILO IPP1 ISB ICC VIL VIH VOL VOH
(2)

Input Load Current Output Leakage Current VPP


(1)

VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.0 mA IOH = -2.0 mA 2.4

1 5 10 20 100 8 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4

A A A A A mA V V V V

Read/Standby Current

VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage

VCC = 4.5V to 5.5V ILI ILO IPP1 ISB ICC VIL VIH VOL VOH Notes:
(2)

Input Load Current Output Leakage Current VPP


(1)

VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4

1 5 10 100 1 25 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4

A A A A mA mA V V V V

Read/Standby Current

VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage

1. VCC must be applied simultaneously with or before VPP, and removed simultaneously with or after VPP . 2. VPP may be connected directly to VCC, except during programming. The supply current would then be the sum of ICC and IPP .

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
AC Characteristics for Read Operation
VCC = 3.0V to 3.6V and 4.5V to 5.5V
AT27LV010A -70 Symbol tACC(3) tCE(2) tOE
(2)(3)

-90 Max 70 70 40 35 Min Max 90 90 50 40 Min

-12 Max 120 120 50 40 Min

-15 Max 150 150 60 50 Units ns ns ns ns

Parameter Address to Output Delay CE to Output Delay OE to Output Delay OE or CE High to Output Float, whichever occurred first Output Hold from Address, CE or OE, whichever occurred first

Condition CE = OE = VIL OE = VIL CE = VIL

Min

tDF(4)(5)

tOH

ns

AC Waveforms for Read Operation(1)

Notes:

1. Timing measurement references are 0.8V and 2.0V. Input AC drive levels are 0.45V and 2.4V, unless otherwise specified. 2. OE may be delayed up to tCE - tOE after the falling edge of CE without impact on tCE. 3. OE may be delayed up to tACC - tOE after the address is valid without impact on tACC. 4. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. 5. Output float is defined as the point when data is no longer driven.

Input Test Waveforms and Measurement Level

Output Test Load

tR, tF < 20 ns (10% to 90%) Note: CL = 100 pF including jig capacitance.

Pin Capacitance
f = 1 MHz, T = 25C(1)
Symbol CIN COUT Note: Typ 4 8 Max 8 12 Units pF pF Conditions VIN = 0V VOUT = 0V

1. Typical values for nominal supply voltage. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested.

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Programming Waveforms(1)

Notes:

1. 2. 3.

The Input Timing Reference is 0.8V for VIL and 2.0V for VIH. tOE and tDFP are characteristics of the device but must be accommodated by the programmer. When programming the AT27LV010A a 0.1 F capacitor is required across VPP and ground to suppress spurious voltage transients.

DC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.25V
Limits Symbol ILI VIL VIH VOL VOH ICC2 IPP2 VID Parameter Input Load Current Input Low Level Input High Level Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage VCC Supply Current (Program and Verify) VPP Supply Current A9 Product Identification Voltage CE = PGM = VIL 11.5 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4 40 20 12.5 Test Conditions VIN = VIL, VIH -0.6 2.0 Min Max 10 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4 Units
A

V V V V mA mA V

AC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.2V
Limits Symbol tAS tCES tOES tDS tAH tDH tDFP tVPS tVCS tPW tOE tPRT Notes: Parameter Address Setup Time CE Setup Time OE Setup Time Data Setup Time Address Hold Time Data Hold Time OE High to Output Float Delay(2) VPP Setup Time VCC Setup Time PGM Program Pulse Width(3) Data Valid from OE VPP Pulse Rise Time During Programming 1. VCC must be applied simultaneously or before VPP and removed simultaneously or after VPP . 2. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. Output Float is defined as the point where data is no longer driven see timing diagram. 3. Program Pulse width tolerance is 100 sec 5%. Output Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Rise and Fall Times: (10% to 90%) 20 ns Input Pulse Levels: 0.45V to 2.4V Test Conditions
(1)

Min 2 2 2 2 0 2 0 2 2 95

Max

Units s s s s s s

130

ns s s s ns ns

105 150

50

Atmels 27LV010A Integrated Product Identification Code(1)


Pins Codes Manufacturer Device Type Note: A0 0 1 O7 0 0 O6 0 0 O5 0 0 O4 1 0 O3 1 0 O2 1 1 O1 1 0 O0 0 1 Hex Data 1E 05

1. The AT27LV010A has the same Product Identification Code as the AT27C010. Both are programming compatible.

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Rapid Programming Algorithm
A 100 s PGM pulse width is used to program. The address is set to the first location. VCC is raised to 6.5V and VPP is raised to 13.0V. Each address is first programmed with one 100 s PGM pulse without verification. Then a verification / reprogramming loop is executed for each address. In the event a byte fails to pass verification, up to 10 successive 100 s pulses are applied with a verification after each pulse. If the byte fails to verify after 10 pulses have been applied, the part is considered failed. After the byte verifies properly, the next address is selected until all have been checked. VPP is then lowered to 5.0V and VCC to 5.0V. All bytes are read again and compared with the original data to determine if the device passes or fails.

Ordering Information
tACC (ns) 70 ICC (mA) VCC = 3.6V Active 8 Standby 0.02 Ordering Code AT27LV010A-70JC AT27LV010A-70TC AT27LV010A-70VC AT27LV010A-70JI AT27LV010A-70TI AT27LV010A-70VI AT27LV010A-90JC AT27LV010A-90TC AT27LV010A-90VC AT27LV010A-90JI AT27LV010A-90TI AT27LV010A-90VI AT27LV010A-12JC AT27LV010A-12TC AT27LV010A-12VC AT27LV010A-12JI AT27LV010A-12TI AT27LV010A-12VI AT27LV010A-15JC AT27LV010A-15TC AT27LV010A-15VC AT27LV010A-15JI AT27LV010A-15TI AT27LV010A-15VI Package 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V Operation Range Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C)

0.02

90

0.02

0.02

120

0.02

0.02

150

0.02

0.02

Package Type 32J 32T 32V 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) (8 x 14 mm)

10

AT27LV010A

AT27LV010A
Packaging Information
32J, 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC STANDARD MS-016 AE

32T, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)*
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BD

.045(1.14) X 45

PIN NO. 1 IDENTIFY

.025(.635) X 30 - 45 .012(.305) .008(.203) .530(13.5) .490(12.4) .021(.533) .013(.330) .030(.762) .015(.381) .095(2.41) .060(1.52) .140(3.56) .120(3.05)

INDEX MARK

.032(.813) .026(.660)

.553(14.0) .547(13.9) .595(15.1) .585(14.9)

18.5(.728) 18.3(.720)

20.2(.795) 19.8(.780)

.050(1.27) TYP

.300(7.62) REF .430(10.9) .390(9.90) AT CONTACT POINTS

0.50(.020) BSC

7.50(.295) REF 8.20(.323) 7.80(.307)

0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)

1.20(.047) MAX

.022(.559) X 45 MAX (3X) .453(11.5) .447(11.4) .495(12.6) .485(12.3)


0 5 REF

0.15(.006) 0.05(.002) 0.20(.008) 0.10(.004) 0.70(.028) 0.50(.020)

*Controlling dimension: millimeters

32V, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BA

INDEX MARK

12.5(.492) 12.3(.484)

14.2(.559) 13.8(.543)

0.50(.020) BSC

7.50(.295) REF 8.10(.319) 7.90(.311)

0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)

1.20(.047) MAX

0.15(.006) 0.05(.002) 0 5 REF 0.20(.008) 0.10(.004) 0.70(.028) 0.50(.020)

11

Atmel Headquarters
Corporate Headquarters
2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 TEL (408) 441-0311 FAX (408) 487-2600

Atmel Operations
Atmel Colorado Springs
1150 E. Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd. Colorado Springs, CO 80906 TEL (719) 576-3300 FAX (719) 540-1759

Europe
Atmel U.K., Ltd. Coliseum Business Centre Riverside Way Camberley, Surrey GU15 3YL England TEL (44) 1276-686677 FAX (44) 1276-686697

Atmel Rousset
Zone Industrielle 13106 Rousset Cedex, France TEL (33) 4 42 53 60 00 FAX (33) 4 42 53 60 01

Asia
Atmel Asia, Ltd. Room 1219 Chinachem Golden Plaza 77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui East Kowloon, Hong Kong TEL (852) 27219778 FAX (852) 27221369

Japan
Atmel Japan K.K. Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg., 9F 1-24-8 Shinkawa Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033 Japan TEL (81) 3-3523-3551 FAX (81) 3-3523-7581

Fax-on-Demand
North America: 1-(800) 292-8635 International: 1-(408) 441-0732

e-mail
literature@atmel.com

Web Site
http://www.atmel.com

BBS
1-(408) 436-4309
Atmel Corporation 1998. Atmel Cor poration makes no warranty for the use of its products, other than those expressly contained in the Companys standard warranty which is detailed in Atmels Terms and Conditions located on the Companys website. The Company assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this document, reserves the right to change devices or specifications detailed herein at any time without notice, and does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. No licenses to patents or other intellectual proper ty of Atmel are granted by the Company in connection with the sale of Atmel products, expressly or by implication. Atmels products are not authorized for use as critical components in life suppor t devices or systems. Marks bearing

and/or

are registered trademarks and trademarks of Atmel Corporation. Printed on recycled paper.
0548C10/98/xM

Terms and product names in this document may be trademarks of others.

AV/IO Schematic

Video ICs

High-voltage audio head selection switch


BA7755A / BA7755AF
The standard audio circuits of video cassette recorders and the recording circuits of tape decks use AC bias recording to record the audio signal onto the tape. This bias voltage is some tens of volts, and a high-capacity bias-side switch is required to electronically switch the head when in playback or record mode. The BA7755A and BA7755AF are high-voltage switching ICs designed to switch voltages as high as 65VDC or AC120VP-P (f = 70Hz). Two control systems, one for current control, and one for voltage control are provided, so the ICs can be used in circuits that employ either method. By combining the BA7755A or BA7755AF with the BA7751ALS recording / playback amplifier, it is possible to construct a compact recording / playback audio circuit. In addition, the BA7755A and BA7755AF are an excellent choice for a wide variety of other high-voltage switching applications. Applications Video cassette recorders and tape decks Features 1) High withstanding voltage ( 65V

DC (Min.), AC120VP-P (Min.), f = 70Hz). 2) Circuits for either current control or voltage control are provided on the chip. 3) Compact SIP 5pin or SOP 8pin package.

Block diagram
BA7755A

1 VCC

2 SW

GND CTRL2 CTRL1

BA7755AF

CTRL1
8 7 6 5

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

VCC HEAD GND CTRL2 SWITCH

Video ICs

BA7755A / BA7755AF

Absolute maximum ratings (Ta = 25C)


Parameter Power supply voltage Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Breakdown voltage of switch (pin 2) Symbol VCC Pd Topr Tstg BVCC2 Limits 15 4001 10 ~ + 65 55 ~ + 125 65 Unit V mW C C V

Reduced by 4mW for each increase in Ta of 1C over 25C.

Recommended operating conditions (Ta = 25C)


Parameter Operating voltage Symbol VCC Min. 4 Typ. 9 Max. 13 Unit V

Electrical characteristics (unless otherwise noted, Ta = 25C and V


Parameter Supply current Supply current Switch-on resistance Switch leakage current Switch AC breakdown voltage Switch offset voltage CTRL1 SW ON control current CTRL1 SW OFF control current CTRL2 threshold voltage CTRL2 input resistance Symbol ICC1 ICC2 RON ILOFF BVAC VOS ICTRL1 (ON) ICTRL1 (OFF) VTH1 RCTRL2 Min. 2.4 120 50 1.70 21.0 Typ. 0 3.9 8.0 0 160 4.3 2.15 31.0 Max. 10 5.6 15.0 10 15.0 1 2.60 42.0

CC

= 9V)
Unit A mA A VP-P mV A A V k Conditions Pin4 L or OPEN Pin5 OPEN Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 H, or OPEN, or L Pin 5 OPEN, pin 2 applied voltage 65V f = 70kHz Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A

Video ICs

High-voltage audio head selection switch


BA7755A / BA7755AF
The standard audio circuits of video cassette recorders and the recording circuits of tape decks use AC bias recording to record the audio signal onto the tape. This bias voltage is some tens of volts, and a high-capacity bias-side switch is required to electronically switch the head when in playback or record mode. The BA7755A and BA7755AF are high-voltage switching ICs designed to switch voltages as high as 65VDC or AC120VP-P (f = 70Hz). Two control systems, one for current control, and one for voltage control are provided, so the ICs can be used in circuits that employ either method. By combining the BA7755A or BA7755AF with the BA7751ALS recording / playback amplifier, it is possible to construct a compact recording / playback audio circuit. In addition, the BA7755A and BA7755AF are an excellent choice for a wide variety of other high-voltage switching applications. Applications Video cassette recorders and tape decks Features 1) High withstanding voltage ( 65V

DC (Min.), AC120VP-P (Min.), f = 70Hz). 2) Circuits for either current control or voltage control are provided on the chip. 3) Compact SIP 5pin or SOP 8pin package.

Block diagram
BA7755A

1 VCC

2 SW

GND CTRL2 CTRL1

BA7755AF

CTRL1
8 7 6 5

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

VCC HEAD GND CTRL2 SWITCH

Video ICs

BA7755A / BA7755AF

Absolute maximum ratings (Ta = 25C)


Parameter Power supply voltage Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Breakdown voltage of switch (pin 2) Symbol VCC Pd Topr Tstg BVCC2 Limits 15 4001 10 ~ + 65 55 ~ + 125 65 Unit V mW C C V

Reduced by 4mW for each increase in Ta of 1C over 25C.

Recommended operating conditions (Ta = 25C)


Parameter Operating voltage Symbol VCC Min. 4 Typ. 9 Max. 13 Unit V

Electrical characteristics (unless otherwise noted, Ta = 25C and V


Parameter Supply current Supply current Switch-on resistance Switch leakage current Switch AC breakdown voltage Switch offset voltage CTRL1 SW ON control current CTRL1 SW OFF control current CTRL2 threshold voltage CTRL2 input resistance Symbol ICC1 ICC2 RON ILOFF BVAC VOS ICTRL1 (ON) ICTRL1 (OFF) VTH1 RCTRL2 Min. 2.4 120 50 1.70 21.0 Typ. 0 3.9 8.0 0 160 4.3 2.15 31.0 Max. 10 5.6 15.0 10 15.0 1 2.60 42.0

CC

= 9V)
Unit A mA A VP-P mV A A V k Conditions Pin4 L or OPEN Pin5 OPEN Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 H, or OPEN, or L Pin 5 OPEN, pin 2 applied voltage 65V f = 70kHz Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A

RS2622

BLOCK DIAGRAM
10

11

12

13

14

15
Q602 (L/R), Q603 (L/R) Audio Amp

16

17

18

19

20

B
FM Ant 43

T Clock 27

T Data 28 14 Tuner Left

9 IC701 System Control

18

AM Ant

IC001 Am/FM Tuning

15

Tuner Right CD Data 24 36 CD Clock

IC501 Audio Amp

14 GND

Playback Deck A

24 23

IC300 PB/Rec Amp

20

Tape Left

Rec/Playback Deck B

5 Tape Right Record Left

21 S Clock

20

S Data

IC502 Audio Amp

14

ALL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND MANY OTHER SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED UNDER "ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES" IN THE SAFETY AND SERVICING PRECAUTIONS PUBLICATION.

18 7

F
Bias OSC AUX IN Left 2

Record Right

IC302 Switch

9 10 7

IC401 Switching/Volume Control

21

22

Left Out 27 Right Out 26

COMPONENTS WITH A ! HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS IMPORTANT TO SAFETY. BEFORE REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE IN THIS SERVICE DATA. DO NOT DEGRADE THE SAFETY OF THE SET THROUGH IMPROPER SERVICING.

PRODUCT SAFETY NOTE

SCHEMATIC NOTES 1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS; K=X1000, Meg=X1,000,000. RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5%, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/8W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/16W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. m F, 2. CAPACITANCE VALUES 1.0 AND ABOVE ARE IN pF, VALUES BELOW 1.0 ARE IN EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. VOLTAGE RATING IS 50V EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT. 3. DENOTES CHASSIS GROUND. INDICATES CONNECTION VIA POINT-TO-POINT WIRE. -INDICATES JUMPER WIRE. -INDICATES ZERO OHM CHIP COMPONENT.

28

To IC701 4 IC001 Motor Driver 2 8

AUX IN Right
Power Transformer

Carousel Motor To IC701 PI001 Slider Down Sensor Drawer Motor To IC701 4 3 To IC701 3 To IC701 3

Filament

I
D515

Filament

-30V 10V

To IC701 CD Left CD Right

PI002 Slider Up Sensor To IC701 PI005 Drawer In Sensor 3

PI003 Carousel Position Sensor To IC701 3

D509-D512

To IC701 4 IC002 Motor Driver 5 2 8

-31V

D505-D508 31V

7 9

TCM Module

PI004 Disc Sensor

PI006 Drawer Out Sensor

To IC701

PAGE 8-1

PAGE 8-1

ANT. PLL Data/CLK/CE.SD.ST COM.SEG MAIN U-COM CD CLK/Data/Storbe/Reset IC-UPD780306 KEY I/O,RMC INPUT Function Keys Remote Sensor Module H.P Jack Attenuator LCD Display

FM/MW/LW Tuner IC-LA1844

PLL IC-BU2616F

Tuner Pack

Power SW System Mute

VOL CLK / Data Tuner R/L O/P Tape R/L O/P CD R/L O/P Volume+Switch+ PT2253+TC4052 AMP VCC AC Main R/L Mute Circuit

BLOCK DIAGRAM

4
Power Supply Rectifier Circuit

Cassette PRE-AMP-AN7312

R/L

Power AMP LA4270

Externa l Speaker Box

Mech-Deck

AC Power AC Transformer

OKMCO CD Module

Q602 (L/R), Q603 (L/R) Audio Amp


T Clock FM Ant 27

T Data 28 14 Tuner Left

43

9 IC701 System Control

18

AM Ant

IC001 Am/FM Tuning

15

Tuner Right

3 CD Data 24 36 CD Clock

IC501 Audio Amp

14 GND

Playback Deck A

24 23

IC300 PB/Rec Amp

20

Tape Left

Rec/Playback Deck B 1

5 Tape Right Record Left

21 S Clock

20

S Data

IC502 Audio Amp

14 GND

18 7

Record Right Bias OSC 2

IC302 Switch

9 10 7

IC401 Switching/Volume Control

21

22

Left Out 27 Right Out 26

AUX IN Left

28

To IC701 IC001 Motor Driver 4 5 2 8

AUX IN Right

Carousel Motor To IC701 PI001 Slider Down Sensor Drawer Motor To IC701 4 3 To IC701 3 To IC701 3

Power Transformer

Filament Filament D515

-30V 10V

To IC701 CD Left CD Right

PI002 Slider Up Sensor To IC701 PI005 Drawer In Sensor 3

PI003 Carousel Position Sensor

D509-D512

To IC701 IC002 Motor Driver 4 5 2 8

-31V

D505-D508 31V

7 9

TCM Module

To IC701 3

PI004 Disc Sensor

PI006 Drawer Out Sensor

To IC701

Q602 (L/R), Q603 (L/R) Audio Amp


T Clock FM Ant 27

T Data 28 14 Tuner Left

43

9 IC701 System Control

18

AM Ant

IC001 Am/FM Tuning

15

Tuner Right

3 CD Data 24 36 CD Clock

IC501 Audio Amp

14 GND

Playback Deck A

24 23

IC300 PB/Rec Amp

20

Tape Left

Rec/Playback Deck B 1

5 Tape Right Record Left

21 S Clock

20

S Data

IC502 Audio Amp

14 GND

18 7

Record Right Bias OSC 2

IC302 Switch

9 10 7

IC401 Switching/Volume Control

21

22

Left Out 27 Right Out 26

AUX IN Left

28

To IC701 IC001 Motor Driver 4 5 2 8

AUX IN Right

Carousel Motor To IC701 PI001 Slider Down Sensor Drawer Motor To IC701 4 3 To IC701 3 To IC701 3

Power Transformer

Filament Filament D515

-30V 10V

To IC701 CD Left CD Right

PI002 Slider Up Sensor To IC701 PI005 Drawer In Sensor 3

PI003 Carousel Position Sensor

D509-D512

To IC701 IC002 Motor Driver 4 5 2 8

-24V

D505-D508 24V

7 9

TCM Module

To IC701 3

PI004 Disc Sensor

PI006 Drawer Out Sensor

To IC701

CAROUSEL SENSOR SCHEMATIC

CAROUSEL MOTOR BOARD


3 RPI-574 / GP1S58V PI003 COL KAT 2 ANO1 PI004 GP2S28
EMIT KAT

4 EMIT

CAROUSEL POSITION SENSOR

ANO

COL

4 3

R007 R006
100 1/4W

DISC SENSOR

150 1/4W

P027
6 5 4 3 2 1

CRSMTR1 CRSMTR2 DISC_SW GND +V1

P026
1 2

(RED DOT) +

CAROUSEL MOTOR M
-

P027 FROM P003

PLAT_SW

PAGE 9-7

PAGE 9-7

CASSETTE SCHEMATIC
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
R304L 47R

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list

R311L

18K

C314L 2u2F

TAPE_L

AUDIO_L AUDIO_R
AGND R407
1K

AUDIO_L

AGND

RECORD L

R306L 1K2

C308L

C310L

SDATA

SCLK

R303L

JR301

C453R AUX_R

R311

C306L 27nF

R302L

C304R

19 C404R

5n6F

5n6F

ALC-L/CUT

PB/OUT

PB/EQL

PB/NFL

REC/OL

A-I/PR

REC/INL

JP301

VCC

ALC

HI/LO

D-GND

AGND

ROUT

CREF

NC2

TREBLE(R)

R_IN4

NC1

SDA

SCL

BOUT(L)

LOUT

VS

TDA7440D

REC/OUTR

RIPPLE/FIL

PB-OUTR

C407L

N303

BIAS OSC
B-I/PL

A/Rec

REC/INR

PB-EQR

REC/PB

PB-NFR

AB/SWT

O/PGND

MUXOUT(R)

B-I/PR

AB/SW

BOUT(R)

BIN(R)

R301L 15K

10

12

13

C302L 1n2F

R302R 120K

C307R 1uF

100uF C305R

C315R

C315L

C311R

C402R TAPE_R

C401R TUNER_L

C402L

C453L RECORD_L

C401L

GND
2

C306R 27nF

10uF C319

22uF C317

1uF

1uF

1uF

15K

RECORD_R

2u2F

2u2F

2u2F

TAPE_L

2u2F

2u2F

C308R 100pF

R305R 1K2

R301R 15K

C316

R308 27K

R306R

JP302

47R

C303R 2n2F

C302R 1n2F

REC/PLAYBACK DECK B

R30733K

4u7F

1K2

AUX_L

680 R303R

CD_R

CD_L

WHITE

RECORD_R

RECORD_L

RECORD_L

R309

C410L
2u2F

C410R
2u2F

120nF

C407RC408R
120nF

14

11

RED

R403R
5K6

C303L 2n2F

C310R

RECORD_L

AGND
18K 2u2F

R304R

FROM/TO KEY BD

RECORD R

R311R

R342

R341
56K

BIAS OSC
Q305
KTC3198GR

TAPE_R

C314R

RECORD_R TUNER_L TUNER_R

1uF

100

C343

IC302

CTRL1

VCC

GND

R340 C348
33nF 47K

CD_SYNCHRO
+10V R325
100
BASE

TAPE_MUTE
STAND_BY P401

CTRL2 3

SW

C341
6n8F

L302

470uH

2 COL KRC107S

STAND_BY Q307 R402L 6.8V


10K

P701

1n2F

13

12

11

10

11

12

BIN(L)

R_IN3

R_IN2

R_IN1

L_IN2

L_IN3

L_IN4

L_IN1

IN(R)

IN(L)

YELLOW

Logic Rec/PB

MUXOUTL

120nF

PB Amp (R) + -

MUTE Logic A/B

Rec AMP(R)

IC401

PLAYBACK DECK A

A/Rec

IC300 AN7348K

+ PB Amp (L)

MUTE

Rec AMP(L)

120nF

ALC

Nor / Cro & Hi / Lo Logic Ripple Rejection P

5K6

R403L

TREBLE(L)

C408L

RED

CRO/NOR

A-I/PL 24

27

26

25

24

22

20

21

17

16

15

C301R 3n3F

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

28 2u2F

GND

18 C404L

C301L3n3F

47uF

23 47uF C420

C304L

C305L

C309

C311L

2u2F

2u2F

1uF

WHITE

AGND

47nF

56R

N304

C409R AUDIO_R

C409L AUDIO_L

100uF

120K

C307L

1uF

1uF

1uF

R420
100

GND

680

100pF

C312

100uF

C400

C402

100pF

C403

R408
1K

SDATA SCLK GND

AUDIO_R

22uF

R305L 1K2

100pF

1n2F

R312

1M5

N501

C320

PROTECTION

+10V

AGND

FIL+ FIL-30V

10 AUX_R AUX_L 1

C342
68nF

220uH

L301

TP60G
L303 470uH

TP60

R401L
10K

CD_L

R324 R326

100K

EMIT

MGND

100nF

C412

R402R
10K

2 3

2SC1815

Q603L

C411 D402
220uF

470uF

TAPE_A

C410
10uF

AGND

KTC3875GR

Q403

R405
560

R406 AGND
10K C601R 100nF 100nF

6.5uH

1.8K

L603L
6.5uH

470uF R617L 4K7

C605L

R616L
180

C604L 1uF C607L


100pF

R614L 0 R613L 22

1k

330k

1uF Q602L 2SC1815 C606L


100pF

C611

R601L 100k

R611L
47k

2SC1815

TAPE MOTOR -

TAPE MOTOR CKT

NJ503

P601A
H/P_IN

P601

PAGE 9-3

1uF 50V

C901

10K

R350

Q306

KTC3875GR

9 8 7 1 3 2

Q603R

C601L

L602

R615R
1.8K C604R 1uF R616R 180

R612R
1k R614R 0

6.5uH

330k Q602R 2SC1815

R610R

AUDIO_R

R352
1k5

L603R R617R
4K7

C605R
470uF

C607R R613R 100pF


22

C606R
100pF

C611R
1uF

R601R 100k

R611R 47k

PAGE 9-3

P101

RECORD

470R

R401

C401

10K

R402

470uF

C600

R615L

R612L

R610L

AUDIO_L

N301

22K

2u2F

KTC3203Y 6.8V

Q401

SW_VCC

KTA1273Y

Q402

+10V

R600
47

H/P_VCC

JW884 CONNECT TO METAL BOTTOM

CD POWER SUPPLY

C333

R401R
10K

CD_R

CASSETTE SCHEMATIC
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
R304L 47R

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list

R311L

18K

C314L 2u2F

TAPE_L

AUDIO_L AUDIO_R
AGND R407
1K

AUDIO_L

AGND

RECORD L

R306L 1K2

C308L

C310L

SDATA

SCLK

R303L

JR301

C453R AUX_R

R311

C306L 27nF

R302L

C304R

19 C404R

5n6F

5n6F

ALC-L/CUT

PB/OUT

PB/EQL

PB/NFL

REC/OL

A-I/PR

REC/INL

JP301

VCC

ALC

HI/LO

D-GND

AGND

ROUT

CREF

NC2

TREBLE(R)

R_IN4

NC1

SDA

SCL

BOUT(L)

LOUT

VS

TDA7440D

REC/OUTR

RIPPLE/FIL

PB-OUTR

C407L

N303

BIAS OSC
B-I/PL

A/Rec

REC/INR

PB-EQR

REC/PB

PB-NFR

AB/SWT

O/PGND

MUXOUT(R)

B-I/PR

AB/SW

BOUT(R)

BIN(R)

R301L 15K

10

12

13

C302L 1n2F

R302R 120K

C307R 1uF

100uF C305R

C315R

C311R

C315L

C402R TAPE_R

C401R TUNER_L

C402L

C453L RECORD_L

C401L

GND
2

C306R 27nF

10uF C319

22uF C317

1uF

1uF

1uF

15K

RECORD_R

2u2F

2u2F

2u2F

TAPE_L

2u2F

2u2F

C308R 100pF

R305R 1K2

R301R 15K

C316

R308 27K

1n2F

R306R

FOR US

JP302

47R

C303R 2n2F

C302R 1n2F

REC/PLAYBACK DECK B

R30733K

4u7F

1K2

AUX_L

680 R303R

CD_R

CD_L

WHITE

RECORD_R

RECORD_L

RECORD_L

R309

C410L
2u2F

C410R
2u2F

120nF

C407RC408R
120nF

14

11

RED

R403R
5K6

C303L 2n2F

C310R

RECORD_L

AGND
18K 2u2F

R304R

FROM/TO KEY BD

RECORD R

R311R

R342

R341
56K

BIAS OSC
Q305
KTC3198GR

TAPE_R

C314R

RECORD_R TUNER_L TUNER_R

1uF

100

C343

IC302

CTRL1

VCC

GND

R340 C348
33nF 47K

CD_SYNCHRO
+10V R325
100
BASE

TAPE_MUTE
STAND_BY P401

CTRL2 3

SW

C341
6n8F

L302

470uH

2 COL KRC107S

STAND_BY Q307 R402L 6.8V


10K

P701

13

12

11

10

11

12

BIN(L)

R_IN3

R_IN2

R_IN1

L_IN2

L_IN3

L_IN4

L_IN1

IN(R)

IN(L)

YELLOW

Logic Rec/PB

MUXOUTL

120nF

PB Amp (R) + -

MUTE Logic A/B

Rec AMP(R)

IC401

PLAYBACK DECK A

A/Rec

IC300 AN7348K

+ PB Amp (L)

MUTE

Rec AMP(L)

120nF

ALC

Nor / Cro & Hi / Lo Logic Ripple Rejection P

5K6

R403L

TREBLE(L)

C408L

RED

CRO/NOR

A-I/PL 24

27

26

25

24

22

20

21

17

16

15

C301R 3n3F

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

28 2u2F

GND

18 C404L

C301L3n3F

47uF

23 47uF C420

C304L

C305L

C309

C311L

2u2F

2u2F

1uF

WHITE

AGND

47nF

56R

N304

C409R AUDIO_R

C409L AUDIO_L

100uF

120K

C307L

1uF

1uF

1uF

R420
100

GND

680

100pF

C312

100uF

C400

C402

100pF

C403

R408
1K

SDATA SCLK GND

AUDIO_R

22uF

R305L 1K2

100pF

1n2F

R312

1M5

N501

C320

PROTECTION

+10V

AGND

FIL+ FIL-30V

10 AUX_R AUX_L 1

C342
68nF

220uH

L301

TP60G
L303 470uH

TP60

R401L
10K

CD_L

R324 R326

100K

EMIT

MGND

100nF

C412

R402R
10K

2 3

2SC1815

Q603L

C411 D402
220uF

470uF

TAPE_A

C410
10uF

AGND

KTC3875GR

Q403

R405
560

R406 AGND
10K C601R 100nF 100nF

6.5uH

1.8K

L603L
6.5uH

470uF R617L 4K7

C605L

R616L
180

C604L 1uF C607L


100pF

R614L 0 R613L 22

1k

330k

1uF Q602L 2SC1815 C606L


100pF

C611

R601L 100k

R611L
47k

2SC1815

TAPE MOTOR -

TAPE MOTOR CKT

NJ503

P601A
H/P_IN

P601

PAGE 9-3

1uF 50V

C901

10K

R350

Q306

KTC3875GR

9 8 7 1 3 2

Q603R

C601L

L602

R615R
1.8K C604R 1uF R616R 180

R612R
1k R614R 0

6.5uH

330k Q602R 2SC1815

R610R

AUDIO_R

R352
1k5

L603R R617R
4K7

C605R
470uF

C607R R613R 100pF


22

C606R
100pF

C611R
1uF

R601R 100k

R611R 47k

PAGE 9-3

P101

RECORD

470R

R401

C401

10K

R402

470uF

C600

R615L

R612L

R610L

AUDIO_L

N301

22K

2u2F

Q401 KTC3203Y 6.8V

SW_VCC

KTA1273Y

Q402

+10V

R600
47

H/P_VCC

JW884 CONNECT TO METAL BOTTOM

CD POWER SUPPLY

C333

R401R
10K

CD_R

4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety
N701

components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list
6.8n 50V

to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

R311L

18K 1/16W

AUDIO_L

TO KEY BD
ECO

C309L

15

AUDIO_R

RECORD L
47R 1/16W R305L 1K2 1/16W 1K2 1/16W 1M5 R312 1/16W R304L 100pF 50V 1n2F 50V 22uF 50V

PROTECTOR
14

TUNER-12V
13
220uF 10V

C308L

C310L

680 R303L 1/16W

R306L

C312

C320

C409L 10uf 50V

C409R 10uf 50V

12

+10V 3.8V_

100uF 16V

120K 1/16W

C307L

1uF 50V

27nF 50V

47nF 50V

R311

R302L

56R 1/16W

C309

C305L

C306L

C311L

C400 100uF 10V

C401 47uF 10V

11

50V 1uF

3.8+
10 C408R 5n6F 50V R401 1K 1/16W R402 1K 1/16W 8 C408L 5n6F 50V

-30V
9

24 A-I/PR A-I/PL

23 PB/NFL

22 PB/EQL

21

20 PB/OUT ALC-L/CUT

19 REC/INL

18 REC/OL

17 ALC

16
P

15 HI/LO

14 CRO/NOR

13 VCC

R400 100 1/16W

GND
19 18 17

R P R

ALC

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

AGND

ROUT

CREF

LOUT

SDA

NC2

D-GND

R_IN4

NC1

VS

SCL

A/Rec + PB Amp (L) MUTE

TREBLE(R)

C350
22uF 50V

RIPPLE/FIL

REC/OUTR

PB-OUTR

REC/INR

O/PGND

PB-EQR

AB/SWT

REC/PB

PB-NFR

AB/SW

B-I/PR

GND
6
15K 1/16W

B-I/PL

REC/PLAYBACK DECK B

470uH

RED
5

Logic A/B

BIAS OSC

YELLOW
4

L302

PB Amp (R) A/Rec + -

MUTE

Rec AMP(R) R

Ripple Rejection

BIAS OSC

TREBLE(L)

Nor / Cro & Hi / Lo Logic

BOUT(L)

Rec AMP(L)

IC300

16

15

ST-BY

MOTOER

IC401

REC H/P-MUTE
4

Logic Rec/PB

R302R 120K 1/16W

MUXOUT(R)

1
50V 50V 1uF 1uF 1n2F 50V

2
100uF 16V

5
C307R 1uF 50V

6
10uF C319 50V

8
1uF C311R 50V

10
15K 1/16W

11
22uF C317 50V

12 MUXOUTL R_IN3 R_IN2 R_IN1 L_IN1 L_IN2 L_IN3 L_IN4

BIN(R)

BIN(L)

WHITE
7
470uH

BOUT(R)

SDATA

IN(R)

R301L

27nF 50V

IN(L)

C302L

C315R

C315L

C305R

SCLOCK

L303

680 R303R 1/16W

C303R 2n2F 50V

C303L 2n2F 50V

RESERVE

N303

C306R

AUDIO-MIX
C407L 220N 16V 1

R309

1 C404R 2u2F 50V

6 C404L 2u2F 50V

9 C405L 2u2F 50V

10

11 C405R 2u2F 50V

12 C406R 150N 16V

13 C407R 220N 16V

14 C406L 150N 16V

C351
100nf 50V 15K R301R 1/16W 1n2F 50V

1K2 1/16W

C308R 100pF 50V

1K2 1/16W

47R R304R 1/16W

R307 33K 1/16W

TAPE_L
4u7F 50V 27K 1/16W

C302R

R305R

1n2F 50V

R306R

C310R

C316

R308

R403R 5K6 1/16W

R403L 5K6 1/16W

FROM CDM5B
DRAWING NO. CONT ON SHEET

RECORD R
R341 R342
1/16W 10R

2u2F C314L 50V

1u 16V

1u 16V

RECORD_L

P010
1 10K 1/16W

C410R

C410L

RECORD_R

R402R

R401R
CD_L 10K 1/16W 2

Q305
56K 1/16W

TP60

IC302

R311R 18K 1/16W

C314R 2u2F

10k 1/16W

C309R

50V

TAPE_R 10k R410R 10k 1/16W

1/16W

R340 CTRL1
47K 1/16W

BA7755A
C343 GND VCC
1uF 50V

10k 1/16W

10k 1/16W

SW

C348
33nF 50V

CTRL2 3 4

R409R

CD_R

AUDIO-MIX 5 R325
100 1/16W

C341
6n8F 50V

AUDIO_R MUTE GND1 D404 D403 AUDIO_L


5 6 7

C342
68nF 50V

L301
220uH

TP60G
100K 1/16W

R324 R326
22K 1/16W

N101

2u2F 50V

H/P-IN R406L
39K 1/16W 39K 1/16W 4

C333

2u2F 50V

C401L

H/P-MUTE
3

Q401

R407L
100R 1/16W

15K 1/16W

R450

+7V
220N 16V

D402

C603

C404

R403 C410
47UF 50V

1/16W 15K

1 1

VVV

R407R C401R R406R


2u2F 50V 39K 1/16W 2

N305

GND1
220UF 16V

AUX IN
3

12v

TO BOTTOM

TAPE MOTOR
R328
TAPE MOTOR CKT

Q327 R327
1k 1/16W 22K 1/16W

Q330 R330 R331 2


1k 1/16W 22K 1/16W

2
COL

COL

REC
BASE

BASE

1
EMIT

1 MOTOER

TO KEY BD

EMIT

Q328

Q331

N401A

N402

6.8n 50V

R410L

R441 R409L
1/16W 10k

R440

R401L R402L
10K 1/16W 10K 1/16W

SH NO.

+ + -

1 A

CAROUSEL SENSOR SCHEMATIC


3 4 5

CAROUSEL MOTOR BOARD


B
3 RPI-574 / GP1S58V PI003 COL KAT 2 ANO1 PI004 GP2S28
EMIT KAT

4 EMIT

CAROUSEL POSITION SENSOR

ANO

C
P027
6 5 4 3 2 1

COL

4 3

R007 R006
100 1/4W

DISC SENSOR

150 1/4W

CRSMTR1 CRSMTR2 DISC_SW GND +V1

P026
1 2

(RED DOT) +

CAROUSEL MOTOR M
-

P027 FROM P003

PLAT_SW

PAGE 9-6

PAGE 9-6

EXPLODED VIEWS

Page 7-1

Page 7-1

+5VD_AUD

POWER
MAIN POWER CON FROM POWER BD +5VD +3.3V V_+5V +9VM
I2S_DAT1 I2S_DAT2 I2S_DAT3 DGND I2S_BCK I2S_LRCK POWER_DET DAMP_FAIL HP_DET HP_MUTE DAMP_PD1 DAMP_PD2 DAMP_RESET DAMP_I2C_CLK DAMP_I2C_DAT +5VD_AUD DGND SPDIF OUT

CON1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

R160 R161 R162 R168 R183 R200 R249 R248 R247 R244 R243 R242 R60 R56

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

DA_DATA3 DA_DATA2 DA_DATA1 DA_BCK DA_LRCK POWER_DET AMP_POW_FAIL HEADPHONE_DET MUTE_PHONE PD1_DAMP PD2_DAMP DAMP_RST I2C_CLK I2C_DAT

CVBS C
Y1

CB CR
+12V_AUD +3V3_AUD ADC_+3.3V

L19

10uH

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CON15

25V 220uF

C190

R204 R205 R206 R207 R208

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

100 100 100 100 100

L_+12VM
L_+5V

V_MUX_CNTL3_OUT V_MUX_CNTL2_OUT V_MUX_CNTL1_OUT SCART_CNTL2_OUT SCART_CNTL1_OUT

LC42

33uH

L43

33uH

L44 R241 150 1/16W

33uH

L_MGND
L46 10uH

V_GND
v_gnd

R239 100 1/16W

L_+3.3V

L12 L45
10uH

10uH

C154 1000 16V

D7 3.3V

C153 47uF 10V

C157 1000 16V

D8 3.3v

C156 47uF 10V

CON8

R295 R296 2.7K 2.7K 1/8W 1/8W

C191 C192 R298 R299 470uF 470uF 2.7K 2.7K 35V 1/8W 1/8W 35V

P_CON VF1 VF2 -27V DGND

4 3 2 1

+5VD_AUD

R257 R74

100 1/16W 100 1/16W

SPDIF_IN IEC958_OUT

AGND

CON5

V_GND

SPDIF_OUT

DGND

DGND

+12V_AUD -12V_AUD
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

R209 R210
LT RT

100 1/16W 100 1/16W

A_IN_MUX_CNTL1_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL2_OUT

TTT

L_IN R_IN TUNER_L TUNER_R

+3.3V
D9 R148
1/16W 470
COL

2 CH DOWN MIX AUDIO FOR RECORDING OUT


R147
1/16W 0R KRA107S

PLL_VDD FRONT_DGNDL9
10uH

L38

10uH

U7
C14 BA4560
1/16W 1K 100P 16V
LATI2S 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 LRCIN 2 DIN 3 BCKIN 4 MCLK

+5VD_FRONT REF_VDD DVDD L37 L36 L35 L5


10uH 10uH 10uH

L14 10uH L16 10uH

+5VD

Q1

R170 100 1/16W R169 100 1/16W R171

L39
10uH

+5VD_AUD

C65

EMIT

47K

R80

CON19

L40 PLL_GND REF_GND DVSS MDGND VDAC_VDD


10uH

BASE

L41

8415_+3.3V 8415_DGND

L6 10uH L11 10uH

+3.3V MDGND

AGND

AGND
1/16W +12V_AUD 68

D11
2V2

AGND

C36
DTC323

1/16W 100K

1000uF 10V

Q7 DTC114Y Q2

C16
47uF 16V

R81

U3

2 3

1/16W 3.9K

R52

20K 1/16W 10K 1/16W

R54

C13

SCKDSD SDIDEM MUTEB MODE

47UF 16V

100 1/16W R172 33 1/16W

100P 16V

220P 16V

C5

R49

47K 1/16W 10uF 10V


C4

R53

CSBIWL VREFP VREFN VMID VOUT

WM8728

5 ZERO 6 DGND 7 DVDD 8 VOUT 9 AGND 10 AVDD

DA_LRCK DA_DATA0 DA_BCK DA_XCK

AGND
BA4560
1/16W 1K 100P 16V

10uH 10uH

VDD_FLASH 16V 16V


10nF

10uH 10nF

R154 C70
47uF 10V

C72100nF
16V

C39

0 1/16W

R283

C46

L22 +3.3V

MDGND DGND +1.8V +3.3V C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF C47 100uF 10V +3.3V C54 C55 C58 16V 16V 16V 10nF 10nF 10nF C56 47uF 10V U32 LM1117 OUT

R155 +3.3V 3 C41


-12V_AUD

47uF 10V 68 1/16W

C73

16V 100nF

GND 4

1/16W

Q8
DTC323

C60
100P 16V

1/16W 100K

R145

C45 10uF 10V

C44

AGND C71

8 VCC U3 BA4560

3.9K 1/16W

R141 R143 20K


1/16W

C37 47UF
16V

0 1/16W 0 1/16W

C40
47uF 16V

R311 R312

+3V3_AUD +3.3V

R259
820K

R146

U3

6 5

220P 16V

C38

10K 1/16W

R132

47K 1/16W

R133

C105
10uF 10V

100nF 16V

C102

C106
100nF 16V MUTE_DMIX

C104 C103 C101


100nF 10uF 10uF 16V 10V 10V

AGND

AGND

2
R57 1/16W

VCC GND

220R

C43 16V 10nF R58 1/16W 100


10V

6.3v 470uF 10V 1/16W 68

C33
1/16W 20K

10P 16V 10K1/16W

ANALOG INPUT CONVERTING ( 24 BIT RESOLUTION )


ADC_+3.3V
10uF 10V
R284

R134 2 3

R136
U2

BA4560

C34

C42

10uF

R150

R139 C143
16V 100nF

10k 1/16W

C32 10uF

1/16W 150R

R135
C127 C125 C126

1K 1/16W
COL 47K

MDGND
MDGND MDGND

+12V_AUD

C35 10nF
16V

U33

CS5333

10uF 10V

10nF 16V

10nF 16V

R282

COL 47K BASE EMIT

1K 1/16W

Q12 DTC114Y

+3.3V C24 C19 C20 C21 C22 C158


10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V

+1.8V

16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF10nF 10nF

+3.3V C61 C62 C63 C64 C66 C67 C74 C75 C87 C88 C85 C86 C25 C26 C27C28C29 C57 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V

C141
47uF 10V

10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF

AGND
47uF

C18

C142 10V

8 VCC U2 BA4560 16V GND 4 C144


100nF

C111
1/16W 20K

10P 16V 10K1/16W

R140

R149

10V

6 5 U2

BA4560

C136
10uF 10V

AGND R137
1/16W 150R 16V 100nF 10V 100nF 10uF 16V
C128 C138 C129 C130

47uF 10V

-12V_AUD

68 1/16W

R151

R138

C10810uF
10K 1/16W

C137
10nF 16V

10uF 10V

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

RST VQ AINL

VL MCLK SCLK

AINR SDATA REF_GND VA FILT+ TST DIF GND LRCK DIV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Q11 DTC114Y

BASE EMIT

SUB_RST

1/16W R203 33R R290 100R 1/16W 100R 1/16W 100R 1/16W
R291

DA_XCK

DA_BCK CS5333_DATA

R292

DA_LRCK

10K R163 1/16W 1/16W


R195

MDGND

MDGND

MDGND
AGND

AGND

1/16W 10K 1/16W

R164 R196

47K 1/16W

R77

AGND

+5VD C132 100nF C131 3.3uF

+5VD_AUD 100nF C133 C134 3.3uF R189 28 27 26 25 24 23 U27 SDL AD1 RXP6 RXP5 S H/ VL+ DGND CMCK U INT SDA AD0 AD2 RXP RXN VA+ AGND FILT RST RMCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8415_DGND SUB_RST DIGITAL_A_IN_MUX C124 10nF C119 10nF C31 10uF R142 910R 10nF C118 R188 47K SPDIF_IN R190 33 33 8415_DGND I2C_CLK R199 I2C_DAT Q15 10nF C78 DTC3233 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 U30 OE1 I0 O4 74VHC244 I1 O5 I2 O6 I3 O7 GND Vcc OE2 O0 I4 O1 I5 O2 I6 O3 I7 +3.3V C79 10uF R29710k

39k

MDGND 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 33R CS5333_DATA DA_BCK DA_LRCK RDS_DAT RDS_CLK R31 R46 33R 33R R24 IN_LRCK R192 R265 R262 CON3

TO TUNER
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

13.5M 8415_DGND R185 33R R186 NVERR R191 33 R194 RERR 33 33R R187 33R

22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

R263

R264

IN_BCK IN_DATA

R258

R193

+12V_AUD 100R

100R

100R

100R

100R

100R

SDOUT RERR OLRCK RXP1 OSCLK RXP2 RXP4 RXP3 CS8415A

100R

10uH TUNER_R TUNER_L PLL_DAT_IN C159 100nF L3 C160 100uF

SCART_CNTL1_OUT SCART_CNTL2_OUT V_MUX_CNTL1_OUT V_MUX_CNTL3_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL1_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL2_OUT R23310K V_MUX_CNTL2_OUT +5VD 10nF 10uF C82 C83 GPIO(01:08)

IN245G DOOR_SNS_OPEN DOOR_SNS_CLS HEADPHONE_DET AMP_POW_FAIL TRAY_SENSE

U6 20 VCC OE 19 V0 D0 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CP 74HCT245 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08 DGND DGND

TUNED11

GND 10

10k

TRAY_SENSE AMP_POW_FAIL R84 10k +5VD U16 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10k 10k O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CP 10k 100nF +5VD 74HCT245 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10k RA05 IN245G OUT245G C80 10nF GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08 OUT574CK1 OUT574CK2 OUT574OE

DGND RA06 10k RA07 10k +5VD_FRONT RA08 10k

CON14 1 DOOR_M+ DOOR_MDOOR_SNS_OPEN DOOR_SNS_CLS RMC FRONT_DGND +5VD_FRONT LED_STANDBY KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN_IN1 2

R86

OUT245G PLL_CE SERIAL_CLK SERIAL_DAT

KEY_SCAN (1:7) RMC VFD_DRV_CS_OUT PROG_FPGA KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 DGND DGND DAT_FPGA CCLK_FPGA 10k 10k 33R R280 33R R279 10k DAMP_RST SUB_RST R278

14 13 12 11 10 9

GND 10 R85 C109 C195 1nF GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08

R277

R87

R88

R16

CON7 7 +5VD_FRONT VFD_DAT_OUT VFD_DAT_IN VFD_CLK VFD_CS KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 100 VFD_KEY_IN R221 100 100 KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN7 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN6 KEY_SCAN7 KEY_SCAN6 COL 2 3 EMIT Q19 KRA102S BASE 1 DGND RA09 10k 100 R218 R219 100nF 10k 10k 10k R220

SCART_CNTL1_OUT SCART_CNTL2_OUT V_MUX_CNTL1_OUT V_MUX_CNTL2_OUT V_MUX_CNTL3_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL1_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL2_OUT 10k R69

U12 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CP 74HCT573 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3 4

R91

R90

1 2

R89

C200

CON10 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN6 KEY_SCAN7 KEY_SCAN_IN1 KEY_SCAN_IN2 LED_STANDBY FRONT_DGND -27V VF1 VF2 CHGND 7

GND 10

MUTE_DMIX 100nF C110

C193 1nF

R314 1k

Q18 DTC323 FRONT_DGND -27V VF1 VF2

+5VD

+5VD MUTE_PHONE PD1_DAMP PD2_DAMP P_CON DOOR_IN DOOR_OUT TRAY_IN TRAY_OUT

CON2 7 6

U11 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 O1 O2 74HCT573 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CP D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08 D32 D33 IN4148 IN4148 DGND

100nF

100nF

3 4

10k

10k

R94

R93

C201

C202

R92

10k

ENCODER_A ENCODER_B FRONT_DGND +5VD_FRONT KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN6 KEY_SCAN_IN2

GND 10

Q5 KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 C98 100P IN4148 IN4148 FRONT_DGND MDGND C99 100P DTC323 Q6 DTC323 R75 10K Q17

Q16

DGND

DTC323 CHGND C194 1nF R315 1k

DTC323

R76 10K

CON12

10 9

D30 D31 CHGND

TO FRONT BOARD RTDVD101 ONLY FRONT_DGND

TUNED

AGND

HEADPHONE_DET

0.1u

+5VD

C2

9 7 5 3 1 CON17 10 8 6 4 2

10 8 6 4 2

9 7 5 3 1

ENCODER_A ENCODER_B MINI_EN POWER_DET +3.3V 33uH L2

ENCODER_A

mdgnd MDGND ENCODER_B

R306 R305 R304

R307

V_+5V C120 47u

0 0 0

R303 R302 R301 R300

0.1u C76 U15 BA7623 1 GND OUT1 8 2 IN1 OUT27 3 IN2 OUT36 4 IN3 VCC5

0 0

100uF 100uF 100uF

C77 C121 C151 C152

470uF C180

CVBS Y1 CB CR R228 R229 R226 Y C

470uF

C122 100uF Q10

R281 1K R227

IEC958_OUT

DA_DATA3

DA_DATA2

DA_DATA0

DA_DATA1

DA_LRCK

DA_BCK

DA_XCK

REF_GND

REF_VDD

DVDD

DVSS

C150

100uH L016

R007

0.1u C204

1.5k R28

1.5k R29

D40 R236100 R237100

GPIO04 GPIO07

R232

1.8K

139 XIN/BYPASS-CLK_216 XOUT 138

156

155

VDDP3152 151 ADATA1/GPIO11 150 ADATA0/GPIO10

153 GNDP3

154

BCK149 LRCK148

VDD1 145 AVSS1144

XCK 147 GND2146

AVDD1143 AVDD2142

AVSS2141 XVDD 140

XVSS 137 136 VDAC_REFVSS 135 VDAC_REF

134 VAC_REFVDD 133 VDAC_DVDD

132 VDAC_DVSS 131 VDAC_0

130 VDAC_VDD0 129 VDAC_0B

128 VDAC_1 127 VDAC_VDD1

125 VDAC_2 124 VDAC_VDD2 123 VDAC_2B

126 VDAC_1B

122 VDAC_3 121 VDAC_VDD3 120 VDAC_3B

HSYNC/HIRQ2 /GPIO9116 115 VDATA0/GPIO8

IN245G OUT574CK1 OUT574CK2 157 I2C_CLK I2C_DAT

ADATA3/GPIO13

ADATA2/GPIO12

IEC958/GPIO14

VCC 51 PROGRAM 52 I/O 53 I/O 54 I/O 55 I/O 56 I/O 57 I/O 58 I/O 59 I/O 60 I/O 61 I/O 62 VCC 63 GND 64 I/O 65 I/O 66 I/O 67 I/O 68 I/O 69 I/O 70 I/O 71 I/O 72 I/O 73 CCLK 74 VCC 75

OUT245G I2C_CLK I2C_DAT

158 DAI_DATA/GPIO15 DAI_BCK/GPIO16 159 DAI_LRCK/GPIO17 160 IDC_CL/GPIO18 161 IDC_DA/GPIO19 RTS1 162 GPIO20 163 RXD1/GPIO21 R006 10k 166 GNDP4 167 VDDP4 168 164 TXD1/GPIO22 CTS1 165 GPIO23

109 VDATA4/GPIO4 108 VDATD5/GPIO3 107 VDATA6/GPIO2 VDATA7/GPIO1 106

119 VDAC_4 118 VDAC_VDD4 117 VDAC_4B

114 VDATA1/GPIO7 113 VDATA/GPIO6

VDDP2111 110 VDATA5/GPIO5

112 GNDP2

VCLK 105

DAT_FPGA

V_GND

104 VDD25-7 GND25-7 103 MD31 102 MD28 99 VDD25-6 98 MDQM397 GND25-6 96 MD27 95 MD26 94 MD25 93 MD24 92 MD23 91 MD22 90 MD20 88 VDD25-5 87 MDQM286 GND25-5 85 MD19 84 MD18 83 MD17 82 MD16 81 VDD2 80 GND1 79 MD15 78 MD12 75 VDD25-4 74 MDQM173 GND25-4 72 MD11 71 MD10 70 MD9 69 MD8 68 MD7 67 MD6 66 MD5 65 MD14 77 MD13 76 MD21 89 MD30101 MD29100

MDATA31

MDATA30 MDATA29 MDATA28 MDQM3

50

TESTREG

STABLE0 STABLE1

VCC

VCC

GND

GND

I/O 2 1 GND

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

Q9 DTC323

MODE

NC

DONE 49 GND 48 I/O 47 I/O 46 I/O 45 I/O 44 I/O 43 I/O 42 I/O 41 I/O 40 I/O 39 I/O 38 GND 37 VCC 36 I/O 35 I/O 34 I/O 33 I/O 32 I/O 31 I/O 30 I/O 29 I/O 28 I/O 27 I/O 26 NC 25

76 O,TDO 77 GND I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O 78 79 80 81 SDATA0 82 SDDATA1

SDDATA7 SDDATA6 SDDATA5 SDDATA4 SDDATA3

+3.3V

33R

R002 10k

MDATA27

83 SDDATA2 84 SDDATA3 85 SDDATA4 86 SDDATA5 87 SDDATA6

RA309 33

169 SDDATA6/GPIO25 170 SDATS5/GPIO26 171 SDDATA4/GPIO27 172 GND3 173 VDD3 174 SDDATA3/GPIO28 175 SDATA2/GPIO29 176 SDATA1/GPIO30 177 SDATA0/GPIO31 178 SDREQ/GPIO32 179 SDEN/GPIO33 GNDP5 180 181 VDDP5

SDDATA7/HDMARQ/GIOP24

MDATA26 MDATA25 MDATA24 MDATA23 MDATA22 MDATA21 MDATA20

U5 XCS05/XL

24

23

22

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

10

21

11

88 GND 89 VCC 90 SDDATA7 I/O 91 SD_EN I/O 92 SD_ERROR I/O 93 SD_BCLK I/O +3.3V 94 I/O 95 I/O FPGA_MUX_CON 96 I/O 33 97 R130 I/O 33 R252 98 I/O DIGITAL_A_IN_MUX 99 I/O PLL_DAT_IN 100 VCC VFD_KEY_IN SUB_RST

SDDATA2 R016 33 SDDATA1 R015 33 33 R013

MDQM2

SDATA0 R014 100 150R008 33 R009 33 R010 R011

VSYNC/HIRQ 184 GPIO36 RTS2 185 SPI_CLK/GPIO37

IC001

182 SDERROR/GPIO34 183 SDCLK/GPIO35

ZiVA-5-Processor

10k

R285

MDATA16

MDATA17

MDATA18

MDATA19

R012

10k

MDATA15 MDATA12

MDATA14

186 RXD2/SPI_MIOS/GPIO38 187 TXD2/SPI_MOSI/GPIO39 188 CTS2/SPI_CS/GPIO40 189 VNW2 190 GPIO41ALE HSC4 191 GPIO42 HSC3 192 GPIO43 193 HSC2 194 HSC1 195 HSC0 196 VDDP6 197 TRST 33

MDATA13 MDQM1

IN4148

CCLK_FPGA

PROG_FPGA

120

150

GPIO06

GPIO05

PLL_VDD

+3.3V MDGND

R313 10k

1K

GPIO03

GPIO08

R152 V_GND 100

+3.3V

+5VD 33 R32

MDATA11

MDATA10

MDATA09 MDATA06 MDATA05 MDATA07 MDATA08

MDATA31 MDATA30 MDATA29 MDATA28 MDATA26 MDATA25 MDATA24 SD_CLK MDATA27

1 Vcc 2 DQ0

IC1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CON22

R83

IN_DATA SECTOR_START DATA CLK DATA_VALID NVERR RERR 33 1K RA01

33

IN_LRCK IN_BCK

R261

TO TVM502 LOADER

3 VccQ 4 DQ1 5 DQ2 6 VssQ 7 DQ3 8 DQ4

VssQ 52 51 DQ14 50 DQ13 49 VccQ 48 DQ12 DQ1147 46 VssQ W986416CH 45 DQ10 44 DQ9 43 VccQ 42 DQ8 Vss 41 NC 40 39 UDQM 38 CLK 37 CKE NC 36 A11 35 A9 34 A8 33 A7 32 A6 31 A5 30 Vss 28 A4 29

Vss 54 53 DQ15

MDATA00 MDATA01 MDATA02 MDATA04 MDATA05 MDATA06 MDATA07 MDATA03

OUT574OE RDS_CLK RDS_DAT RMC

33 33

RA02 RA04 RA03

0R 0R 0R 0R

R286 R287

R288

R289

MDGND

R131

198 TD0 199 TDI/GPI0 202 RESET 203 ALE 204 GND4 205 VDD4 208

200 TMS/GPI1 201 TCK

MD4 64 VDD25-3 63 MDQM062 GND25-3 61 MD3 60 MD2 59 MD1 58 MD0 57 33

MDATA04

33

MDQM0

MDATA03 MDATA00 MDATA01

MDATA02

9 VccQ 10 DQ5 11 DQ6 12 VssQ 13 DQ7 16 19 WE 17 CAS 18 RAS CS 20 BS0 21 BS1 24 A1 25 A2 14 Vcc 15 LDQM

30 VDD0 31 GND25-0

32 VDD25-0 33 MA9

42 MA0 43 GND25-1

44 VDD25-1 45 MA10

22 HD0 23 HDTACK

26 HLDS 27 HREAD

12 VDDP1 13 GNDP0

VDDP0

20 VPPD2 21 GNDP1

24 HIRQ0 25 HUDS

L_+5V

74VHC573

RA316

RA317

RA318

L018

100uH

L_+12VM dgnd

33

33

UPA20

UPA01

R004 33 R005

R266

R267

L014 L015

100uH 100uH

L_+3.3V

VDD_FLASH U8 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 O1 17 O2 16 O3 15 O4 14 O5 13 O6 12 O7 11 LE D1 3 D2 4 D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8

C080 68p

C81 C082 68p 100n

UPA01

33

52 MCAS

48 BA0 49 MCS0

50 MCS1 51 MRAS

HD14

HD15

HD13

HD12

HD10

46 MA11 47 BA1

HD11

34 MA8 35 MA7

36 MA6 37 MA5

38 MA4 39 MA3

40 MA2 41 MA1

9 HD9 10 HD8 11 HD7

14 HD6 15 HD5

16 HD4 17 HD3

18 HD2 19 HD1

HA1

R293100 I2C_CLK R294100 I2C_DAT R003 33

HA3 206 HA2 207 GNDP7

28 IRRX1/GPIO0 29 GND0

RESET

DXX_INTERRUPT

MCLK 56 VDD25-2 55 GND25-2 54 MWE 53

R20

MDQM3

5 MDQM0 SD_CLK MDQM1 SD_CLK

+1.8V

MADDR11 MADDR11

MADDR00 MADDR01 33 33 33 33 33 MADDR00 MADDR10 MADDR11 33 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 +3.3V R1 MADDR02 MADDR03

MADDR10

22 A10/AP 23 A0 26 A3 27 Vcc

MADDR09 MADDR07 MADDR06 MADDR05 MADDR04

UPA03

UPA02

47R

MADDR06 47R

MADDR09

MADDR07

MADDR08

MADDR05

MADDR04

MADDR03

UPD09

UPD08

UPD07

UPD06

UPD05

UPD04

UPD03

UPD15

UPD14

UPD13

UPD12

UPD10

MADDR01

UPD02

UPD00

UPD01

UPD11

D7 9 10 GND

MADDR02 47R

l_mgnd

UPA(1:20 )

1 2 CON6

TRAY_M-

TRAY_M+

UPA12 UPA13 UPA14 UPA15 UPA16 UPA18 UPA19 UPA17

74VHC573

U9 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 O1 D1 3 17 O2 D2 4 16 O3 15 O4 14 O5 13 O6 12 O7 11 LE C139 D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8

UPD(00:15) UPD08 UPD09 UPD10 UPD11 UPD12 UPD13 UPD14 UPD15 UPA20 UPA17 R37 0R SYS_RST R36 0R

MDGND IC2

UPD(00:15)

MADDR(00:11) MDATA23 MDATA22 MDATA21 MDATA20 MDATA19 MDATA18 1 Vcc 2 DQ0

4.7k 4.7k +3.3V

R27 R26

3 VccQ 4 DQ1 5 DQ2 6 VssQ 7 DQ3 8 DQ4

VssQ 52 51 DQ14 50 DQ13 49 VccQ 48 DQ12 DQ1147

Vss 54 53 DQ15

MDATA08 MDATA09 MDATA10 MDATA11

D7 9 10 GND 0.1uF

UPA03

UPA02

UPD09

UPD08

UPD07

UPD06

UPD05

UPD04

UPD03

UPD02

UPD00

UPA01

UPD15

UPD14

UPD13

UPD12

UPD10

UPD01

UPD11

R71 1k

UPA07 1 KIA7034P 3 VCC OUT 2 GND U1 UPA08 0 C3 UPA09 R73 UPA10 UPA11

74VHC573

16 O3 15 O4 14 O5 13 O6 12 O7 11 LE

D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8

UPD03 UPD04 UPD05 UPD06 UPD07

UPA10

UPA09

UPD06 UPD13 UPD12 UPD11 UPD05 UPD04 UPD03 UPD10 UPD01 UPD02 UPD09 UPD08 UPD00

R19

+3.3V

UPA04

UPA05 UPA06

U10 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 O1 17 O2 D1 3 D2 4

UPA15 UPD00 UPD01 UPD02 UPA14 UPA13 UPA12 UPA11

10uF

D7 9 10 GND

MDGND

MDGND

UPA19 UPA18 UPA08 UPA07 UPA06 UPA04 UPA03 UPA02 UPA01 UPA05

47 M29W800T BYTE 46 VSS1 4 45 A12 DQ15A-1 5 44 A11 DQ7 6 43 A10 DQ14 7 42 A9 DQ6 8 41 A8 DQ13 9 40 U4 NC0 DQ5 10 39 NC1 DQ12 11 38 WE DQ4 12 37 VDD RESET 13 36 NC2 DQ11 14 35 NC3 DQ3 15 34 / RY BY DQ10 16 33 A18 DQ2 17 32 A17 DQ9 18 31 A7 DQ1 19 30 A6 DQ8 20 29 DQ0 A5 21 28 OE A4 22 27 VSS A3 23 26 CS A2 24 25 A1 A0 3 A14 A13

W986416CH

UPA16

A15

A16

48 MDGND UPD15 UPD14

MDATA17 MDATA16

9 VccQ 10 DQ5 11 DQ6 12 VssQ 13 DQ7 16 19 WE 17 CAS 18 RAS CS 20 BS0 21 BS1 24 A1 25 A2 14 Vcc 15 LDQM

46 VssQ 45 DQ10 44 DQ9 43 VccQ 42 DQ8 Vss 41

MDATA12

MDATA14 MDATA15

MDATA13

UPD07

MDQM2 SYS_RST 33

NC 40 39 UDQM 38 CLK 37 CKE NC 36 A11 35 A9 34 A8 33 A7 32 A6 31 A5 30 A4 29 MADDR11

VDD_FLASH

MDGND C84 C15 .1uf

C012 47u

10

10

12

12

14

14

16

16

U20 15

18

18

20

20

22

22

24

24

26

26

28

28

30

30

32

32

MADDR00 MADDR01 MADDR02 MADDR03

MADDR10

22 A10/AP 23 A0 26 A3 27 Vcc

MADDR09 MADDR08 MADDR07 MADDR06 MADDR05 MADDR04

.1uf

11

11

13

13

15

17

17

19

19

21

21

23

23

25

25

27

27

29

29

31

31

Vss 28

MEDUSA_CS

+5VD MDGND MDGND

ALE

MDGND

R47 1k

X001 13.5Mhz

R309 1K

R310 1K

mdgnd MDGND

R308

GPIO02

R234 R235 100

GPIO01

R48

1k

3 IN2 OUT36 4 IN3 VCC5

100uF

C181

2 3

R080

1k

PLL_GND 10p 10p C001 C002

100uF

470uF C183

C182

0.1u

GPIO(01,08)

+5VD R30 1k

MINI_EN

+3.3V

R081 1k 1k R82

13.5M 100R225

C11 0.1u

C8 0.1u

C10 47u

C9

0.1u V_GND V_GND

U18 BA7623 1 GND OUT1 8 2 IN1 OUT27 3 IN2 OUT36 4 IN3 VCC5 U19 BA7623 1 GND OUT1 8 2 IN1 OUT27

6k8

1K

1K

1K

V_GND CON4 G B R

1K

1K

R230

VDAC_VDD

1K R153 0.1u C203

R144

2SC2874

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

LEFT SURFACE

RIGHT SURFACE

1 3

6 8

10

BACK SURFACE

BOTTOM SURFACE

15

14

13

12

11

17

16

19

18

21

20

DETACH REAR CABINET FROM FRONT CABINET MUST BE REMOVED 21 SCREWS.

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY Top Cover Removal


Note: Perform all disassembly procedures in the order presented. When reassembling, use the reverse procedure. Make sure that all leads/wiring are routed correctly when reassembling. Remove five (5) screws located on the backside of the unit as shown in figure 1. Also remove two (2) screws on top ofthe unit (not shown).

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY

Top Cover Removal (Contd) 2. Remove top panel by lifting upward from rear and separating tabs from backside of front plate asshown in figure 2.

1.

Top Cover

Side Panel

Back Panel

1/2 PAN HEAD SCREW 1 OF 5

Fig. 2 Top Cover Removal

Fig. 1 Top Cover Removal

Page 2-1

Page 2-2

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY Side Panel Removal


1. 2. Remove top cover. Remove three (3) screws from either side of the unit as shown in figure 3.

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY Back Panel Removal


1. 2. 3. 4. Remove top cover. Remove side panels. Remove thirteen (13) screws from the back of unit as shown in figure 4. Lift CD tray to release tabs on back panel as shown in figure 5.

3/8 Pan Head Screws 1 of 12

Fig. 3 Side Panel Removal

Remove (8) screws Located on the Back of Unit.

Fig. 4 Back Panel Removal

Page 2-3

Page 2-4

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY CD Mechanism Removal


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Plug unit in and extend the CD tray. While extended unplug the unit. Remove top cover. Remove side panels. Remove the back panel Remove one (1) screw from the CD Arm Stop as shown in figure 6.

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY CD Mechanism Removal (Contd)


7. 8. 9. Remove four (4) srews fron CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 7. Release one (1) wire from catch on bottom of CD Tray. Release CD Mechanism Assembly from mount by pulling towards the rear and lifting gently.

CD Mechanism Assembly

Remove (4) screws

CD Tray

CD Arm Remove (1) screw

CD Arm
Rear of Unit
Fig. 6 CD Mechanism Removal

Rotate Gear Clockwise

Fig. 7 CD Mechanism Removal

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY CD Mechanism Removal (Contd)


10. Disconnect one (1) Ribon wire from CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 8.

RS2620 DISASSEMBLY

Risconnect Wire from CD Mechanism Assembly

Fig. 8 CD Mechanism Removal

RS2622 DISASSEMBLY Top/Side Cover Removal


Note:
Perform all disassembly procedures in the order presented. When reassembling, use the reverse procedure. Make sure that all leads/wiring are routed correctly when reassembling. Remove the screws located on the back and sides of the unit securing the covers. Remove the two sides and top cover.

RS2622 DISASSEMBLY Back Panel Removal


1. 2. 3. 4. Remove top cover. Remove side panels. Remove thirteen (13) screws from the back of unit as shown in figure 4. Lift CD tray to release tabs on back panel as shown in figure 5.

CD Mechanism Removal
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.

Plug unit in and extend the CD tray. While extended unplug the unit. Remove top cover. Remove side panels. Remove the back panel Remove one (1) screw from the CD Arm Stop as shown in figure 6.

CD Tray

CD Arm

Remove (1) screw

Rear of Unit
Fig. 2 CD Mechanism Removal

Rotate Gear Clockwise

Remove the screws located on the back of the unit Screw and terminal location may vary

Fig. 1 Back Panel Removal


Page 2-1 Page 2-2

RS2622 DISASSEMBLY

RS2622 DISASSEMBLY

CD Mechanism Removal (Contd)


7. 8. 9.

Remove four (4) srews fron CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 7. Release one (1) wire from catch on bottom of CD Tray. Release CD Mechanism Assembly from mount by pulling towards the rear and lifting gently.

CD Mechanism Removal (Contd)

10. Disconnect one (1) Ribon wire from CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 8.

CD Mechanism Assembly

Remove (4) screws

Risconnect Wire from CD Mechanism Assembly


CD Arm
Fig. 4 CD Mechanism Removal

Fig. 3 CD Mechanism Removal

Page 2-3

Page 2-4

NOTES:
P701

1. Unless otherwise specified:


ECO
A14

15

A. All resistor values are in ohms, FOR AUTOSCAN THRESHOLD B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

1/16w

FL701

A7
14

A7

TUNER_12V
13

+10V
12

2
TAPE CD

4
AUX TUNER

MODEL

OPTION D711 D710 D707 D708


3.8V

RS2302/CS550 FOR EU VERSION---24/12 HOURS FOR EU VERSION---LW/MW FOR EU VERSION---AM 9K/10K FOR EU VERSION---FM 50K/200K FOR RDS CD PUCK Volume Control

US

EU

3.8V+
11

3.8V
10

-30V
9

GND
8

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

STANDBY 7

A13
2K2

AUDIO-MIX C722
10V 4U7

R880
220K

+5V

D709
3.8V+ 50v 47nF

P13

P11

P10

G15

P12

R785 C727 R882

P16

P7

G14

P9

P8

P6

P5

P15

G12

G11

G7

G6

G5

G4

G13

G10

P14

G9

G8

G3

P3

470R

C715

10V 4u7

C708

Q710
27R

10V

H/P-MUTE
SDATA

A11

R883

D718

10UF

+5V

R701

330

SDATA
3 SCLOCK 2

D717

CPU5V D703

R881
12K

10V

10V

50V

D701

C701

C702

C704

C705

50V

C706

47UF 10V

G5

G6

G7

P1

G10

P2 P3

6V8

G14

P4

G1

G2

G4

G8

G9

G13

100uF

100nF

AUDIO-MIX
R889 R890 R891 R892
1K 10K I-RDS-COLCK R783 9

100nF

47uF

G12

G15

G3

SCLOCK
10UF 10V

G11

P5

47nF 50V

REC-PALY 5

D704

10V 4u7

Q702

C716

+10V

C707

MOTOER 6

G2

P4

G1

P2

P1

D714

L701 100uH

D715

-30V

-30V

R893

R894

C728 GND A4 C750 A2 VCC3 I-PLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GND I-REC-DET S4 VCC2 CISC-SW CD-RESET HOOK-OUT SDATE TRAY-2 IC703 E2 C709 SCL C710 MODE VSS
22k 50V 100p 1 3

10K

10K

10K

10K

1K

10K

R885 P87/FIP20 80 P6 CD-PUCK D714 VLOAD 79 78 P90/FIP21 P91/FIP22 P92/FIP23 P93/FIP24 P94/FIP25 P95/FIP26 P96/FIP27 P97/FIP28 P100/FIP29 P101/FIP30 P102/FIP31 P103/FIP32 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 I-RDS-DATE 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 PLL-CE PLL-DI I-PLL-COLK TUNER-LED protector TUNER-DATA-O ST-BY H/P-MUTE
TUNER-POWER OPTION

FIP0

FIP1

FIP2

FIP3

FIP4

FIP5

FIP6

FIP7

FIP8

FIP9

FIP10

FIP11

FIP12

R782
RDS.DATA 8

P80/FIP13

P81/FIP14

VDD3 P37

P82/FIP15 P83/FIP16 P84/FIP17 P85/FIP18 P86/FIP19

P101

-30V
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 I-AM9K_10K I-FM_50K_200K I-RDS_SET I-AM/LM I-CLK_SET D707 D708 D709 D710 D711 FOR EU MODEL D715 VOLUME CONTROL

PLL-CE R788 1K
7 PLL-DI 6 1K

A3

CD-SYNCHRO O-SOLAL

P36/BUZ P35/PCL P34/TI2 P33/TI1 P32/TO2 P31/TO1 P30/TO0 RESET X2 X1 IC(VPP) XT2 P04/XT1 VDD2 P27/SCK0 P26/SO0/SB1 P25/S10/SB0 P24/BUSY P23/STB P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 AVSS P17/ANI7 P16/ANI6 P03/INTP3/CI0 P00/INTP0/TI0 P15/ANI5 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD P14/ANI4 P13/ANI3 IC701

R723

A1

D-OUT I-TAPE-DET

PLL-COLCK
5

R789 1K R715 1K

A5 A9 A12

D-IN
vol vol

DATA-O
4

GND

R717
TUNER-VCC 3

KEY_RESET C711 R722


1M 33pF 50V C712

R720 1K
10V

X2-DSC X1-DSC

68K

1/16 47N

100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

1k

A6
10k

R718
1k

FOR AUTOSCAN THRSESHOLD

TUNER-LED
2

Q716
10k

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

33pF 50V

GND 1

C703 R711
22K

+5V

Y701

C725 33pF 50V

Q717

33pF 50V

4000KHZ

R758

47uF

R739

1K

C726

R801

P104/FIP33 P105/FIP34 P106/FIP35 P107/FIP36 P110/FIP37 P111/FIP38 P112/FIP39 P113/FIP40 P114/FIP41 P115/FIP42 P116/FIP43 P117/FIP44 P120/FIP45 P121/FIP46 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49 P122/FIP47 P123/FIP48

1K

R725 R896
22K

R719
2.2k

GND R730 R727

R726 1K

A10 R738
22K 1K

8 R803 1 2 3 6
150K

E0 E1

SDA

47k

VCC

47k

A2 A3
A1

TAPE-DET

+5V

R809
1K

I-S1 CHK-UP A
EN701 MOTOER

A5 A6 A7 A12 A13 A10 A9


R716
10K

B GND

GND H-VCC
100K

R808

GND
R806

50V

25 26 27

100p

4 R804

H-OUT
4

M1IN2 M1IN1 I-AUDIO-MIX

28 29 30

P02/INTP2

P01/INTP1

A807 Q805
GND1

Q806

O-SCLK DISC5

100R 68K

AVREF

VSS

P74

P73

P72

1K

P71

SOL-A
6

R811 R813
22k

15k

A14

R802

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 IR701 GND R817


GND 10uF 10K 10K

PLAY1

R816

KEY1

KEY3

I-RMC

SCLK

VC1

PLAY1

AVDD

AVDD

10K

+10V

KEY2

C753 ECO R702

C730 47uF 10V

C751 1 VOUT
10K

R886

D802

R812

1K

50V 100nF

1/16 100N

1K

I-POWER_DET

I-RDS-COLK

P403 REC-DET Q804

L0

10K

+10V

100R

VCC

Q712

10K

1K

DISC3

L1 R779

A4

Q713

DISC4

R887

M2IN2

M2IN1

R721
47K

DISC1

10K

Q714

R790

Q705

10K

+5V

R708
10K

R703 R768 47K


10K

KEY1

100nF

FWD-SKIP

SW701

SW702

SW704

SW705

SW706

SW707

SW709

SW708

R735

R776 POWER-LED
1K

+10V
4.7uf 10V

R766 C713 R765 47K R764 47K

SW703

10K

D702
5.6V

Q703 R707
47NF 50V 10K

Q701 C721

R704
100

C790

R709

12K

C755 50V

100nf

4.7K

Q704

KEY2

R705

R706

R710

4.7K

SW711

SW712

SW713

SW714

SW715

SW716

SW717

SW718

10K

10K

R761 47K R755 R712 R746


1K R753

SW719

C791
R747 R748 R749 R750 R751 R752 R754 R756 R757
1K

R888

R760 47K

R818

R797

10K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

KEY3

CD-RESET

GND HOOK-OUT
22K

1K

CHK-UP

SDATE

TRAY-2

DISC-SW

D-OUT

SCLK

M2IN1

S1

M1IN2

M2IN2

M1IN1

+5V

D-IN

SW721

SW722

SW723

SW724

SW725

SW726

P703B

P703A GND

GND

SW727

39K

R810

R895

COM

REC-PALY

A11

R780

D725

330R

R713

D724

330R

DISC2 L2 R714

POWER -LED WINEDOS-LED L3

R778

D723

330R

R771 47K R77047K R769 47K

R773

10K

R777

D722

330R

R795 1k 50V

R796 820R

R791 1.5K

R792 2.2K

R793 3.3K

R794 4.7K

R728 R745

R774

6.8K

10K
Q715 L4 R786
10K

+5V
D721
330R

R767

47K

47K

R763 47K R762 47K

R798 1K 50V

R799 820R

R742 1.5K

R743 2.2K

R729

R734

R731

3.3k

4.7K

6.8K

10K

R732 L7

+5V

R814 Q706 D727

330R

R815

100nF

L5

10K

Q711 D726
330R

1k

R759

C792 100nF 50V

R741 1K

R740 820R

R736 1.5K

R737 2.2K

R733

R744

3.3K

4.7k

R781

R772

NOTES:
P701

1. Unless otherwise specified:


ECO
A14

15

A. All resistor values are in ohms, FOR AUTOSCAN THRESHOLD B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

1/16w

FL701

A7
14

A7

TUNER_12V
13

+10V
12

2
TAPE CD

4
AUX TUNER

MODEL

OPTION D711 D710 D707 D708


3.8V

RS2302/CS550 FOR EU VERSION---24/12 HOURS FOR EU VERSION---LW/MW FOR EU VERSION---AM 9K/10K FOR EU VERSION---FM 50K/200K FOR RDS CD PUCK Volume Control

US

EU

3.8V+
11

3.8V
10

-30V
9

GND
8

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

STANDBY 7

A13
2K2

AUDIO-MIX C722
10V 4U7

R880
220K

+5V

D709
3.8V+ 50v 47nF

P13

P11

P10

G15

P12

R785 C727 R882

P16

P7

G14

P9

P8

P6

P5

P15

G12

G11

G7

G6

G5

G4

G13

G10

P14

G9

G8

G3

P3

470R

C715

10V 4u7

C708

Q710
27R

10V

H/P-MUTE
SDATA

A11

R883

D718

10UF

+5V

R701

330

SDATA
3 SCLOCK 2

D717

CPU5V D703

R881
12K

10V

10V

50V

D701

C701

C702

C704

C705

50V

C706

47UF 10V

G5

G6

G7

P1

G10

P2 P3

6V8

G14

P4

G1

G2

G4

G8

G9

G13

100uF

100nF

AUDIO-MIX
R889 R890 R891 R892
1K 10K I-RDS-COLCK R783 9

100nF

47uF

G12

G15

G3

SCLOCK
10UF 10V

G11

P5

47nF 50V

REC-PALY 5

D704

10V 4u7

Q702

C716

+10V

C707

MOTOER 6

G2

P4

G1

P2

P1

D714

L701 100uH

D715

-30V

-30V

R893

R894

C728 GND A4 C750 A2 VCC3 I-PLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GND I-REC-DET S4 VCC2 CISC-SW CD-RESET HOOK-OUT SDATE TRAY-2 IC703 E2 C709 SCL C710 MODE VSS
22k 50V 100p 1 3

10K

10K

10K

10K

1K

10K

R885 P87/FIP20 80 P6 CD-PUCK D714 VLOAD 79 78 P90/FIP21 P91/FIP22 P92/FIP23 P93/FIP24 P94/FIP25 P95/FIP26 P96/FIP27 P97/FIP28 P100/FIP29 P101/FIP30 P102/FIP31 P103/FIP32 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 I-RDS-DATE 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 PLL-CE PLL-DI I-PLL-COLK TUNER-LED protector TUNER-DATA-O ST-BY H/P-MUTE
TUNER-POWER OPTION

FIP0

FIP1

FIP2

FIP3

FIP4

FIP5

FIP6

FIP7

FIP8

FIP9

FIP10

FIP11

FIP12

R782
RDS.DATA 8

P80/FIP13

P81/FIP14

VDD3 P37

P82/FIP15 P83/FIP16 P84/FIP17 P85/FIP18 P86/FIP19

P101

-30V
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 I-AM9K_10K I-FM_50K_200K I-RDS_SET I-AM/LM I-CLK_SET D707 D708 D709 D710 D711 FOR EU MODEL D715 VOLUME CONTROL

PLL-CE R788 1K
7 PLL-DI 6 1K

A3

CD-SYNCHRO O-SOLAL

P36/BUZ P35/PCL P34/TI2 P33/TI1 P32/TO2 P31/TO1 P30/TO0 RESET X2 X1 IC(VPP) XT2 P04/XT1 VDD2 P27/SCK0 P26/SO0/SB1 P25/S10/SB0 P24/BUSY P23/STB P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 AVSS P17/ANI7 P16/ANI6 P03/INTP3/CI0 P00/INTP0/TI0 P15/ANI5 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD P14/ANI4 P13/ANI3 IC701

R723

A1

D-OUT I-TAPE-DET

PLL-COLCK
5

R789 1K R715 1K

A5 A9 A12

D-IN
vol vol

DATA-O
4

GND

R717
TUNER-VCC 3

KEY_RESET C711 R722


1M 33pF 50V C712

R720 1K
10V

X2-DSC X1-DSC

68K

1/16 47N

100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

1k

A6
10k

R718
1k

FOR AUTOSCAN THRSESHOLD

TUNER-LED
2

Q716
10k

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

33pF 50V

GND 1

C703 R711
22K

+5V

Y701

C725 33pF 50V

Q717

33pF 50V

4000KHZ

R758

47uF

R739

1K

C726

R801

P104/FIP33 P105/FIP34 P106/FIP35 P107/FIP36 P110/FIP37 P111/FIP38 P112/FIP39 P113/FIP40 P114/FIP41 P115/FIP42 P116/FIP43 P117/FIP44 P120/FIP45 P121/FIP46 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49 P122/FIP47 P123/FIP48

1K

R725 R896
22K

R719
2.2k

GND R730 R727

R726 1K

A10 R738
22K 1K

8 R803 1 2 3 6
150K

E0 E1

SDA

47k

VCC

47k

A2 A3
A1

TAPE-DET

+5V

R809
1K

I-S1 CHK-UP A
EN701 MOTOER

A5 A6 A7 A12 A13 A10 A9


R716
10K

B GND

GND H-VCC
100K

R808

GND
R806

50V

25 26 27

100p

4 R804

H-OUT
4

M1IN2 M1IN1 I-AUDIO-MIX

28 29 30

P02/INTP2

P01/INTP1

A807 Q805
GND1

Q806

O-SCLK DISC5

VSS

P74

P73

P72

1K

P71

68K

AVREF

100R

SOL-A
6

R811 R813
22k

15k

A14

R802

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 IR701 GND R817


GND 10uF 10K 10K

PLAY1

R816

KEY1

KEY3

I-RMC

SCLK

VC1

PLAY1

AVDD

AVDD

10K

+10V

KEY2

C753 ECO R702

C730 47uF 10V

C751 1 VOUT
10K

R886

D802

R812

1K

50V 100nF

1/16 100N

1K

I-POWER_DET

I-RDS-COLK

P403 REC-DET Q804

L0

10K

+10V

100R

VCC

Q712

10K

1K

DISC3

L1 R779

A4

Q713

DISC4

R887

M2IN2

M2IN1

R721
47K

DISC1

10K

Q714

R790

Q705

10K

+5V

R708
10K

R703 R768 47K


10K

KEY1

100nF

SW704

FWD-SKIP

SW701

SW702

SW705

SW706

SW707

SW709

SW708

R735

R776 POWER-LED
1K

+10V
4.7uf 10V

R766 C713 R765 47K R764 47K

SW703

10K

D702
5.6V

Q703 R707
47NF 50V 10K

Q701 C721

R704
100

C790

R709

12K

C755 50V

100nf

4.7K

Q704

KEY2

R705

R706

R710

4.7K

SW711

SW712

SW713

SW714

SW715

SW716

SW717

SW718

10K

10K

R761 47K R755 R712 R746


1K R753

SW719

C791
R747 R748 R749 R750 R751 R752 R754 R756 R757
1K

R888

R760 47K

R818

R797

10K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

1K

KEY3

CD-RESET

GND HOOK-OUT
22K

1K

CHK-UP

SDATE

DISC-SW

TRAY-2

SCLK

D-OUT

M2IN1

S1

M1IN2

M2IN2

M1IN1

+5V

D-IN

SW721

SW722

SW723

SW724

SW725

SW726

P703B

P703A GND

GND

SW727

39K

R810

R895

COM

REC-PALY

A11

R780

D725

330R

R713

D724

330R

DISC2 L2 R714

POWER -LED WINEDOS-LED L3

R778

D723

330R

R771 47K R77047K R769 47K

R773

10K

R777

D722

330R

R795 1k 50V

R796 820R

R791 1.5K

R792 2.2K

R793 3.3K

R794 4.7K

R728 R745

R774

6.8K

10K
Q715 L4 R786
10K

+5V
D721
330R

R767

47K

47K

R763 47K R762 47K

R798 1K 50V

R799 820R

R742 1.5K

R743 2.2K

R729

R734

R731

3.3k

4.7K

6.8K

10K

R732 L7

+5V

R814 Q706 D727

330R

R815

100nF

L5

10K

Q711 D726
330R

1k

R759

C792 100nF 50V

R741 1K

R740 820R

R736 1.5K

R737 2.2K

R733

R744

3.3K

4.7k

R781

R772

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS - CONTINUED


DISPLAY & KEY PCB

Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in F (p=10-6 F). 57 58

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS - CONTINUED


DISPLAY & KEY PCB

Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in F (p=10-6 F).

EXPLODED VIEW
36 37 35

, REMOTE ASS Y P/N.: 00-02112-2 1


34 33

32 31 30 29 28 20 23 19

57

27

26 25

18

54

21 15 14 22 24 16 17

38

12

11

40 39 56 45 44 42 49 48 47 43 7 50 52 1 3 51 53 4 47 6 43 8 9 10 41

13

46

55

32

33

EXPLODED VIEW
36 37 35

, REMOTE ASS Y NO.: 00-02112-20


34 33

32 31 30 29 28 20 23 19

56

27

26 25

18

54

21 15 14 22 24 16 17

38

12

11

40 39 53 45 44 42 49 48 47 43 7 50 52 1 3 51 53 4 47 6 43 8 9 10 41

13

46

55

32

33

EXPLODED VIEW
0090

0200 0450 0760 0490 0710 0130 0700 0600 0730 0485

0470 0460 0720 0610

MAIN BD

CDM5B ASM

0800

0860

KEY BD 0230 HEADPHONE BD 0830

0240 0500 0420 0501

0080

0100

0510 0040

0890

0100

0110

0770 0820

0990 0620 0505

0900 0780

0070

0502

0870 0805

0880

0430

0410

0120

0400 0390

0340 0330

0440

0250

0210

0220

0300

0825

0050

POWER BD

0540 0595 0580

0560 0550

TRANSFORMER BD

0815

0850

0840

Page 7-1

Page 7-1

www.fairchildsemi.com

FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Bi-directional DC Motor Driver

Features
Built-in brake function for stable brake characteristics. Built-in element to absorb a surge current derived from changing motor direction and braking motor drive. Motor speed control by an external voltage. Stable motor direction change. Interfaces with CMOS devices. Built-in the thermal shut down circuit (165C). Low standby current. (6.5mA)

Description
The FAN8082 is a monolithic integrated circuit designed for driving bi-directional DC motor with braking and speed control, and it is suitable for the loading motor driver of VCR, CDP, and TOY systems. The speed control can be achieved by adjusting the external voltage of the speed control pin. It has two pins of logic inputs for controlling the forward/ reverse and braking.

8-DIP-300

Typical Applications
Compact disk player (CDP) tray or changer Low current DC motor such as audio or video equipment. General DC motor

Ordering Information
Device FAN8082 Package 8-DIP-300 Operating Temp. 25C ~ +75C

Rev. 1.0.1 February. 2000.


2000 Fairchild Semiconductor International

FAN8082 (KA3082N)

Pin Assignments

GND VO1

VO2

PVCC

VCTL

FAN8082
3 6

SVCC

VIN1

VIN2

Pin Definitions
Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin Name GND VO1 VCTL VIN1 VIN2 SVCC PVCC VO2 I/O O I I I O Ground Output 1 Motor speed control Input 1 Input 2 Supply voltage (Signal) Supply voltage (Power) Output 2 Pin Function Description

Internal Block Diagram

GND VO1

DRIVER OUT

VO2

PVCC

PRE DRIVER VCTL


3

TSD

BIAS

SVCC

VIN1

LOGIC SWITCH

VIN2

FAN8082 (KA3082N)

Equivalent Circuit
Description Output Pin No. 2, 8
Vcc Vcc

Internal circuit

2 8

Speed control

3
Vcc Vcc

VCC

Input

4, 5
Vcc Vcc

VCC

4 5

SVCC PVCC

6 7
6 7

VCC

FAN8082 (KA3082N)

Application Information
1. THERMAL SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT

I Q1 V1 R1 Q2 V2 R2 Q3

When Ta = 25C, Q2 & Q3 are Turned-off and output stage operates normally. V1 = I (R1 + R2) V2 = R2 / (R1 + R2) V1 = 0.37V When Ta = 165C, Q2 & Q3 Turn-on and it turns-off the output stage. 0.70V - 0.37V = 330mV (When Q2 & Q3 are Turn-on, VbeQ2 = VbeQ3 = 0.70V) And temperature coefficient of Q2 = Q3 = 2mV / C T.S.D: 330mV / 2mV = 165C 2. LOGIC INPUT & OUTPUT TABLE Input Pin #4 Low High Low High INPUT High is above 2.0V. INPUT Low is below 0.7V. *Low : All Power TRs are off-state. But internal Bias makes output Voltage low state. Pin #5 Low Low High High Pin #2 *Low High Low *Low Output Pin #8 *Low Low High *Low Motor Brake Forward Reverse Brake

www.fairchildsemi.com

FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Bi-directional DC Motor Driver

Features
Built-in brake function for stable brake characteristics. Built-in element to absorb a surge current derived from changing motor direction and braking motor drive. Motor speed control by an external voltage. Stable motor direction change. Interfaces with CMOS devices. Built-in the thermal shut down circuit (165C). Low standby current. (6.5mA)

Description
The FAN8082 is a monolithic integrated circuit designed for driving bi-directional DC motor with braking and speed control, and it is suitable for the loading motor driver of VCR, CDP, and TOY systems. The speed control can be achieved by adjusting the external voltage of the speed control pin. It has two pins of logic inputs for controlling the forward/ reverse and braking.

8-DIP-300

Typical Applications
Compact disk player (CDP) tray or changer Low current DC motor such as audio or video equipment. General DC motor

Ordering Information
Device FAN8082 Package 8-DIP-300 Operating Temp. 25C ~ +75C

Rev. 1.0.1 February. 2000.


2000 Fairchild Semiconductor International

FAN8082 (KA3082N)

Pin Assignments

GND VO1

VO2

PVCC

VCTL

FAN8082
3 6

SVCC

VIN1

VIN2

Pin Definitions
Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin Name GND VO1 VCTL VIN1 VIN2 SVCC PVCC VO2 I/O O I I I O Ground Output 1 Motor speed control Input 1 Input 2 Supply voltage (Signal) Supply voltage (Power) Output 2 Pin Function Description

Internal Block Diagram

GND VO1

DRIVER OUT

VO2

PVCC

PRE DRIVER VCTL


3

TSD

BIAS

SVCC

VIN1

LOGIC SWITCH

VIN2

FAN8082 (KA3082N)

Equivalent Circuit
Description Output Pin No. 2, 8
Vcc Vcc

Internal circuit

2 8

Speed control

3
Vcc Vcc

VCC

Input

4, 5
Vcc Vcc

VCC

4 5

SVCC PVCC

6 7
6 7

VCC

FAN8082 (KA3082N)

Application Information
1. THERMAL SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT

I Q1 V1 R1 Q2 V2 R2 Q3

When Ta = 25C, Q2 & Q3 are Turned-off and output stage operates normally. V1 = I (R1 + R2) V2 = R2 / (R1 + R2) V1 = 0.37V When Ta = 165C, Q2 & Q3 Turn-on and it turns-off the output stage. 0.70V - 0.37V = 330mV (When Q2 & Q3 are Turn-on, VbeQ2 = VbeQ3 = 0.70V) And temperature coefficient of Q2 = Q3 = 2mV / C T.S.D: 330mV / 2mV = 165C 2. LOGIC INPUT & OUTPUT TABLE Input Pin #4 Low High Low High INPUT High is above 2.0V. INPUT Low is below 0.7V. *Low : All Power TRs are off-state. But internal Bias makes output Voltage low state. Pin #5 Low Low High High Pin #2 *Low High Low *Low Output Pin #8 *Low Low High *Low Motor Brake Forward Reverse Brake

P702

Q701

2sd2012

R707

1k

Q703 2sa1015 R706

P701
From Power Amp N758

47u 25v
R701

12.6v

D703

10k

R705

10k

GND1

1k

DDD

1k 3.3k GND1
D702 R708 C701

R704

GND1 47u 25v


D701

R702

R703

1k

Q702

2sc1815

12.6v

471R

47u 25v

GND1

Fan Board

DDD

Display and Front Panel Controls

LEFT FPA

RIGHT FPA

MOTOR CONTROL

HEADPHONE ASSEMBLY

DOOR CONTROL

FROM U-COM BOARD (VFD DISPLAY)


N10B1 -27V_GND -27V SEG19 SEG18 SEG17 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1

DVD VCD CD MP3

DIGITAL Pro Logic INTRORADOM

TITLE

TRACK CHAP AUTO PROG.

FL431

HNV-11SM19 ST

TUNED

RDS

REPEAT IALL A-B dB L C R ms KHz LS LFE RS MHz

C438

100NF 16V

C436

47NF 16V

C437

47NF 16V

GP1U287R

RM431

10K

100kR 1/16W

R470

100kR 1/16W R471

R472

100kR 1/16W R473

R474

100kR 1/16W R475

R476

100kR 1/16W R477

R478

100k 1/16W R479

R480

100K 1/16W R481

R482

100k 1/16W R483

R484

100K 1/16W R485

R486

100k 1/16W R487

R488

100K 1/16W R489

R490

100K 1/16W R491

100K 1/16W R493 R492 100K 1/16W 100K 1/16W

R494

100K 1/16W R495

R496

100k 1/16W R497

R498 100K 1/16W


100K 1/16W

R499

TO U-COM BOARD
NC11B

10uF

10K

R515

100K 1/16W

10K 1/16W

R514

ENCODER_DW ENCODER_UP

470R 1/16W

C440

IR_DATA
D501
1ss133

47uF 16V

100K 1/16W

STAND_BY
R511

KEY_IN 5.5V

100K 1/16W

100K 1/16W

10K 1/16W

100K 1/16W

R510

100K 1/16W

10K 1/16W

C441
100nf 50V

SW435
1k 1/16W

1k 1/16W

R512

D_GND

POWER_DOWN

100k 1/16W

R513

100K 1/16W

100K 1/16W

100K 1/16W

100k 1/16W

SW431

N10B2

GRID11 GRID10 GRID9 GRID8 GRID7 GRID6 GRID5 GRID4 GRID3 GRID2 GRID1

Power key board


16V 47uf

SW451

SW439

SW432

SW433

SW436

SW437

SW438

SW450

SW434

18K 1/16W

R509

8K2 1/16W

R508

5K6 1/16W

R507

3K3 1/16W

R506

2K7 1/16W

R505

2K2 1/16W

R504

1K5 1/16W

R503

1k2 1/16w

R502

R501
1k 1/16w

FROM POWER BOARD


C439

D438

5.5V

LED-

NC20A

NC20B

5.5V

5.5V

D_GND

LEDR469
180R 1/16W

STAND_BY -27V_GND -27V

POWER_DOWN 3.3VAC+

DTA114YK

Q401 NC15B

3.3VAC-

Frontboard and Keyboard

Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK DAC DATA

Defintion

Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information

DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN

DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable

I2SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX S S-Video SA SAT

Select Auxiliary or Normal input

Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect

Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS)

SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK WS X XTLI XTLO

Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Seriaal Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock Word Select input/output; I S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output
2

Y Z

Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR AUX B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CRSMTR CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK

Defintion

Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Auxiliary Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Carousel Motor Control Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock

DAC DATA DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DISC_SW DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FIL FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I

Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In Disc Detection SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Filament Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel

IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN I SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MGND MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX
2

Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable Select Auxiliary or Normal input

Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Motor Ground Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect

Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver

S S-Video SA SAT SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDATA SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK

Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS) Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Serial Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock

WS X XTLI XTLO Y Z

Word Select input/output; I2S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output

Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK DAC DATA

Defintion

Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information

DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN

DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable

I2SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX S S-Video SA SAT

Select Auxiliary or Normal input

Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect

Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS)

SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK WS X XTLI XTLO

Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Seriaal Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock Word Select input/output; I S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output
2

Y Z

Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR AUX B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CRSMTR CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK

Defintion

Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Auxiliary Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Carousel Motor Control Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock

DAC DATA DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DISC_SW DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FIL FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I

Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In Disc Detection SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Filament Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel

IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN I SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MGND MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX
2

Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable Select Auxiliary or Normal input

Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Motor Ground Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect

Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver

S S-Video SA SAT SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDATA SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK

Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS) Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Serial Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock

WS X XTLI XTLO Y Z

Word Select input/output; I2S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output

Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR AUX B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CRSMTR CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK

Defintion

Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Auxiliary Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Carousel Motor Control Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock

DAC DATA DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DISC_SW DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FIL FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I

Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In Disc Detection SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Filament Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel

IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN I SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MGND MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX
2

Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable Select Auxiliary or Normal input

Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Motor Ground Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect

Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver

S S-Video SA SAT SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDATA SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK

Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS) Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Serial Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock

WS X XTLI XTLO Y Z

Word Select input/output; I2S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output

u s e r m a n

DISC

CHANGER
A N D L O A D

U S S I M U L T A N E O

P L A Y

S Y S T E M

CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

N CLOS E PE O

ON
DISC SKIP
IR SENSOR

ST ANDBY

STANDBY

L
SOURCE GAME MP3

PRESET EQ TIMER

DIGITAL

TUNING

TUNE PRESET

R
PROG SET DIMMERDEMO CLOCK BAND

REPEAT

AUTO PROG CD DISPLAY

BASS BOOST

VO

LUME C ONT

RO

DECK DECK
1
PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTO STOP MECHANISM AUTOMATIC RECORD LEVEL ONE TOUCH RECORDING

1 CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

W E RE D

S OU N D

S SY

E T

IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5 0151

EXPORTER Thomson multimedia Inc. P.O. Box 1976 Indianapolis, IN 46206-1976 2002 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) Depose(s) 55570940 (EN/F/E) www.rca.com www.rca.com/LatinAmerica Printed In China / Impreso en China

W E RE D

S OU N D

S SY

E T

RS2620
It is important to read this instruction book prior to using your new product for the first time. Es importante leer este manual antes de usar por vez primera su euipo.

FCC Information
EN FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.

Safety Information
Technical specification
Product: 5CD Audio System Brand: RCA Model: RS2620
THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN


CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USERS E RV I C E A B L E PA R T S I N S I D E . R E F E R S E RV I C I N G TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. THE EXCLAMATION POINT WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF I M P O R TA N T INSTRUCTIONS A C C O M PA N Y I N G T H E P R O D U C T.

CAUTION

EN

Electrical Consumption:
Power Supply: 120V~60Hz Power consumption: 80 Watts IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5

SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM / BACK OF PRODUCT

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL


SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For Your Safety


The AC power plug is polarized (one blade is wider than the other) and only fits into AC power outlets one way. If the plug wont go into the outlet completely, turn the plug over and try to insert it the other way. If it still wont fit, contact a qualified electrician to change the outlet, or use a different one. Do not attempt to bypass this safety feature.

Table of Contents
FCC Information Safety Information Getting Started . . . . . . .2
Unpacking the system . . . . . . . .2 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Loading Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Play and Load Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . .7 Skipping a Disc . . . . . . . . . . .7 Searching Through a CD . . .7 Shuffling the Play Order . . .7 Sampling Tracks . . . . . . . . . . .7 Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Setting Up a CD Program . . .7 Playing a Program List . . . . .7 Displaying the Program List .7 Deleting Program List . . . . . .7

Troubleshooting Tips . .10 Maintenance . . . . . . . .11


Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Handling CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Cleaning CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 CD Lens Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

General Controls . . . . . .3
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . .4

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

Important Information 12
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . .12 Important Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Headset Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Dont Infringe . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Technical Specification . . . . . .12

Display Settings

For Your Records


In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No.

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Showing Demonstration . . . . .5 Display Clock / Timer . . . . . . . . .5 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . .5 Setting the Timer . . . . . . . . .5 Activating the Timer . . . . . . .5 Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Selecting Tuner Band . . . . . . . .8 Tuning to a Station . . . . . . . . . .8 Using Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Auto Preset Programming (FM only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Manually Setting Presets . . . . .8 Suppressing Stereo Signal . . . .8

Limited Warranty (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Limited Warranty (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . .15

Have a Blast- Just Not in Your Eardrums Make sure you turn down the volume on the unit before you put on headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level only after headphones are in place.

Sound Features . . . . . . .6
Preset Equalizer Curves . . . . . .6 Creating Custom curves . . . . . .6 Bass Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Muting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Tape Player
Playing a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Continuous Play . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 From Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 From CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Tape to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.

CD Player
Notes on CD-R/RW Disc . . . . . . .6

Getting Started
EN Unpacking the system:
You should have the following: one main unit (with 2 main speakers); one remote control; one AM loop antenna; one users guide; one safety leaflet. Owner and registration Card

General Controls
Connecting the Speakers
Match the red wire (on the left speaker) to red terminal for the left speaker (L) on the back of the unit and the black wire (on the left speaker ) to the black terminal for left speaker (L). Follow the same procedure to connect the right (R) speaker.
Speaker Wire Connection
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

Main Unit
DIGITAL TUNING (SKIP BACKWARD) Decrements radio frequency, preset down, goes to the previous CD track or setting option. DIGITAL TUNING (SKIP FORWARD) Increments radio frequency, preset up, goes to the next CD track or setting option. PLAY / PAUSE Plays or pauses CD. TUNEPRESET Stops CD track, Sets tune or preset mode. PROGSET - Enters program mode for CD and Tuner; Applies new settings for Clock and Timer modes. BAND/AUTO PROG. Changes between FM and AM tuner bands. Enters auto preset program in FM mode. BASS BOOST Turns BASS BOOST on or off. REPEAT - Selects among repeat modes. DISC SKIP Skips to the next CD in the tray VOLUME UP/DOWN Increases/ decreases volume.
N CLOS PE E O
DISC SKIP
LUME CONT R
OL

EN

DISC

CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M

S I M U L T A N E O U S

P L A Y

Back View
Push Speaker terminal tab down to insert wire. Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.

ON

ST A N DB Y

IR SENSOR

STANDBY

L
GAME MP3 SOURCE TIMER

PRESET EQ

DIGITAL

TUNING

TUNE PRESET

R
DIMMERDEMO CLOCK PROG SET BAND REPEAT

CD DISPLAY

AUTO PROG

BASS BOOST

NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the speaker wires at all connection points.
DECK
1

VO

DECK

PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTOMATIC RECORD LEVEL AUTO STOP MECHANISM ONE TOUCH RECORDING

CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > 1 TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

Installation
AM LOOP

FM ANTENNA

To ensure sufficient ventilation, keep the spacings shown below free from other surfaces: 2 Front View
4 inches

+
R L MAIN SPEAKERS 6

3
~

ON/STANDBY Turns power on or off (STANDBY mode).


4 inches

4 inches
ON

DISC

CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M

S I M U L T A N E O U S

P L A Y

CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

N CLOS PE E O

1. FM Pigtail Antenna 2. AM Loop Antenna Connector 3. Main Speaker Jacks

ST A N DB Y

IR SENSOR

DISC SKIP

STANDBY

L
GAME MP3 SOURCE TIMER

PRESET EQ

DIGITAL

TUNING

TUNE PRESET

R
DIMMERDEMO CLOCK PROG SET BAND REPEAT

CD DISPLAY

AUTO PROG

BASS BOOST

VO

LUME CONT R

OL

DECK

DECK

PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTOMATIC RECORD LEVEL AUTO STOP MECHANISM ONE TOUCH RECORDING

CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > 1 TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

Using the FM and AM Antennas


Before you use your audio system, youll want to make sure both the FM and AM antennas are positioned properly. Uncoil the FM antenna at the back of the unit, making sure it is fully extended (you may even want to tape it to the wall behind the unit if possible. The higher the better.) Youll also need to connect the AM antenna loop to the back of the unit if you listen to AM stations. Rotate the AM loop antenna for better reception.

Tip: In STANDBY mode (press ON/STANDBY off), the system displays the time. Press ON/STANDBY to turn the system on in the previously used mode. Press CD, TAPE, TUNER or AUX (Remote Only) to select the corresponding mode. Look at the display icons to identify the current mode. GAME MP3 L / R - Jack for auxiliary connection. PHONES Jack for connecting headphones OPEN/CLOSE Opens or closes the disc tray. SOURCE Selects the CD player/ tuner/ tape player. DIMMERDEMO/CD DISPLAY Turns the feature demonstration on or off, adjusts display brightness, selects among displaying disc details. TIMER Enters timer setting mode and turns the timer on/off. CLOCK Shows clock time and enters clock setting mode. PRESET EQ selects among the different EQ modes.

Tape Player
RECORD PLAY REWIND FAST-FORWARD STOP/EJECT PAUSE

Side View
2 inches

4 inches

General Controls
EN Remote Control
TUNER CD
E Q

Display Settings
Display EN
BASS SURROUND

SOURCE

TAPE AUX

B.BO

OST
DEMO/ DIMMER

ON

VOL

E PR

EX

RE

FW
VOL

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP

REPEAT

FM ST.

DISC SKIP

INTRO

DNPRESETUP

SLEEP

ON Turns power on or off from STANDBY mode. CD Selects CD player and change CD display information in CD playing mode. TUNER Selects radio tuner and change radio band in Tuner mode. TAPE Selects tape player. AUX Selects Aux; turns the system on. EQ Selects equalizer presets. B BOOSTTurns Bass Boost on or off. DEMO/DIMMER Turns the feature demonstration on or off; adjusts display brightness. VOL+ or VOL- Increases/ decreases volume. PLAY/PAUSE Plays and pauses current CD. NEXT /FWD In CD mode - Skips forward to the next CD track; In Tuner mode - Tunes up radio frequency. PREV /REV In CD mode - Skips backwards to the previous CD track; In Tuner mode - Tunes down radio frequency. OPEN/CLOSE Opens and closes CD disc tray. STOP Stops playing CD. REPEAT Repeats a track, CD, or all CDs. MUTE - mutes sound. SHUFFLE Turns on/off random playback. FM ST. - Toggles between FM stereo and mono. DISC SKIP Skips to next CD. INTRO - Turns INTRO mode on or off to play the first 10 seconds of each track. PRESET UP/DN Selects next/ previous preset station. SLEEP - selects the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off.

Showing Demonstration
Not operational in CD mode. Press DIMMERDEMO/CD DISPLAY to turn on/off demonstration mode. The demonstration scrolls through all display operations.

6. Press TIMER to set volume. Press VOLUME CONTROL up or down to set desired volume level. 7. Press PROGSET to save settings or STOP to quit setting.

Activating the Timer

Display Clock / Timer


Setting the Clock
1. Press and hold CLOCK until the hour flashes on the display. 2. Press DIGITAL TUNING or to set the hour and then press CLOCK to shift to minute digits. 3. Press DIGITAL TUNING or to set the minute. 4. Press PROGSET to save settings and STOP to quit setting.

Press and release TIMER to turn on/off the timer. The timer is active when the clock icon is lit.

Adjusting the Display Brightness


1. Press and hold DIMMERDEMO/CD DISPLAY for more than 2 seconds. 2. While the dimmer is DIMM 2 displayed, press and release DIMMERDEMO/CD DISPLAY repeatedly to select the desired level (DIMM 1 - 3).

NOTE: Cassette functions can not be operated from the remote control.

Note: When system is ON, you can press CLOCK to display the current time for about 2 seconds.

Sleep Mode
You can select the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off automatically. Press SLEEP on the remote to select among OFF, 90, 60, 45, 30, 15 and 5 minutes. (Remote Only)

Installing Batteries
The remote control must be inserted with 2 AAA or R3 or UM 4 batteries prior to use. Follow the steps below to ensure correct installation. 1. Open the battery compartment door (located at the back of the remote control) by sliding the cover out. 2. Before inserting the batteries, observe the polarities (that is, + and -) of the battery then relate the polarities to the engraved diagram inside the battery compartment. Now insert the batteries. 3. After installation of the batteries, place the lit to cover the batteries. Lightly push it closed with a snap.

Setting the Timer


1. Press and hold TIMER until the ON appear with the hour flashing ( ON - timer on time ) 2. For setting time, press DIGITAL TUNING or to set the hour and then press TIMER to shift to minute digits. 3. Press DIGITAL TUNING or to set the minute. 4. Press TIMER to change to OF (timer off time) with hour flashing. Repeat steps 2 & 3 for timer off time setting. 5. Press TIMER to select source. Press DIGITAL TUNING or to select TUNER, TAPE or CD.

Battery Size: AAA or UM-4 or R03

Sound Features
EN Preset Equalizer Curves
Press PRESET EQ on the main unit or EQ on the remote to toggle among FLAT, ROCK, POP, JAZZ, CLASS and CUSTOM. The display shows the selection briefly.

CD Player
BASS BOOST
Press BASS BOOST to turn on/off boosting the bass frequency.

Play and Load Simultaneously


1. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the tray while a CD is playing 2. Load/change discs for available trays by pressing DISC SKIP. 3. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the tray.

Setting Up a CD Program
You can program the CD player to play up to any 32 tracks on the CDs in the tray. 1. While the CD player is stopped, press PROGSET to enter program mode. The system displays the next available program number: - - P:01, with - - flashing, prompts you for the first track in the program list.

EN

Muting Audio
Press MUTE (Remote Only) on the remote to cut the sound.

Creating Custom Curve


1. Press PRESET EQ to select CUSTOM mode. 2. While "CUSTOM" is displayed, press DIGITAL TUNING / to cycle among displayed bass- and treble - range levels. 3. While BAS or TRE is displayed, adjust VOLUME CONTROL to set the associated gain between -10 - +10.

Skipping a Disc
Press DISC SKIP.

MUTE
Searching Through a CD
Press and hold SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to search through a CD while it is playing.

5 P:01
2. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to select a track (press DISC SKIP to select a track from a different disc). 3. Immediately press PROGSET to assign the selected track to the program number. After 3 seconds, you are prompted for the next track in the program list. (In CD program mode, PROG icon will be lit.)

BAS+08

Shuffling the Play Order

CD Player
Loading Discs
CD-R / RW

Press SHUFFLE to turn on/off the playing of tracks in random order. (Remote Only)

Playing a Program List Sampling Tracks


Press INTRO to play the first 10 seconds of each track on the current disc, all discs in the tray, or turn INTRO mode off. (Remote Only) While in PROGRAM mode, press PLAY/PAUSE .

This unit is compatible with CD-RW/ CD-R discs for playback.

Notes on CD-R/RW Disc:


Do not affix any type of labels to either side (recordable or labeled side) of a CD-R/RW disc as this may result in the unit malfunctioning. To avoid damages to the CD-R/RW disc, do not open the disc compartment door while the disc is being read. Do not load an unrecorded CD-R/RW disc into the unit. This may take a longer time to read the disc. Playback capability for CD-RW discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the CD-RW disc and the recorder used to create the disc.

1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD mode. 2. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the drawer. 3. Insert up to five discs with label face up. (Press DISC SKIP to rotate the disc carrier.) 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the drawer. Loaded disc position icon lights.

Displaying the Program List


1. While the CD player is stopped, press PROGSET to enter PROGRAM mode. 2. Press PROGSET repeatedly to list each track assignment in the program list.

Note: You may also press REPEAT to select 1 disc or all discs before activating INTRO & SHUFFLE functions

Playing Discs
Press PLAY/PAUSE to begin or pause play, and STOP to stop play. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to select a specific track. Tip: While playing a CD, press and hold SKIPFORWARD or BACKWARD for more than 2 seconds to search through the CD.

Repeat
Press REPEAT to repeat the current track, current disc, all discs, or turn REPEAT mode off.

Deleting Program List


While in PROGRAM mode, press and hold STOP for 3 seconds. They system displays the message CLEAR.

Tips: You can create a program of up to 32 tracks. Press CD DISPLAY repeatedly to view elapsed track time, track number, track remain time and disc remain time. Caution: Do not push to force closing of the tray during CD playback or tray opening.

Radio
EN Selecting Tuner Band
1. Press SOURCE to select TUNER. 2. Press BAND to select between AM or FM radio band.

Tape Player
Auto Preset Programming
(FM only)
Press and hold BAND button for 2 seconds to scan stations in FM band. The stations will then be stored as preset channels. A maximum of 32 stations can be stored. Beware of your preset channels being erased accidentally because the scanning and storing process is automatic upon pressing the button. You can stop the automatic scan by pressing any button, but the erased stations cannot be recovered.
CD DISPLAY AUTO PROG BASS BOOST

VO

LUME CONT R

OL

Continuous Play
1. Insert a tape into deck 2 and start playback. 2. Insert a tape into deck 1 and press PLAY and PAUSE together. 3. When the tape in deck 2 finishes playback, PAUSE at deck 1 will be released automatically and start playback.

EN

DECK

DECK

PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTOMATIC RECORD LEVEL AUTO STOP MECHANISM ONE TOUCH RECORDING

CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > 1 TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

Tip: Your audio system has 32 preset stations.

Tuning to a Station
Press SKIP BACKWARD select frequencies. / SKIP FORWARD to

Tape Player
RECORD PLAY REWIND FAST FORWARD STOP/EJECT PAUSE

Recording
From Tuner
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TUNER and press BAND to access the desired radio band. 3. Tune to the station to be recorded. 4. Press RECORD to begin recording. 5. Press STOP to end recording.

87.50 MHz

AUTO

Using Presets
The tuner can be in either TUNE or PRESET mode. When in PRESET mode, the PROG light is on. Press TUNEPRESET to toggle TUNE and PRESET mode. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main system or PRESET UP or DOWN on the remote control to access the previous or next preset station. The display first shows the preset program number and after a few seconds, the frequency will be displayed. (FMPR:01 is FM preset 1)

Manually Setting Presets


1. Press TUNEPRESET button to enter TUNE mode. 2. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to access the desired frequency. 3. Press the PROGSET button once. 4. The most recently accessed program location will be displayed. 5. If a different program location is preferred, press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to move to the desired preset number (1-32). 6. Press PROGSET to store the selected frequency at that preset.

Playing a Tape
Tip: You can play a tape from either deck.
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TAPE. 2. Press STOP/EJECT to open the cassette door. 3. Insert a tape into the door and push the door closed. 4. Press REWIND/FAST FORWARD to position the tape to the desired starting position. (Deck 1 Only) 5. Press PLAY to begin playback.

From CD
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Insert a tape into deck 1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD. Insert the disc(s) to be recorded. Select the track, CD, or program to be recorded. Press RECORD to begin recording when CD begins to play. 6. Press STOP to end recording.

Tape to Tape
1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the destination tape in deck 1. Insert the source tape into deck 2. Press PAUSE and then RECORD on deck 1. Press PLAY on deck 2. The playback and recording start simultaneously.

PR:01

Suppressing Stereo Signal


Press FM ST. to toggle between FM mono and stereo for stereo FM stations. (Remote Only)

Troubleshooting Tips
EN
Problem Solution
System will Check power cord for a secure not turn on connection. Unplug the unit for a moment, and then plug into power source again. Check the outlet by plugging in another device. No sound Increase the volume setting. Check connection to speakers. Check that you have selected the appropriate function: CD, TAPE, Tuner. Make sure mute is off. Make sure headphones are not plugged in. Check antenna connection. Move antenna. Turn off nearby electrical appliances, such as hair dryer, vacuum cleaner, microwave, fluorescent lights.

Maintenance
Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.

Problem Solution
CD button will not respond, or does not change discs when you press DISC SKIP Switch to another function (TAPE, Tuner) and then back to CD.

Handling CDs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold CDs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. CDs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) CDs

EN

Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.

CD Player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician.

Cleaning CDs
Dirty CDs can cause poor sound quality. Always keep CDs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. If a CD becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on CDs. Also, never clean CDs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface

Distorted or Inspect the tape head, clean it if noisy tape necessary. recordings Remote control does not work Check that the batteries are properly installed. Replace weak batteries. Check the system is plugged into power source. Point the remote directly at the systems front panel. Move closer to the system. Remove any obstacles between the remote and the system.

Tape Player
To prevent deterioration of sound quality, periodically open the door of each deck and clean the magnetic heads, pinch roller, and capstan with a cotton bud dipped in alcohol. Also, demagnetize the head by playing a demagnetizing cassette (available through an audio equipment store). To protect recordings on one or both sides of a tape, remove the corresponding tab. If you later want to record on the tape, affix a piece of adhesive tape over the hole. Quit Slacking - A little bit of slack in your tapes can cause scratches on the tape, or worse yet, the tape could break. If you notice some slack in the tape, use a pencil to tighten it up before you insert it.

Poor radio reception

Side A Protection
A

Side B Protection
B

CD Lens Care
When your CD lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a CD lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the CD lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.

CD does not Check that CD is in the tray. play Check that CD label is facing up. Check that PAUSE mode is not on. Check that CD function is selected. Use CD lens cleaner. Clean the disc. Try another CD. CD sound skips Clean the disc. Check disc for warping, scratches, or other damage. Check if something is causing the system to vibrate. If so, move the system. Make sure the speakers are at least 3 feet away or on a different surface from the main unit.

10

11

Important Information
EN Safety Precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not use your System immediately after transporting it from a cold place to a warm place, as condensation may cause the system to malfunction. Keep your unit away from humid areas and abnormally hot places. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This compact disc player uses a laser to read the music on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. To keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens, do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.

Limited Warranty (U.S.)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

Headset Safety
Do not play your headset at high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use with extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air designed to let you to hear outside sounds, do not turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.

EN

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts Warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

Dont Infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

Technical Specification
Power supply: 120V~60Hz Dimensions ( H x W x D inches): Unit size - 12.2 x 12 x 15.4 Main Speaker - 12.2 x 8.5 x 7 Tape deck: Response curve: 125Hz-8kHz (-5dB) CD player: Response curve (+/- 2dB): 60Hz to 15 kHz Rating Plate: Look for it at the back of the set.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

Important Battery Information


Remove the batteries to avoid leakage if you do not use your remote control for more than one month. Discard leaky batteries immediately as leaking batteries may cause skin burns or other personal injuries. Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to provincial and local regulations. Any battery may leak electrolyte under the following circumstances: - if mixed with a different battery type, - if inserted incorrectly, - if all batteries are not replaced at the same time, - if disposed of in fire, or - if an attempt is made to charge a battery not intended to be recharged.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
The descriptions and characteristics given in this document are given as a general indication and not as a guarantee. In order to provide the highest quality product possible, we reserve the right to make any improvement or modification without prior notice. The English version serves as the final reference on all products and operational details should any discrepancies arise in other languages.

12

13

Limited Warranty (U.S.)


EN
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

Limited Warranty (Canada)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

EN

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How State Law relates to warranty:


Some states do not allow the exclusion nor limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

If you purchased your unit outside the United States:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information.

Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside Canada. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

14

15

Limited Warranty (Canada)


EN
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

How Provincial Laws relates to warranty:


This warranty gives you specific legal rights which are in addition to statutory warranties that may vary from Province to Province.

If you purchased your unit outside Canada:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

16

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 2

L
PROGSE T

IMPORTADOR Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5 0151

EXPORTER Thomson multimedia Inc. P.O. BOX 1976 Indianapolis, IN 46206-1976 2003 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) dpose(s) 55641280 (REV. 0) (EN/F/E) www.rca.com www.rca.com/LatinAmerica Printed in China / Impreso en China

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 3

u s e r m a

U S T A N E O S I M U L

DISC

P L A Y

R CHANGE M S Y S T E A D
A N D L O

OP

*CLO S EN

CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

RS

2622

ON

DISC SKIP

IR SENSOR

STANDBY

TUNER PRESET

STANDBY
PRESET TIMER EQ

DIGITAL

TUNING

L
GAME MP3

SOURCE

REPEAT T PROGSE PROG SET


DIMMER

BAND

CLOCK AUTO PROG


X-SURR.

B. BOOST

OL VOLUME CONTR

DEMO

DECK DECK
1

PLAYBACK

RECORD PLAYBACK/

PLAY 2 > 1 CONTINUOUS 2>1 TAPE DUBBING


AUTO C REC LEVEL STOP MECHANIS M

AUTOMATI

RECORDIN ONE TOUCH

RS2622
It is important to read this instruction book prior to using your new product for the first time. Es importante leer este manual antes de usar por vez primera su euipo.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 4

FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.

For Your Safety


The AC power plug is polarized (one blade is wider than the other) and only fits into AC power outlets one way. If the plug wont go into the outlet completely, turn the plug over and try to insert it the other way. If it still wont fit, contact a qualified electrician to change the outlet, or use a different one. Do not attempt to bypass this safety feature.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

Have a Blast- Just Not in Your Eardrums Make sure you turn down the volume on the unit before you put on headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level only after headphone are in place.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN


THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, D O N OT R E M OV E C OV E R ( O R BAC K ) . N O U S E R S E RV I C E A B L E PA RT S I N S I D E . R E F E R S E RV I C I N G T O Q UA L I F I E D S E RV I C E PERSONNEL. THE EXCLAMATION POINT WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF I M P O R TA N T INSTRUCTIONS A C C O M PA N Y I N G T H E P R O D U C T.

CAUTION

SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM / BACK OF PRODUCT

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL


SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 5

FCC Information
For Your Records
In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No. in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.

EN

Technical specification
Power Supply: 120V~60Hz Power consumption: 135 Watts

Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained

IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5

CONTENTS
FCC Information Getting started . . . . . . .3 General controls
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . .5 B Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Muting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Tape Player
Playing a Tape . . . . . . . . . .10 Continuous Play . . . . . . . . .10 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 From Tuner . . . . . . . . . . .10 From CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Tape to Tape . . . . . . . . . .10 From an Auxiliary Input .10

CD Player
Loading Discs . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Shuffling the Play Order . . .7 Sampling Tracks . . . . . . . . . .7 Repeating the Play Order . .8 CD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Setting Up a CD program . .8 Playing a Program List . . . . .8 Displaying the Program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Deleting a Program List . . . .8 Skipping a Disc . . . . . . . . . . .8 Searching through a CD . . .8

Display settings
Showing the Demonstration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Display Timer/Clock . . . . . . .6 Setting the Time . . . . . . . . .6 Setting the Timer . . . . . . . . .6 Activating the Timer . . . . . .6 Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Important Information 12 Limited Warranty

Radio
Tuning to a Station . . . . . . .9 Using Presets . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Auto Preset Program (for FM only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Setting Presets . . . . . . . . . . .9 Suppressing Stereo Signal . .9

Sound Features
Using Preset Equalizer Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Creating a Custom Curve . . .7

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 6

Getting Started
EN
1. AM Loop Antenna Connector 2. Main Speaker Jacks 3. FM Antenna Jacks

3
AM LOOP

1
+ R + L -

Unpacking the system: You should have: one main unit (with 2 speakers); one remote control; one AM loop antenna; T-Type FM antenna wire; one users guide; one safety leaflet. owner registration card

To ensure sufficient ventilation, keep the spacings shown below free from other surfaces:

10cm / 4

75

10cm / 4

DISC

CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M

S I M U L T A N E O U S

P L A Y

5cm / 2
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

10cm / 4
L
GAME MP3

ON

RS

2622

*CLO EN P

IR SENSOR

DISC SKIP

STANDBY
STANDBY

10cm / 4

E S

PRESET EQ SOURCE TIMER

DIGITAL TUNING

TUNER PRESET

R
DIMMER

CLOCK

PROGSET

BAND

REPEAT

DEMO

AUTO PROG

X-SURR.

B. BOOST

VOLUME CONTROL

DECK

DECK

PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTOMATIC REC LEVEL AUTO STOP MECHANISM

CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > 1 TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

ONE TOUCH RECORDING

Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection

Push terminal tab down to insert wire.

Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.

NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the Antenna and speaker wires at all connection points.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 7

General Controls
Main Unit
OPEN/CLOSE Opens or closes the disc tray. DISC SKIP Skips to the next CD in the tray. ON/STANDBY Turns power on or off (STANDBY mode). PHONES Jack for connecting headphones. SOURCE Selects the CD player/ tuner/ tape player/ external source DIMMER/DEMO Turns the feature demonstration on or off, adjusts display brightness.
5 DISC CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M S I M U L T A N E O U S P L A Y

EN

ON

RS

2622

CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

*CLO EN P

E S
DISC SKIP

IR SENSOR

STANDBY
STANDBY

L
PRESET EQ DIGITAL TUNING TUNER PRESET

GAME MP3

SOURCE

TIMER

R
DIMMER

CLOCK

PROGSET

BAND

REPEAT

DEMO

AUTO PROG

X-SURR.

B. BOOST

STOP / TUNER / PRESET Stops CD track, sets tune or preset mode. SKIP FORWARD Increments radio frequency, CD tracks or setting options. SKIP BACKWARD Decrements radio frequency, CD tracks EQ selects among the different or setting options PLAY/PAUSE Plays EQ modes. X-SURR. Press once to actior pauses CD. RECORD vate X-SURROUND. PLAY VOLUME Increases/ decreases CLOCK Shows clock time and REWIND volume. enters clock setting mode. FAST-FORWARD GAME MP3 Aux in for TIMER Enters timer setting STOP/EJECT mode and turns the mode on/off. various inputs. PAUSE BAND/AUTO PROG. Changes between FM and AM tuner bands. Enters autopreset program in FM mode. REPEAT - Selects among repeat modes. PROG./SET - Enters program or setting mode for CD and tuner Tip: In STANDBY mode (press mode. POWER off), the system disB BOOST Turns B BOOST on or plays the time. Press POWER to off. turn the system on in the previously used mode. Press CD, TAPE, TUNER, or AUX (Remote Only) to select the corresponding mode. Look at the display icons to identify the current mode.
DECK
1

VOLUME CONTROL

DECK

PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTOMATIC REC LEVEL AUTO STOP MECHANISM

CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > 1

ONE TOUCH RECORDING

TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

Tape Player

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 8

General Controls
EN

Remote Control
ON Turns power on or off (STANDBY mode). TUNER Selects tuner CD Selects CD player TAPE Selects tape player AUX Selects external input. B-BOOST Turns BASS BOOST on or off VOL+ or VOL- Increases/ decreases volume EQ Selects equalizer presets PLAY/PAUSE Plays or pauses current CD STOP Stops playing CD NEXT/FWD Increments CD track; searches through CD PREV/REV Decrements CD track; searches through CD (Press NEXT/FWD or PREV/REV to tune up/ down tuner frequency) DISC SKIP Skips to next CD REPEAT Repeats a track, CD, or all CDs MUTE mutes sound SHUFFLE Turns on/off random listening FM ST. Toggles between FM stereo and mono INTRO Turns INTRO mode on or off to play the first 10 seconds of each track. PRESET UP/DOWN Selects next/ previous preset station OPEN/CLOSE opens/closes cd tray door SLEEP selects the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off X-SURROUND enables/disables X-surround feature
TUNER CD

SOURCE

TAPE AUX

E Q

B.BOOS

ON

X-SURROUND

VOL
EV

PR

NE

XT

RE

V
VOL

FW

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP

REPEAT

FM ST.

DISC SKIP

INTRO

DNPRESETUP

SLEEP

RS

2622

Battery Size: AAA or UM-4 or R03

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 9

Display Settings
EN

Showing the Demonstration


In all mode, press DIMMER/DEMO to turn on/off magic demonstration except timer on or sleep mode is active.

Activating the Timer


Press and release TIMER to turn on/off the alarm. The alarm is active when the clock icon indicator is lit.

DISPLAY TIMER/CLOCK
Setting the Time
1. Press and hold CLOCK until the hour flashes on the display. 2. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD to set the hour and then press CLOCK to shift to minute digits. 3. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD to set the minute. 4. Press SET to save settings and STOP to quit setting. Note: When system is ON, you can press CLOCK to display the current time for about 2 seconds.

Adjusting the Display Brightness


1. Press and hold DIMMER/DEMO for more than 2 seconds. 2. While the dimmer is displayed, press and release DIMM 2 DIMMER/DEMO to select the desired level (DIMM 1 - 3). Note:You can only adjust the dimmer level when unit is in ON mode, in standby mode the dimmer level remains at DIMM 3, while in magic demo mode the dimmer level will be at DIMM 1.

Sleep Mode
You can select the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off automatically. Press SLEEP on the remote to select among 120, 90, 60, 45, 30, 15 & 5 minutes. (Remote Only)

Setting the Timer


1. Press and hold TIMER until the ON appear with the hour flashing ( ON - timer on time ) 2. For setting time, press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to set the hour and then press TIMER to shift to minute digits. 3. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to set the minute. 4. Press TIMER to change to OF (timer off time) with hour flashing. Repeat steps 2 & 3 for timer off time setting. 5. Press TIMER to select source. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to select between CD /TUNER / TAPE) 6. Press TIMER to set volume. Rotate the VOLUME knob to set desired volume level. 7. Press SET to save settings or STOP to quit setting.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 10

Sound Features
EN Using Preset Equalizer Curves
Press EQ on the main unit or on the remote to toggle among FLAT, ROCK, POP, JAZZ, CLASSIC & CUSTOM. The display shows briefly the selection.

Bass Boost
Press B.BOOST to turn on/off boosting the bass frequency.

Muting Audio Creating a Custom Curve


1. Press EQ repeatedly to select CUSTOM mode. 2. While "CUSTOM" is displayed, press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to cycle among displayed bass- and treble - range levels. 3. While BAS, or TRE is displayed, adjust VOLUME to set the associated gain between 10 - +10. Press MUTE on the remote to cut the sound. (Remote Only)

MUTE

X-Surround
Press X-SURROUND to enjoy enriched sound quality. This feature gives you: 1. Better width and depth for vocal and instrumental sound. 2. More powerful presence for studio recording. 3. Enhanced surround effects with greater flexibility in positioning speakers.

TRE+08

CD Player
Loading Discs
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD mode. 2. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the drawer. 3. Insert up to five discs with label face up. (Press DISC SKIP to rotate the disc carrier.) 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the drawer. Loaded disc position icon lights.

Shuffling the Play Order


Press SHUFFLE to turn on/off the playing of tracks in random order. (Remote Only)

Sampling Tracks
Press INTRO to play the first 10 seconds of each track on the current disc, all discs in the tray, or turn INTRO mode off. (Remote Only) (Note: You may also press REPEAT to select 1 disc or all discs before activating INTRO & SHUFFLE functions).

Playing Discs
Press PLAY/PAUSE to begin or pause playing, and STOP to stop playing. Select a specific disc by pressing DISCSKIP. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to select a specific track.

Play and load simultaneously by:


1. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the tray while a CD is playing 2. Load/change discs for available trays by pressing DISC SKIP. 3. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the tray.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 11

CD Player
Repeating the Play Order
Press REPEAT to repeat the current track, current disc, all discs, or turn REPEAT mode off.

Deleting Program List


While in PROGRAM mode, press and hold STOP for 5 seconds. They system displays the message CLEAR.

EN

Setting Up a CD Program
You can program the CD player to play up to any 32 tracks on the CDs in the tray. 1. While the CD player is stopped, press PROG/SET to enter program mode. The system displays the next available program number: - - P:01, with - - flashing, prompts you for the first track in the program list. 2. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to select a track (press DISC SKIP to select a track from a different disc). 3. Immediately press PROG/SET to assign the selected track to the program number. After 3 seconds, you are prompted for the next track in the program list. (In CD program mode, PROG icon will be lit.)

Skipping a Disc
Press DISC SKIP.

Searching Through a CD
Press and hold SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to search through a CD as it is playing.

--P:01

Playing a Program List


While in PROGRAM mode, press PLAY/PAUSE .

Displaying the Program List


1. While the CD player is stopped, press PROG/SET to enter program mode. 2. Press PROG/SET repeatedly to list each track assignment in the program list.

Tips: You can create a program of up to 32 tracks. Press CD repeatedly to view elapsed track time, track number, track remain time and disc remain time(remote only). Caution: Do not push to force closing of the tray during CD playback or tray opening.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 12

Radio
O

EN

RS

2622

CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE

*CLO EN P

E S
DISC SKIP

IR SENSOR

Setting Presets
1. Press TUNE/PRESET button to enter TUNER mode. 2. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to access the desired frequency. 3. Press the PROG/SET button once. 4. The most recently accessed program location will be displayed. 5. If a different program location is preferred, press SKIP BACKWARD / FORWARD to move to the desired preset number (1-32). 6. Press PROG/SET to store the selected frequency at that preset.

STANDBY

PRESET EQ SOURCE TIMER

DIGITAL TUNING

TUNER PRESET

DIMMER

CLOCK

PROGSET

BAND

REPEAT

DEMO

AUTO PROG

X-SURR.

B. BOOST

1. Press SOURCE to select TUNER. 2. Press BAND to select between AM or FM radio band.
Tip: Your audio system has 32 preset stations.

Tuning to a Station
Press SKIP FORWARD to select frequencies. / BACKWARD

Suppressing Stereo Signal


Press FM ST to toggle between FM mono and stereo for stereo FM stations. (Remote Only)

Using Presets

87.50 MHz

The tuner can be in either TUNE or PRESET mode. When in PRESET mode, the PROG light is on. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main system or PRESET UP or DOWN on the remote control to access the previous or next preset station. The display first shows the preset program number and after a few seconds, the frequency and preset program number will be displayed. (FMPR:01 is FM preset 1)

Auto Preset Programming (for FM only)

PR:01

Press and hold BAND button for 2 seconds to scan stations in FM band. The stations will then be stored as preset channels. A maximum 32 stations can be stored. Beware of your preset channels being erased accidentally because the scanning and storing process is automatic upon pressing the button. You can stop the automatic scan by pressing any button, but the erased stations cannot be recovered.

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 13

Tape player
VOLUME CONTROL

DECK

DECK

EN

PLAYBACK/ RECORD

PLAYBACK

AUTOMATIC REC LEVEL AUTO STOP MECHANISM

CONTINUOUS PLAY 2 > 1 TAPE DUBBING 2 > 1

ONE TOUCH RECORDING

Playing a Tape
Tip: You can play a tape from either deck.
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TAPE. 2. Open the cassette door. 3. Insert a tape into the door and push the door closed. 4. Press REW /F.FWD to position the tape to the desired starting position. (Deck 1 Only) 5. Press PLAY to start playback .

From CD
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD. 3. Insert the disc(s) to be recorded. 4. Select the track, CD, or program to be recorded. 5. Press RECORD to begin recording. 6. CD begins to play. 7. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.

Tape to Tape

Continuous Play
1. Insert a tape into deck 2 and start playback. 2. Insert a tape into deck 1 and press PLAY and PAUSE together. 3. When the tape in deck 2 finishes playback, PAUSE at deck 1 will be released automatically and start playback.

1. Insert the destination tape in deck 1. 2. Insert the source tape into deck 2. 3. Press PAUSE and then RECORD on deck 1. 4. Press PLAY on deck 2. The playback and recording start simultaneously.

From an Auxiliary Input


1. Insert the cassette in deck 1. 2. Check that the auxiliary device has been connected correctly to the AUX connector. 3. Start playback on the auxiliary device. 4. Press RECORD on deck 1 to begin recording. 5.. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.

Recording
From Tuner
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TUNER and press BAND to access the desired radio band. 3. Tune to the station to be recorded. 4. Press RECORD to begin recording. 5. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.

10

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 14

Troubleshooting Tips
EN
Problem Solution
System will Check power cord for a secure not turn on connection. Unplug the unit for a moment, and then plug into power source again. Check the outlet by plugging in another device. No sound Increase the volume setting. Check connection to speakers. Check that you have selected the appropriate function: CD, TAPE, Tuner. Make sure mute is off. Check antenna connection. Move antenna. Turn off nearby electrical appliances, such as hair dryer, vacuum cleaner, microwave, fluorescent lights. Check that CD is in the tray. Check that CD label is facing up. Check that PAUSE mode is not on. Check that CD function is selected. Use CD lens cleaner. Clean the disc. Clean the disc. Check disc for warping, scratches, or other damage. Check if something is causing the system to vibrate. If so, move the system. Make sure the speakers are at least 3 feet away or on a different surface from the main unit.

Problem Solution
CD button Switch to another function (TAPE, will not Tuner) and then back to CD. respond, or does not change discs when you press DISC SKIP

Distorted or Inspect the tape heads, clean it if noisy tape neccessary. recordings Remote control does not work Check that the batteries are properly installed. Replace weak batteries. Check the system is plugged into power source. Point the remote directly at the systems front panel. Move closer to the system. Remove any obstacles between the remote and the system.

Poor radio reception

CD does not play

CD sound skips

11

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 15

Important Information
Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.

Safety Precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not use your System immediately after transporting it from a cold place to a warm place, as condensation may cause the system to malfunction. Keep your unit away from humid areas and abnormally hot places. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This compact disc player uses a laser to read the music on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. To keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens, do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.

EN

Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.

CD Player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician.

Tape Player
To prevent deterioration of sound quality, periodically open the door of each deck and clean the magnetic heads, pinch roller, and capstan with a cotton bud dipped in alcohol. Also, demagnetize the head by playing a demagnetizing cassette (available through an audio equipment store). To protect recordings one or both sides of a tape, remove the corresponding tab. If you later want to record on the tape, affix a piece of adhesive tape over the hole. Quit Slacking - A little bit of slack in your tapes can cause scratches on the tape, or worse yet, the tape could break. If you notice some slack in the tape, use a pencil to tighten it up before you insert it.

Side A Protection
A

Side B Protection
B

Important Battery Information


Remove the batteries to avoid leakage if you do not use your remote control for more than one month. Discard leaky batteries immediately as leaking batteries may cause skin burns or other personal injuries. Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to provincial and local regulations. Any battery may leak electrolyte under the following circumstances: - if mixed with a different battery type, - if inserted incorrectly, - if all batteries are not replaced at the same time, - if disposed of in fire, or - if an attempt is made to charge a battery not intended to be recharged.

12

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 16

Important Information
EN Headset Safety
Do not play your headset at high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use with extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air designed to let you to hear outside sounds, do not turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.

Dont Infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia.

Technical Specification
Power supply: 120V~60Hz Dimensions ( H x W x D inches): Unit size - 12.2 x 12 x 15.4 inches Speaker - 12.2 x 9.4 x 7.7 inches Tape deck: Response curve: 125Hz-8kHz (-5dB) CD player: Response curve (+/- 2dB): 60Hz to 20 kHz Rating Plate: Look for it at the back of the set.

Handling CDs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold CDs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. CDs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) CDs

Cleaning CDs
Dirty CDs can cause poor sound quality. Always keep CDs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. If a CD becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on CDs. Also, never clean CDs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface

CD Lens Care
When your CD lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a CD lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the CD lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.

13

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 17

Limited Warranty (U.S.)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

EN

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts Warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

14

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 18

Limited Warranty (U.S.)


EN
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

How State Law relates to warranty:


Some states do not allow the exclusion nor limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state.

If you purchased your unit outside the United States:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information.

Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

15

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 19

Limited Warranty (Canada)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

EN

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside Canada. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

16

RS2622 EN

12/11/02

5:28 PM

Page 20

Limited Warranty (Canada)


EN
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

How Provincial Laws relates to warranty:


This warranty gives you specific legal rights which are in addition to statutory warranties that may vary from Province to Province.

If you purchased your unit outside Canada:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

17

IC FUNCTION
RS2620

AUDIO SYSTEM: CD DRAWER: IC001 FAN8082 IC002 FAN8082 MAIN BOARD: IC001 TEA5757H IC300 AN7348K IC302 BA7755A IC401 TDA7440D POWER SUPPLY: IC501 IC502 TDA7296 TDA7296

FUCTION: Motor Drive Motor Drive AM/FM IC Cassette Driver Switch Tone Control and Audio Processor

DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y Y Y

Power Amplifier Power Amplifier

Y Y

FRONT PANEL and KEYBOARD: IC701 uPD780204AGF Micro controller Y

IC FUNCTION
RS2622

AUDIO SYSTEM: CD DRAWER: IC001 FAN8082 IC002 FAN8082 MAIN BOARD: IC001 TEA5757H IC300 AN7348K IC302 BA7755A IC401 TDA7440D POWER SUPPLY: IC501 IC502 TDA7296 TDA7296

FUCTION: Motor Drive Motor Drive AM/FM IC Cassette Driver Switch Tone Control and Audio Processor

DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y Y Y

Power Amplifier Power Amplifier

Y Y

FRONT PANEL and KEYBOARD: IC701 uPD780204AGF Micro controller Y

IC FUNCTION
RTDVD1
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y

DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y

MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y

POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y

SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y

VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y

IC FUNCTION
RTDVD1
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y

DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y

MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y

POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y

SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y

VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y

IC FUNCTION
RTD130
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y

DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y

MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y

SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y

VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y

IC FUNCTION
RTD130
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y

DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y

MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y

SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y

VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y

IC LEAD IDENTIFICATION AND INTERNAL DIAGRAM

ST24C02

Vcc SDA SCL WC

8 5 6 7 Slave Address Register & Comparator Load Inc.

High voltage Gen... timing and Control

Control Logic

64 X 32 Memory Core

X Decoder

32

32 Y Decoder

A2 A1 A0 Vss

3 2 1 4

Word Address Counter

ACK

Clock Di/O Data Register

BU2616F
XOUT XIN CE DA CK DO SD IFIN P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 Vss 17 PD2 16 PD1 15 VDD 14 FMIN 13 AMIN 12 P2 11 P1 10 P0
+ CH2 300

LA4270

30K CH1 + Thermal Shutdown Over Voltage Ripple Filter

30K 300 ACC

1 NF1

2 INPUT1

3 RIP

4 GND

5 INPUT2

6 NF2

7 OUTPUT2

8 GND

9 VCC

10 OUTPUT1

48

AN7312
Vcc 14
R.F ALC IN 2 OUT 2 P.C. 2 NF 2 IN 2

13

12

11

10

1
GND

2
ALC Const.

3
ALC IN1

4
OUT

5
P.C.1

6
NF 1

7
IN 1

TA7291S

BD4742G
Vcc 5 Vout 4

1
IN2

2
Vcc

3
OUT2

4
NC

5
GND

6
VS

7
OUT1

8
VREF

9
IN1
1 NC 2 SUB 3 GND

PT2253 TC4052B
VDD 2X 1X 0X 3X

VSS
L-OUT1 L-IN1 A-GND L-IN2 L-OUT2 INH DCO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 15 14

VCC
R-OUT1 R-IN1 A-GND R-IN2 R-OUT2 U/D OSC

X-COM

A 10 7 VEE

16

15

14

13

12

11

PT2253

13 12 11 10 9

1 0Y

2 2Y

3 Y-COM

4 3Y

5 1Y

6 INH

49

Vss

B 9 8

24

1
KI3 KI2 KI1 KI0 *KI7 *KI6 *KI5 *KI4

LA1844

FM I input

AM OSC BUFF & FM SD-ADJ

23

2 24 23 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 AFC
Key Input Sweep

PT2222

AM MIX output OSC

3 21 AM RF-input 21 20 FM signal meter & AM AGC 20


KI/O0 KI/O1

REG

4 19 AM detector output 19
KI/O2

AM IF input

OSCI

11

GND

TU-LED

10

OSC.

OSCO

Encode

LA1844/M

Timing&Control

Vss

VCC 16 Decoder input

KI/O5 KI/O6 KI/O7

AM/FM IF 15

Pilot cancel out.

Phase comparator 14 R output

Pilot detector 13 L output

Output Control

50
18 18 FM demodulation out.
KI/O3

7 17 17
KI/O4

ST-LED AM-IF out.

VDD

8 16 15 14

Key Input/Output Sweep

FM-DET

PLL input

12

10

22

13

11

SEL

LMP

CCS

REM

12

UPD780306
P25/SI0/SB0 P80/S39 P81/S38 P82/S37 P83/S36 P84/S35 P85/S34 P86/S33 P87/S32 P90/S31 P91/S30 P92/S29 P93/S28 P94/S27 P95/S26 P96/S25 P97/S24

S23

S22 82

100

99

98

97

96

95

94

93

92

91

90

89

88

87

86

85

84

83

P26/SO0/SB1 P27/SCK0 P70/SI2/RxD P71/SO2/RxD P72/SCK2/ASCK IC X2 X1 VDD1 XT1/P07 XT2 RESET P00/ INTP0/TI00 P01/ INTP1/TI01 P02/INTP2 P03/INTP3 P04/INTP4 P05/INTP5 P110/SI3 P111/SO3 P112/SCK3 P113/TxD P114/RxD P115 P116 P117 AVss P10/ANI0 P11/ANI1 P12/ANI2

S21 81
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

S20 S19 S18 S17 S16 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 VSS0 VLC2 VLC1 VLC0 BIAS COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

VDD0

P13/ANI3

P14/ANI4

P15/ANI5

P16/ANI6

P17/ANI7

AVREF

VSS1

P35/PCL

51

P36/BUZ

P100

P101

P102

P103

P30/TO0

P31/TO1

P32/TO2

P33/TI1

P34/TI2

P37

SOURCE

POWER

PRESET -

IMPORTADOR COMERCIALIZADORA THOMSON DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V SIERRA CANDELA NO. 111, PISO 11 COL. LOMAS DE CHAPULTEPEC DEL. MIGUEL HIDALGO MEXICO D.F. C.P. 11000 R.F.C. CTM-980723 KS5

THOMSON multimedia Inc. 10330 N.Meridian St. Indianapolis, IN 46290 2001 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) Depose 55135910 (EN/F/E) www.rca.com

u s e r m a n

VOLUME BAND/APP
D I G I TA L

BASS/TREBL

RPT/PGM

TEST

mp3
SURROUND TUNE TUNE +

PRESET +

PHONES

RTD130

FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.

For Your Safety


The AC power plug is polarized (one blade is wider than the other) and only fits into AC power outlets one way. If the plug wont go into the outlet completely, turn the plug over and try to insert it the other way. If it still wont fit, contact a qualified electrician to change the outlet, or use a different one. Do not attempt to bypass this safety feature. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

For Your Records


In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. CRK76AF1 Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No.

Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide
PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH DHHS RULES 21CFR SUBCHAPTER J, APPLICABLE AT DATE OF MANUFACTURE.
MANUFACTURED:

344A2634-0001

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme du NMB-003 du Canada.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN


THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USERS E RV I C E A B L E PA R T S I N SIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. THE EXCLAMATION POINT WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF I M P O R T A N T INSTRUCTIONS A C C O M PA N Y I N G T H E P R O D U C T.

CAUTION

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE


OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM / BACK OF PRODUCT

Table of Content
FCC Information Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver . . . . . . . . .2 Unpacking the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Inserting Batteries into Remote Control .3 Set Up and Maintenance of the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Protect your Components from Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Connecting to Audio-Visual Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Digital Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Connecting the Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . .6 Positioning your Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Front Speaker Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Preferred Surround Placement . . . . . . . .8 Advanced Surround Setting . . . . . . . . . .8 Test Tone / Channel Balance . . . . . . . . . .9 Connecting for Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

CD/MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Loading and Playing an Audio CD . . . .30 On-Screen Banner Display for CD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 On-Screen Display for MP3 playback . . .35

EN

Radio
Operating the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . .39 Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . .41 Remote Codes


Cable Codes . . . . . VCR Codes . . . . . . TV Codes . . . . . . . Satellite Receivers Audio (RCA only) . Laser disc Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 .42 .43 .44 .44 .44

Language Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Limited Warranty (US) . . . . . . . . .46 Limited Warranty (Canada) . . . . .47

Operating your Receiver


Receiver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Your Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Switching On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Selection of Audio/Video Source . . . . . .13 Using the Remote to Control Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Advanced Sound Control


Sound Enhancement Systems Fine Setting of Components . Fine Setting of the Speakers . Advanced Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 .16 .17 .17

DVD Player
Basic Playback Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Quick Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Freeze Frame and Frame Advance . . . .19 Slow Motion Playback (DVD only) . . . . .20 On-Screen Banner Display . . . . . . . . . . .20 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver
You should receive the following items:

+
SOURCE SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

mp3

D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

VOLUME

DVD
RPT/PGM

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

POWER PRESET PRESET + TUNE TUNE +

CD
/C H+

TAPE

VOL

PHONES

One pair of AA batteries One DVD receiver unit

VOL

/
MUTE
IDE GU

CH-

O BAC
INFO

RD

SHIFT

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

One Pig-Tail antenna wire

One external AM loop antenna

one video cable (single wire) with yellow RCA connectors;

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

u n i v e r s a l

one instruction book; one safety leaflet; one Quick Connection Guide

One RCA Universal Remote Control (CRK76AF1)

Unpacking The Speakers


one set of speakers including 2 left and right front speakers, 1 centre speaker, 1 subwoofer and 1 set of left and right rear speakers.

6 speaker cables including:

1 X blue/black cable for center speaker


FRONT SPEAKERS CENTER SPEAKER

2 X red/black cable for front speakers

SUBWOOFER

2 X grey/black cable for rear speakers


REAR SPEAKERS (SURROUND SOUND)

1 X brown/black cable for subwoofer

D IS K
G

Getting Started
Inserting Batteries into Remote Control
Insert two AA(R6) batteries according to the + and - signs on the battery compartment. To use the remote control, point it directly at your receiver.

Protect your Components from Overheating


Do not block ventilation holes in any component. Arrange the components so that air can circulate freely. Do not stack components directly on top of each other. Allow adequate ventilation when placing your components in a stand. Place the receiver near the top shelf of the stand so heated air rising from it will not affect other components.

EN

Set up and Maintenance of the Receiver


IMPORTANT NOTE
Provide spaces for sufficient ventilation as indicated below. If the space is insufficient, the unit may overheat resulting in malfunction and shorter life time.

About CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), DVD Video, DVD Audio
This model RTD130 is compatible to play CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), Video Compact Disk (VCD) and DVD Audio. When playback a DVD-Audio disk, this model is able to play any Dolby Digital 5.1 (AC3) Surround mix content only, but not the DVD-Audio Advanced Resolution Surround sound (6 channels) or Stereo sound (2 channels) content. Please watch the format of your disk and read the disk information for further contents information.

10 cm/4" 10 cm/ 4"


POWER PRESET PRESET + TUNE TUNE + SOURCE SURROUND

mp3

D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

VOLUME

10 cm/ 4"

RPT/PGM

PHONES

10 cm/4"

NOTES ON CD-R/RW DISC


This unit is compatible with CD-RW/ CD-R discs for playback.

5 cm/ 2"

Do not connect to the AC power cords until all connections are completed. Do not use your set immediately after transferring it from a cold place to a warm place: there is risk of condensation. Do not expose your set to water and excessively high temperatures. After having disconnected your set, clean the case with a soft cloth, or with a slightly damp leather chamois. Never use strong solvents.

CD-R/RW discs that are recorded by personal computers or some CD-R/RW recorders may not be played on this unit due to the difference in recording platforms. Do not affix any type of labels to either side (recordable or labeled side) of a CD-R/RW disc as this may result in the unit malfunctioning. To avoid damages to the CD-R/RW disc, do not open the disc compartment door while the disc is being read. Do not load an unrecorded CD-R/RW disc into the unit. This may take a longer time to read the disc. Playback capability for CD-RW discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the CD-RW disc and the recorder used to create the disc.

Getting Started
Connecting to Audio-Visual Components
ANALOG INPUT
Alternatively, if you have no VCR or SAT (or you do wish to connect them to this unit), you can connect any other compatible components like TAPE player, TV to your DVD receiver via the VCR/SAT input. VCR
to VIDEO OUT (VCR) to VIDEO IN (VCR)

DIGITAL INPUT
Connect components capable of outputing Dolby Digital (e.g. SAT) or standard PCM (CD) format digital signals. Read section on "Input Signal Setting" under "Advanced Sound Control" carefully to adjust the matching input settings.
DI GI TAL AUDI O

to AUDIO OUT (VCR)


IN L R

VCR
OUT

A U D I O

to AUDIO IN (VCR)
VCR IN

DIGITAL OUTPUT
Connect components capable of recording digital signals (e.g. MD, CD recorder player) equiped with a optical input.

SAT
IN S A T

VCR OUT

SAT IN

COAXIAL IN

OPTICAL OPTICAL IN OUT


A U D I O

MON OUT
V I D E O

D I G I TA L

OPTICAL OUT (SAT)

to VIDEO IN (TV)

to S-VIDEO OUT (if available)

to VIDEO OUT (SAT)

to S-VIDEO IN (if available)

AUDIO OUT (SAT)

TV

SAT

S-VIDEO
S-video provides the best connection for the video portion of the signal. When connecting S-video cable, a Composite video cable (yellow RCA connector) must also be used. If you use a S-video cable to connect any audio-visual components to your DVD receiver, you must also use a S-video cable between your TV and receiver. VCR audio/video out will have output signal in SAT, DVD/CD and TUNER modes. When VCR (source) is selected, there will be no audio/video signal from VCR audio/video out.

Getting Started
Digital Connections
If you have a SAT receiver DVD player or CD player with a digital output, you can make use of an optical digital connecting cord (not supplied) or coaxial digital connecting cord (not supplied) to carry the audio portion of the signal and enjoy Dolby Digital or digital stereo sound quality. One optical or coaxial cable is needed for each SAT receiver, DVD player or CD player. When optical or coaxial cable is used, the analog audio cables are still needed if recording through a tape or VCR is desired. This receiver provides one optical and one coaxial digital input for the connection of your components. Please connect your components (e.g. DVD, SAT or CD) to the appropriate digital inputs and select the appropriate source (see below).

Connecting the Antennas


EN
CENTER FRONT SUB AM LOOP
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic 2" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ' 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

AUDIO VIDEO RECEIVER


POWER SOURCE: 120V 60Hz POWER CONUMPTION: 300W REFER INQUIRIES TO: THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. MANAGER CONSUMER RELATIONS, P.O. BOX 1976, INDIANAPOLIS, IN46206 MADE IN CHINA

VCR IN

1
R L FM 75
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operaton is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations

VCR
IN L OUT

SAT
IN

110V VCR OUT

60Hz

S A T

SAT IN

R REAR

R COAXIAL IN A U D I O OPTICAL OPTICAL IN OUT


A U D I O

MON OUT V I D E O

S P E A K E R S

D I G I TA L

The AM and FM antennas connect to the AM and FM terminals on the systems back panel. They must be hooked up in order to receive clear reception.

AM Loop Antenna and FM Indoor Antenna


1. Uncoil the Antenna wire and located the base end 2. Press down on the Antenna tab to open the terminal (Refer to the illustration on the bottom of page 6)

NOTE
Optical and coaxial cables carry only the audio portion of the signal. A video connection must also be established by connecting a video cable to the (SAT) video input.

AM LOOP

Read instructions carefully when connecting components to the receiver. Digital In Jacks can accept Dolby Digital (AC-3), or PCM signals when compatible components are connected.
FM 75

OPTICAL DIGITAL IN (AUDIO) Optical Fiber Cable Connect to optical digital output of DVD, CD, SAT or other compatible devices. SAT / DVD / CD Player
SAT

OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Connect to recording device like CD, CDRW player, DVD recorder, mini disc etc.

HINT
For FM reception, extend antenna to its full length and arrange the Antenna at different parts of the room until the reception is optimized. For AM reception, rotate the antenna horizontally to get better reception.

COAXIAL DIGITAL IN (AUDIO) Connect to coaxial digital output of DVD, CD, SAT or other compatible devices. SAT / DVD / CD

S A T

COAXIAL OPTICAL OPTICAL IN IN OUT DI G I TA L A UDI O

S P E A K E R S

CENTER FRONT

SUB

AM LOOP

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic 2" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ' 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

AUDIO VIDEO RECEIVER


POWER SOURCE: 120V 60Hz POWER CONUMPTION: 300W REFER INQUIRIES TO: THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. MANAGER CONSUMER RELATIONS, P.O. BOX 1976, INDIANAPOLIS, IN46206 MADE IN CHINA

VCR IN

1
R L FM 75
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operaton is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations

VCR
IN L OUT

SAT
IN

110V VCR OUT

60Hz

S A T

SAT IN

R REAR

R COAXIAL IN A U D I O OPTICAL OPTICAL IN OUT


A U D I O

MON OUT V I DE O

SPEAKER S

D I G I TA L

Getting Started
Connecting the Speakers
SUBWOOFER

To ease speaker connections, the speaker cords and the terminals are color-coded. Red/Black (Front Speakers), Blue/Black (Center Speaker) Grey/Black (Rear Speakers). Brown/Black (Subwoofer) Connect the speaker wire (red/black wire) to the back of L, R front speakers (red / black terminals) and to the corresponding color terminals on the rear of the receiver. Do the same for center speaker (with blue/black terminal), rear speakers (with grey/black terminals) and the subwoofer (with brown/black terminal).
FRONT SPEAKER

CENTER SPEAKER

BLUE / BLACK BROWN / BLACK

FRONT SPEAKER
L

RED / BLACK

CENTER FRONT R

SUB

RED / BLACK

Speaker Polarity
When connecting the speakers, make sure the polarities (+ speaker wire to + on the receiver) of speaker wires and terminals are matched. If the cords are reversed, the sound will be distorted and will lack bass (out of phase effect).

GREY / BLACK
REAR

GREY / BLACK

S P E A K E R S

REAR SPEAKER

REAR SPEAKER

Connecting the Subwoofer


Connect the subwoofer with the speaker cord (brown/ black) provided.

Speakers
There are 6 speakers equipped with the unit (2 front, 1 center, 2 rear, 1 subwoofer). In order to enjoy good surround effects all six speakers need to be connected to the receiver At least two front speakers (left and right) are required. For better sound quality, Center speaker, rear speakers and Subwoofer should also be connected. Adding center and rear speakers will enhance surround effects. Adding a Subwoofer will increase bass response. If you want to enjoy full range of sound effects, it is a must to use the subwoofer with the speakers to maintain adequate bass signal.

Speaker cords
1 for each speaker, is needed for connection. Twist the stripped ends of speaker cord about 2/3 inch (15 mm). Press down on the tab to open the terminal and insert the wire. Snap the tab closed.
Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection

Push Speaker terminal tab down to insert wire.

Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.


NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the Antenna and speaker wires at all connection points.

Getting Started
Positioning your speaker
1 Left, Right (Front Speakers)
They carry primarily music and sound effects

Alignment
Align the center speaker evenly with (A), or slightly behind (B), the left and right speakers, but not ahead of them.

EN

2 Center
In surround mode, the center speaker carries much of the dialogue as well as music and effects. It should be set between the left and right speakers.

3 Surround (Rear Speakers)


Their overall sound balance should be as close as possible to the front speakers. Proper placement is vital to establish an evenly distributed sound field.

Subwoofer
A subwoofer is designed to reproduce powerful low bass effects (explosions, the rumble of spaceships, etc.) which dramatically heightens involvement with the action on the screen. It is therefore recommended to connect subwoofers when small speakers are used.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Advanced Setting
Angle
Placing the left and right speakers to form a 45-degree angle with your favorite viewing position will duplicate the soundtrack mixer's perspective.

Magnetic shielding
Speakers placed less than two feet from the TV set must be magnetically shielded in order to prevent picture distortion. Front and center speakers provided with RTDVD1 are magnetically shielded to protect your TV set. It is not recommended to place the rear speakers near the TV set.

3 1

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

1 3

Height
The mid- and high-frequency drivers of the three front speakers should be as close as possible to the same height. This often requires placing the center speaker directly atop (A) or beneath (B) the TV set.
A

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Front Speaker Placement


Even if you can't duplicate this ideal home theater setup exactly, the suggestions for speaker placement that follow will help you get good results.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Getting Started
Preferred surround placement
Location
If possible, place surround speakers to either side of the listening area, not behind it.

Advanced Setting Alternative Surround Placement


Rear wall
If rear wall mounting is the only choice, aim the speakers at each other (A), towards the front (B) or even towards the sidewalls (C, D). Experiment with placement until surround sounds seem to envelop you, rather than coming from behind you.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Height
If space permits, install surrounds 2-3 feet above viewers. This helps to minimize localization effects.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

No adjacent walls
Surrounds can go on stands facing each other to approximate the preferred sidewall mounting (A), or to the sides or rear of the viewing area aimed upwards. In the latter case, they can go right on the floor, or preferably, a few feet off the floor such as on end tables (B).

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Aiming
Aiming surrounds straight across the room, not down at viewers, helps create a more open, spacious surround sound field.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Getting Started
Test Tone / Channel balance
Channel balance
Your receiver is equipped with a test signal generator for balancing the channels. As the signal "travels" from channel to channel, adjust the level controls until each channel plays at the same loudness level. (details see operation of test/setup)

Connecting for Power


Make sure you connect all your other electronic components and the speakers before plugging your receiver into the outlet. Plug the power cord in the wall outlet, matching the wide blade of the plug with the wide slot in the outlet. Be sure to insert the plug completely.

EN

Using Headphones
To listen privately through your audio system, use the PHONES jack on the receiver. However, make sure you turn down the volume before you put on the headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level after headphones are in place. Once headphones are connected, HEADPHONE DOWNMIX 2 CHANNEL will scroll on display. This feature automatically converts multi-channel outputs to 2 channel stereo for your listening pleasure.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Level adjustment & surround channel level expectation


Even though you adjust the surround channel to be as loud as the others on the test signal, you'll find that on actual program material the surround channel is usually much lower than the front. Don't be tempted to readjust the surround level; program producers use surround mostly for subtle atmosphereics and ambience, and only rarely for special effects. A good surround mix doesn't call attention to itself; if it did, it would soon become distracting.

Hearing Comfort & Well-Being


Do not play your headset at a high volume. Hearing experts advise against continuous extended play. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use.

Factory Setting
The RTDVD1 is preset to the following setting when you first turn on the power Source = DVD/CD Volume setting = 45 dB Bass & Treble = 0 dB

NOTE
The system is equipped with Dolby Digital, and manufactured under License from Dolby Laboratories.

Restore to Factory Settings


You can always restore all settings back to its original state. When the receiver is in STANDBY mode, press accordingly on the main unit to restore all settings back to factory default : PRESET PRESET + BASS/TREBLE

Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Pro Logic II and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NOTE
All preset radio stations and surround sound setting will be lost after factory setting is restored.

Operating Your Receiver


1 4 2 3
5

11

13

12

10

SOURCE

SURROUND

mp3

D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

VOLUME

RPT/PGM

POWER PRESET PRESET + TUNE TUNE +

PHONES

14

Receiver Controls
1. POWER / STANDBY To turn the unit on/ off. When the system is turned on, the unit will go to Standby mode, then press the SOURCE button on the unit to power the unit up in the last mode used. When the unit is in standby mode, press the Source button to power on the unit. 2. Source Buttons To select input source. For example, DVD/CD, VCR1 etc. Press and hold for delay settings. 3. SURROUND Press repeatedly to select the surround sound setting or Digital Sound Processor (DSP) mode you want. Refer to Advanced Sound Control on page 16.) Press and hold to activate speaker Test Tone, use the Adjustment buttons on the remote to adjust the settings. 4. PRESET - / SKIP REVERSE To move back to the beginning/previous preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the previous track in CD mode and the beginning/previous chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 5. PRESET + / SKIP FORWARD To go to the next preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the next track in CD mode and the next chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 6. BAND /APP / RPT / PGM In Tuner mode, press to select between radio BANDS or press and hold to enter AUTO PROGRAM mode. In DVD/CD mode, press to select among REPEAT options (only while playing) or press and hold to enter PROGRAM mode (only in stop mode).

7. BASS/TREBLE To adjust BASS or TREBLE, press relevant button and turn the volume knob to adjust level. Press and hold for Random function in CD/MP3 playback. 8. TUNE - / FAST REVERSE In tuner mode, press to tune down on the radio frequency or press and hold to to search down . In CD and DVD mode, press to fast reverse. Press repeatedly to vary the speed of fast reverse. In pause mode, press for slow reverse. 9. TUNE + / FAST FORWARD In tuner mode, press to tune up the radio frequency or press and hold to search down. In CD and DVD mode, press to fast forward. Press repeatedly to vary the speed of fast forward. In pause mode, press for slow forward. 10. VOLUME Turn the knob to adjust volume level. 11. PLAY/PAUSE To play and pause DVD/CD playback. 12. STOP/ EJECT To stop DVD/CD playback. Press to eject disc tray. 13. Display To display current status of the receiver. 14. PHONES Plug your headphones (not supplied) into it for your private enjoyment. Speakers will be off when phones are inserted.

10

Operating Your Receiver


Your Remote Control
Please be sure you have inserted the batteries into the remote control (see relevant section on page 3.) You can test it by pressing any button. If it works, the red LED will light.
5. MUTE To mute all audio outputs. 6. SHIFT To access second function features. (Function features controlled by the SHIFT key are colour coded to have the same colour as the word SHIFT. 7. Adjustment Buttons Press SHIFT then OK/FUNCTION, the display will toggle among: NOTE: Do not press the SHIFT key when in Tuner mode. Preset EQ (Stereo only), SLEEP Mode DIM Mode NIGHT Mode (Dolby Digital Only). When the display shows the setup you want to change, press the left and right arrow buttons beside OK button to make changes, then press OK to finalize your choice. 8. Number Buttons In Tuner mode, to select a preset station. In DVD/CD mode, to select a track to be played (Audio CD only). For separate RCA 5 disc CD Player, to select track or DISC. (Must use the SHIFT button to select Disc) 9. MENU In Tuner mode: - Press AM/FM - Press to store desired frequency in memory. The flashing word MEMORY in red will appear in display. Input your desired channel number while the word is still flashing and the frequency will be stored. (For details, refer to "Storing Radio Stations under Manual Preset on page 38) In DVD mode, press for menu setup for DVD title. 10. Operation Buttons TUNER, press AM/FM on the remote to enter tuner mode. Press REVERSE and FORWARD keys to tune down or up the radio frequency. DVD/CD, press DVD to enable PLAY, RECORD, STOP and PAUSE keys. The remote control currently operates most Thomson, RCA and GE products, but it can be programmed to operate devices from other manufacturers (For details, refer to Using the Remote to Control Additional Components on page 14. 11. AUDIO/SUBTITLE Press AUDIO/SUBTITLE To select between left, right and stereo channel when playing VCD. Press SHIFT then AUDIO/SUBTITLE to turn on or off the subtitle function for DVD mode. 12. DIGITAL/LANG Select the way your SAT external audio/video devices are connected to the receiver (Analog, Optical or Coaxial) through the SAT audio input. Press SHIFT then DIGITAL/LANG to select available languages in DVD playback. 13. LEVEL/ANGLE Press to adjust the volume of individual speaker. Press repeatedly and the display will toggle among different channels (Left front speaker, Right front speaker, Center speaker, Left rear speaker, Right rear speaker, and Subwoofer). Press the left and right arrow buttons beside OK button for adjustment. Press SHIFT then LEVEL/ANGLE to select different screen display angles. 14. SURR (Surround Sound Control)/FRAME Press to change the surround sound settings. The display will toggle among any stereo modes (DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PL II MOVIE, DOLBY PL II MUSIC, DOLBY PRO LOGIC, DOLBY 3 STEREO, ARENA, JAZZ, THEATER, STADIUM, DISCO, STEREO) Press SHIFT then SURR/FRAME to activate STILL step backward. (For details, refer to section Advanced Sound Control on page 15.)

EN

1
VCR 1 ON OFF TV

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

CD

TAPE
/C H+

VOL

VOL

4
MUTE
IDE GU

5
M RD

CH-

O BAC
INFO

D IS K
G

SHIFT

6 7

OK

FUNCTION

9
MENU CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

10

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

14
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME

13
u n i v e r s a l

12 11

NOTE
The remote buttons GUIDERDM, INFO & INPUTSEEK do not work in tuner mode.

1. ON/OFF To turn on or off the receiver and other auxiliary components (see page 14 Using the Remote to Control Additional Components). 2. Source Buttons To turn on and select various audio/ video sources. 3. CH+, CH- (Channel Buttons) To select programmed stations in TUNER mode. To skip to the next or previous chapter or track in DVD, CD & MP3 mode. 4. VOL (Volume Buttons) To adjust the volume.

After using AUDIO, DIGITAL, LEVEL or SURR keys on the remote control in DVD/CD function mode, you must press the DVD/CD or SHIFT key to use other DVD keys.

11

Operating Your Receiver


Display

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

DVD / VCD / CD / MP3


Unit in DVD, VCD, CD or MP3 mode.

CHAP
Chapter location at which DVD is currently at.

AUTO D I G I TA L
Auto programming in tuner mode is activated Audio output is in Dolby Digital mode. (For DVD only)

PROG. PRO.LOGIC
Program mode is activated. Audio output is in Dolby PL II Movie, Dolby PL II Music or Dolby Prologic mode. TUNED

INTRO
Track sampling activated.

Tuner station detected.

ST RANDOM
Random playback mode activated. Tuner stereo signal detected.

REPEAT / REPEAT 1 / REPEAT ALL


CD, MP3 and DVD in repeat mode. Currently in playback mode.

KHz / MHz
Currently in pause mode. Tuner frequency unit.

TITLE
C

Title number for DVD playback. Speaker Icons.

TRACK
Track number being played.

12

Operating Your Receiver


Switching on /off
To switch on the receiver, press POWER button on the receiver once to enter standby mode. Press SOURCE or POWER button on the receiver or one of the source buttons on the remote control to power on the receiver.

Selection of Audio/Video source


When one of the audio/video source is selected, the audio and video input corresponding to the name will be activated. The receiver acts as a switching device between all the sources that are plugged into it.

EN

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

POWER PRE
DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

DVD CD
/C H+

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

TAPE
WER PRESET PRESET +
CD
/C H+

TAPE

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

ER PRESET PRESET +

CD
/C H+

TAPE

Example 1: If you connect a VCR player to the VCR input (audio + video) on the receiver and press the SOURCE button until VCR1/ANL shows on the display. You will be able to have the sound and image transmitted by the VCR.

Standby: when the receiver is on, press the ON/OFF on the remote to return to standby mode. To switch off the unit completely, press the POWER button on the receiver.

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

NOTE
Your receiver has a back up memory to keep your settings like preset radio station for about 2 weeks in case electricity cut occurs. If the receiver is unplugged for more than 2 weeks, all the settings will be lost and re-setting will be necessary.

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

ER PRESET PRESET +

CD
/C H+

TAPE

Example 2: Based on example 1, the VCR input is selected. If DVD is selected, image and sound from the DVD receiver source will replace the VCR.

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

ER PRESET PRESET +

CD
/C H+

TAPE

13

Operating your Receiver


You can connect up to 2 audio/video sources to this amplifier: Source button (remote control) DVD/CD FM/AM SAT VCR Corresponding connector (receiver back panel) built-in built-in SAT IN (audio / video) VCR IN (audio / video)
VCR 1 ON OFF TV

3. Press and hold the corresponding Source Button (like VCR1, SAT/CABLE, TV) on the remote while entering the code from the code list using the Number Buttons.
MENU CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

CD
/C H+

TAPE
INPUT SEEK REVERSE

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

When a source is selected, the source name will be shown on the display. Example: Press VCR to select VCR as the source to the amplifier. 4. Release the component button, then press ONOFF to see if the component will turn off.
VCR 1 ON OFF TV

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

CD
/C H+

TAPE

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

5. If this does not work, repeat steps 3 and 4 by trying to use the next code (if available) listed for the brand of your component until the component responds to the remote command.

NOTE
1. Your receiver has a built in tuner. Just connect the appropriate antenna on the back of the receiver and you will be able to listen to radio stations. (See details in Tuner section) 2. The receiver is also equipped with DVD/CD player. Press the SOURCE button on the main unit or DVD button on the remote to activate the feature. 3. Other sources can be connected to this unit (VCR, SAT etc). 4. Refer to the "Connecting To Audio-Visual Components" section for details on connection.

NOTE
Once your remote is encoded, you can press ON/OFF on the remote once to turn off the component and then followed by the second time quickly to turn off the receiver (i.e. this unit). If you only want the receiver to be turned off, select FM/ AM while the unit is ON before pressing ON/OFF.

HINT
This remote may not operate all models of the brands shown. If batteries are removed from the battery compartment of the remote control, all memory will be lost. You need to re-enter all previously programmed codes again. The buttons on the remote may not work correspondingly with those on other brand components. Experiment with the remote and your components to see which buttons work. If only a few functions operate, check to see if another code set will work with more buttons.

Using the Remote to Control Additional Components


You can set your remote to control other components (like TV, VCR, etc.). What you need is to encode them in advance (not necessary for recent RCA & Proscan models). 1. Turn on the component to be programmed. 2. Look up the brand and corresponding code number in the code list from page 42 to 44.

14

Advanced Sound Control


Sound Enhancement Systems
This receiver is equipped with several built-in sound enhancement systems.

Dolby Digital
The Dolby Digital mode lets you enjoy full digital surround from software processed in the Dolby Digital format. Dolby Digital provides better sound quality and more powerful presence than conventional Dolby Surround. This unit is equipped with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel so that you can enjoy enhanced full digital surround sound. Being different from Dolby Pro Logic in which only four channels ( Front Left, Front Right, Centre and Rear ) are used, the new system provides stereo separation of the rear speakers (Rear-Right, Rear-Left ). These 5 channels, together with the subwoofer channel for bass sounds ( counted as 0.1 channel ), constitute as 5.1-Channel ( or 6 Channels ) Input for Dolby Digital that brings you the most sophisticated sound enjoyment.

EN

Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby 3 Stereo


The Pro Logic II mode uses the built-in circuit to steer the Left, Center, Right and Surround left and right channel audio signals and uses all five speakers to play both stereo and Dolby Pro Logic program source, such as TV and VCR. Dolby Pro Logic II includes Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Music and Dolby Pro Logic. Use this mode to suit the type of program (such as VCR).

Front Left Speaker

Center Speaker

Front Right Speaker

Subwoofer

Listening Zone

Rear Left Speaker

Rear Right Speaker

This surround system reproduces theater-like surround sound from Dolby-encoded software. The 3 Stereo mode will redirect the Surround signals to the front left and right speakers when only the front and center speakers are used.

Front Left Speaker

Center Speaker

Front Right Speaker

Listening Zone

15

Advanced Sound Control


Stereo
The Stereo mode uses the two main channel outputs from the front speakers.

Input Signal Setting


The receiver defaults to the most convenient settings for your easiest use (see table). By default, SAT (satellite) is set to analogue input. If you wish to change the input formats, follow the steps below: 1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until SAT appears on the display or press the SAT source buttons on the remote control. 2. Press DIGITAL on the remote control to toggle among optical/ coaxial/ analog to match your connection. Your selection will be stored automatically. Every time you press the source button, the input setting (e.g. SAT/ ANL) will be shown on display for a few seconds. SOURCE SAT VCR1 FM/AM DEFAULT INPUT (as seen on display) Analog (SAT/ ANL) Analog (VCR1/ ANL) Built-in Tuner

DSP (Digital Sound Processor)


These digital sound effects resemble sounds in a real environment such as Arena, Jazz, Theater, Stadium and Disco. DSP automatically converts analog audio signals to digital ones which enables you to adjust the sound without degrading the sound quality. Different modes will give you different feel of size and type of listening environment. (Not available in Dolby Digital (DVD))

Night Mode
By using Dynamic Range Compression technology (pressing SHIFT and OK), you can enjoy enhanced Dolby Digital sound quality at night without interrupting your roommates or neighbors. Night Mode will compress the difference in volume between normal voices and sound like explosions, while still enjoying a Dolby Digital enable component (DVD, SAT). Night Mode can be activated by pressing the SHIFT button then the OK button repeatedly until NORMAL appears on the display. While Normal is still on the display, press the LEFT or RIGHT Adjustment buttons on the remote control,around the OK button, on the remote control until you select the desired mode. Night mode can also be activated by pressing the AUDIO button, then OK button repeatedly then LEFT or RIGHT Adjustment buttons. There are three modes (NORMAL, SOFT, SOFTER) for you to choose the extents of compression.

NOTE
Only SAT input setting can be changed to coaxial or optical. SOURCE SAT DVD/CD VCR1 AVAILABLE INPUT ANL/Optical/Coaxial Built-in ANL/ - / -

Fine Setting of the Components


The receiver has pre-selected the best surround mode for you once you turn on the unit by pressing the SOURCE Buttons (like DVD/CD, SAT) directly. The default surround modes for different components are as tabled below. If you decide to change the surround mode, you can press the SURROUND repeatedly to toggle among the different surround mode choices and select the one you want. For Digital Signal (2ch PCM), or analogue signal , VCR1, Tuner: Dolby PL II Movie Dolby PL II Music Dolby PL Dolby 3 Stereo Arena Jazz Theater Stadium Disco Stereo For Digital Signal (Dolby Digital) Dolby Digital Dolby 2 Stereo Stereo

Digital Input: Coaxial (COAX) / Optical (OPT)


Select this setting to play digital signals from a DVD, CD, LD player, or SAT. (SAT mode only)

CAUTION!
DO NOT CONNECT A LD PLAYER WITH RF COAXIAL OUTPUT TO YOUR COAXIAL INPUT.

Analog Input
Select this setting to play analog signals from a cassette deck, VCR or SAT.

Default Settings
Source/ Source/ Input DVD/CD SAT VCR TUNER If Digital Input (optical or coaxial) is selected Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/ N/A N/A If PCM bitstream If Analog Input selected

NOTE
SAT and VCR are just generic names. You can connect other compatible audio/video components to these inputs like TV, TAPE, MINI DISC, CD-RW player, etc.

PRO-LOGIC II PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE MOVIE N/A PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE N/A PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE

The receiver will keep the last selection in memory as long as it doesnt enter standby mode.

16

Advanced Sound Control


Fine Setting of the Speakers
If you use all the speakers provided, all the basic settings have been set. However, to make the surround sound more effective and suit the acoustic conditions in your listening room, you need to delay the signal from some of the speakers. Such channel delay compensates for center or surround speakers that are closer to listening position than the front speakers. You can make use of the SOURCE button to adjust the speakers relative loudness.

Speaker Configurations
You can also change the delay of the speakers by pressing and holding the SOURCE button. Available Selections: Front Speaker distance Center Speaker distance Rear Speaker distance 0-40 ft 0-40 ft 0-40 ft

EN

The TEST button


Recommend to set the surround to one of the Dolby setting so that all speakers will be selected. To activate the Test Tone, press and hold the SURROUND button. A short noise will be heard in each speaker one by one. The speaker producing the noise at that moment will flash on the Speaker icon and be displayed on the VFD. The speaker being displayed can then be adjusted by using the LEFT or RIGHT arrows on the remote to desired level. To get out of Test Tone, just press SURROUND button and the setting will be saved.
MUTE
O BAC

Pressing SOURCE repeatedly while the display is still showing speaker distance setup. Set speaker selections or speakers distance by pressing PRESET +/ PRESET - on the main unit or the LEFT / RIGHT arrows on the remote control.

NOTE
Always use the subwoofer for optimum sound quality.

SOURCE

SURROUND

mp3

IDE GU

RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

PRESET -

PRESET +

1
C

2
C

3
C

Advanced Setting
Factory Default Setting
The receiver speaker distance default settings are the following:
Front Left Front Left

Center

C ch L/R L/R

SUR

SUR

Rear Left

Rear Left

Front speakers (L/R) Center speaker (Cch) Rear speaker (SUR)

15 ft 15 ft 10 ft

CH

17

Advance Sound Control


Speaker distance: For optimum surround experience measure the distance between the speaker and your favorite listening position.

Speaker Icons
The receiver shows you the speakers settings on the display with the following icons:

1. Press and hold SOURCE for 3 seconds

Front Speakers
SOURCE SURROUND

Center Speaker Rear Speakers

WER PRESET PRESET +

LFE

Subwoofer Present

2. While the Display is showing FRNT 15 FT, press PRESET + or PRESET - on the main unit or LEFT or RIGHT arrow on the remote control to adjust the delay setting.
SOURCE SURROUND
MUTE
O BAC

Displaying Program Formats


When a digital source is playing, the receiver will automatically switch to the proper surround mode and indicates on the speaker icons on the right-hand side of the display. (See diagram)

IDE GU

RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

PRESET -

PRESET +
MENU

FUNCTION

CLEAR

D
G

mp

CH-

3. Press SOURCE once to move to the next delay setting.

SOURCE

SURROUND

WER PRESET PRESET +

4. Repeat step 2 to set up the next speaker

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

It is important to note, however, that not all Dolby Digital sources are encoded with the full complement of five channels plus LFE*. Speaker icons show how many and which speaker you have enabled (See Fine Setting of the Speakers) and the letters inside the speaker icons show which channel is present in the source information. For example, the diagram shown means you have all the five speakers and subwoofer enabled and the digital sources you played have five channels plus LFE complemented. (Dolby Digital 5.1 Channels) * LFE stands for Low Frequency Effect. The indication LFE appears if the digital source contains LFE information. In this case, the bass signal will be delivered to the subwoofer, offering more dynamic deep bass sound effects. If the letter is flashing, the signal is either too weak or just gone.

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

CD
/C H+

TAPE

PRESET -

PRESET +

5. When set up is done, wait for 5 seconds to automatically save your settings or press any source key to save your selection and set up mode.

18

DVD Player
Basic Playback Features
1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until DVD/CD appears on the display or DVD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source. Press STOP once to stop playback and go into resume mode.
REPEAT
RANDOM

PROGRAM

EN

0
D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

INPUT SEEK REVERSE

PLAY

ANT-FMS FORWARD

RPT/PGM

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

TUNE SUBTITLE LANG DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE ANGLE FRAME

ER PRESET PRESET +

CD
/C H+

TAPE

NOTE
L C R LS LFE RS

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

RESUME MODE: The next time PLAY is pressed, the unit will begin playback at the location where it was last stopped. Press STOP on the remote control to cancel the resume mode.

D I G I TA L

BAND/AP

2. Open disc tray for loading discs with label side facing up. Press again to close it.

RPT/PGM

Quick search
1. While playing a disc, press REVERSE on the remote control to scan backwards through the disc. Press FORWARD on the remote for scanning forward. Press repeatedly to change searching speed to 1,2 or 3 times for VCD and 1,2,3 or 4 for DVD. 2. Press PLAY at any time to resume normal playback.
C C

TUNE -

3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PLAY on the remote control to start playback Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PAUSE to pause playing during playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback.
REPEAT
RANDOM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

SURROUND

mp3

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

PROGRAM

1
RECORD STOP

1 2
P AUSE AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL SURR

SURROUND

mp3

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

PRESET +

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME

Press SKIP REVERSE to go back to the previous chapter or SKIP FORWARD to move to the next chapter.

Freeze frame, frame advance and frame backward


1. Press PAUSE to freeze picture during playback. Each time you press again, the picture advances one frame. 2. Press PAUSE repeatedly to move forward in still frame.

SOURCE

SURROUND

mp3
VOL

CD
/C H+

TAPE

PRESET -

PRESET +

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

D IS K

VOL

3. Press SHIFT then press SURR/FRAME repeatedly to move backward in still frame.
REPEAT
RANDOM

G
SHIFT

PROGRAM

INFO

SURROUND

mp3

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME

n i v e r s a l

4. Press PLAY to resume normal playback.

19

DVD Player
Slow motion playback (DVD only)
1. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE in the remote control to freeze the picture during playback.
7
REPEAT

On-screen banner display


You can access the on-screen banner display during playback to select many playback features. Each feature is illustrated with an icon. However, each banner display feature is available only if the disc was created with that particular feature. An invalid icon appears on the screen when you select an icon that does not function. Also, the icon is grayed out to tell you so. Title Audio Chapter Camera angles Disc type

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

SURROUND

mp3
INPUT SEEK REVERSE

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME

2. Advance picture in slow motion. Press FAST FORWARD on the unit or FORWARD on the remote control for slow motion in forward direction and FAST REVERSE or REVERSE in reverse direction. Press repeatedly to change speed to 1/16 times, 1/8 times, 1/4 times and 1/2 times.
C C

Subtitles

Bookmarks

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

A L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE
INPUT SEEK REVERSE

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RPT/PGM
RECORD STOP P AUSE

Title icon is being highlighted in this example

Time indicator

TUNE -

TUNE +

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

General use
3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote control to resume normal playback.
7
REPEAT

1. Press INFO on the remote control during playback to show on-screen banner.
V

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

SURROUND

mp3
INPUT SEEK REVERSE

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD MUTE

/
M RD

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

IDE GU

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

INFO

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

OK

PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows on the remote control to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

3. Press OK to open menu under selected feature.


/
MUTE
CHO BAC

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

20

D IS K
G

D IS K
G

D IS K
G

DVD Player
Selecting a title
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter title number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit title number (e.g. 9 = 09). 2. Press SHIFT and DIGITAL/LANG or OK repeatedly until the audio language you want appears on the banner.
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

VOL

EN

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

D IS K

VOL

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

G
SHIFT

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

INFO SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME

IDE GU

OK

u n i v e r s a l
FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

VOL

CH-

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

MUTE

O BAC

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

IDE GU

RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

NOTE
Some discs have one title only.

NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple audio tracks.

Selecting a chapter
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter chapter number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit chapter number (e.g. 9 = 09)

Selecting subtitle language


1. Refer to General use to open the subtitle menu.

MENU

CLEAR

2. Press OK to select and confirm subtitle language.


/
MUTE
R

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

CH-

O BAC

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

DM

SHIFT

INFO

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

NOTE
The chapter feature will not work if the disc is not formatted with separate chapters.
VOL

3. Press SHIFT and AUDIO/SUBTITLE repeatedly to turn subtitle on or off.


INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

D IS K

D IS K

Selecting audio language


1. Refer to the previous page General use to open the title menu.

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

IDE GU

OK

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

u n i v e r s a l
FUNCTION

4. Press INFO to exit.

NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with subtitles.

D IS K
G

3. Press INFO to exit.

VOL

VOL

21

DVD Player
Selecting camera angle
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the camera angle menu.

Using bookmarks
The bookmark feature allows you to mark a point on the disc that you can go to quickly. You can store up to 9 bookmarks.

Adding bookmarks
2. Press SHIFT and LEVEL/ANGLE to select the camera angle you want.
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

1. Refer to Page 20 General use to open the bookmark menu.

VOL

VOL

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

D IS K

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

G
SHIFT

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

INFO SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME

OK

u n i v e r s a l
FUNCTION

2. Use the arrows on the remote to move the cursor (yellow frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the scene you want to do so.
MUTE
O BAC

IDE GU

/
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

SHIFT

INFO

OK

IDE GU

3. Press INFO to exit.

IDE GU

OK

NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple angles.

FUNCTION

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

1
C

2
C

3
C

3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right with arrow button and then press OK when you reach another scene you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

Recalling bookmarks
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to move cursor (yellow frame) to the Go To check line and to the bookmarked scene you want to recall. 3. Press OK to recall bookmarked scene. 4. Move cursor by using the arrows to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new scenes but the previous bookmarks will be erased starting from the earliest one.

22

DI
G

DVD Player
Repeat (During Playback Only)
1. During playback, press the RPT/PGM button on the main unit or SHIFT and 7/REPEAT repeatedly on the remote control to select among the repeat modes - Repeat Disc > Repeat Title > Repeat Chapter > Repeat Off > (Repeat Chapter). Selected mode is displayed in the banner display on screen.

EN

1
C

2
C

3
C

TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
RPT/PGM
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

2. The box under Title will be highlighted automatically. Use the arrows on the remote to select title and chapter.
D IS K

0
PLAY

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

TUNE -

TUNE +
RECORD STOP P AUSE

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

SHIFT

SHIFT

INFO

OK OK

NOTE
Random playback is not available in DVD mode.

FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU MENU CLEAR CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

Program playback Edit program


1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM to display program edit playlist.

3. Add will be highlighted automatically after chapter is selected. Press OK to add selected track and chapter(s) onto playlist.
/
MUTE
CHO BAC

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

RPT/PGM

TUNE -

TUNE +

4. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return normal playback with program saved), then press OK to start program playback or return to stop mode.
IDE GU
MENU CLEAR MUTE

DI

VOL

D IS K

IDE GU

1 4
C

2 5
C

3 6 9
PROGRAM

OK

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

FUNCTION

OK

O BAC
INFO

SHIFT

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

MENU

FUNCTION CLEAR

IDE GU

OK

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

1
C

2
C

3
C

MENU

CLEAR

FUNCTION

1
C

2
C

3
C

NOTE
You can select at maximum 32 items by repeating steps 2 - 3.

RD

SHIFT

INFO

CH-

O BAC

DI
G

DI
G

INPUT SEEK REVERSE

ANT-FMS FORWARD

VOL

23

DVD Player
Delete program
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to select and highlight the programmed item you want to delete on the playlist.
MENU MUTE
O BAC

3. Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to select Title or Chapter, then the UP and DOWN arrows to select the number.
MUTE
O BAC

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

/
RD

CLEAR

CH

1
C

2
C

3
C

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

4. Use the LEFT and DOWN arrows to highlight Insert and then press OK.
RD

D
G

CH

1
C

2
C

3
C

SHIFT

INFO

MUTE

IDE GU

OK

3. Highlight Delete and then press OK to delete item.


FUNCTION

IDE GU

RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

/
MUTE

CH-

DI

MENU

CLEAR MENU CLEAR

O BAC

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

1
C

2
C

3
C

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

5. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to delete additional items. 5. Use the arrows to select and highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

Cancel program
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode. Nevertheless, the program will remain in memory and can be recalled by pressing PROGRAM again.

Insert chapter
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM to display program edit playlist.

2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a chapter before it.
MUTE
O BAC

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

24

CH-

MUTE

O BAC

CH-

O BAC

DI
G

G G G

DVD Player
Set up menu
Audio language
This step will define the default audio language. Choosing an audio language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily.

NOTE
After using AUDIO, DIGITAL, LEVEL or SURR keys on the remote control in DVD/CD function mode, press the DVD/CD or the SHIFT key to use other DVD keys.

EN

NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated as default by each disc will be selected..

General use
1. Press MENU in stop mode to display the set up menu on screen. The menu shows current settings.

1. Refer to General use to open audio language menu.

NOTE
if you press during disc playback, the discs own menu will be displayed.
RD

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

2. Use UP and DOWN arrows to select language and then press OK.

For languages other than options available: 3. Press DOWN to select Other and then press OK.

2. Use arrow buttons to highlight options and press OK to open selected menu.
D IS K

/
MUTE

CH-

/
MUTE

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK OK FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU CLEAR

DI
G

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK on the remote.
/
CHO BAC

3. Press LEFT arrow to go back to the previous menu or press GO BACKDISC to exit the setup menu completely.
DI

MENU

CLEAR

MUTE

IDE GU

1 4

2 5
C

3 6 9
PROGRAM

RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/C H+

O BAC

7
VOL
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

FUNCTION

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

MENU

CLEAR

/
FUNCTION MUTE
RD

CH-

D I SC

OK

1
C

2
C

3
C

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

MENU

CLEAR

IDE GU

1
C

2
C

3
C

OK

DI
G

VOL

25

DVD Player
Subtitle language
This step will define the default subtitle language. Choosing a subtitle language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily. 4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK button on the remote.
IDE GU
MUTE

IDE GU

OK

DM

SHIFT

INFO

FUNCTION

OK

NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated by each disc as default will be selected.

MENU

CLEAR

FUNCTION

1
C

2
C

3
C

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

1. Refer to page 25 General use to open subtitle language menu.

Menu language
This step will define the language of menus and other short messages shown on screen. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open menu language menu.

2. Press UP and DOWN arrow to select language and then press OK.
D IS K

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

SHIFT

SHIFT

INFO

DI

OK OK FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU CLEAR

2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll the selections and select the language and then press OK to return to main menu.
3
C

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

For languages other than options available:


3. Move down and select Other and then press OK.

26

RD

INFO

CH-

O BAC

DI
G

SHIFT

DVD Player
Rating (Parental control)
This step will disable the playing of some DVDs (especially U.S. type) which are not suitable for some audience, e.g. children. Such kind of DVDs is encoded with a specific rating level. If the rating level of the disc is higher than the preset level (to be set in this step), the playing will be prohibited unless the password (see next step) is entered. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the rating menu.

Password Set password


To disable the viewing of rated DVDs, a four-digit password must be selected. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the Set Password menu.

EN

2. Select Rating and then press OK to return to main menu. Ratings highlighted in blue require password.
D IS K

2. Select Set Password and press OK. 3. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

SHIFT

SHIFT

INFO

OK OK FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

The rating systems is based on information encoded on the DVD disc being played, so movies may carry a rating symbol, the disc may or may not contain that rating in its software. In addition to the five standard (MPAA) rating symbols of G (level 2), PG (Parental Guidance, level 4), PG13 (Parental Guidance and 13 years old, level 4), R (Restricted, level 6) and NC17 (from 17 years old, level 7), the DVD will accommodate a total of 8 rating steps, as set by the DVD makers. These additional steps allows for more critical control of program playback for all audiences. Level 8: All DVDs can be played (Factory preset). Level 7 to 2: DVDs for general audiences/ children can be played. Level 1: DVDs for children can be played, DVDs for adults/ general audiences are prohibited.

DI
G

4. Repeat step 2 to confirm password.

27

DVD Player
NOTE
When incorrect password is entered, new password menu appears and you can enter and confirm password again. A lock icon shows on unit display when password is required to view rated discs. Important: keep the password in a safe place or remember it reliably as access to rated discs or rating/ password menus requires the correct password. 4. Use the number buttons to enter new password and then press OK. 5. Repeat the above step to confirm password and return to password menu. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.

Change password
Current password must be entered first to change password. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the password menu.

Clear password
2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.
/
MUTE MENU CLEAR
RD

1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the password menu. 2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK. 3. Move up or down the menu using the UP or DOWN arrows and select Clear Password. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

1
C

2
C

3
C

IDE GU

OK

4
C

5
C

6
FUNCTION

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

MENU

CLEAR

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

1
C

2
C

3
C

3. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to select Change Password and then press OK.
D IS K

K K

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

SHIFT

SHIFT

INFO

OK OK FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

28

DI
G

DI
G

DVD Player
TV aspect
This step selects the TV aspect, wide-screen (16:9) or conventional (4:3). 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the TV aspect menu.

Dynamic range
This step enables Dolby Digital recordings to be played back with full dialogue intelligibility while reducing peak levels and increasing low levels by 1/4 to 1/3. This smooth level compression prevents abrupt loud transitions from disturbing others without the impact of the digital source perceptibly. This function only works with Dolby Digital DVD and in conjunction with Night mode (see p.16): - when dynamic range is off, normal audio range is selected. - when dynamic range is on and Night mode is off, normal audio range is selected. - Dynamic compression is activated only when dynamic range on DVD and night mode is on. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the Dynamic Range menu.

EN

2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select TV aspect and then press OK to return to main menu.
D IS K

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

SHIFT

SHIFT

INFO

OK OK FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

DI
G

If you have a wide-screen (16:9) TV, choose 16:9 Widescreen.

- For 16:9 movie you will get Only PCM data (Stereo, 2ch.) will be output.

- For 4:3 movie you will get

If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, - if you select 4:3 letterbox for 16:9 movie, you will get

- if you select 4:3 Pan Scan for 16:9 movie, you will get (the left and right edges are hidden)

- for 4:3 movie, for both selections, you will get

2. Select Dynamic range on/ off and then press OK to return to main menu.

Digital audio out

29

CD / MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations
Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference. Many common CD creator softwares can make files compatible for the system but do not forget to finalize your disc after creation. This set cannot read DirectCD recordings. In order to get audio CD quality, you need to record your MP3 CD at 128 kbps. You can record up to 256 kbps. Beyond 256 kbps, the unit might not read the CD. Do not combine CD Audio and MP3 tracks onto a CD-R(W) or CD-ROM. The player will only playback CD audio tracks from mixed CD formats.

Loading and playing an audio CD


1. Press STOP/EJECT button on the front panel to open the disc tray. Place disc on the disc tray with the label side facing up. Press STOP/EJECT again to close disc tray.
D I G I TA L

BA

RP

The disc will be read to detect whether an audio CD or MP3 CD has been inserted.

NOTE
If the CD is a MP3 audio CD, reading may take up to 1 minute.

NOTE
ID3 tag (Album, song, artist name) is not supported. If over 400 items (songs/folders) are on the disc, only the first 400 songs can be played. Resume function does not operate in MP3 mode. 2. Playback begins automatically after the disc has been read. An audio CD CD or MP3 icon MP3 will show on the left of the display. 3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE on the remote control to pause playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE again on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback. The CD/MP3 playback function works in a similar way as the features available for DVD . Press SOURCE on the main unit or DVD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source.
OUND

mp3

REPEAT

PROGRAM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

ET +

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

n i v e r s a l
SOURCE SURROUND
VCR 1 ON OFF TV

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

CD

TAPE
/C H+

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

ER PRESET PRESET +

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

30

CD / MP3 Player
4. Press SKIP REVERSE on the main unit or CH- on the remote to return to the previous track. Press SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or CH + on the remote to go to the next track.
SOURCE SURROUND

Repeat
There are 3 repeat options for CD playback. Repeat DISC Repeat Track Standard play (for MP3) REPEAT REPEAT TRACK REPEAT OFF (for audio CD)

EN

mp3
CD
/C H+

TAPE

VOL

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

D IS K

PRESET -

PRESET +

VOL

The corresponding icon will be shown on the top of the display. 1. Press RPT/PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and number 7 / REPEAT repeatedly to toggle among repeat options. When playing an audio CD Repeat can only be activated while playing.

5. Press STOP/EJECT on the main unit or STOP on the remote control to end playback.
D I G I TA L

BAND
INPUT SEEK REVERSE

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

RPT/
RECORD STOP P AUSE

RPT/PGM

TUN

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

TUNE -

TUNE +

u n i v e r s a l
VOL VOL

MENU

CLEAR

1
D IS K
C

2
C

3
C

IDE GU

NOTE
When playback is interrupted, the location at which it stopped will be memorized. Playback will resume at the position it was last stopped. Resume playback does not work on MP3 music.

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE FUNCTION

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

Random Quick scan


1. Press and hold FAST FORWARD or FAST REVERSE on the main unit or FORWARD or REVERSE on the remote to scan through a track quickly during playback. To change speed to 1, 2 or 3 times, press repeatedly during scan. Quick scan does not work on MP3 music.
C C

1. Press and hold BASS/TREBLE on the main unit or press SHIFT and number 8 / RANDOM for random playback.
CLEAR

VOL

VOL

1
C

2
C

3
C

D IS K

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

IDE GU

OK

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

FUNCTION RECORD STOP P AUSE

0
RPT/PGM
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

TUNE -

TUNE +
AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL SURR

NOTE
Random playback does not work on MP3 music.

2. Press PLAY on the main unit or the remote to resume normal playback.
OUND

mp3

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

31

CD / MP3 Player
On- screen banner display for CD playback
Track Intro icon Bookmarks Disc type

Selecting a track
1. Refer to General use to open the track menu. 2. Enter track number. Add 0 in front of single-digit track number (e.g. 9 = 09).
MENU CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

Time display mode

Time indicator

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

General use
1. Press INFO on the remote control to hide and show on- screen banner. (Only audio CD banner)
VOL VOL

NOTE
You must be in playback mode for track selection. Shortcut: enter track number directly using number buttons to select a track during playback.

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

D IS K
G

IntroScan (Only for audio CDs)


2. Use the LEFT / RIGHT arrow keys to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
/
MUTE
RD

IntroScan plays the first few seconds of each track. 1. Refer to General use to open the IntroScan menu. IntroScan will start automatically after you have pressed OK. 2. Press OK again, PLAY or PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit to end IntroScan. The track that you stopped at will be played normally.
OUND

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

D IS
G

mp3

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

3. Press OK to open menu under selected feature.


SET +
O BAC

INPUT SEEK REVERSE

PLAY

ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

MUTE

D
G

/
RD

CH-

SHIFT

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

NOTE
IntroScan ends when all the tracks have been played.

32

CD / MP3 Player
Bookmarks (Audio CDs Only) Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new points but the previous bookmarks will be erased. The bookmark feature allows you to select certain points on the disc where you want to jump to quickly. 9 bookmarks can be selected.

EN

Time display (Audio CDs Only)


1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the time display menu. 2. Press OK repeatedly to switch among "Track Elapsed", "Track Remain" , Disc Elapsed and Disc Remain time during playback. Selected mode shows on banner.
/
CH-

Adding Bookmarks (Audio CDs Only)


1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the bookmark menu.

2. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (green frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the point you want to do so.
DI DI

MUTE

O BAC

IDE GU

DM

SHIFT

INFO

OK

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
R

CH-

FUNCTION

O BAC

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

DM

SHIFT

INFO

MENU

CLEAR

IDE GU

IDE GU

1
OK

OK

FUNCTION

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

1
C

2
C

3
C

Repeat and random features


There are 5 options for this feature. 1. Repeat Track plays one track over repeatedly. 2. Repeat Disc plays the disc you have selected or being played at the moment over repeatedly. 3. Random - plays tracks randomly on one disc. (Audio CD only) 4. Random Repeat Disc - plays tracks randomly and over repeatedly on disc. (Audio CD only) 5. Repeat Off Ends the repeat function.
MENU CLEAR

3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right and then press OK when you reach another point you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

Recalling bookmarks
1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the UP arrow to move the cursor (green frame) to the Go To check line and use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to the bookmarked point you want to recall. 3. Press OK to recall bookmarked point.

VOL

D IS
G

D IS K

MUTE

IDE GU

D IS

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

O BAC

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

SHIFT

D IS

IDE GU

IDE GU

VOL

G G

VOL

1
C

2
C

3
C

/
RD

CH-

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

O BAC

G
SHIFT

INFO

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

FUNCTION

Press SHIFT and 7 / REPEAT for repeat modes.


G
INFO MENU CLEAR

VOL

1
C

2
C

3
C

OK

OK

D IS K

MUTE

FUNCTION

FUNCTION

/
RD

CH-

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

O BAC

G
SHIFT

IDE GU

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

INFO

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

FUNCTION

4. Use the arrow buttons to move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

NOTE
Press Select among the 5 options until the desired one shows on banner.

33

CD / MP3 Player
Program playback Edit program
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9 / PROGRAM on the remote control to display program edit playlist. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional tracks to the program. 5. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK to confirm program playback.

NOTE
I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

RPT/PGM

You can select at maximum 32 items by repeating steps 2 - 3.


TUNE +

TUNE -

VOL

MENU

CLEAR

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

D IS K

O BAC

VOL

1
C

2
C

3
C

Delete Program
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9 / PROGRAM on the remote control to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to select Playlist, then use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight the programmed track you want to delete on the playlist. 3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Delete and then press OK to delete track. 4. Highlight Play (to start program playback) or Done (to return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

G
SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE FUNCTION

0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

Insert track
2. The box under TRACK will be highlighted. Press UP or DOWN arrow buttons or number buttons to select track. Press OK.
D IS K

1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9 / PROGRAM on the remote control to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows to highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a track before it.

/
MUTE
R

CH-

O BAC

DM

SHIFT

MENU

CLEAR

INFO

1
C

2
C

3
C

IDE GU

3. Refer to Edit program to select a track to be inserted. 4. Highlight Insert and then press OK 5. Highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

OK

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

FUNCTION

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

MENU

CLEAR

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

3
D
O BAC

/
MUTE

CH-

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

G
FUNCTION

Cancel program
CLEAR

MENU

1
C

2
C

3
C

3. Add will be highlighted automatically after track is selected. Press OK to add selected track onto playlist.

Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode. Nevertheless, the program will remain in memory and can be recalled by pressing PROGRAM again.

34

CD / MP3 Player
On- screen display for MP3 playback
Refer to General Use on page 32 for basic operations.

Folder mode
1. Use the arrow buttons on the remote to select the folder you wish to play.
/
MUTE
CH-

EN

Normal Play File mode


1. Use the UP or DOWN arrow buttons on the remote to select the file you wish to begin playing.
/
MUTE
RD

O BAC

IDE GU

M RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

CH-

O BAC

SHIFT

INFO

IDE GU

OK

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

DI

2. Press OK to enter the folder and PLAY when in stop mode or OK when currently playing to begin playback of all the files in the folder.
OUND

mp3

DI
G

2. Press PLAY on the main unit or on the remote control to start playback. If you are currently playing, then press OK button to select a different MP3 to play. All the files or folders will be played starting with the one you have selected.
OUND

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

mp3

Playback stops when all files have been played.


C C

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

3. To exit a folder, use the arrow buttons to select the RETURN arrow.

SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

Playback stops when all files have been played.

35

CD / MP3 Player
Program Play
1. In stop mode, Press RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM on the remote to access the program display. The PROG. icon will show on the display. 5. Press STOP or RPT / PGM on the main unit or STOP or SHIFT 9/PROGRAM to end program playback.
D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

RPT/PGM
D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

RPT/PGM TUNE -

TUNE D I G I TA L

TUNE +

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

1
VOL

2
C

3
C

RPT/PGM

TUNE -

TUNE +

/
MUTE

CH-

D IS K

O BAC

VOL

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

G
SHIFT

IDE GU

M RD

INFO

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

VOL

VOL

1
C

2
C

3
C

OK

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

D IS K

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

FUNCTION

O BAC

G
SHIFT

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

INFO

IDE GU

0
OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

FUNCTION

6. To play program again, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9/PROGRAM while in stop mode to reactivate program playback. Press PLAY to begin.

2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows on the remote to select the folder on the left that you wish to add to the program list. 3. Press OK to move the file or folder to the right programming list.
D IS

Delete a specific File or Folder from Program List


1. In stop mode, use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows to select program list, then use the UP or DOWN arrows to select file to be deleted and press CLEAR to delete.
D
MUTE
O BAC

MUTE

O BAC

MUTE

O BAC

IDE GU

/
RD

CH-

/
RD

CH-

D IS

RD

SHIFT

IDE GU

CH-

INFO

OK

G
SHIFT

INFO

SHIFT

INFO

OK

FUNCTION

IDE GU

IDE GU

OK

OK MENU

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

1
FUNCTION FUNCTION CLEAR
C

2
C

3
C

1
MENU CLEAR MENU CLEAR
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

1
C

2
C

3
C

Delete All
1. In stop mode, use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows to select ALL CLEAR icon and press OK to clear all.
DI

/
MUTE
RD

CH-

MUTE

O BAC

O BAC

INFO

IDE GU

IDE GU

SHIFT

RD

SHIFT

INFO

OK OK FUNCTION FUNCTION MENU CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1 1
C

2
C

3
C

2
C

3
C

4. Once all the files or folders have been selected, Press PLAY to being program playback.
OUND

mp3

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

36

Radio
Operating the Radio
The receiver has a built-in tuner that allows for AM/FM radio function. 5. Tune the stations by pressing TUNING + or - on the main unit or FAST FORWARD or FAST REVERSE on the remote control repeatedly until the desired station is found. Alternatively, you can press and hold the respective buttons for about one second to activate the automatic SEARCH function. In this mode the receiver will automatically tune frequencies until it finds a station
7
TA L

EN

Manual tuning
1. Connect the FM and AM antenna accordingly (see "Connecting the Antenna" on page 5 section for details) 2. Press POWER on the main unit.

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE
REPEAT

0
RPT/PGM
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

TUNE -

TUNE +
AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL SURR

POWER PR
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

3. Press SOURCE until tuner mode is selected or press AM/FM on the remote control.

6. Repeat steps 5 to tune another radio station.

SOURCE

SURROUND

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

Select sound effect if needed by pressing SURROUND or SURR/FRAME sound (see "Advance sound section" on page 15 and 16 for details)
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT FMS FORWARD

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

WER PRESET PRESET +

CD
/C H+

TAPE

SOURCE

SURROUND

mp3

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

4. To select band, press the BAND/APP on the main unit or AM/FM button on the remote again to toggle between AM/FM mode. When an FM station broadcast Stereo sound, ST is displayed.

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

u n i v e r s a l
PRESET PRESET +

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE
DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE

NOTE
1. If there is interference, modify the location of the antenna until the optimal sound is heard. TV and other electronic devices could be the cause of interferences so try to position the antenna away from them. 2. Weak signal can affect the "auto Search function". Adjust the antenna for better reception for more efficient search.

RPT/PGM
CD
/C H+

TAPE

TUNE -

TUNE +
VO

37

Radio
Storing radio stations:
The receiver can store up to 30 radio stations in memory. You can enter every single radio station yourself or the receiver can store all available radio station automatically in an ascending order. 3. Press MENU on the remote control. "PROG" will appear on the display
ID GU E

RDMP

INFORDS

MENU

TY

OK
FUNCTION

CLEAR

Automatic preset storing :


1. Press BAND/APP on the main unit or AM/FM repeatedly on the remote control to select the FM band.
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

1 4

2 5

3 6

LS LFE RS

I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

VCR 1

ON OFF

TV

RPT/PGM

DVD

VCR 2

AMFM SATCABLE

CD

TAPE
/C H+

TUNE -

TUNE +

4. While the word "PROG " is still flashing, input your desired preset number (1-30) using the numeric keys on the remote control to store the radio station.
MENU CLEAR

2
C

3
C

2- Press and hold BAND/APP/RPT/PGM for 3 seconds to start automatic preset programming. AUTO will be flashing during the automatic storing process.

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

D I G I TA L

BAND/APP

BASS/TREBLE

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
RPT/PGM
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

TUNE -

TUNE +

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3 D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

LS LFE RS

Radio frequencies will be browsed and radio stations stored automatically. When all available radio stations are stored or if all 30 memory locations are full, the auto preset will stop.

Retrieving preset stations


1. Press SOURCE on the unit or AM/FM on the remote control to enter tuner mode 2. Press PRESET + or PRESET - on the unit or CH+ or CH on the remote control to tune up or down preset channels.
SOURCE SURROUND

NOTE
Weak signal can affect the "Automatic Preset Storing function" efficiency. Adjust the antenna for the best reception for more efficient search.

mp
CD
/C H+

TAPE

VOL

/
MUTE
R

CH-

O BAC

DM

SHIFT

INFO

Manual preset
1. Select the band by pressing AM/FM repeatedly 2. Tune to a radio station (see "Manual tuning" on page 37 above for details)

38

D IS K
G

PRESET -

PRESET +

VOL

Troubleshooting Tips
Power
No power ?
Correctly connect the AC Power Cord to an AC Outlet.

Remote control
EN The remote control does not work ?
Load the batteries with their polarities (+ and ) aligned correctly. Batteries are low. Replace with new ones. Point the remote control to the front of the player. Operate the remote control within an 26 ft range from the player. Remove any obstacles between the remote control and the red LED on the player.

Power is switching off automatically ?


If the player is not used, i.e. no key pressed for 30 minutes, it automatically switches to standby (Auto Power Off). Press the SOURCE key to switch the player on again.

The keys do not activate the functions they control (unit and / or remote control).
Set the STANDBY key to OFF (light on) and back to ON again. Alternatively, turn off the power, disconnect the power plug and then re-connect it (The player may not be operating properly due to lightning, static electricity or some other external factors). If keys still do not activate the functions they control even when the above mentioned corrective actions are taken, contact your RCA retailer.

The invalid icon appears on-screen ?


When invalid icon appears on-screen, it indicates that you have pressed the wrong key, because : 1. The DVDs does not allow it. 2. The DVD's does not propose this option /e.g., angles. 3. The function is not available on that part of the disc. 4. You have requested a title or chapter number or search time that is not available.

Video and audio


There is no picture ?
Turn on the TV set. Check connections. Make the correct input selection on the TV set.

TV or video recorder cannot be operated with the remote control.


Not all models can be operated with the supplied universal remote control.

No picture or the picture shown is not that of the DVD player.


Switch off the other video device connected to the AV jack of the player.

The picture is distorted or shakes during search, forward or reverse.


Search, forward or reverse playback generates a slight distortion, but this is not a malfunction.

Playback
Playback does not start when the PLAY key is pressed ?
Make sure that the disc (single sided) is loaded correctly with the title label facing up. Make sure you are in the proper source mode.

There is no sound or it can hardly be heard ?


Make sure the speakers are connected. Make sure the MUTE button is not on. Check connections. Make the correct audio input selection and volume adjustment on the TV set or hifi system (e.g. AV selector). There is no sound during a pause (still picture), still picture advance, or slow playback. Disc is defaulted to DTS.

Playback stops immediately after the PLAY key is pressed ?


This player can play DVDs, Video CDs and Audio and MP3 CDs only, check that your disc corresponds to one of these formats. If the disc is dirty, wipe it with a soft and clean cloth. Condensation occurred inside the player. Leave it at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours.

No "Surround" sound ?
Check speaker configuration in the menu.

Noise interference appears on the TV, while watching a TV program and the DVD player is left on ?
Turn off DVD player. The TV is too close to the audio system.

Disc cannot be played.


Wipe the disc clean. Use a RCA lens cleaner. The disc's region No. differs from your player's region No.

Volume level differences playing different disc types (DVDs, audio / video CDs).
Adjust the master volume .

Search forward & reverse playback does not work ?


Some DVDs have segments where search forward & reverse playback functions do not work.

No audio from one channel.


Check the speaker level setting. Check the speaker wire or cable connections.

39

Troubleshooting Tips
Subtitle, language, camera angle etc.
Disc menu operation and contents may differ from disc to disc. Please refer to the instructions accompanying the disc.

Equipment Specifications RTDVD1:


AMPLIFIER SECTION:
All 5 channels: RTDVD1: each 32W at 6 ohm. 010% THD @1 kHz Subwoofer channel: 40w at 6 Muting Attenuation: 65dB Frequency Response: 40Hz to 20kHz +/-3dB Signal to Noise Ratio: 65dB (Bypass mode)

There are no subtitles ?


Check that the subtitle is recorded on the disc. Subtitles disappear from the TV screen. See page 21 to display subtitles.

Subtitle (or language) setting cannot be changed ?


The disc being played has been recorded in only one language. Depending on the type of DVD, some segments limit language selection.

VIDEO SECTION:
Input ( Sensitivity/ Impedance ):1Vp-p/ 75ohm Output (Level/ Impedance): 1Vp-p/ 75 ohm Frequency Response: 10Hz to 6MHz at +/- 3dB Signal to noise ratio: 40dB Crosstalk @3.58MHz: 40dB

You have forgotten your password to change the rating level ?


Restore to Factory settings. (page 9)

AM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 80Hz 2kHz +/-6dB Usable Sensitivity: 800uV/m @ S/N 20dB Signal to Noise: 38dB Image Ratio: 27dB @ 1000kHz IF Rejection: 35dB

The picture is not displayed in the correct format on the TV (4 x 3 or 16 x 9)


According to your TV, make the correct "TV Screen" setting in the set-up menu (page 29).

The camera angle cannot be changed with the angle button ?


This function does not work when a DVD has not been recorded with a multi-camera angle system. Some DVDs use a multi-camera angle system only in certain portions of the DVD.

FM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 40Hz 15kHz +/-3dB Quieting: 24dBu Signal to Noise: 60dB(stereo) / 65dB(mono) Image Ratio: 40dB IF Rejection: 50dB

The menu language is not the one you want ?


The menu language for your player has not been set during set-up. Your preferred menu language on a DVD disc (if available) has not been set during set up.

Audio (spoken) and / or subtitle language is not the one selected during the initial player set-up ?
If the audio or subtitle language is not available on the DVD disc, the language selected during initial player set-up will not be heard or seen. The disc's priority language (default language) is selected automatically. If you want another language, press menu during playback, if the disc has its own language selection menu (Refer to page 21).

Radio
STEREO indicator is off.
Adjust the antenna.

The signal is Mono. Severe hum or noise.


The signal is too weak. Connect an external antenna.

40

Care and Maintenance


Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.

Safety precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This player uses a laser to read the data on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. Also, to keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses.

Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.

EN

The player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician. Never move the player during playback. Never put more than one discs on a tray or put a disc slipping out of the guide area.

Handling discs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold discs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. Discs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs.
T
son Digita hom

V id e o D i s c

Cleaning discs
Dirty discs can cause poor sound and visual quality. Always keep discs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. Never wipe the disc in a circular motion since circular scratches are likely to occur and could cause noise during playback. If a disc becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on discs. Also, never clean discs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface

Headset safety
Do not play your headset at a high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air type designed to let you hear outside sounds, dont turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.

Dont infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia Inc.

Disc lens care


When your disc lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound and visual quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a disc lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound and visual quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the disc lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.

Important battery information


Remove the batteries to avoid leakage if you do not use your remote control for more than one month. Discard leaky batteries immediately as leaking batteries may cause skin burns or other personal injuries. Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to provincial and local regulations. Any battery may leak electrolyte if mixed with a different battery type, if inserted incorrectly, if all batteries are not replaced at the same time, if disposed of in fire, or if an attempt is made to charge a battery not intended to be recharged.

41

Remote Codes
CABLE CODES
ABC ANTRONIX ARCHER CABLETENNA CABLEVIEW CENTURY CITIZEN COLOUR VOICE COMTRONICS CONTEC EASTERN GARRARD GC ELECTRONICS GEMINI GENERAL INSTRUMENT HAMLIN HITACHI HYTEX JASCO JERROLD MAGNAVOX MEMOREX MOVIE TIME NSC OAK PANASONIC PARAGON PHILIPS PIONEER PULSAR RCA REALISTIC REGAL REGENCY REMBRANDT RUNCO SAMSUNG SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA SIGNAL SIGNATURE SL MARX SPRUCER STARCOM STARGATE STARQUEST TANDY TELEVIEW TOCOM TOSHIBA TUSA TV86 UNIKA UNITED ARTISTS UNITED CABLE UNIVERSAL VIDEOWAY VIEWSTAR ZENITH 5002, 5008, 5008, 5008 5008 5011 5011 5012, 5014, 5016 5017 5011 5009 5018, 5003 5020, 5003 5002 5011 5003, 5024, 5025 5026 5002, 5002, 5002, 5048, 5026 5011, 5030, 5033, 5026 5047, 5009, 5022, 5017 5003 5026 5014, 5006, 5014, 5003 5014 5052 5007, 5014, 5018 5040 5014 5004, 5026 5018 5027 5008, 5002 5053 5008, 5044 5015, 5026, 5003, 5004, 5005, 5006, 5009, 5053 5009 5009, 5010, 5011

VCR CODES
ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 2113 AMERICAN HIGH ASHA AUDIO DYNAMICS AUDIOVOX BELL & HOWELL BEAUMARK BROKSONIC CALIX CANDLE CANON CAPEHART CARVER CCE CITIZEN COLORTYME COLT CRAIG CURTIS-MATHES CYBERNEX DAEWOO DAYTRON DBX DIMENSIA DYNATECH ELECTROHOME ELECTROPHONIC EMERSON 2131 2026 2027 2002, 2026 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2111, 2112, 2021 2013 2009, 2014 2011 2013 2012, 2014 2013, 2018, 2021, 2020, 2062 2027, 2013, 2018, 2009 2061 2013, 2000, 2018, 2013 2015, 2027, 2110 2009, 2000 2002, 2014, 2014 2002, 2026, 2029, 2037, 2038, 2047, 2065, 2011, 2118 2021, 2002, 2026 2000, 2120 2009, 2026 2026 2009 2061 2011 2002, 2111, 2023 2021 2021 2009, 2021, 2059, 2055, 2009, 2111, 2009, 2058, 2061 2014, 2002, 2061 2014 2021, 2108, 2013 2009, 2021, 2014 2021 2021

5013 5015

2010

2025 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019 2022, 2114 2110 2061 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019, 2027

5019, 5049 5021, 5022, 5035, 5045

5005, 5007, 5018, 5023, 5046, 5053

5027, 5028 5027, 5028 5016, 5029 5052 5012, 5013, 5019, 5025, 5031, 5032 5034 5049, 5052 5049 5035

2014, 2023, 2061 2002, 2009, 2013, 2016, 2021, 2022, 2024, 2115 2017, 2019, 2025, 2026, 2028, 2110 2010 2026 2029 2012, 2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2025, 2030, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2036, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2044, 2045, 2105, 2113, 2116, 2117, 2130 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2119 2026 2001, 2013, 2021, 2022, 2053, 2115, 2014, 2018, 2054, 2121

5034 5036, 5037, 5038 5018

FISHER 5018, 5053 5018 FUJI FUNAI GARRARD GE GOLDSTAR GRADIENTE HARLEY DAVIDSON HARMAN KARDON HARWOOD HEADQUARTER HITACHI HI-Q INSTANT REPLAY JCI JC PENNEY

5023, 5041

5009, 5011

5009, 5010, 5011 5025, 5027, 5040 5050, 5051

2055, 2056, 2057, 2107, 2120, 2122

JENSEN JVC KENWOOD KLH KODAK LLOYD LOGIK LXI MAGNAVOX MAGNIN MARANTZ MARTA MASUSHITA MEI

2010, 2022, 2060, 2056, 2010, 2123 2010, 2111, 2021 2026

2011, 2055, 2107, 2111 2011,

2013, 2014, 2056, 2058, 2118 2018, 2058,

2011, 2016, 2018, 2123

2022, 2062, 2063, 2104, 2124 2010, 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2062, 2064

42

Remote Codes
MEMOREX MGA MGN TECHNOLOGY MIDLAND MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 2002, 2104, 2029, 2013 2053 2055, 2029, 2070, 2123 2075, 2021, 2002, 2002, 2009, 2076, 2014 2013 2021 2014, 2096 2035 2021, 2016, 2018 2021, 2021, 2014 2010, 2016, 2000, 2061 2104 2011 2011 2021, 2000, 2082, 2089, 2002, 2026, 2014 2014 2128 2104 2005, 2104, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2093, 2011, 2051, 2002, 2004, 2013 2002, 2021, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2124 2002, 2002, 2014 2058, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2013, 2015, 2013, 2013 2009, 2010 2009, 2013 2002, 2029, 2103, 2021, 2009, 2004, 2011, 2013, 2014, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2131 2065, 2113

TV CODES
ABEX ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AKAI ALLERON AMTRON ANAM NATIONAL AOC AUDIOVOX BELCOR BELL & HOWELL BRADFORD BROKWOOD CANDLE CAPEHART CELEBRITY CENTURION CITIZEN CLAIRTONE COLORTYME CONCERTO CONTEC/CONY CRAIG CROWN CURTIS MATHES CXC DAEWOO DAYTRON DIMENSIA DUMONT DYNATECH ELECTROBAND ELECTROHOME EMERSON 1172 1001, 1174 1016 1002 1046 1038 1003, 1004, 1038 1004 1001, 1038 1004 1004, 1175 1002 1009 1004, 1174, 1176 1004, 1004, 1012, 1038 1038, 1000, 1038 1004, 1171 1004, 1000 1004, 1178 1002, 1003, 1004, 1025, 1031, 1038, 1047, 1179, 1004, 1048, 1046 1038, 1038 1000, 1055, 1181 1004, 1004, 1058, 1038, 1004, 1038 1004, 1135, 1142, 1179 1038 1062 1174 1062 1002 1000, 1054, 1128, 1004, 1012, 1089, 1173

EN

2056, 2107 2055, 2056, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2069, 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074, 2106, 2113, 2131 2131 2013, 2013, 2010, 2078,

MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH NEC NIKKO NOBLEX OLYMPUS OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PENTAX PENTEX RESEARCH PHILCO PHILIPS PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PROSCAN PROTEC PULSAR QUARTER QUARTZ QUASAR RCA

1038 1005, 1006, 1007, 1175, 1176

2026 2016, 2026, 2053, 2061 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2064, 2079, 2111, 2123

1083, 1162

1006, 1008, 1174

2131

2022, 2109, 2125, 2126, 2127 2055, 2056, 2107, 2120 2022, 2062, 2063 2062, 2096, 2124 2055, 2080, 2081, 2123 2017, 2019, 2110 2001

1006, 1008, 1016, 1038, 1105, 1171, 1177 1006 1006 1013, 1014, 1038, 1176 1171 1004, 1006, 1015, 1105, 1162, 1171 1005,1006, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1127, 1006, 1171 1151 1176 1004, 1006, 1026, 1032, 1039, 1123, 1191 1006 1049, 1046 1003, 1004, 1006, 1022, 1052, 1054, 1087, 1164, 1165, 1166, 1167, 1168, 1151 1005, 1006, 1012, 1019, 1056, 1057, 1155, 1156, 1171, 1172 1046, 1171 1006 1006, 1012, 1013, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1136, 1137, 1138, 1139, 1140, 1141, 1143, 1144, 1145, 1146, 1148, 1150,

RADIOSHACK/REALISTIC RADIX RANDEX RICOH RUNCO SAMSUNG SANKY SANSUI SANYO SCOTT SEARS SHARP SHINTOM SHOGUN SIGNATURE SINGER SONY STS SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC TANDY TASHIKO TATUNG TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVSION UNITECH VECTOR RESEARCH VICTOR VIDEO CONCEPTS VIDEOSONIC WARDS

2022, 2001, 2083, 2090, 2011, 2029,

2125 2003, 2084, 2091, 2013, 2049,

2013, 2085, 2107, 2014, 2050,

2021, 2086, 2115, 2021, 2096,

2055, 2087, 2120, 2022, 2131

2056, 2088, 2125 2023,

1006, 1012, 1027, 1033, 1041, 1124,

1019, 1014, 1028, 1034, 1042, 1162,

1022 1023, 1029, 1035, 1043, 1171,

1024, 1030, 1036, 1037, 1044, 1046, 1176, 1177,

2013, 2131 2092, 2013, 2015, 2116 2014, 2055, 2017, 2056,

2015, 2033, 2053, 2112 2111, 2123 2023 2025, 2032, 2035, 2038, 2065, 2021, 2056, 2029, 2061, 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2107, 2118 2094, 2095, 2096, 2131 2098

ENVISION FISHER FUJITSO FUNAI FUTURETEC GE

1050, 1051, 1162, 1180

GIBRALTER GOLDSTAR GRUNDY HALLMARK HARVARD HITACHI

2131 2061, 2128 2004, 2098, 2099, 2119, 2128 2107 2021, 2022, 2026, 2062, 2063, 2065, 2026 2011 2111 2026, 2109 2014, 2024, 2049, 2014

2058, 2085, 2111 2021, 2026, 2100, 2129 2047 2051, 2055, 2065, 2093, 2116

IMA INFINITY JANEIL JBL JCB JC PENNY

JENSEN JVC

2010, 2015, 2016 2010, 2015, 2016, 2113 2013, 2055, 2107, 2026, 2010, 2098, 2014, 2056, 2116, 2061 2011, 2104, 2015, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2061, 2096, 2101, 2102, 2131 2018, 2058, 2111 2119, 2128

1004, 1058, 1171, 1006 1013, 1157,

1005, 1006, 1008, 1022, 1052, 1063, 1064, 1072, 1087, 1105, 1172, 1181 1054, 1060, 1065, 1066, 1067, 1158, 1159, 1182

XR-1000 YAMAHA ZENITH

43

Remote Codes
KAWASHO KAYPANI KENWOOD KLOSS NOVABEAM KTV LOEWE LOGIK LUXMAN LXI MAGNAVOX 1002, 1175 1004, 1068, 1038, 1062 1083 1004, 1000, 1162, 1004, 1074, 1131, 1083 1062 1004, 1006, 1176 1001, 1004, 1080, 1054, 1052 1004, 1080, 1083 1003, 1004, 1038, 1084 1006, 1003, 1006, 1016 1038 1185 1095, 1035, 1003, 1003, 1062, 1184 1003, 1069, 1089 1004, 1004, 1004, 1105 1054 1000, 1004, 1151 1004 1003, 1000, 1162, 1000, 1096, 1129, 1176 1151 1004, 1004, 1105, 1171 1191 1004, 1162, 1006 1004, 1000, 1049, 1110, 1004, 1113, 1004 1001, 1004, 1006 1006, 1019 1069, 1174, 1183 1070, 1171, 1176, 1177 SIMPSON SONIC SONY SOUNDESIGN SQUAREVIEW SSS STARLITE SUPRE-MACY SUPREME SYLVANIA 1008 1176 1002 1004, 1189 1004, 1038 1174 1002 1004, 1074, 1183, 1033, 1173 1003, 1054 1004, 1004, 1038, 1171 1117 1004, 1049, 1118, 1171 1052, 1066, 1004, 1174 1000, 1033, 1076, 1184 1004, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1038, 1046 1038

1006 1006, 1181 1006, 1075, 1132,

1049, 1062, 1071, 1072, 1073, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1089, 1130, 1133, 1134, 1183, 1184

MAJESTIC MARANTS MARANTZ MEGATRON MEI MEMOREX MGA MIDLAND MINUTZ MITSUBISHI MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH MULTIVISION NAD NEC NIKKO NTC ONWA OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PHILCO

1006, 1062, 1078 1059 1006, 1082, 1083, 1162 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1082 1151, 1171, 1172, 1181 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1081, 1082, 1082, 1083, 1125 1173 1005, 1006, 1105, 1176, 1178 1178 1071, 1072, 1185 1004, 1005, 1006, 1089 1016

SYMPHONIC TANDY TATUNG TECHNICS TECHWOOD TEKNIKA

1006, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1116, 1161, 1184 1038, 1189 1178 1006, 1054 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1013, 1016, 1046, 1076, 1082, 1083, 1105, 1170,

TELECAPTION TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVISION UNIVERSAL VICTOR VIDTECH VIKING WARDS

1006 1071, 1072, 1089, 1105, 1109, 1117, 1160, 1162 1087 1182 1005, 1006 1001, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1019, 1024, 1046, 1052, 1062, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1083, 1087, 1088, 1095, 1119, 1120, 1005, 1006, 1019 1083, 1151, 1152, 1153, 1154

YAMAHA ZENITH 1173 1191 1054, 1062, 1170 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1068, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1077, 1183, 1004, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1171 1006, 1090, 1091, 1092, 1179, 1185 1005, 1006, 1016, 1171

Satellite Receivers
CHAPPARAL 5056, DRAKE 5058, GE SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, GENERAL INSTRUMENTS 5060, PANASONIC SATELLITE RECEIVER 5075 PRIMESTAR DBS 5076 PROSCAN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, RCA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, REALISTIC 5063 SONY SATELLITE RECEIVER 5072 STS1 5064 STS2 5065 STS3 5066 STS4 5067 TOSHIBA 5068 TOSHIBA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5073 UNIDEN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5069 5057 5059 5001 5061, 5062

PHILIPS

PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PRICE CLUB PRISM PROSCAN PROTON PULSAR PULSER QUASAR RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC RCA

1181 1006, 1012, 1093, 1175

5001 5001

1054, 1004, 1171, 1003, 1098, 1179,

1070, 1006, 1172 1004, 1099, 1181,

1094 1012, 1038, 1049, 1095, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1019, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1103, 1187, 1188, 1190

RHAPSODY RUNCO SAMPO SAMSUNG SAMSUX SANSUI SANYO SCOTCH SCOTT SEARS

1006, 1171, 1172, 1175 1005, 1006, 1012, 1015, 1019, 1104, 1106, 1171, 1172

Audio (RCA/Dimensia only)


AM/FM AUX PHONO CD TAPE 4003 4004 4005 4007 4006

1048, 1049, 1050, 1080, 1107, 1108, 1169, 1180, 1189 1006, 1004, 1050, 1162, 1006, 1122, 1012, 1006, 1051, 1180, 1012, 1171, 1024, 1013, 1066, 1181, 1029, 1173 1035, 1019, 1071, 1189 1095, 1038, 1046 1046, 1048, 1072, 1109, 1111, 1112,

Laser disc Players


PROSCAN RCA 2001 2001

SHARP SHOGUN SIGNATURE

1083, 1115

44

Language Codes
For audio track and subtitle selection, see p.25,26. Abkhazian Afar Afrikaans Albanian Amehanie Arabic Armenian Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Basque Bengali, Bangla Bhutani Bihari Bislama Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Cambodian Catalan Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Dutch English Esperanto Estonian Faeroese Fiji Finnish French Frisian Galiean Georgian German Greek Greenland Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiaic Irish Italian Japanese Javanese Kannada 6566 6566 6570 8381 6577 6582 7289 6583 6588 6590 6665 6985 6678 6890 6672 6673 6682 6671 7789 6669 7577 6765 9072 6779 7282 6783 6865 7876 6978 6979 6984 7079 7074 7073 7082 7089 7176 7565 6869 6976 7576 7178 7185 7265 7387 7273 7285 7383 7378 7365 7369 7375 7165 7384 7465 7487 7578 Kashmiri Kazakh Kanyarwanda Kirghiz Kirundi Korean Kurdish Laothian Latin Latvian, Leltish Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Malay Malayalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Naru Nepali Norwegian Occitan Oriya Oroma (Atan) Punjabi Pashto, Pushao Persian Polish Portuguese Quechua Ahaero- Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sangbo Sanskrit Sents Gaelic Serbian Servo-Croatian Sesotho Setswana Sindhi Singhalese Siswati Slovak Slovenian Somali Spanish Sudanese Swahili Swedish Tagalog Tajik Tamil 7583 7575 8287 7589 8278 7579 7585 7679 7665 7684 7678 7684 7775 7771 7783 7776 7784 7773 7782 7779 7778 7865 7869 7879 7967 7982 7977 8065 8083 7065 8075 8084 8185 8277 8279 8285 8377 8371 8365 7168 8382 8372 8384 8478 8368 8373 8383 8375 8376 8379 6983 8385 8387 8386 8476 8471 8465 Tatar Telugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya Tonga Tsonga Turkish Turkmen Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Welsh Wolaf Xhosa Yiddish Yoruba Zulu 8484 8469 8472 6679 8473 8479 8483 8482 8475 8487 8575 8582 8590 8673 8679 6789 8779 8872 7473 8979 9085

EN

45

Limited Warrranty (US)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

How State Law relates to warranty:


Some states do not allow the exclusion nor limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

If you purchased your unit outside the United States:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

46

Limited Warranty (Canada)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

EN

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

How Provincial Laws relates to warranty:


This warranty gives you specific legal rights which are in addition to statutory warranties that may vary from Province to Province.

If you purchased your unit outside Canada:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside Canada. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

47

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
DRAWER MOTOR

+ -

CAROUSEL MOTOR

+ -

P026
1 2 1

CAROUSEL MOTOR BOARD


2 3

P027
4

DRAWER1 BOARD
1

P006
2

CDM5B DRIVER BOARD

N027

P024

N006

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P301 1

N705

4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4

P705

GAME_IN JACK

KEY BOARD
P706

TAPE DECK

N706

5 6 7 8 9

N101
1 2

N102
2

P304
2

P303
2 3

N701

X'MER BOARD

AM ANT JACK NJ501 N L N L


1

N881B
2 3 4 5

JW1 JW2 JW3

+ -

+ R MAIN SPEAKER

MAIN TRANSFORMER AC CORD

PAGE 9-7

N001

N501

P501

POWER AMP BOARD

10

11

P701

P401

P101

12

N301

N304

N303

13

MAIN BOARD

FOR RS2620
2 1

P001

PAGE 9-7

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
DRAWER MOTOR

+ -

CAROUSEL MOTOR

+ -

P026
1 2 1

CAROUSEL MOTOR BOARD


2 3

P027
4

DRAWER1 BOARD
1

P006
2

CDM5B DRIVER BOARD

N027

P024

N006

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P301 1

N705

4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4

P705

GAME_IN JACK

KEY BOARD
P706

TAPE DECK

N706

5 6 7 8 9

N101
1 2

N102
2

P304
2

P303
2 3

N701

X'MER BOARD

POWER AMP BOARD

10

11

P701

P401

P101

12

N301

N304

N303

13

MAIN BOARD

FOR RS2620

AM ANT JACK NJ501 N L N L


1

N881B
2 3 4 5

JW1 JW2 JW3

+ -

+ R MAIN SPEAKER

N001

N501

P501

P001

P601A
2 3

P601

MAIN TRANSFORMER AC CORD

HEADPHONE BOARD

PAGE 9-5

PAGE 9-5

Interconnect Drawing

AMP BOARD SUB WOOFER

11

14

CP402

CP401

1 CN611

VIDEO PCB
NC4 11 CP550

TUNER BOARD
1 NC2A 11

1 14

1 NW02 8 NW01 N758 P702 4 1 1 NW03 7 2 1 1 NC6 15 1 3 1 NC757 PW02 8 1 PW01 4 1 6 1

10

1 CP2

DSP BOARD
1

CP551

11

MAIN BOARD

NC3 1 CP1 1 2 PC14 1 NC13

19

NC7A

CP756 6 1

19

15

PC6

CN3 1 10

AMP FILTER BOARD


W058 1 3

CN205 1 1 CN203 10

AUDIO AMP BOARD

POWER SUPPLY
CP751 1 4

SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY

NC5

10 1 CP205

NC8

NC7

2 CN204

13 1 NC11 19 19 W048 1 1

CN201

CN202

NC10B2

NC12

CN2

1 2

DVD DRIVE CONTROLER

1 2 1

FAN BOARD
2 1

8 1

4 1

MCU BOARD

11 W038 1 1 1

FAN
3 3

POWER SWITCH
2 1 NC20A CN434 8 1

DVD DRIVE

NC10B1

1 NC9 NC9

21

NC15B 1

N10B1 21 1 1

N10B2 11

NC20B

1 2

FPA BOARD

NC11B 1

Interconnect Drawing

AMP BOARD SUB WOOFER

11

14

CP402

CP401

1 CN611

VIDEO PCB
NC4 11 CP550

TUNER BOARD
1 NC2A 11

1 14

1 NW02 8 NW01 N758 P702 4 1 1 NW03 7 2 1 1 NC6 15 1 3 1 NC757 PW02 8 1 PW01 4 1 6 1

10

1 CP2

DSP BOARD
1

CP551

11

MAIN BOARD

NC3 1 CP1 1 2 PC14 1 NC13

19

NC7A

CP756 6 1

19

15

PC6

CN3 1 10

AMP FILTER BOARD


W058 1 3

CN205 1 1 CN203 10

AUDIO AMP BOARD

POWER SUPPLY
CP751 1 4

SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY

NC5

10 1 CP205

NC8

NC7

2 CN204

13 1 NC11 19 19 W048 1 1

CN201

CN202

NC10B2

NC12

CN2

1 2

DVD DRIVE CONTROLER

1 2 1

FAN BOARD
2 1

8 1

4 1

MCU BOARD

11 W038 1 1 1

FAN
3 3

POWER SWITCH
2 1 NC20A CN434 8 1

DVD DRIVE

NC10B1

1 NC9 NC9

21

NC15B 1

N10B1 21 1 1

N10B2 11

NC20B

1 2

FPA BOARD

NC11B 1

www.fairchildsemi.com

KA278R33

Low Dropout Voltage Regulator

Features
2A / 3.3V Output low dropout voltage regulator TO220 Full-Mold package (4PIN) Overcurrent protection, Thermal shutdown Overvoltage protection, Short-Circuit protection With output disable function

Description
The KA278R33 is a low-dropout voltage regulator suitable for various electronic equipments. It provides constant voltage power source with TO-220 4 lead full mold package. Dropout voltage of KA278R33 is below 0.5V in full rated current(2A). This regulator has various function such as peak current protection, thermal shut down, overvoltage protection and output disable function.

TO-220F-4L

1. Vin 2. Vo 3. GND 4. Vdis

Internal Block Diagram


Vin 1 Q1 2 Vo

THERMAL SHUTDOWN

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

BANDGAP REFERENCE

R1

SOA PROTECTION HIGH / LOW Vdis 4 + OUTPUT ON / OFF

1.4V

SHORT-CIRCUIT SHORTCIRCUIT
PROTECTION

R2

3 GND

Rev.1.0.1
2001 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation

www.fairchildsemi.com

KA278R33

Low Dropout Voltage Regulator

Features
2A / 3.3V Output low dropout voltage regulator TO220 Full-Mold package (4PIN) Overcurrent protection, Thermal shutdown Overvoltage protection, Short-Circuit protection With output disable function

Description
The KA278R33 is a low-dropout voltage regulator suitable for various electronic equipments. It provides constant voltage power source with TO-220 4 lead full mold package. Dropout voltage of KA278R33 is below 0.5V in full rated current(2A). This regulator has various function such as peak current protection, thermal shut down, overvoltage protection and output disable function.

TO-220F-4L

1. Vin 2. Vo 3. GND 4. Vdis

Internal Block Diagram


Vin 1 Q1 2 Vo

THERMAL SHUTDOWN

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

BANDGAP REFERENCE

R1

SOA PROTECTION HIGH / LOW Vdis 4 + OUTPUT ON / OFF

1.4V

SHORT-CIRCUIT SHORTCIRCUIT
PROTECTION

R2

3 GND

Rev.1.0.1
2001 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation

RS2622

KEYBOARD SCHEMATIC
10 11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

A
SCHEMATIC NOTES 1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS; K=X1000, Meg=X1,000,000. RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5%, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/8W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/16W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. m F, 2. CAPACITANCE VALUES 1.0 AND ABOVE ARE IN pF, VALUES BELOW 1.0 ARE IN EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. VOLTAGE RATING IS 50V EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT. 3. DENOTES CHASSIS GROUND. INDICATES CONNECTION VIA POINT-TO-POINT WIRE. -INDICATES JUMPER WIRE. -INDICATES ZERO OHM CHIP COMPONENT.

ALL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND MANY OTHER SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED UNDER "ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES" IN THE SAFETY AND SERVICING PRECAUTIONS PUBLICATION.

COMPONENTS WITH A ! HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS IMPORTANT TO SAFETY. BEFORE REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE IN THIS SERVICE DATA. DO NOT DEGRADE THE SAFETY OF THE SET THROUGH IMPROPER SERVICING.

PRODUCT SAFETY NOTE

PAGE 9-2

PAGE 9-2

Ordering number : EN4817A

CMOS LSI

LC78211, 78212, 78213


Analog Function Switch

Applications
Function switching under serial data control in amplifiers, receivers, and other electronic equipment

Package Dimensions
unit: mm 3061-DIP30S
[LC78211, 78212, 78213]

Features
Two sets of eight (or in the LC78213, seven) built-in circuits with three switching configurations available based on differing internal connections Control according to serial data sent from a microprocessor, and easy connection to 5 V microprocessors Two identical products can be connected to a shared bus due to the provision of a select pin (S). A reset pin that turns off all analog switches A 20 V withstand voltage rating allows these products to provide a wide dynamic range.

SANYO: DIP30S

Specifications
Absolute Maximum Ratings at Ta = 25C
Parameter Maximum supply voltage Symbol VDD max VEE max V I1 V I2 VON Pd max Topr Tstg VDD VEE DI, CL, CE, S, RES L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 With the switch on Ta 75C Conditions Ratings 0.3 to +20 20 to +0.3 0.3 to +20 VEE 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 0.5 100 30 to +75 40 to +125 Unit V V V V V mW C C

Maximum input voltage Analog switch potential difference when on Allowable power dissipation Operating temperature range Storage temperature range

SANYO Electric Co.,Ltd. Semiconductor Bussiness Headquarters


TOKYO OFFICE Tokyo Bldg., 1-10, 1 Chome, Ueno, Taito-ku, TOKYO, 110 JAPAN
73096HA (OT)/72994 TH (OT) No. 4817-1/6

LC78211, 78212, 78213 Pin Assignments

Top view

Allowable Operating Ranges at Ta = 25C, VSS = 0 V, | VDD | | VEE |


Parameter Maximum supply voltage Symbol VDD VEE VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 VIL2 VIN tL tH tset up Setup time t1* t2* t3* Minimum reset pulse width Hysteresis Note: * CE, CL and DI waveforms twRES VH Conditions VDD VEE 12 V: VDD VDD VEE 12 V: VEE DI, CL, CE S, RES DI, CL, CE S, RES L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 CL CL CL, DI CL, CE CL, CE CL, CE VDD 6 V: RES CL, CE, DI min 6.0 18.5 4.0 0.7 VDD 0 0 VEE 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.3 typ max 18.5 0 18.5 VDD 0.7 0.3 VDD VDD Unit V V V V V V V s s s s s s s V

Input high level voltage

Input low level voltage Analog switch input voltage range Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width

No. 4817-2/6

LC78211, 78212, 78213 Electrical Characteristics at Ta = 25C, VSS = 0 V


Parameter Symbol RON1 Analog switch on resistance RON2 Conditions I = 1 mA, VDD VEE = 12 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 I = 1 mA, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 1 Vrms, f = 1 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 0.1 Vrms, f = 1 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 0 dBV, f = 10 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 0 dBV, f = 10 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VI = 18.5 V: DI, CL, CE, S, RES VI = 0 V: DI, CL, CE, S, RES VI = VEE to VEE + 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VDD 10 10 +10 1.0 min typ 150 max Unit

70

THD1 Total harmonic distortion THD2

0.0015

0.01

0.01

0.05

Feedthrough

FTH

55

dB

Crosstalk Input high level current Input low level current Analog switch leakage current (off state) Current drain

CT IIH IIL IOFF IDD

75 +10

dB A A A mA

Equivalent Circuit Block Diagrams

Continued on next page. No. 4817-3/6

LC78211, 78212, 78213 Pin Functions


Pin VDD, VSS, VEE L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 I/O Internal equivalent circuit Power supply Pin function

See the block diagram.

Analog switch input and output

CL, DI, CE

Serial data input (Schmitt buffer) CL..............Clock input DI...............Data input CE .............Chip enable

Selection of one of two chips The address is set to the values shown in the table below according to the level input to the S pin. Product S I S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1

LC78211

LC78212

LC78213

RES

Reset input The states of the analog switches are undefined when power is first applied. Setting this pin low will force all switches the off state.

Operation 1. Data Input Procedure The LC78211, LC78212 and LC78213 are controlled by inputting specified data to the CL, DI and CE pins. The input data consists of 12 bits, of which four bits are address and eight bits are data.

Bits correspond to the L1 to L8 and R1 to R8 analog switches, and a value of one turns the corresponding switch on, and a value of zero turns it off. 0.........Off 1.........On The address is used when the chip is connected to a shared bus. The data (address) that must be transmitted depends on the S pin and the particular product as shown in the table below.
Product S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1

LC78211

LC78212

LC78213

Note: The bit for switch eight in the LC78213 is a dont care bit, that is it can be either 0 or 1 without affecting chip function. This is because the LC78213 has two sets of seven (not eight) circuits.
No. 4817-5/6

Ordering number : EN4817A

CMOS LSI

LC78211, 78212, 78213


Analog Function Switch

Applications
Function switching under serial data control in amplifiers, receivers, and other electronic equipment

Package Dimensions
unit: mm 3061-DIP30S
[LC78211, 78212, 78213]

Features
Two sets of eight (or in the LC78213, seven) built-in circuits with three switching configurations available based on differing internal connections Control according to serial data sent from a microprocessor, and easy connection to 5 V microprocessors Two identical products can be connected to a shared bus due to the provision of a select pin (S). A reset pin that turns off all analog switches A 20 V withstand voltage rating allows these products to provide a wide dynamic range.

SANYO: DIP30S

Specifications
Absolute Maximum Ratings at Ta = 25C
Parameter Maximum supply voltage Symbol VDD max VEE max V I1 V I2 VON Pd max Topr Tstg VDD VEE DI, CL, CE, S, RES L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 With the switch on Ta 75C Conditions Ratings 0.3 to +20 20 to +0.3 0.3 to +20 VEE 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 0.5 100 30 to +75 40 to +125 Unit V V V V V mW C C

Maximum input voltage Analog switch potential difference when on Allowable power dissipation Operating temperature range Storage temperature range

SANYO Electric Co.,Ltd. Semiconductor Bussiness Headquarters


TOKYO OFFICE Tokyo Bldg., 1-10, 1 Chome, Ueno, Taito-ku, TOKYO, 110 JAPAN
73096HA (OT)/72994 TH (OT) No. 4817-1/6

LC78211, 78212, 78213 Pin Assignments

Top view

Allowable Operating Ranges at Ta = 25C, VSS = 0 V, | VDD | | VEE |


Parameter Maximum supply voltage Symbol VDD VEE VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 VIL2 VIN tL tH tset up Setup time t1* t2* t3* Minimum reset pulse width Hysteresis Note: * CE, CL and DI waveforms twRES VH Conditions VDD VEE 12 V: VDD VDD VEE 12 V: VEE DI, CL, CE S, RES DI, CL, CE S, RES L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 CL CL CL, DI CL, CE CL, CE CL, CE VDD 6 V: RES CL, CE, DI min 6.0 18.5 4.0 0.7 VDD 0 0 VEE 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.3 typ max 18.5 0 18.5 VDD 0.7 0.3 VDD VDD Unit V V V V V V V s s s s s s s V

Input high level voltage

Input low level voltage Analog switch input voltage range Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width

No. 4817-2/6

LC78211, 78212, 78213 Electrical Characteristics at Ta = 25C, VSS = 0 V


Parameter Symbol RON1 Analog switch on resistance RON2 Conditions I = 1 mA, VDD VEE = 12 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 I = 1 mA, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 1 Vrms, f = 1 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 0.1 Vrms, f = 1 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 0 dBV, f = 10 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VIN = 0 dBV, f = 10 kHz, VDD VEE = 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VI = 18.5 V: DI, CL, CE, S, RES VI = 0 V: DI, CL, CE, S, RES VI = VEE to VEE + 37 V: L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 VDD 10 10 +10 1.0 min typ 150 max Unit

70

THD1 Total harmonic distortion THD2

0.0015

0.01

0.01

0.05

Feedthrough

FTH

55

dB

Crosstalk Input high level current Input low level current Analog switch leakage current (off state) Current drain

CT IIH IIL IOFF IDD

75 +10

dB A A A mA

Equivalent Circuit Block Diagrams

Continued on next page. No. 4817-3/6

LC78211, 78212, 78213 Pin Functions


Pin VDD, VSS, VEE L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 I/O Internal equivalent circuit Power supply Pin function

See the block diagram.

Analog switch input and output

CL, DI, CE

Serial data input (Schmitt buffer) CL..............Clock input DI...............Data input CE .............Chip enable

Selection of one of two chips The address is set to the values shown in the table below according to the level input to the S pin. Product S I S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1

LC78211

LC78212

LC78213

RES

Reset input The states of the analog switches are undefined when power is first applied. Setting this pin low will force all switches the off state.

Operation 1. Data Input Procedure The LC78211, LC78212 and LC78213 are controlled by inputting specified data to the CL, DI and CE pins. The input data consists of 12 bits, of which four bits are address and eight bits are data.

Bits correspond to the L1 to L8 and R1 to R8 analog switches, and a value of one turns the corresponding switch on, and a value of zero turns it off. 0.........Off 1.........On The address is used when the chip is connected to a shared bus. The data (address) that must be transmitted depends on the S pin and the particular product as shown in the table below.
Product S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1

LC78211

LC78212

LC78213

Note: The bit for switch eight in the LC78213 is a dont care bit, that is it can be either 0 or 1 without affecting chip function. This is because the LC78213 has two sets of seven (not eight) circuits.
No. 4817-5/6

LM4766 OvertureAudio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute

September 1998

LM4766 Overture Audio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute
General Description
The LM4766 is a stereo audio amplifier capable of delivering typically 40W per channel of continuous average output power into an 8 load with less than 0.1% (THD + N). The performance of the LM4766, utilizing its Self Peak Instantaneous Temperature (Ke) (SPiKe) Protection Circuitry, places it in a class above discrete and hybrid amplifiers by providing an inherently, dynamically protected Safe Operating Area (SOA). SPiKe Protection means that these parts are safeguarded at the output against overvoltage, undervoltage, overloads, including thermal runaway and instantaneous temperature peaks. Each amplifier within the LM4766 has an independent smooth transition fade-in/out mute that minimizes output pops. The ICs extremely low noise floor at 2 V and its extremely low THD + N value of 0.06% at the rated power make the LM4766 optimum for high-end stereo TVs or minicomponent systems.

Key Specifications
j j

THD+N at 1 kHz at 2 x 30W continuous average output power into 8: THD+N at 1 kHz at continuous average output power of 2 x 30W into 8: 0.009% (typ) 0.1% (max)

Features
n n n n SPiKe Protection Minimal amount of external components necessary Quiet fade-in/out mute mode Non-Isolated 15-lead TO-220 package

Applications
n High-end stereo TVs n Component stereo n Compact stereo

Typical Application

Connection Diagram
Plastic Package

DS100928-2

Top View Non-Isolated Package Order Number LM4766T See NS Package Number TA15A

DS100928-1

FIGURE 1. Typical Audio Amplifier Application Circuit


Note: Numbers in parentheses represent pinout for amplifier B.
*Optional component dependent upon specific design requirements.

SPiKe Protection and Overture are trademarks of National Semiconductor Corporation.

1998 National Semiconductor Corporation

DS100928

www.national.com

Equivalent Schematic

(excluding active protection circuitry) LM4766 (One Channel Only)

DS100928-8

www.national.com

LM4766 OvertureAudio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute

September 1998

LM4766 Overture Audio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute
General Description
The LM4766 is a stereo audio amplifier capable of delivering typically 40W per channel of continuous average output power into an 8 load with less than 0.1% (THD + N). The performance of the LM4766, utilizing its Self Peak Instantaneous Temperature (Ke) (SPiKe) Protection Circuitry, places it in a class above discrete and hybrid amplifiers by providing an inherently, dynamically protected Safe Operating Area (SOA). SPiKe Protection means that these parts are safeguarded at the output against overvoltage, undervoltage, overloads, including thermal runaway and instantaneous temperature peaks. Each amplifier within the LM4766 has an independent smooth transition fade-in/out mute that minimizes output pops. The ICs extremely low noise floor at 2 V and its extremely low THD + N value of 0.06% at the rated power make the LM4766 optimum for high-end stereo TVs or minicomponent systems.

Key Specifications
j j

THD+N at 1 kHz at 2 x 30W continuous average output power into 8: THD+N at 1 kHz at continuous average output power of 2 x 30W into 8: 0.009% (typ) 0.1% (max)

Features
n n n n SPiKe Protection Minimal amount of external components necessary Quiet fade-in/out mute mode Non-Isolated 15-lead TO-220 package

Applications
n High-end stereo TVs n Component stereo n Compact stereo

Typical Application

Connection Diagram
Plastic Package

DS100928-2

Top View Non-Isolated Package Order Number LM4766T See NS Package Number TA15A

DS100928-1

FIGURE 1. Typical Audio Amplifier Application Circuit


Note: Numbers in parentheses represent pinout for amplifier B.
*Optional component dependent upon specific design requirements.

SPiKe Protection and Overture are trademarks of National Semiconductor Corporation.

1998 National Semiconductor Corporation

DS100928

www.national.com

Equivalent Schematic

(excluding active protection circuitry) LM4766 (One Channel Only)

DS100928-8

www.national.com

M24C16, M24C08 M24C04, M24C02, M24C01


16/8/4/2/1 Kbit Serial IC Bus EEPROM
s

Two Wire I2C Serial Interface Supports 400 kHz Protocol


SBGA

Single Supply Voltage: 4.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx 2.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-W 1.8V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-R 1.8V to 3.6V for M24Cxx-S

8 1
PDIP8 (BN) 0.25 mm frame

SBGA5 (EA) 75 mil width

s s s s s s s s

Write Control Input BYTE and PAGE WRITE (up to 16 Bytes) RANDOM and SEQUENTIAL READ Modes Self-Timed Programming Cycle Automatic Address Incrementing Enhanced ESD/Latch-Up Behavior More than 1 Million Erase/Write Cycles More than 40 Year Data Retention

8 1
SO8 (MN) 150 mil width TSSOP8 (DW) 169 mil width

DESCRIPTION These I2C-compatible electrically erasable programmable memory (EEPROM) devices are organized as 2048/1024/512/256/128 x 8 bit (M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01), and operate with a power supply down to 2.5 V (for the -W version of each device), and down to 1.8 V (for the -R and -S versions of each device). The M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01 are available in Plastic Dual-in-Line, Plastic Small Outline and Thin Shrink Small Outline packages. The M24C16-S is also available in a Chip Scale package. Table 1. Signal Names
E0, E1, E2 SDA SCL WC VCC VSS Chip Enable

Figure 1. Logic Diagram

VCC

3 E0-E2 SCL WC M24Cxx SDA

Serial Data Serial Clock Write Control Supply Voltage Ground

VSS
AI02033

November 2001

1/21

M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01


Figure 7. Write Cycle Polling Flowchart using ACK
WRITE Cycle in Progress

START Condition DEVICE SELECT with RW = 0

NO
First byte of instruction with RW = 0 already decoded by the device

ACK Returned
YES

NO

Next Operation is Addressing the Memory

YES

ReSTART

Send Address and Receive ACK

STOP

NO

START Condition

YES

DATA for the WRITE Operation

DEVICE SELECT with RW = 1

Continue the WRITE Operation

Continue the Random READ Operation

AI01847C

8/21

M24C16, M24C08 M24C04, M24C02, M24C01


16/8/4/2/1 Kbit Serial IC Bus EEPROM
s

Two Wire I2C Serial Interface Supports 400 kHz Protocol


SBGA

Single Supply Voltage: 4.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx 2.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-W 1.8V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-R 1.8V to 3.6V for M24Cxx-S

8 1
PDIP8 (BN) 0.25 mm frame

SBGA5 (EA) 75 mil width

s s s s s s s s

Write Control Input BYTE and PAGE WRITE (up to 16 Bytes) RANDOM and SEQUENTIAL READ Modes Self-Timed Programming Cycle Automatic Address Incrementing Enhanced ESD/Latch-Up Behavior More than 1 Million Erase/Write Cycles More than 40 Year Data Retention

8 1
SO8 (MN) 150 mil width TSSOP8 (DW) 169 mil width

DESCRIPTION These I2C-compatible electrically erasable programmable memory (EEPROM) devices are organized as 2048/1024/512/256/128 x 8 bit (M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01), and operate with a power supply down to 2.5 V (for the -W version of each device), and down to 1.8 V (for the -R and -S versions of each device). The M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01 are available in Plastic Dual-in-Line, Plastic Small Outline and Thin Shrink Small Outline packages. The M24C16-S is also available in a Chip Scale package. Table 1. Signal Names
E0, E1, E2 SDA SCL WC VCC VSS Chip Enable

Figure 1. Logic Diagram

VCC

3 E0-E2 SCL WC M24Cxx SDA

Serial Data Serial Clock Write Control Supply Voltage Ground

VSS
AI02033

November 2001

1/21

M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01


Figure 7. Write Cycle Polling Flowchart using ACK
WRITE Cycle in Progress

START Condition DEVICE SELECT with RW = 0

NO
First byte of instruction with RW = 0 already decoded by the device

ACK Returned
YES

NO

Next Operation is Addressing the Memory

YES

ReSTART

Send Address and Receive ACK

STOP

NO

START Condition

YES

DATA for the WRITE Operation

DEVICE SELECT with RW = 1

Continue the WRITE Operation

Continue the Random READ Operation

AI01847C

8/21

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MAIN PCB

Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in oF (p=10-6 oF).

FROM DSP BD
NC3
FL_IN 1

R102
270 1W

R103
4R7 1W

6.8V 1/2W

D92 C108
47uF 25V AGND

D93
47uF 25V

R104
6.8V 1/2W

C107

R105
4R7 1W

270 1W

Main Board
C106
15nF 25V

FR_IN

C103
15nF 25V

0u33F

C104

50V

C_IN

100K 1/16W 100K 1/16W

R17FL

100pF

C5FL

1R R18L 1/4W C5FR

50V

25V 8n2F

C109 C8FL

R21FL

SL_IN

R17FR R17C
100K 1/16W

1R 1/4W

R18R

100pF

50V

3u3F 50V

R19L 2.2K R19R

1/16W

2.2K 1/16W

3u3F 50V

C8FR C8SL

SR_IN

10

R17SL 100K R17SR 100K

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 100K

50V 100pF

C5SL C5SR C5SW

100pF 50V

C5C

3u3F 50V

SW_IN

11

R17SW

50V

100pF 100pF 50V

3u3F 50V

C8SR C8SW

3u3F 50V

C8C

3u3F 50V

AGND

AGND

22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SRIN GNDS SWIN AVDD OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

NC1 NC2 23 LBASS1 RBASS124 LBASS2 RBASS225 RBASS326 LBASS3 RTRE 27 LTRE BYPASSL CR2 28 BYPASSR CR1 29 LIN CL2 30 GNDL CL1 31 RIN AVSS 32 GNDR LOUT 33 CIN ROUT 34 GNDC IC84 COUT 35 SLIN SM7346SLOUT 36 SROUT 37 SW-OUT 38 AGND 39 DGND 40 LATCH 41 DATA 42 CLK 43 DVDD 44

C105
0u33F 50V

3u3F

C700 C110
3u3F 50V

8n2F 25V

R20FL FL_PREAMP_IN C111


1nF 16V 1nF 16V

C9FL
4u7F 50V

C113

50V

R700 R701

560 1/16W

2.2K 1/16W

5 + IC88 7
-

FL_PREAMP_OUT
C13FL
100pF 50V

2.2K 1/16W

C112

IC88 BA4560 GND 4

8 VCC

BA4558

3.9K 1/16W R23FL

C10FL
33pF 50V

100K 1/16W

3K 1/16W

C11FL R22FL 50V

100PF AGND

R20FR C9FR FR_PREAMP_IN


560 1/16W 4u7F 50V

3 + IC88 1 2
-

FR_PREAMP_OUT

BA4558 C13FR
100pF 50V

100pF

R21FR

R108

750 1/16W

VOLUME CONTROL

560 1/16W

4u7F 50V

R21C

R20SL SL_PREAMP_IN
560 1/16W

C9SL
4u7F 50V

3 + IC87 1 2
-

SL_PREAMP_OUT

BA4558 C13SL
100pF 50V

7 11 AGND 10 9

IC87 BA4560 GND 4

33pF 50V

AGND

100K 1/16W

3.3K 1/16W

R22C

100PF 50V

8 VCC

3.9K 1/16W R23C

C10C

C11C

100pF 50V

C13C

BA4558

2.7K 1/16W

1K 1/16W

1K 1/16W

1K 1/16W

C_PREAMP_INR20C

C9C

5 + IC87 7

C_PREAMP_OUT

C114
47uF 25V

100pF 50V

C118

50V

C117
33pF 50V

3.9K 1/16W R23FR

C115 R112

C10FR

R109

R110

R111

100pF 50V

AGND

100K 1/16W

3K 1/16W

C11FR R22FR 100PF


50V AGND

TO POWER AMP
PC6 FL_PREAMP_OUT

FR_PREAMP_OUT

SL_PREAMP_OUT

SR_PREAMP_OUT

3.9K 1/16W R23SL

C_PREAMP_OUT

R21SL

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

R1 R2 R3 R4 RCOM1 R5 R6 RCOM2 R7 R8 RCOM3 VDD RES S VSS

VCR OUT

BLK RED

50V 100pF

C3L
50V

R5L
470 1/16W

L1 L2 L3 L4 LCOM1 L5 L6 LCOM2 L7 L8 LCOM3 VEE CE D1 CL

4 C3R 8

100pF

R5R

470 1/16W

IC75 LC78211

IC86 BA4560 GND 4 R20SW SW_PREAMP_IN


7821_CLK 7821_DATA 7821_CE +12V 47 1W

8 VCC

3.9K 1/16W

R23SR C11SR
100PF 50V

C13SR
100pF 50V

C10SR
33pF 50V

100K 1/16W

R22SR
3.3K 1/16W

SAT IN

9 7
1SS133

RED

50V 100pF

C1R

470 1/16W

R1R

R21SW

AGND

220K 1/16W

R2R

100pF 50V 100pF 50V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

BLK

100pF 50V

C1L

R1L

AGND

470 R2L 1/16W 220K 1/16W

C31L C31R

C9SW
4u7F 50V

R125 R95
1K 1/16W 1K 1/16W

R94 C95 D89

560 1/16W

3 + IC86 1
15K 1/16W

SW_PREAMP_OUT

BA4558 R23SW C11SW


680nF 50V

R96
1K 1/16W

D91

ISS133

MGND

D90

C96
22nF 50V 470 1/16W

C97 R25L C32L


100pF 50V 100pF 50V

C98
100pF 50V

C99
100pF 50V

AGND

C32R

KTD1302

470 1/16W

R25R

SELECT CONTROL

Q80 R93
AGND 3.3K 1/16W

DTA114YS

Q78

100pF 50V

100uF 16V AGND

12V 1W

1nF 50V

C10SW

C13SW

100K 1/16W

AGND

1.2K 1/16W

R22SW

100PF 50V

AGND

AGND

50V 100pF

C15L

R29L 470 1/16W

220K 1/16W

R26L

50V 100pF

C33L
100K 1/16W

R7L

50V 100pF

C4L

100K 1/16W

R7R

470 1/16W

TUNER_L

TUNER_R

50V 100pF

C15R

100pFC14L C14R AGND 100pF 50V 50V 1/16W 470

AGND

R29R

R26R 220K 1/16W

50V 100pF

C33R

470 1/16W

R6L

KTD1302

Q79

3.3K 1/16W

R92

R57R
470 1/16W

C51R
4u7F 50V

R6R C4R

100K 1/16W

+ 1 3 IC74 R58R

2-

BA4558

50V 4u7F

C52R

100pF 50V

R57L
470

C51L
4u7F 50V

100K 1/16W

R58L

AGND 50V 4u7F

AGND

6 BA4558

5 + IC74 7
-

IC74 BA4560 GND 4

8 VCC

ISS133 47uH

D88

ISS133

D87

ISS133

D85

L01

C52L

VIDEO_SW_1

VIDEO_SW_2

VIDEO_SW_3

1 VIDEO_SW_1 2 VIDEO_SW_2 3 VIDEO_SW_3 4 5 6 T_MUTE 7 SM7346_CE 8 SM7346_DATA 9 SM7346_CLK 10 7821_DATA 11 7821_CLK 12 7821_CE 13SUB_ON/OFF 14 AV_SWITCH 15 +5V(MCU) 16 +12V 17 TUNER_R 18 AGND 19 TUNER_L

CVS_OUT

+3.3V

DGND

DGND

+3.3V

CVS_IN

AGND

AGND

DVD_L

DVD_R

R_IN

L_IN

+15V

AGND

+15V

-15V

AGND

VGND

VGND

AGND

+5V

+5V

+5V

AGND

-15V

DGND

1SS133

ISS133

VGND
22nF 50V

PC14

D81

D82

C94

FROM VIDEO BD

10

11

NC2A

NC7A

FROM MICOM

NC4

FROM DSP

10

11

12

13

14

FROM POWER SUPPLY

NC13

15

VCR IN

RED

1 C2R

50V 470 220K 100pF 1/16W 1/16W

R3R

R4R

100pF 50V

C30R

C100

560 1/16W

4u7F 50V

BA4558

14

BLK

50V 100pF

C2L

220K 1/16W

R4L

100pF 50V

C30L

1uF 50V

100K 1/16W

R20SR SR_PREAMP_IN

C9SR

5 + IC86 7

SR_PREAMP_OUT

13

JACK102
2

R3L

470 1/16W

R97

AGND

12

33pF 50V

C10SL

C11SL
100K 1/16W 3.3K 1/16W

R22SL

100PF 50V

SW_PREAMP_OUT

R21SR

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MAIN PCB

Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in oF (p=10-6 oF).

R545R546
10K 10K 10K 10K
NC9

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

NC7

R547 R548 LOUT C508 L502


50V 100nF

DGND

+5V 47uH AV-SWITCH SUB-ON/OFF CE(7821) CLK(7821) DATA(7821) CLK(7346) DATA(7346) CE(7346) T-MUTE

GND 47uH ROUT L503VCC-12V

TP01

VIDEO-SW4 VIDEO-SW3 VIDEO-SW2 VIDEO-SW1

50V

R522
OUT

NC9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IN

DGND

IC501

100nF

X501

100K

SW-MUTE C-MUTE
10K

AGND J511 J511 FOR USA R523 J512 FOR EUR(RDS) J513 FOR KROEU R524 J514 FOR EUR R525 J512 J513 J514

S-MUTE F-MUTE SPK-RELAY PROTECTION HP-IN AGND

10K 10K

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 R551

PA1/AN1 PA0/ANO AVREF PB7/SO1 PB6/SI1 SCK1 PB5/ PB4/SO0 PB3//SI0 SCK0 PB2/ CS0 PB1/ PB0/CINT PC7/KR7 PC6/KR6 PC5/KR5 PC4/KR4 PC3/KR3 PC2/KR2 PC1/KR1 PC0/KR0 PE7/TO/ADJ PWM PE6/ PE5 PE4/RMC NMI PE3/INT3/ PE2/INT2 EC1 INT1 PE1/ EC0 INT0 PE0/ NC G0/A0 G1/A1

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

PA4/A51 PD3/A52 PD2/A53 PD1/A54 PD0/A55 VFDP VDD TEX TX VSS XTAL EXTAL RST AVSS PA7/AN7 PA6/AN6 PA5/AN5 PA4/AN4 PA3/AN3 PA2/AN2

A20 81 A19 82 A18 83 A17 84 A16 85 G15/A15 86 G14/A14 87 G13/A13 88 VDD189 G12/A12 90 G11/A11 91 G10/A10 92 G9/A993 G8/A894 G7/A795 G6/A696 G5/A597 G4/A4 G3/A398 G2/A2 99 100

1 -27V 2 SEG1 3 SEG2 4 SEG3 5 SEG4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SEG19 21

DGND

C503

PD5/A50 51 PD6/A49 52 PD7/A48 53 PF0/A47 54 PF1/A46 55 PF2/A45 56 PF3/A44 57 PF4/A43 58 PF5/A42 59 PF6/A41 60 PF7/A40 61 PG0/A39 62 PG1/A38 63 PG2/A37 64 PG3/A36 65 PG4/A35 66 PG5/A34 67 PG6/A33 68 PG7/A32 69 PH0/A31 70 PH1/A30 71 PH2/A29 72 PH3/A28 73 PH4/A27 74 PH5/A26 75 PH6/A25 76 PH7/A24 77 A23 78 A22 79 A21 80

NC10B2 GRID11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GRID1 11

R552

R540 10K
10K

AGND

R544

D505

DGND

10K

1k

R529

R528

R526

R527

R518 R519

R520 R521

GND

C505 Q501

DGND NC8

R532

1K2

R533 47 R534
47 47

R537

1uF

TUNED 13 12 VCC-12V 11 LOUT 10 GND 9 ROUT 8 CE-PLL 7 DATA-OUT-PLL 6 PLL-CLK 5 DATA-IN-PLL 4 3 RDS-CLK 2 RDS-DATA 1

NC11 ENCODER-DW 1 C502


50V 1nF
DGND

R53010K
100K

R538 R536

10K

ENCODER-UP 2 IR-DATA 3 KEY-IN STAND-BY 5.5V


4 5 6 7 8

L501 C506
100uF 10V 47uH

10K

10K

D501

4K7

4K7

4K7

4K7

D502

1nF

C504

50V

A-BOOST 19 DSP-A15 18 DSP-A16 17 DSP-A17 16 15 14 RST(8415) 13 RST(49326) 12 DATA-IN(8415) 11 DSP-INTREQ 10 DATA-IN(49326) 9 DSP-DATA_OUT 8 DSP-CLK 7 CE(49326) 6 CE(4228) 5 RST(4228) 4 EMPHASIS 3 CE(8415) 2 1

R550

R535 JOINER DVD-RST DVD-RX DVD-TX AGND


4

8 VCC E0 1 7 IC502 2 WC E1 6 SCL E2 3 5 4 SDA VSS


JP DGND DGND

50V

DGND

10K

10K

DGND

2.2uF 50V 330

C507 R539

DGND POWER-DOWN

56K

DGND AGND

Microprocessor System Control

R501

R502

R503

R504

R505

R506

R507

R508

R509

R510

10K R512

R511

R513

R514

R515

R516

C501

NC12

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

1K

1K

1K

1K

820P 50V

R517

NC5

DGND

DGND

10K

D503

DGND

MITSUMI

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)

Monolithic IC MM1221~MM1228
Outline
These ICs are high grade video switches with 2-input 1-output or 3-input 1-output and built-in 75 driver. The series includes those with and without built-in clamp and 6dB amp circuits. Circuit configuration tables and block diagrams are as follows. MM1228 is used as the representative model in this description.

MM1221~MM1228 Series Circuit Configuration Table


Model name MM1221 MM1222 MM1223 MM1224 MM1225 MM1226 MM1227 MM1228 # of Inputs 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 # of Outputs 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6dB amp circuit No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Clamp circuit No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply voltage range 8~13V 8~13V 8~13V 8~13V 4.7~13V 4.7~13V 4.7~13V 4.7~13V

MM1221~MM1228 Input/Output Voltage Measurement Values (typ.)


Model name Power supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage 1.27 1.31 1.3 1.4 1.27 1.31 1.3 1.4 5V 9V 4.53 4.5 4.05 5.34 4.53 4.5 4.05 5.34 2.17 2.25 2.2 2.23 2.17 2.25 2.2 2.23 12V 6.05 6.1 5.4 7.12 6.05 6.1 5.4 7.12 2.86 2.96 2.9 2.88 2.86 2.96 2.9 2.88 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V

MM1221

MM1222

MM1223

MM1224

MM1225

MM1226

MM1227

MM1228

MITSUMI

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228

Control input truth table SW L H OUT IN1 IN2

Control input truth table SW L H OUT IN1 IN2

Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 SW1 L H L/H

Control input truth table SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3

MITSUMI

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228

Introduction of Main Model

3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (with 75 driver, clamp and 6dB amp)

Monolithic IC MM1228
Outline
This is a high performance 3-input 1-output video switch IC with 6dB amp, clamp and 75 driver circuits. Output is 75, and a 1VP-P video signal can be output externally.

Features
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Built-in 75 driver circuit Built-in 6dB amp Built-in clamp circuit Models in the MM1221~MM1228 series without clamp circuits able to support audio or chroma circuits Mute operation possible Wide operating power supply voltage range 4.7~13V Low current consumption Wideband frequency response 7MHz @ 0dB -70dB (4.43MHz) Crosstalk

Package
SOP-8C (MM1228XF) SIP-8A (MM1228XS)

Applications
1. 2. 3. 4. TV VCR Video cameras Other video equipment

Block Diagram

Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3

MITSUMI

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)

Monolithic IC MM1221~MM1228
Outline
These ICs are high grade video switches with 2-input 1-output or 3-input 1-output and built-in 75 driver. The series includes those with and without built-in clamp and 6dB amp circuits. Circuit configuration tables and block diagrams are as follows. MM1228 is used as the representative model in this description.

MM1221~MM1228 Series Circuit Configuration Table


Model name MM1221 MM1222 MM1223 MM1224 MM1225 MM1226 MM1227 MM1228 # of Inputs 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 # of Outputs 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6dB amp circuit No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Clamp circuit No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply voltage range 8~13V 8~13V 8~13V 8~13V 4.7~13V 4.7~13V 4.7~13V 4.7~13V

MM1221~MM1228 Input/Output Voltage Measurement Values (typ.)


Model name Power supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input voltage Output voltage 1.27 1.31 1.3 1.4 1.27 1.31 1.3 1.4 5V 9V 4.53 4.5 4.05 5.34 4.53 4.5 4.05 5.34 2.17 2.25 2.2 2.23 2.17 2.25 2.2 2.23 12V 6.05 6.1 5.4 7.12 6.05 6.1 5.4 7.12 2.86 2.96 2.9 2.88 2.86 2.96 2.9 2.88 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V

MM1221

MM1222

MM1223

MM1224

MM1225

MM1226

MM1227

MM1228

MITSUMI

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228

Control input truth table SW L H OUT IN1 IN2

Control input truth table SW L H OUT IN1 IN2

Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 SW1 L H L/H

Control input truth table SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3

MITSUMI

2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228

Introduction of Main Model

3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (with 75 driver, clamp and 6dB amp)

Monolithic IC MM1228
Outline
This is a high performance 3-input 1-output video switch IC with 6dB amp, clamp and 75 driver circuits. Output is 75, and a 1VP-P video signal can be output externally.

Features
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Built-in 75 driver circuit Built-in 6dB amp Built-in clamp circuit Models in the MM1221~MM1228 series without clamp circuits able to support audio or chroma circuits Mute operation possible Wide operating power supply voltage range 4.7~13V Low current consumption Wideband frequency response 7MHz @ 0dB -70dB (4.43MHz) Crosstalk

Package
SOP-8C (MM1228XF) SIP-8A (MM1228XS)

Applications
1. 2. 3. 4. TV VCR Video cameras Other video equipment

Block Diagram

Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3

MITSUMI

Video Switch 75 driver Y/C mix MM1501

Video Switch 75 driver Y/C mix

Monolithic IC MM1501 Series


Outline
This IC extends the series of ICs for video/audio signal switching, with a 2-input 1-output single video switch, video signal/chroma signal 75 driver, and Y/C mixing circuit in one small package (SOT-26).

Features
(1) Low power consumption achieved. (2) Low power supply voltage realized. (3) Frequency bandwidth without 75 driver: 10MHz (4) Cross talk 70dB When 4.43MHz (5) With SAG measures pin (75 driver and Y/C mix driver) with 75 driver: 7MHz

Package
SOT-26A (with 75 driver) SOT-26B (without 75 driver)

Applications
(1) TV (2) VTR (3) Video camera (4) Digital still camera (5) Other visual equipment

Line-up
Functions Model Name Input Output MM1501 MM1502 MM1503 MM1504 MM1505 MM1506 MM1507 MM1508 MM1509 MM1510 MM1511 MM1512 Clamp 6dB amp 75 driver SAG measures pin Power supply voltage 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V

Switch

Driver Y/C mix

1 1

1 1 / /

MITSUMI

Video Switch 75 driver Y/C mix MM1501

Block Diagram
MM1501 MM1502

MM1503

MM1504

MM1505

MM1506

MITSUMI

Video Switch 75 driver Y/C mix MM1501

Video Switch 75 driver Y/C mix

Monolithic IC MM1501 Series


Outline
This IC extends the series of ICs for video/audio signal switching, with a 2-input 1-output single video switch, video signal/chroma signal 75 driver, and Y/C mixing circuit in one small package (SOT-26).

Features
(1) Low power consumption achieved. (2) Low power supply voltage realized. (3) Frequency bandwidth without 75 driver: 10MHz (4) Cross talk 70dB When 4.43MHz (5) With SAG measures pin (75 driver and Y/C mix driver) with 75 driver: 7MHz

Package
SOT-26A (with 75 driver) SOT-26B (without 75 driver)

Applications
(1) TV (2) VTR (3) Video camera (4) Digital still camera (5) Other visual equipment

Line-up
Functions Model Name Input Output MM1501 MM1502 MM1503 MM1504 MM1505 MM1506 MM1507 MM1508 MM1509 MM1510 MM1511 MM1512 Clamp 6dB amp 75 driver SAG measures pin Power supply voltage 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V

Switch

Driver Y/C mix

1 1

1 1 / /

MITSUMI

Video Switch 75 driver Y/C mix MM1501

Block Diagram
MM1501 MM1502

MM1503

MM1504

MM1505

MM1506

MOTOR CONTROL UNIT


+5VD

L_+12VM

LC7

22UH C115

100uF

R167

R174

47K KTA1504

1.8K

10uF

Q4

5.6K

R166 470 5 6 7 8

R173

R165

C114

D20

IN4148

22

22

DGND

TRAY_MTRAY_M+

GND Vo2 FAN8082

Vin1 Vin2

PVcc

SVcc

Vctl

TRAY_SENSE KTC3875

Q3

RB501V-40 R68 IN4148 D19 R61 5.6K

10K

L_MGND

N601

100K

R63

1uF

C112

R62

68K D21 5.6V DGND

Vo1

10K

R64

D18

U13

R65

10K

10nF

R66 L_MGND

C113

R67

470

L_MGND

L_MGND LC10

+9VM

22UH C116 100nF C135 R251 100uF 2.2 R250 2.2

+5VD

1K R197

R198 1K

DGND 5 6 7 8

470 U14 C117 100nF R245 L_MGND

Vo1

GND Vo2 FAN8082

Vin1 Vin2

Vctl

PVcc

SVcc

10nF C123

10nF C145 DGND

5.6V D12

R246

470

L_MGND

CONNECTOR(FLAT CABLE) TO DVD MOUDLE


L12V L12V D-DGND D-DGND L5V L3V3 L-MGND D-DGND I2C-DAT I2C-CLK D-INT D-RESET D-DGND CLK DATA DATA-VALID SECTOR-START D-DGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 L101 FB300

CONNECTOR(FLAT CABLE) TO DSP BOARD


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 L12V L12V D-DGND D-DGND L5V L3V3 L-MGND D-DGND I2C-DAT I2C-CLK D-INT D-RESET D-DGND CLK DATA DATA-VALID SECTOR-START D-DGND R107 10K 1/4W R108 10K 1/4W R109 10K 1/4W R110 10K 1/4W R111 10K 1/4W 1 SW203 2 8 7 6 5 1 SW202 2 R201 2R2 1/2W 1 SW201 2

NEO5 CONTROL BOARD

NE5 MOTOR BOARD

MOTOR1
+ -

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC201


C203 100nF 50V

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR CN309A


1 FRONT-GND

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR CN309B


FRONT-GND 1 1 SW204 2

FAN8082 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1


1 2 3 4

CN320A

CN304B

S2

S2

S4

S4

TO FRONT BOARD 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE) CN308


4051-DATA 1

S3

S3

4 D201 8V2 1/2W

M2IN2

M2IN2

M1IN2

M1IN2

SURGE

4094-STB

R113 NOUSE 1/4W

R112 10K 1/4W

M1IN1

M1IN1

S1

S1

4094-DATA

MGND

MGND

4094-CLK

10

MGND

MGND

10 R202 2R2 1/2W

+3V3

16

1 R103 10K 1/4W R106 47K 1/4W 4 2 6 3 2 VDD

16

11

M2IN1

M2IN1

11

STR
FRONT-GND 7 2

VDD
15

15

12

S5

S5

12

DATA
MGND 8 3

OE Q5 Q6
12 14 13

5 W301 1 +
C204 100nF 50V

14 COM 1 13 7

13

S6

S6

13

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC202 FAN8082 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C201 220UF 16V C202 100nF 50V

MOTOR2
-

CLK
+9V 9 4

Q1
R101 10K 1/4W 5

C104 100PF 50V R104 10K 1/4W

14 C103 220UF 16V

+9V

+9V

14

IC101 CD4094BE

5 5 6 INH

IC102 CD4051BE

0 12 3 11 A 10

Q2
6

Q7
11

Q3
7

Q8
10

Q4
8

Q'S
9

R105 10K 1/4W

7 VEE 8 VSS C B

9 D202 8V2 1/2W

VSS
R102 330 1/4W C101 47uF 50V

QS

C102 100nF 50V

C105 100nF 50V

CN310
2
LED+

CN311
2
S7

CN312 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE)


3
FRONT-GND

1
FRONT-GND

2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE)

1
FRONT-GND

2.5mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE)

2
S6

1
S5

FRONT-GND

FRONT-GND

FRONT-GND

NOTES:
S6 S5

LED+

S7

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/8W B. All Capacitor values are in F

CP310 WIRE WITH 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR

CP311 WIRE WITH 2.5mm PITCH CONNECTOR

CP312 WIRE WITH 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR

SENSOR

SW205

SW206

S101

LED

S102

2. Replace transistors with type


1

specified from replacement parts list 3. * and indicates critical safety

components. Replace only with those

SENSOR-OUT BOARD

SENSOR-IN BOARD

SWITCH BOARD

specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

CONNECTOR(FLAT CABLE) TO DVD MOUDLE


L12V L12V D-DGND D-DGND L5V L3V3 L-MGND D-DGND I2C-DAT I2C-CLK D-INT D-RESET D-DGND CLK DATA DATA-VALID SECTOR-START D-DGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 L101 FB300

CONNECTOR(FLAT CABLE) TO DSP BOARD


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 L12V L12V D-DGND D-DGND L5V L3V3 L-MGND D-DGND I2C-DAT I2C-CLK D-INT D-RESET D-DGND CLK DATA DATA-VALID SECTOR-START D-DGND R107 10K 1/4W R108 10K 1/4W R109 10K 1/4W R110 10K 1/4W R111 10K 1/4W 1 SW203 2 8 7 6 5 1 SW202 2 R201 2R2 1/2W 1 SW201 2

NEO5 CONTROL BOARD

NE5 MOTOR BOARD

MOTOR1
+ -

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC201


C203 100nF 50V

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR CN309A


1 FRONT-GND

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR CN309B


FRONT-GND 1 1 SW204 2

FAN8082 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1


1 2 3 4

CN320A

CN304B

S2

S2

S4

S4

TO FRONT BOARD 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE) CN308


4051-DATA 1

S3

S3

4 D201 8V2 1/2W

M2IN2

M2IN2

M1IN2

M1IN2

SURGE

4094-STB

R113 NOUSE 1/4W

R112 10K 1/4W

M1IN1

M1IN1

S1

S1

4094-DATA

MGND

MGND

4094-CLK

10

MGND

MGND

10 R202 2R2 1/2W

+3V3

16

1 R103 10K 1/4W R106 47K 1/4W 4 2 6 3 2 VDD

16

11

M2IN1

M2IN1

11

STR
FRONT-GND 7 2

VDD
15

15

12

S5

S5

12

DATA
MGND 8 3

OE Q5 Q6
12 14 13

5 W301 1 +
C204 100nF 50V

14 COM 1 13 7

13

S6

S6

13

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC202 FAN8082 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C201 220UF 16V C202 100nF 50V

MOTOR2
-

CLK
+9V 9 4

Q1
R101 10K 1/4W 5

C104 100PF 50V R104 10K 1/4W

14 C103 220UF 16V

+9V

+9V

14

IC101 CD4094BE

5 5 6 INH

IC102 CD4051BE

0 12 3 11 A 10

Q2
6

Q7
11

Q3
7

Q8
10

Q4
8

Q'S
9

R105 10K 1/4W

7 VEE 8 VSS C B

9 D202 8V2 1/2W

VSS
R102 330 1/4W C101 47uF 50V

QS

C102 100nF 50V

C105 100nF 50V

CN310
2
LED+

CN311
2
S7

CN312 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE)


3
FRONT-GND

1
FRONT-GND

2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE)

1
FRONT-GND

2.5mm PITCH CONNECTOR(WIRE)

2
S6

1
S5

FRONT-GND

FRONT-GND

FRONT-GND

NOTES:
S6 S5

LED+

S7

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/8W B. All Capacitor values are in F

CP310 WIRE WITH 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR

CP311 WIRE WITH 2.5mm PITCH CONNECTOR

CP312 WIRE WITH 2.0mm PITCH CONNECTOR

SENSOR

SW205

SW206

S101

LED

S102

2. Replace transistors with type


1

specified from replacement parts list 3. * and indicates critical safety

components. Replace only with those

SENSOR-OUT BOARD

SENSOR-IN BOARD

SWITCH BOARD

specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

NEO5 CONTROL BOARD SENSOR-IN BOARD

NE5 MOTOR BOARD


SW001 1 2

SW003 1 2

R003 2R2 1/2W

8 SW004 1 2

MOTOR1
+ -

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC001


C002 100nF 25V

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR


SW007 1 2 1 1

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR P001


1 SW002 2

N008

N001
1 FRONT-GND FRONT-GND

BA4558 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1


1 2 3 4

2 1 3 2 1 2

S2

S2

P008

S4

S4

S3

S3

4 D001 8.2v 1/2W

M2IN2

M2IN2

M1IN2

M1IN2

M1IN1

M1IN1

DISC-SW CHECK-UP HOOK-OUT

S7 S6 S5

S1

S1

MGND

MGND

10

MGND

MGND

10 R004 2R2 1/2W

DRN-CW M2IN1 S1 TRAY-UP TRAY-DWN DRW-CCW M1IN1 M1IN2 M2IN2

11

M2IN1

M2IN1

11

12

S5

S5

12

5 P024 1 +

13

S6

S6

13

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC002 BA4558 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C005 330uf 16V C001 100nF 25V C004 100nF 25V

MOTOR2
-

14

DRV12V

DRV12V

14

N002

1N4002

DKW-OUT S3 DRW-IN S4 S2 SDATA GNDD SCLK CD-RESET

D005

D002 8.2v 1/2W

1N4002
5

D004
N003
7 6

N007

N006 R005 150R 1/4W

S6

FRONT-GND

LED+

S5

N012 LED+

FRONT-GND

NOTES:
S6 S5

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms,


1

P007
AUDIO-R AUDIO-L

P006

1/8W B. All Capacitor values are in F


2 SW006 SW005 2

D003

2. Replace transistors with type


1

P010

N004
1 2

P005

OP01

specified from replacement parts list 3. * and indicates critical safety

connecte-main board p005

TCM

MODULE

TCM MODULE

components. Replace only with those

SENSOR-OUT BOARD

SWITCH BOARD

specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

NEO5 CONTROL BOARD SENSOR-IN BOARD

NE5 MOTOR BOARD


SW001 1 2

SW003 1 2

R003 2R2 1/2W

8 SW004 1 2

MOTOR1
+ -

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC001


C002 100nF 25V

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR


SW007 1 2 1 1

PIN TO PIN CONNECTOR P001


1 SW002 2

N008

N001
1 FRONT-GND FRONT-GND

BA4558 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1


1 2 3 4

2 1 3 2 1 2

S2

S2

P008

S4

S4

S3

S3

4 D001 8.2v 1/2W

M2IN2

M2IN2

M1IN2

M1IN2

M1IN1

M1IN1

DISC-SW CHECK-UP HOOK-OUT

S7 S6 S5

S1

S1

MGND

MGND

10

MGND

MGND

10 R004 2R2 1/2W

DRN-CW M2IN1 S1 TRAY-UP TRAY-DWN DRW-CCW M1IN1 M1IN2 M2IN2

11

M2IN1

M2IN1

11

12

S5

S5

12

5 P024 1 +

13

S6

S6

13

VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC002 BA4558 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C005 330uf 16V C001 100nF 25V C004 100nF 25V

MOTOR2
-

14

DRV12V

DRV12V

14

N002

1N4002

DKW-OUT S3 DRW-IN S4 S2 SDATA GNDD SCLK CD-RESET

D005

D002 8.2v 1/2W

1N4002
5

D004
N003
7 6

N007

N006 R005 150R 1/4W

S6

FRONT-GND

LED+

S5

N012 LED+

FRONT-GND

NOTES:
S6 S5

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms,


1

P007
AUDIO-R AUDIO-L

P006

1/8W B. All Capacitor values are in F


2 SW006 SW005 2

D003

2. Replace transistors with type


1

P010

N004
1 2

P005

OP01

specified from replacement parts list 3. * and indicates critical safety

connecte-main board p005

TCM

MODULE

TCM MODULE

components. Replace only with those

SENSOR-OUT BOARD

SWITCH BOARD

specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

This Section is currently not available. Look for new or revised information on CD Updates.

TO DSP BD
6 5 4 3

CN611

47uF 16V

L04 L03 220uH 47pF 50V

C87
100nF 50V

C91

C92

220uH 47pF 50V 1

C8847uF 16V

C89
100nF 50V 2
1 GND

C93
47pF 50V

JACK112 COAXIL IN

MODULE TOTX178A TRANSMITTING FIBER OPTIC

CONNECTOR INSERT FIBER OPTIC

C90
2 VCC 3 INPUT

1 INPUT

2 GND

3 VCC MODULE TOTX178A TRANSMITTING

JACK110
FIBER OPTIC

JACK111

CONNECTOR INSERT FIBER OPTIC

OPT IN

OPT OUT

+VDD

-VEE
C644FR

C645FR

100pF

-VEE -VEE AGND AGND +VCC +VCC

50V

NC757
1

+5V

10pF

N758
2

To Fan
F_MUTE
ISS133

D530

ISS133

C646FR

3 EMIT R644FL COL 2


3.3 1/16W

R647FR

1uF 100V

1uF 100V

C710

C711

15k 1/16W

Q682 DTA114YS

50V 910

R646FR

1/16W

AGND

Power Amplifier
R652FL
22

R640FR

D501L

ISS133

50V

D501

BASE D531 Q683 DTA114YS


ISS133

D502L

470pF

47K 1/16W

R643FR

C643FR

D501R

D502R

R640FL

22K

1/4W

C649FR

50V

C646FL

R647FL

3 4 5 6 7 8

R648FR

10 1/4W

R646FL

C645FL

C647FR

100pF

C644FL

100nF 50V

PROTECT HP_IN DGND

Q684 DTA114YS

C649SL

C_MUTE

47uF 25V

3 EMIT

100nF 50V

50V

KTD1302

910 1/16W

ISS133

C648FR

SPK_RELAY

+5V

D532

10pF

F_MUTE

15k 1/16W

1/4W

COL 2

KTD1302

10k 1/16W

-VEE

2 1

AGND

Q635SR

10

R644SR
3.3K 1/16W

4 3 2 1

5 6 7 8

C644SR

22K 1/4W

R653SR

1/4W

C645SR

NC6
1

F_LOUT AGND F_ROUT AGND S_LOUT AGND S_ROUT AGND C_OUT AGND SW_OUT +15V -15V +5V +5VA

R25FL
1K 1/16W

3 EMIT

910 1/16W

AGND

R646SR

Q685 DTA114YS

+5V

100pF

ISS133

50V

D533

47uF

R651SL
C647SL

22 1/4W

100 1W

1SS133

D676

C646SR

R647SR

15k 1/16W

1uF 100V

1uF 100V

100nF 50V

C713

R25FR
1K 1/16W

C712

SW_MUTE

ISS133

22 1/4W 0.5uH

2 COL

D504

10pF

BASE

L635SL

BASE EMIT 3 DGND NW03A


6 7 5 4 3

D503L

Q635SW
KTD1302

R643SL

C643SL

D504L

ISS133

47K 1/16W

470pF

1K 1/16W

R648SR

47K 1/16W

R643SR

C643SR

D503R

ISS133

470pF

R25SR
1K 1/16W 4.7uF 50V

D504R

100nF 50V

R25C
1K 1/16W

100k 1/16W

4u7F 50V

R640SL

ISS133

1K 1/4W

4u7F 50V

R24SR

R657
1k 1/16W

C642SR

100nF 50V

-IN_B

OUT_B

C647SR C648SR

C630R

C12SR

AGND

1K 1/16W

+IN_B

GND_B

12

AGND

10

2 1

10 1/4W

AGND

R649SR

R645SR

13

10

50V

1/4W

1/16W

+IN_A

LM4766

IC613

GND_A

10

R24SL
100k 1/16W

1K

R648SL

AGND

10 1/4W

R649SL

R25SL

4u7F 50V

1k 1/16W

ISS133

4u7F 50V

C642SL

R640SR

R645SL

50V

-IN_A

OUT_A

W05B

1/4W

NC

NC

VCC_A VCC_B

W05A
3

1K 1/4W

100nF 50V

C12SL

9 14

2 15

C648SL

COL 2

R644SW
3.3K 1/16W

50V

Q686 KRC107M

6 11

MUTE_A MUTE_B

VEE

100 1W

R710

C646SL

R647SL

C616R

100nF 16V

R25SW
1K 1/16W

1K 1/16W

15k 1/16W

R622R

AGND

10k 1/16W -VEE

10pF

10

R602

L635SR
0.5uH

PW01B
1 2 3 4

NW01A
1 2 3 4

2 COL 1 BASE Q688 KRC107M EMIT 3 AGND

50V

22K

KTD1302

+VDD

-VEE

AGND

R652SL

22 1/4W

AGND

R708

R653SL

3.3 1/16W

Q635C

R652FR

25V

22nF 50V

22 1/4W

C649SR

D503

BASE

COL 2

R644C

AGND

R651FR

3 4

22nF 50V

ISS133

L635FR
0.5uH

DGND RLY602 OSA-SS-212DM3 1

EMIT 3 Q687 KRC107M

AGND

1 BASE

AGND

AGND

22nF 50V

R_MUTE

Q635SL

AGND

R601

R649FR R648FL

D502

BASE

10

R649FL

3.3 1/16W

10 1/4W

2 COL

22K

C_MUTE

R_MUTE

ISS133

R644SL

100k 1/16W

6 11

ISS133

1K 1/4W

MUTE_A MUTE_B

VEE

W04A

R653FL

1k 1/16W

4u7F 50V

+VCC

R653FR

R24FR

100nF 50V

1/4W

1/4W

100 1W

1SS133

10uF 50V

R655

C642FR

R709

D675

22nF 50V

C649FL

PC9

ISS133

SW_MUTE

3 EMIT

470pF

AGND

Q635FR
KTD1302

C12FR

AGND

100nF 50V

AGND

1K

1/16W

+IN_B

GND_B

C648FL C647FL

+5V

50V

R644FR
3.3K 1/16W

100k 1/16W

R643FL

C643FL

Q635FL
KTD1302

1k 1/16W

ISS133

47K 1/16W

R24FL

R645FL
1K

7 8 13 12

VCC_A VCC_B OUT_A

-IN_A

3 5 10 1

1K 1/4W

C12FL
10uF 50V

R654

C642FL
4u7F 50V

9 14
NC

NC

2 15

47uF 25V

R645FR

1/16W

+IN_A

LM4766

IC612

GND_A

W04B
3 2

R651FL L635FL
0.5uH

1/4W

22 1/4W

-IN_B

OUT_B

AGND

3 PW02B NW02A 6 4

RLY601 OSA-SS-212DM3 1

BUS4

NJ601B
1

2 5

AGND

R651SR
22 22

R624R

R623R

910 1/16W

12

100k

120

1/16w

R646SL

R625R

R650L

R621L

68K 1/16W

6.8K 1/16W

22K 1/16W

-15V
C645SL

R652SR
22 22

1/16W

11

1/4W 1/4W

100pF 50V

C644SL

GND

OUT_2

R653SW

22K 1/16W

100k 1/16W

1/16W

R646SW

C646SW

R647SW

1uF 100V

1uF 100V

C714

C715

3 4 5

H/P_L

1K 1/16W

4.7uF 50V

C630L

15k 1/16W

D505L

R640SW

D506L

470pF 50V

ISS133

KTA1266Y

C643C

HP_IN
+5V

KTD1302

Q601L

R627L
3.3K 1/16W

+15V
27K 1/16W

R671
2K2R 1/16W

C679
2.2UF 50V

Q672

7
1K 1K

VCC_A VCC_B OUT_A

R678
KTA1266Y

R643SW

47K 1/16W

C643SW 1NF 50V

D534
3 EMIT COL 2
ISS133

D505R

R2

ISS133

R673
2K2R 1/16W

R675
C677
10NF 50 560KR 1/16W

Q673

560R 1/16W

100R 1/16W 0R1 5W NC 1W

R679 R680 R681

100K 1/16W

R24C

R643C
47K 1/16W

C12SW
4u7F 50V

AGND

R659
1k 1/16W

R645SW
1/16W

R645C

8 13 12

-IN_A

3 5 10 1

+IN_A

1/16W

AGND

+IN_B

LM4766

IC614

GND_A

W03B
3 2 1

100nF 50V

1K 1/4W

DGND

ISS133

C12C
4u7F 50V

1k 1/16W

R658

C642C
4u7F 50V

9 14
NC

NC

2 15

100nF 50V

10pF

KTD1302

C647SW C648SW

AGND

Q601R

50V

R627R
3.3K 1/16W

C616L

R622L

+15V

100nF 16V

10 1/4W

R648SW

1SS133

1/4W

910

L635SW
0.5uH

R652SW
22 1/4W

10

GND_B

AGND

R651SW
22 1/4W

Q681

BASE

D506R

ISS133

D670

1SS133

100k 1/16W

4u7F 50V

KTC3200BL

C646C

1/16W 10k

R647C

15k 1/16W

910 1/16W

+VCC

C645C

+VDD

-15V

27K 1/16W

2K2R 1/16W

R670

R672

2K2R 1/16W

10NF 50V

AGND

C644C

47uF 25V

R3

C678

100pF 50V

DGND

AGND

2.2K 1/16W

R711

KTA1268BL

Q671

R646C

LIMIT-

-VEE

AGND

10pF 50V

AGND

3K3R 1/16W

Q670

R674

560KR 1/16W

R677

LIMIT+

680nF 50V

C3

6 11

1K 1/4W

MUTE_A MUTE_B

VEE

R640C

R24SW

C642SW

-IN_B

OUT_B

R603

2SC1740S

Q690

2SC1740S

Q689

NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/10W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

22K

22K

H/P_R

R650R

R621R

R624L

R623L

68K 1/16W

6.8K 1/16W

R653C

100pF

PC606

120 1/16W

AGND

D677

1/4W

1/4W

R649SW R648C

To Headphone

VCC

IN+_2

IN-_2

100nF 50V

C644SW

47uF

C617L
47nF 16V

AGND

+VDD

-VEE
C645SW
50V

AGND AGND W03A


3

C648C C647C

100nF 50V

HEADPHONE AMP

OUT_1

IN+_1

IN-_1

47uF 25V

C617R
47nF 16V

R651C L635C
0.5uH

R652C
1/4W

1/4W

AGND

DGND NJ601A

13

15

IC610 NJM4556A

PW03B
6 7 5

3 6 4

RLY603 OSA-SS-212DM3 1

14

2 3 4

R649C

10 1/4W

R625L

1/4W

25V

2 5

10

C716

470uF 10V

Power Amplifier

P502

Alternate

Europe Only

POWER SUPPLY/AUDIO AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC


NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. * and 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list components. Replace only with those
WARNING SEE NOTE C518

indicates critical safety

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum

to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.


AGND

specified from replacement parts list

100nF 50V

BUFFER_DRIVER

12

C509L 1uF 50V

IN+ SGND

STBY-GND

P501
1

-VS

15

IN_R
R502R
24K 1/16W

R507R
100K 1/16W

C507R
470pF 50V

AGND

AGND

R507L

-PWVS

STBY 9

C524

AGND

100nF 50V

C518R R512R
4R7 1/4W 100nF 16V
AGND

AGND

BUFFER_DRIVER

+PWVS

+VS

MAIN BD

N701
1

C502R
1uF 50V

STBY-GND

TO

PROTECTION /MUTE KEYBD_VCC

D501
470 1/2W 1/2W 2.4V

JP501
4.7v 1/2W

-VS

D504

AGND

22uF 50V

100nF 50V

AGND JW07 JW08


JP502 -24V
AGND

15

R530
2.2K 1/2W
GND

-30V

10

AGND

AGND

1.5K 1/16W

R532

33K 1/16W

22uF 50V

C535

C520

68K 1/16W

-PWVS

R502

C502
100pF 50V

KTC3875GR

Q501

10

R525 R529 C534

STBY

CLIP_DET

AGND

MUTE

TDA7296

12

0 1/16W

R501
1N4148

14

C504R 1NF 50V R503R 470 1/16W C509R 1uF 50V

C533
OUT

1NF 50V

C522R 2

ININ+ SGND

100nF 50V

C501R
5pF 50V

R501R
33k 1/16W

C505R
1NF 50V

L501R
0.5uH

C521R
100nF 16V

13

11

AGND

R510R
10 1/4W

D503

IC502

BOOT_LOADER BOOTSTRAP

L502R
6.5uH

C538 22uF 25V

2K2 1/16W

R505R

D501R

1N4148

R531
2.2K 1/2W
GND

WARNING SEE NOTE

11

C525
100nF

C512 WARNING SEE NOTE JP520

2200uF 35v

13

100nF 50V

C517

12

D505

50V

100nF 50V

C526 WARNING SEE NOTE C511


100nF 50V

D506

F503
US: 5S3A250V

100nF 50V

C527

1N5402

GND1

D507 1N5402 C529

100nF 50V

C528

1N5402

C513 2200uF 35v

JP503 JP504 JW1 JW2 JW3 N801B


1 TRANSFORMER

D508 1N5402

GND1

N/A

WARNING F504 SEE NOTE


US:

ON XFORMER BD

IN_L

R502L
24K 1/16W

C502L
1uF 50V 100K 1/16W

10

C507L
470pF 50V

CLIP_DET

AGND

MUTE

TDA7296

IC501

BOOT_LOADER BOOTSTRAP

R505L
2K2 1/16W

C505L D501L
1N4148 1NF 50V

C518L
100nF 16V

GND1

OUTPUT

4R7 1/4W

AGND

C537
22uF 25V

L501L
0.5uH

14

R512L

C521L
100nF 16V

MAIN OUTPUT

1NF 50V

+PWVS

+VS

C504L

C501L
5pF 50V OUT

R503L 470 1/16W

R501L
33k 1/16W

13

11

C522L 1NF 50V 2

IN-

R510L
10 1/4W

L502L
6.5uH

L OUTPUT

NJ501

5S3A250V

FUSE INSIDE X`MER

WARNING SEE NOTE C514

100nF 50V 1N4001

100nF C530 50V 1N4001 1N4001

GND1

X803

X883

JP883

JP881 LIVE L

P001A

N002

FOR AM/MW/LW ANT INPUT

WARNING SEE NOTE

WARNING SEE NOTE D820


30V 1.3W

1/2W 7.5V

D819

10K 1/16W

R885

1N4148 100uF 350V

D821

PF01

JW06 JW07
5

1/4W 100

R886

JW05

AGND

C532
100nF 50V

C531 50V

100nF

TO N805

0.22

RF505

3300uF 16V/25V

D510

1N4001

D512

D511

D509

WARNING SEE NOTE WARNING SEE NOTE

AGND

1/2W

JW04 WARNING SEE NOTE

FROM AC BOARD
X804

R881
3M3 1/4W

JW883 X884 NEUTRAL JP884 JP882

WARNING SEE NOTE

C806
1

R888 R889
1 1/4W 1/4W

WARNING SEE NOTE

JW08

PAGE 9-1

PAGE 9-1

TO POWER AMPLIFIER BOARD CP756


1

TO FRONT BOARD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FROM SMPS BOARD CN434 CP751


3

3.3VAC-

A_GND

U_GND

-27V

U_GND

P/C

P/D

P/D

5.5V

2 3 4 5 6

3.3VAC+

VEE

P/C

5.5V

SW751

CP754
1

FROM POWER CORD TO SMPS BAORD

1 PUSH_TYPE 2 C752
4N7F 250V

A_GND D751
1SS133

N L

VCC

1 2

RLY751

4 3

C751

CP755
1

TO MAIN BOARD CP757


1

SDT-SS-112DM

4N7F 250V

-15V 15V_GND +15V +5V 3.3V D_GND C671

N R753
GND

2 3

Q751
DTC114YSA

2 3 4 5 6

T1.25(EU)/S2.5(US) 250V

F751

3M3R 1W

CP753
1

TO TRANSFORMER PRIMARY

US ONLY

4700uf 50V

D665
+ -

63V 22NF

~1

C669

C672

~2

4700uf 50V

63V 22NF

MAIN+ A_GND MAIN-

CN4A
1

C670

2 3

FROM TRANSFORMER SECONDARY

R667
100R 1/4W

10uF 35V

C675

R668
100R 1/4W

10UF C698 D667 C674 UZ27V

50v 100nf 7V5

KTA1273Y 50V

Q655

R665
35V 10uF

R664
50v 100nf 100R 1W

1N4003

-33VAC D663 R661


63V 22NF

CN4B
1

220R 1/4W

MAIN2+
1R 1W

R666

10KR 1/4W

D666

27V

C676

C673

47OUF 35V

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C699 D660 D662


1N4003

A_GND MAIN2MAIN3+ MAIN33.3VAC+ 3.3VAC-

1000uf 16V

C667

-15V

470uf 16V

C668

100NF 50V

OUT 3 C677 C678

IC657
78M15

1N4003

C661

EU: jumper US: resistor

2 GND

IN 1

C663 C664

2200uf 25V

D661

1N4003

1N4003

D659

63V 22NF

C662

EU: jumper US: resistor R660 EU: jumper US: resistor


1R 1W

100NF 50V 3 2 79M05/15

1 GND

OUT

C679 C660

VO

KIA78R33/15PI 4

IC656 3

IC658

IN

470UF 25V

GNDCON

VIN

R659

R657
4R7 1W 1N4003

R656
1R 1W

47UF 100NF 35V 50V

1K0R 1/4W

C659

47UF 100NF 35V 50V

2 GND C680

OUT 3

IC655
78M05

C657

IN 1

100UF 16V

R658
4R7 1W

D658 D657

1N4003 1N4003

D656

C658

C656

100UF 16V

2200UF 22NF 25V 50V

C655

1N4003

D655

1R 1W

R655

EU: jumper

US: resistor

R502L
56k 1/16W

FILENAME:crkd2109.SCH
R552
Q504 R517L

to main BD

C501L
AUDIO_L

C502L

C503L
22uF 50V

7.5k 1/16W

IC502 C506L BA4560 7


0.47uf 50V 1K 1/16W

R507L

R508L
1K 1/16W

C507L
2u2F 50V
100V

R502
100 1W

10K 1/16W
1n2F

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

R503L

C513L

6
470K 1/16W

2N5551

R518L

D504 R505L
1/16W 12K

R501L

R506L R512L R509L


8.2k 1/16W
3P

56k 1/16W

Q503
47K

56K 1/16W

100K 1/16W

1/16W

COL

0.5W

50V

3.3K 1/16W

R530

C504

C508L

50V 470pF

47UF

1.5K 1/4W

R551
Q505 R517R
2N5551

C504L

C511L

50V

R511L

10

C505L
220P 50V

BASE KRC114S EMIT

12

-VCC

-VH

-VL
10K 1/16W
50V

7.5k 1/16W

1uF 50V

56K

C513R

C504R

1n2F

1uF 50V

EMIT KRC114S BASE 47K

3.3K 1/16W

Q502

R518R

39k
R541

COL

R501R

100P

COL

56k 1/16W

R503R

R512R

100K 1/16W

470K 1/16W

C508R

R509R

BASE

18
C510L

CH2_IN

R513L

R515L
4.7R 1W

CH2_O-

0R22x2 (5W)

50V 470pF

56K 1/16W

50V 220n

KRA102S

EMIT 3

C512L

50V

AMP
CH2_NF

11

1/16W
L503R
5UH

C501R
AUDIO_R

C502R

IC502 C503R 3 C506R BA4560 2 R505R


12K 22uF 50V

Q501

C509L
220uF 10V

R510L
560 1/16W

L501L

C515R

50V 220n

55048920.S20

1W 4.7R

R506R
1/16W 8.2k 220P

1N4148

C516

1W 4.7R

56k

C509R

R535

10K 1/16W

C514R

C512

47uf 16V

BA4560 GND 4

10

100r 1/16W

100P

560 1/16W

R533

C510R

C512R

15

CH1_NF

CH1_O-

0R22x2 (5W)

50V 220n

C513

L501R

100uF 16V
1/16W

22K

L501

1/16W

R507

R511R

C511R

R505

R506

BRO RED +

13

C561

50V

27K 1/16W

-VH

27K 1/16W

56K

KTA1271

R508

27K 1/16W

27K 1/16W

+VCC

+VH

+VL
0.5W

22UF 25V

Q521

3P

R511
1/16W

Q507 KTC3875GR

1K 1/16W

D503

to n804

1/16W

10K R509

p804

+VH
R504
1/4W 3.3k

R555

2.2K

Q509
KTC2804

1/16W

D508

10V

gnd

C508

R503

C502 R512 C507


4K7 KTC3875GR 470uF

15k

R540

7.5V

BLK
50V

25V

R510

470R

C811 C806
250v

-VL
-

Q508

47uF

3300UF

47UF 100V

2.7K

1/16W

1/16W 1/16W

C816

100nf

100nf

250v

G5SBA-600V AC2

C817

2.2k

14

3UH

1/16W

470uH

R554

R514

C501

CH1_IN

16V 10k

CH1_O+

TO X'FORMER BOARD

Q513
2N5551
1

ECO
KTA1271

AC1

3300UF

C818

220N

R522

250v

100nf

C812

22K 1/16W

D102

R518

1W 100

FAN
R520 Q514
22K 1/16W

Q511

50V

16V

R516

C813

N801

R521

2N5401

JW01

10K 1/16W

+
VVV T200mA-65V.

1
ST-BY
10K 1/16W

R519

1/16W 10K

820R

C510

2N5551

Q515 N800
2N5401

R524

D819

D809

+VL

Q512 KTC3875GR

TO BOTTOM

100K 1/16W

ICP1

1N4148

Q516

100uF 25V

250v 100nf

R523

R515

100 1/16W

C815

R517

1/4W

D507

N802

100nf

250v

22K 1/16W

PROTECTOR

1n4001

1n4001

US:JUMPER EU: 1N4001. +10V TO MOTOER AND Q411


D502
1N4002
12V

P006B

1N5392

1N5392

D813

D812

IN 3 ADJUST
1

OUT 2 R804
1/21W 100

JP804

KTA1273Y Q802

1N4001

0.27R 1W

R810
2
D815
1N5392 1N5392

IC503
C824
10V 220U

3.8V-

KTC3875GR Q801 C825


50V 100uf

D814

3.8V+

3
25V 33300UF

R526 10K 1/16W

R539 1/4W R525


820R 10K

250v

C822

P006A
250v

1/16W

C820

R803

N803

10V 10U

R805
1/4w 2.2K

240R 1/4w

TUNER-12V
D810
-30V

C823

7.5V

D816

100nf

C819

100nf

R806

P005

1 to N701

10K

1/16W
R824
1/4W 1R

R801

100 1/4W
1/4W 100

to newo5

1/4W
1R

R823

R802

SPK
MUTE -30V

R536

1/16W

AMP

4.7R 1W

5uh

NJ501

220U

50V

R510R

STK412.PRT

R513R

R515R

50V 220n

L503L

1n2F

IC502

220uF 10V

VCC

C515L

50V

REL1

SUB_GND

CMPR+

R516R

50V

C505R

R553

R502R

STK412-010

220u 25V

1/16W

10K

5UH

L504L

5UH

33K 1/16W

16

1/16W

1/16W

MUTE

BIAS

IC501

D501

R501

OSA-SS-212DM3

R516L

KTC3875GR

CMPR-

L504R

R507R

1n2F

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

1
0.47uf 50V

17

10

3UH

C514L

1/16W 1K

R508R
1K 1/16W

C507R
2u2F 50V

KTC3203Y

Q506

Q520

50V

CH2_O+

+ + + +

LA4270

AC INPUT

TO MAIN PCB

TO SPK PCB

R600
100R

R601
10K

R602
1K

L603L
6.5UH
C601L 6 7 3 2

100NF 50V

RN1408 Q601 3
10K 25V 470uF 1

L602 L603R
6.5UH
100NF

5 4 1 C601R
50V

NJ504

R612R

C605R 8 D601
4.7V

7 IC601 LM4809

6.5UH

C515

470uF 10V

GND

GND

P401

P402

1
AUDIO-R

4 C605L
470uF 25V

C611R C604
GND 6 50V 4.7UF 50V

AUDIO-L 5

R611L

1K

2U2

N402

R611R

1K

10K 2U2

R612L

C611L
HP/IN 4 50V C810 3300uf 63v

NJ516

AUX IN

H/P-MUTE 3

+7V 2 100NF

C801
TO POWER AMP BD 250V GND 1

D101

GBU8J-8A-600V
2 to p804

N805

3
1 100NF

C802
250V

C809

1
100NF

3300uf 63v

C804
250V

N804

PROJECT NOTES

PROJECT NOTES

PROJECT NOTES

PROJECT NOTES

PROJECT NOTES

RS2605 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES


Operating Conditions
Unless otherwise noted, the following conditions must be observed: 1. Chassis must be operated from a 120VAC isolation transformer, with line voltage set to 120VAC (2.0V). 2. Controls (volume, balance, tone, etc.) should be set to mid position 3. Procedures must be performed in the sequence given. 4. A 10X probe must be used for oscilloscope and frequency measurements. 5. Minimum warm-up time is 10 minutes

RS2605 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES


FM IF ALIGNMENT
Test Points: Input: Output: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. TP 001 TP 003 TP001G (RFGND) TP001G (AGND)

FM OSCILLATOR AND RF ALIGNMENT


Test Points: Input: TP001 Output: TP007/TP008 Tuning(VT):TP002 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
10.80

FM STEREO ALIGNMENT
Test Points: Input: Output: TP001 TP005 TP001G (RFGND) IC001 Pin26 (DGND)

Required Test Equipment


PC (or LAPTOP) with 16 MEG Memory, VGA Monitor, one 3 1/2 floppy drive, 540 Meg or larger hard drive, compatible mouse, one parallel port dedicated for service interface box and one port for mouse, Windows 95, 4X CD ROM, Printer and Sound Card. Isolation Transformer: Digital Voltmeter: Range .1V DC to 1000V DC, Accuracy: .5%/ True RMS Voltmeter: Range: 01 to 1000 Volts .5% Accuracy DC Voltage Supply: Range: 0 to 50V, 2AWell Filtered Temperature Controlled Soldering Station: Grounded Tip TypeTip Temperature 500F to 800F Adjustable Frequency Counter: Range: 50Hz to 100 MHz Sensitivity: 25mV to 5V. Equipped with Lo-Cap Probe (10:1 Attenuation) AC Variac: Continuously Variable. Isolation Type Preferred NTSC Video Signal Generator: Must provide 1V P-P Negative Sync, Video into 75-OHM input. Produce, standard NTSC 75% Saturated Color Bars with 100% White Window. (B&K 1249, or equivalent) RF Signal Generator: 100 kHz to 150 MHz .1V RMS, Int. Mod. 1KHz 30% TAG001 Tuner Alignment Generator (stock # 215568) or equivalent: Equivalent Generator must have RF output capabilities for cable channels 1-125. Cross Hatch Generator: Must have RF output. S-Video Source: Must provide standard Y-C separated signal. SVHS output of VCR, DSS or DVD will suffice Dual Trace, Delayed Sweep Oscilloscope: 25 MHz with Channel invert capability. Sensitivity 5mV/cm Maximum Sweep Rate: .1us/cm. Hot Air Desoldering Station: MTS TV Stereo Generator: Must produce L-R, L+R, SAP at 300 Hz, 1KHz, 8KHz(B&K 2009, or equivalent).

Connect an FM IF signal to TP001 (FM_IN) through a 1nF capacitor in series with a 10K resistor. Connect an Oscilloscope to the IF signal output at TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) through a 4.7 uF capacitor. Align TF006 to obtain a clear display on the oscilloscope without any interference. Ensure that the curve is not saturated. Tune the set to 98.10 MHz Apply an un-modulated mono RF signal at 98.10 MHz with RF input level of 1 mV. Connect a frequency counter to TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) thru a capacitor 0.1 uF Check TP003 and align TF006 to get 10.7 MHz 10 KHz.

TP001G (RFGND) TP001G (AGND) TP001G (AGND)

Set frequency to 87.5 MHz. Adjust FM Osc coil (L004) to obtain 1.0 to 1.05V at TP002 (VT). Set frequency to 108.10 MHz. Adjust Vari-Cap (CV002) to obtain 7.0V 0.5 at TP002. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above until the band coverages falls within the specified VT voltage. Feed a FM RF signal to a matching balanced pad of (50 ohm - 75 ohm) at TP 001 and RFGND. Use the circuit in figure 3 to detect the signal from TP 007/008. Set frequency to 90.10 MHz and adjust L003 until maximum amplitude is reached. Set frequency to 106.10 MHz to see whether approximate amplitude is the same as in step 6. Set frequency to 98.10 MHz and check for approximate amplitude.
GENESCOPE

TUNER SECTION FM Signal Generator 98.10MHz RV-001

TP-001 TP-001G TP-005 TP-010 TP-006 Frequency Counter 152.000kHz

FIGURE 4

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

TUNER SECTION

TP-001

1 nF 10K 10.70 4.7uF 10.60 IN


Figure 1.

TP-001G TP-003 TP-001G OUT

TUNER TP-001
Figure 2.

1.00V DC Voltmeter

TP-001G TP-001G TP-002 TP-007/008 TP-001G

4.7uF

7.

Apply an un-modulated mono RF signal at 98.10 MHz with RF input level of 1 mV. Search to 98.10 MHz (Remove the VT probe during search) Connect a 10K from TP005 to GND. Connect a frequency counter to TP005 (Pin 24 of IC001), short TP010 (Pin 27 of IC001) to DGND ground (Pin 26 of IC001). Check TP005 and align RV001 to get 152 KHz 1 KHz. Apply a stereo 98.10 MHz signal, <32 dB, to the set. Ensure the Stereo indicator lights up. Remove the 10K resistor from TP005 installed in step

FIGURE 3

IN

OUT

Page 3-1

Page 3-2

RS2605 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES


AUTO STOP ALIGNMENT Test Points: Input: TP001 Output: TP003 1. 2. 3. 4.

RS2605 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES


AM IF AND AFC ALIGNMENT AM RF ALIGNMENT
Test Points: Input: Output: 1. 2. AM Antenna Loop TP007/TP008 TP001G (RFGND) PIN 4 (AGND) Test Points: Input: Output: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

TP001G (RFGND) TP004G (IF GND)

AM Antenna Loop IC001 Pin10

TP001G (RFGND) Pin 4 (AGND)

Tune the set to 98.10Mhz. Apply a 38 dbf, 98.10 Mhz singnal from the signal generator to the antenna input through a matching balanced pad. Short TP10 (Pin 27 of IC001) to Vdd TP006 (Pin 23 of IC001) Check the voltage at TP005 for a low (<1.0 v at 98.10 Mhz. Veire the signal generator + 50 Mhz (98.15 Mhz) the voltage at TP005 should go hi, >4.0. Then verie the signal generator -50 Mhz (98.05 Mhz) and the voltage at TP005 should go high.

Connect an AM IF signal to AM OSC, pin 6 of IC001. Detect the output signal at Pin 10 (IC001) as shown below in figure 5. Adjust TF005 & TF008 until maximum amplitude is reached Send an un-modulated RF signal at 1000 KHz with RF level of 100mV. Tune the receiver to search up/down (remove the VT probe during search). It will stop after acquiring this signal. Connect a frequency counter to Pin 36 of IC001 thru a capacitor 1uF Check Pin 36 of IC001 and align TF007 to get 450 KHz 1 KHz.

Apply a modulated (400 Hz) MW RF signal at 630 KHz with low RF level of 300 uV. Detect the signal from TP 007/008 and adjust TF001 for the maximum amplitude.

MAIN BOARD TAPE ALIGNMENT


Alignment for the cassette portion should be done at the semi - encased stage.

AZIMUTH ALIGNMENT
1. 2. 3. 4. In tape transport 1, playback a test tape (TCC-153) freq. 10 KHz. Connect the speaker outputs to a dual trace oscilloscope. Adjust the azimuth screw at the tape head to obtain the maximum amplitude on both channels. (Both channels must be in phase). Repeat the above procedure with tape transport 2.

T U N E RS E C T IO N F M S i g n a lG e n e r a t o r 9 8 . 1 0 M H z T P -0 0 5 P -0 1 0 G T P -0 0 1 T T P -0 0 1 G T P -0 1 0 T P -0 0 3 T P -0 0 6T P -0 0 4 G D CV o ltm e t e r 4 . 0 0 V T F -0 0 6 S i gG e nF r e q T P 0 0 5 V oltage 9 8 . 0 5M H z H igh >4 .0V 9 8 . 1 0M H z L o w <1 .0V 9 8 . 1 5M H z H igh >4 .0V

TUNER
1 0 . 7 0M H Z

TAPE SPEED ADJUSTMENT


1uF

F r e q u e n c yC o u n t e r

PIN 6 TP001G PIN 10 PIN 4

1. 2. 3. 4.
IN FIGURE 5 OUT

F I G U R E 4

4.7uF

5.

AM OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT
Test Points: Input: AM Antenna Loop Output: TP007/TP008 Tuning(VT):TP002 1. 2 3. TP001G (RFGND) TP001G (AGND) TP001G (AGND)
445

Rewind the test tape (MTT-111 DN 3khz) until both the spools on the left and right hubs are equal. Connect the output to the WOW -FLUTTER METER. Adjust the trimmer in the motor to obtain a playback freq. of 3KHz 60 Hz. Stop transport 1 and playback the same test tape on transport 2. Check the output and ensure the output is the same as transport 1, if not, repeat the item 3

455

Set frequency to 530 KHz . Adjust MW Osc coil (TF003) to obtain 1.4 0.05V at TP 002. Set frequency to 1710 KHz . Ensure the MW-VT at TP002 is 8.0 1 V

450

Page 3-3

Page 3-4

27

58

26

36 17 18

IC300

N3

MP3
N1

1 A

10

11
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in F 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

R003 2R2

J200

TO CAROUSEL MOTOR BOARD N027


+V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 PLAT-SW GND DISC-SW CRSMTR2 CRSMTR1

SVCC

VCTL
3

4 C002 100nF 25V

N705 TO KEY BOARD


1 2 3 4
SLIDER1 SLIDER2 PLATTERPLATTER+ PLAT-SW DISC-SW DRAW1

D001 5V6 1/2W

VIN1

GND

VO1

FAN8082

IC01

PVCC

VIN2

VO2

SLIDER1

3 4

COL

PI01 RPI-574
KAT ANO

SLIDER POSITION SENSORS


SLIDER2 COL

EMIT

2 1

5 6 7

PI02 RPI-574
KAT ANO

R005 100

3 4

EMIT

2 1 R002 100

R004 2R2

SVCC

PVCC

VIN2

FROM CDM5B DRIVER BOARD

VO2

VCTL

1 5 4 3 2

5 6 7 8 9

GND SDATA MDATA CD-RESET CD-ENABLE C006 10nF 50V CD_RESET 2 1

M74HCT32

GND SD MDATA

IC04

RESET 3 GND +5V CD-L AGND CD-R

N706 TO KEY BOARD

5 4 3 2 1

N102 TO MAIN BOARD


1 2 3
CD-L AGND CD-R

GND +12V L001 39uH D005 1N4002 C005 1000uF 16V GND 2 1 3 OUT D006 IN 1N4002

GND +V1CC

NBC02
2 1

N101 FROM AMP BOARD

5V

Q001 KTA1270Y

D003 1N4002

D004 1N4002

Q003 KTA1270Y

CDM5B DRIVER BOARD


J

IC03 KIA7805A

C007 470uF 10V

R012 100K Q002 KTC3198GR

R009 330

R013 100K R008 10K R010 10K

R011 330 Q004 KTC3198GR

TO TCM150

TO DSP BOARD

M74HCT32

P003

TO DSP BOARD

ANO

EMIT

PI06 3 RPI-5744

KAT

COL

DRAWER BD

2 1

3 2 1

DRAWER POSITION N006


3 2 1
DRAW2 DRAWER+ DRAWERSCLK

VIN1

GND

VO1

FAN8082 3

IC02

M74HCT32 GND 7

IC04

14 VCC

IC04

4 5

M74HCT32

1 ANO 2 KAT

PI05 RPI-574

EMIT 4 COL 3

4 C004 100nF 25V SCLK 11

DRWMTR2 DRWMTR1

P024
1 2

DRAWER MOTOR M

D002 5V6 1/2W

(CIRCLE)

IC04 13
M74HCT32

12

1 2 3 4

SDATA8

IC04 10

CLK

P004

RS2605 3

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY SUBINDEX

Top Cover Removal Side Panel Removal Back Panel Removal CD Mechanism Removal

2-1

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Top Cover Removal Note: Perform all disassembly procedures in the order presented. When reassembling, use the reverse procedure. Make sure that all leads/wiring are routed correctly when reassembling. 1. Remove five (5) screws located on back side of the unit as shown in figure 1. Also, remove two (2) screws on top of the unit (not shown).

Remove (5) screws.

Fig. 1 Top Cover Removal

2-2

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Top Cover Removal (Cont'd) 2. Remove top panel by lifting upward from rear and separating tabs from backside of front plate as shown in figure 2.

Top Cover

Side Panel

Back Panel

Fig. 2 Top Cover Removal

2-3

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Side Panel Removal 1. Remove top cover. 2. Remove three (3) screws from either side of unit as shown in figure 3.

Remove (12) screws in all, located on back and sides of Side Panels.

Fig. 3 Side Panel Removal

2-4

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Back Panel Removal 1. Remove Top Cover. 2. Remove Side Panels. 3. Remove thirteen (13) screws from back of unit as shown in figure 4. 4. Lift CD tray to release tabs on back panel as shown in figure 5.

Remove the (13) remaining screws.

Fig. 5 Back Panel Removal

2-5

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
CD Mechanism Removal 1. Plug unit in and extend the CD Tray, while extended,, unplug the unit. 2. Remove Top Cover. 3. Remove Side Panels. 4. Remove Back Panel 5. Remove one (1) screw from CD Arm Stop as shown in figure 6.

CD Tray

CD Arm Remove (1) screw.

Rear of unit
Fig. 6 CD Mechanism Removal

2-6

INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
CD Mechanism Removal (Cont'd) 6. Remove four (4) screws from CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 7. 7. Release one (1) wire from catch on bottom of CD Tray. 8. Release CD Mechanism Assembly from mount by pulling towards the rear and lifting gently. 9. Remove one (1) wire from CD Mechanism Assembly.

CD Mechanism Assembly Remove (4) screws.

CD Arm

Fig. 7 Front Panel Removal

2-7

IC FUNCTION
RS2605

AUDIO SYSTEM: CASSETTE DRAWER: IC01 FAN8082 IC02 FAN8082 IC03 KIA7805A IC04 M74HCT32 MAIN BOARD: IC001 TEA5757H IC300 AN7348K IC302 BA7755A IC401 TDA7440D IC601 BH3544F POWER SUPPLY: IC501 LM4766

FUCTION: Motor Drive Motor Drive Voltage Regulator Quad Nan Gate AM/FM IC Cassette Driver Switch Tone Control and Audio Processor Headphone Amp

DATA SHEET Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y

Power Amplifier

FRONT PANEL and KEYBOARD: IC701 IC703 IC704 MP3: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 TMS320vc5416 WM8725ED M29W800AT90N1 BA4558F TPS76316DBVR TPS76333DBVR MP3 and DTS Processor D to A Converter Flash Memory Switch Voltage regulator Voltage regulator Y N N Y N N uPD780208GF M24C64-WMN6 BU4094BCF Micro controller EEPROM Shift register Y Y Y

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 2

IMPORTADOR Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5 0151

EXPORTER Thomson multimedia Inc. P.O. Box 1976 Indianapolis, IN 46206-1976 2002 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) Depose(s) 55330040 (EN/F/E) www.rca.com www.rca.com/LatinAmerica Printed In China / Impreso en China

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 3

u s e r m a n

DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY


STANDBY

OPEN/CLOSE

DIMMER / DEMO

TIMER ROCK /CLASSIC CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ

CLOCK

PROG/SET

VOLUME
W DO
TUNE/PRESET BOOKMARK

UP

BASS BOOST

TH

UMB

UP

SOURCE

DISC SKIP

PLAYLIST

CD DISP /FM ST FILE SEARCH


THU

O.K. REPEAT BAND AUTO PROG.


MB DOWN

RS2605
It is important to read this instruction book prior to using your new product for the first time. Es importante leer este manual antes de usar por vez primera su euipo.

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 4

FCC Information
FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.
Have a Blast- Just Not in Your Eardrums Make sure you turn down the volume on the unit before you put on headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level only after headphones are in place.

Technical specification
Product: 5CD MP3 Audio System Brand: RCA Model: RS2605

Electrical Consumption:
Power Supply: 120V 60 Hz Power consumption: 230 Watts IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5

For Your Safety


The AC power plug is polarized (one blade is wider than the other) and only fits into AC power outlets one way. If the plug wont go into the outlet completely, turn the plug over and try to insert it the other way. If it still wont fit, contact a qualified electrician to change the outlet, or use a different one. Do not attempt to bypass this safety feature.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN


CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USERS E RV I C E A B L E PA R T S I N S I D E . R E F E R S E RV I C I N G TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. THE EXCLAMATION POINT WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF I M P O R TA N T INSTRUCTIONS A C C O M PA N Y I N G T H E P R O D U C T.

CAUTION

THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT.

SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM / BACK OF PRODUCT

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL


SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 5

Safety Information
For Your Records
In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No.

Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.

EN

Table of Contents
FCC Information Safety Information Getting Started . . . . . . .3
Unpacking the system . . . . . . . .3 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Searching Through a CD . . .8 Shuffling the Play Order . . .8 Sampling Tracks . . . . . . . . . . .8 Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 CD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Troubleshooting Tips . .13 Maintenance . . . . . . . .14


Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Handling CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Cleaning CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 CD Lens Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . .9
The MusicMatch Jukebox . . . . .9 File Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Playing a MP3 disc . . . . . . . . . . .9 File Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Adding Songs to a Playlist . . .10 Playing a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . .10 Deleting Files in a Playlist . . . .10 Thumb Up Playlist . . . . . . . . . .10 Thumb Down Playlist . . . . . . .10

General Controls . . . . . .4
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Important Information 15
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . .15 Important Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Headset Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Dont Infringe . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Technical Specification . . . . . .15

Display Settings
Showing the Demonstration . .6 Setting Clock / Timer . . . . . . . . .6 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . .6 Setting the Timer . . . . . . . . .6 Activating the Timer . . . . . . .6 Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Selecting Tuner Band . . . . . . .11 Tuning to a Station . . . . . . . . .11 Using Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Auto Preset Programming . .11 Manually Setting Presets . . . .11 Suppressing Stereo Signal . . .11

Limited Warranty (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Limited Warranty (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . .18

Sound Features . . . . . . .7
Using Preset Equalizer Curves .7 Bass Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Muting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 X-Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

CD Player
Notes on CD-R/RW Disc . . . . . . .7 Loading Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Play and Load Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . .8 Skipping a Disc . . . . . . . . . . .8

Tape Player
Playing a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 From Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 From CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Tape to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . .12 From an Auxiliary Input . . .12

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 6

Getting Started
EN Unpacking the system:
You should have the following: one main unit (with 2 main speakers); one remote control; one AM loop antenna; T-Type FM antenna wire; one users guide; one safety leaflet. Owner and registration Card MusicMatch CD Rom
Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection

Push terminal tab down to insert wire.

Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.

NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the Antenna and speaker wires at all connection points.

Back View Installation


To ensure sufficient ventilation, keep the spacings shown below free from other surfaces:
4 inches

FM 75

DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM

4 inches

4 inches
STANDBY

AM LOOP

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY


OPEN/CLOSE

DIMMER / DEMO

TIMER ROCK /CLASSIC

CLOCK

PROG/SET

IN

VOLUME
CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ

OUT

3 4

AUX

W DO
TH

UP

BASS BOOST

UMB

UP

TUNE/PRESET

BOOKMARK

SOURCE

DISC SKIP

PLAYLIST

CD DISP /FM ST FILE SEARCH


THU
MB DOWN

O.K.

L
SURROUND SPEAKERS 8

REPEAT

BAND AUTO PROG.

5
MAIN SPEAKERS 6

Front View 1. FM Antenna Jacks 2. AM Loop Antenna Connector 3. Auxiliary Connector 4. Surround Speaker Jacks 5. Main Speaker Jacks

4 inches

2 inches

Side View

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 7

General Controls
Main Unit
DISC SKIP Skips to the next CD in the tray. DISC 1 - DISC 5 Selects disc 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 and starts playback automatically. STOP / TUNE / PRESET Stops CD track, Sets tune or preset mode. PLAY/PAUSE Plays or pauses CD SKIP FORWARD Increments radio frequency, preset up, goes to the next CD track or setting option. SKIP BACKWARD Decrements radio frequency, preset down, goes to the previous CD track or setting option. REPEAT Selects among repeat modes. BAND/AUTO PROG. Changes between FM and AM tuner bands. Enters auto preset program in FM mode. ROCK/CLASSIC, CUSTOM/FLAT, POP/JAZZ selects among the different EQ modes. X-SURROUND Press once to activate XSurround. PLAYLIST - MP3 Playback - activates playlist operation. O.K. - MP3 Playback - confirms playlist selection and file search input. THUMB UP - MP3 Playback - selects previous MP3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb up playlist. THUMB DOWN - MP3 Playback - selects next MP3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb down playlist. LEFT - Goes up one folder from current folder. RIGHT - enters current folder and show the first song/folder from current folder. CD DISP / FM ST - MP3 Playback - Toggles ID3 TAG; Toggle track elapsed/track remain/Disc elapsed/Disc remain time for CDDA playback; In Tuner mode - Enable/disable FM TUNER STEREO RECEPTION. FILE SEARCH - MP3 Playback - activates file search input mode. BASS BOOST Turns BASS BOOST on or off VOLUME Increases/ decreases volume.
OPEN/CLOSE

EN

DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM

STANDBY

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

DIMMER / DEMO

TIMER ROCK /CLASSIC

CLOCK

PROG/SET

VOLUME
CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ

W DO
TH
UMB

UP

BASS BOOST

UP

TUNE/PRESET

BOOKMARK

SOURCE

DISC SKIP

PLAYLIST

CD DISP /FM ST FILE SEARCH


THU
MB DOWN

O.K. REPEAT BAND AUTO PROG.

STANDBY/POWER Turns power on or off (STANDBY mode).

Tip: In STANDBY mode (press POWER off), the system displays the time. Press POWER to turn the system on in the previously used mode. Press CD, TAPE, or TUNER (Remote Only) to select the corresponding mode. Look at the display icons to identify the current mode.
PHONES Jack for connecting headphones OPEN/CLOSE Opens or closes the disc tray. DIMMER/DEMO Adjusts display brightness; Turns the feature demonstration on or off. TIMER Enters timer setting mode and turns the timer on/off. CLOCK Shows clock time and enters clock setting mode. PROG./SET / BOOKMARK - Enters program mode for CD and Tuner; Applies new settings for Clock and Timer modes. Stores clock/timer settings, reset tape counter. MP3 Playback - Press to select thumb up playback or Thumb down skip playback in CD STOP mode. SOURCE Selects the CD player / tuner / tape player / external source.

Tape Player
RECORD PLAY REWIND FAST-FORWARD

STOP/EJECT PAUSE

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 8

General Controls
EN Remote Control
NUMBER/CHARACTER KEYS Accesses different tracks directly, input initial key characters in file search mode.
1/ 2/ABC 3/DEF 4/GHI 5/JKL

6/MNO

7/PQRS

8/TUV

9/WXYZ

TIMER CLOCK
EQ

MUTE

BAND

B . BOO ST

WE PO R

UR C E SO

PREV

NEXT

VOL
PR ES ET
ET ES PR

NE TU

TU NE

VOL
REW F FWD

PE

N /C L O S

ST OP

DIS

C S KI P

S LE E

P
DISC 5

DISC 1 DISC 2 DISC 3

DISC 4 PROG./SET

INTRO

REPEA T

SHUFFLE BOOKMARK

FILE SEARCH

PLAYLIST

HOME

CD DISPLA Y /FM ST

UP/ THUMB UP

OK

LEFT

DOWN/ THUMB DOWN

RIGHT

CLOCK - Enters clock setting mode. TIMER - Enters timer setting mode; Activates and deactivates timer. MUTE - mutes sound. BAND - In Tuner mode - Selects radio band. X SURROUND - Activates X Surround. POWER - Turns power on or off from STANDBY mode. EQ - Selects among different equalizer preset (Flat, Rock, Pop, Jazz, Classic and Custom). B. BOOST - Turns on/off enhancement of the bass sound. SOURCE - Selects Tuner, Tape, CD or Aux. VOL+ or VOL- - Increases/ decreases volume. PLAY/PAUSE - Plays current CD; pauses CD playback. PRESET / PREV - In programming mode - Goes to the previous preset location; In CD mode - Goes to the previous CD track. PRESET / NEXT - In programming mode - Goes to the next preset location; In CD mode - Goes to the next CD track. TUNE / REW - In Tuner mode - Moves back in radio frequency. TUNE /F FWD - In Tuner mode - Moves forward in radio frequency. OPEN/CLOSE - In CD mode - Opens and closes disc tray. STOP - In CD mode - Stops CD playback. DISK SKIP - Skips to the next disc. SLEEP - selects the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off. DISC 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 - Directly selects and plays disc. INTRO - Turns INTRO mode on or off to play the first 10 seconds of each track. REPEAT - Repeats a track, CD, or all CDs. SHUFFLE - Turns on/off random playback. PROG./SET / BOOKMARK (MP3 only) - Enters program mode for CD and Tuner; Applies new settings for Clock and Timer modes. In MP3 mode - Goes to bookmark FILE SEARCH (MP3 only) - activates file search input mode. PLAYLIST (MP3 only) - activates playlist operation. HOME (MP3 only) - Back to the root directory of the current disc CD DISPLAY / FM ST - In MP3 mode - Toggles ID3 TAG In CD mode - Selects the choice of displaying Track elapsed time, track remaining time, CD elapse time or CD remaining time. In Tuner mode - Toggles between FM stereo and mono. UP / THUMB UP (MP3 only) - selects previous MP3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb up playlist. DOWN / THUMB DOWN (MP3 only) - selects next Mp3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb down playlist. OK (MP3 only) - confirms playlist selection and file search input. LEFT (MP3 only) Goes up one folder from current folder. RIGHT (MP3 only) - enters current folder and show the first song/folder from current folder. Note: Cassette functions can not be operated from the remote control.

Battery Size: AAA or UM-4 or R03

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 9

Display Settings
EN
SURROUND PROG INTRO FM ST PLAYLIST FILE ARTIST FOLDER ALBUM BASS BOOST GENRE
MIX SHUFFLE
1

TAPE 2 SLEEP

DISC

TIMER REPEAT 1 ALL DISC

Showing the Demonstration


Not operational in CD mode. Press DIMMER/DEMO to turn on/off demonstration mode. The demonstration scrolls through all display operations.

9. Rotate the VOLUME knob on the main unit or press VOL + or VOL - on the remote control to set desired volume level. 10. Press PROG./SET to confirm and save settings. Press STOP to quit setting.

Setting Clock / Timer


Setting the Clock
1. Press and hold CLOCK until the hour flashes on the display. 2. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or PRESET / PREV or PRESET / NEXT on the remote control to select the hour. 3. Press CLOCK to shift to minute digits. 4. Follow step 2 to set the minute digits. 5. Press PROG./SET to confirm and save settings. Press STOP to quit setting. Note: When system is ON, you can press CLOCK to display the current time for about 2 seconds.

Activating the Timer


Press and release TIMER to activate and deactivate the timer. TIMER will lit when the alarm is active.

Adjusting the Display Brightness


1. Press and hold DIMMER/DEMO for more than 2 seconds. 2. While the DIMMER is displayed, press and release DIMMER/DEMO to select the desired display brightness level (DIMMER 0 - 3).

Sleep Mode
You can select the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off automatically. Press SLEEP on the remote to select among 120, 90, 60, 45, 30, 15, 5 minutes and OFF. (Remote Only)

Setting the Timer


1. Press and hold TIMER until AM 12:00 ON appears with the hour flashing (ON - timer on time) 2. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or PRESET / PREV or PRESET / NEXT on the remote control to select the hour. 3. Press TIMER to shift to minute digits. 4. Repeat step 2 to select minute digits. 5. Press TIMER to shift to timer off time setting. 6. AM 12:00 OF(timer off time) will show on the display with hour flashing. Repeat steps 2 - 4 for timer off time setting. 7. Press TIMER to select source. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or PRESET / PREV or PRESET / NEXT on the remote control to select between CD /TUNER / TAPE) 8. Press TIMER to set volume.

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 10

Sound Features
EN Using Preset Equalizer Curves
Press ROCK/CLASSIC, CUSTOM/FLAT or POP/JAZZ on the main unit or EQ on the remote to toggle among FLAT, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, CLASSICAL & CUSTOM. The display briefly shows the selection.

Bass Boost
Press BASS BOOST on the main unit or B. BOOST on the remote control to turn on/off boosting the bass frequency.

Creating a Custom Curve


1. Press CUSTOM/FLAT on the main unit or EQ on the remote control to select CUSTOM mode. 2. While CUSTOM is displayed, press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or TUNE / REW or TUNE / F FWD on the remote control to cycle among displayed bass (BAS 00) and treble (TRE 00) range levels. 3. While BAS, or TRE is displayed, press VOLUME to set the associated gain between -10 - +10.

Muting Audio
Press MUTE on the remote to cut the sound. (Remote Only)

X-Surround
Press X-SURROUND to enjoy enriched sound quality. This feature gives you: 1. Better width and depth for vocal and instrumental sound. 2. More powerful presence for studio recording. 3. Enhanced surround effects with greater flexibility in positioning speakers.

CD Player
Loading Discs
CD-R / RW

This unit is compatible with CD-RW/ CD-R discs for playback.

Notes on CD-R/RW Disc:


Do not affix any type of labels to either side (recordable or labeled side) of a CD-R/RW disc as this may result in the unit malfunctioning. To avoid damages to the CD-R/RW disc, do not open the disc compartment door while the unit is trying to read the table of contents. Do not load an unrecorded CD-R/RW disc into the unit. This may take a longer time to read the disc. Playback capability for CD-RW discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the CD-RW disc and the recorder used to create the disc.

1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD mode. 2. Press OPEN/CLOSE on the main unit to open the drawer. 3. Insert up to five discs with label face up. (Press DISC SKIP to rotate the disc carrier.) 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the drawer. Loaded disc position icon lights.

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 11

CD Player
Playing Discs
Press PLAY/PAUSE to begin or pause play, and STOP to stop play. Select a specific disc by pressing DISC 1 - DISC 5. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or PRESET / PREV or PRESET / NEXT on the remote control to select a specific track.

Shuffling the Play Order


Press SHUFFLE to turn on/off the playing of tracks in random order. (Remote Only)

EN

Sampling Tracks
Press INTRO to play the first 10 seconds of each track on the current disc, all discs in the tray, or turn INTRO mode off. (Remote Only) Repeat Press REPEAT to repeat the current track, current disc, all discs, or turn REPEAT mode off. Note: You may also press REPEAT to select 1 disc or all discs before activating INTRO & SHUFFLE functions.

Play and load simultaneously by:


1. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the tray while a CD is playing 2. Load/change discs for available trays by pressing DISC SKIP. 3. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the tray.

Skipping a Disc
Press DISC SKIP.

CD Display
Searching Through a CD
Press and hold SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or TUNE / REW or TUNE / F FWD on the remote control to search through a CD while it is playing. Press CD DISP / FM ST to select among different CD display options: Track remaining time, Track elapsed time, disc remaining time or disc elapsed time.

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 12

MP3 Player
EN The MusicMatch Jukebox
This music management software, to be installed on your PC, allows you to compress music files recorded from your audio CDs into MP3 format and stores them on your PC. It makes the search and download of Internet music easier, It allows for the management of compressed music and the creation of your own playlist, The Jukebox is a true audio player installed on your PC, It gives access to thousands of net radios available on the web today. You can download music files encoded in MP3 from several Internet sites like www.mp3.com.

File Navigation
LEFT - Goes up one folder from current folder. RIGHT - Enters current folder and shows the first song/folder from current folder. UP/THUMB UP - Selects previous file/folder; press and hold the key to save current song to Thumb up playlist. DOWN/THUMB DOWN - Selects next file/folder; press and hold the key to save current song to Thumb down playlist. OK- confirms playlist operation and file search input. HOME (available by remote control only) - Back to the first folder( or root directory) of the current disc(MP3 disc stop only) FILE SEARCH - activates file search input mode. PLAYLIST - activates playlist operation. CD DISP/FMST - Toggles ID3 TAG when playing MP3 music. Press to view among the following: File Name, Album, Artist, Genre, Year and Bit Rate.

Note for playing MP3 Disc


Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference. For better quality in MP3 disc playback, the CD quality should be recorded 128kbps or above. For UDF format (e.g. disc by Direct CD), please enable CDROM access after burning the disc when using CDR. Disc data size > 650MB is not recommended. Total files and folders in the disc should not exceed 250, it also depends on the length of the file/folder names. Playback capability for CD-RW discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the CD-RW disc and the recorder used to create the disc. For mixed mode discs, only one mode will be selected for playback depending on the recording format. To ensure good performance, wait until the disc changer completely reads the disc before proceeding. MP3 files in CD ROM EXTRA format disc cannot be recognized.

Playing a MP3 disc


1. Insert a MP3 CD into the CD tray, you will see the name of the first folder (or root directory) displayed on the screen. 2. Press the UP/THUMB UP button to select previous file/folder, and DOWN/THUMB DOWN button to select next MP3 song/folder. 3. Press RIGHT to go into a folder. 4. Press PLAY/PAUSE button to play all the songs in the folder, or use UP/ DOWN to select songs. 5. Press PLAY to play from the song selected. Note: During playback, press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or PRESET PREV / PRESET NEXT on the remote control to skip file within the same folder.

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 13

MP3 Player
File Search
It is difficult to find a song in a disc with hundreds of them. The unit provides a tool for the user to look for a desired song by specifying up to first three characters of the song name. 1. Press FILE SEARCH and use number/character keys (if using the front panel, press UP / DOWN / LEFT / RIGHT buttons instead) to select character. 2. Press RIGHT to specify the second character and then the third one. You may go back to the previous one whenever you want to make a change. 3. Press OK button to start searching. After searching, a list in alphanumeric order will be generated with the first one of those songs starting with the specified characters displayed. 4. Press UP /DOWN to check through the list. And press OK to start playing.

Deleting files in a playlist


1. When showing a file, press and hold STOP key. DELETE? will appear on the display. 2. Press OK to confirm.

EN

Deleting a playlist
1. When showing a playlist, press and hold the STOP key, the DEL PYLST? will appear on the display. Press and hold STOP again and DEL ALL will appear on the display. Continue to press and hold the key to toggle among the two option. 2. Once the correct one is selected, press OK to confirm.

Thumb Up Playlist
This is a special Playlist, which you can easily store songs into. 1. Press and hold the THUMB UP key to store the song into it, no matter if it is being played or not. 2. To activate, press BOOKMARK, press THUMB UP to select THUMB UP playlist and press OK to begin playback. The unit will play the tracks in the order that they were entered into the THUMB UP playlist.

Playlist
Adding songs to a playlist
1. Press PLAYLIST to enter the Playlist menu. 2. Select "ADD SONG?" using the DOWN button, press the OK button to confirm. 3. Select the Playlist you want(a total of 20 playlists available), press the OK button to confirm. 4. Select your desired song by using file navigation procedure, press OK button to confirm selection. 5. Press STOP key to exit the Playlist menu.

Thumb Down Playlist


It is a song list in which all the songs will be skipped while the disc is being played. 1. press and hold the THUMB DOWN button to store the song into it, no matter if it is being played or not. 2. To activate, press BOOKMARK, press THUMB DOWN to select THUMB DOWN playlist and press OK to begin playback. The unit will play existing disc and skip all the tracks inside Thumb down playlist. (Normal playback only)

Playing a playlist
1. Press the PLAYLIST key again and select the "SEL PLYLST?" item. Press the OK button to confirm. 2. Select any Playlist you want to play, all the songs in the Playlist will be played if you press the PLAY/PAUSE button. 3. You can press the OK button to get into the Playlist, playlist will be played starting from the displayed song.

10

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 14

Radio
EN
STANDBY

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY


OPEN/CLOSE

Auto Preset Programming (for FM only)


Press and hold BAND/AUTO PROG. button for 2 seconds to scan stations in FM band. The stations will then be stored as preset channels. A maximum 32 stations can be stored. Beware of your preset channels being erased accidentally because the scanning and storing process is automatic upon pressing and holding the button. You can stop the automatic scan by pressing any button, but the erased stations cannot be recovered.

DIMMER / DEMO

TIMER ROCK /CLASSIC

CLOCK

PROG/SET

VOLUME
CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ

W DO
TH
UMB

UP

BASS BOOST

UP

TUNE/PRESET

BOOKMARK

SOURCE

DISC SKIP

PLAYLIST

CD DISP /FM ST FILE SEARCH


THU

O.K. REPEAT BAND AUTO PROG.


MB DOWN

Selecting Tuner Band


1. Press SOURCE to select TUNER. 2. Press BAND to select between AM or FM radio band. Tip: Your audio system has 32 preset stations.

Manually Setting Presets


1. Press TUNE/PRESET button to enter TUNE mode. 2. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to access the desired frequency. 3. Press the PROG/SET button once. 4. The most recently accessed program location will be displayed. 5. If a different program location is preferred, press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to move to the desired preset number (1-32). 6. Press PROG/SET to store the selected frequency at that preset.

Tuning to a Station
Press SKIP BACKWARD / FORWARD on the main unit or TUNE REW /TUNE F FWD on the remote control to select frequencies.

87.50 MHz

Suppressing Stereo Signal Using Presets


The tuner can be in either TUNE or PRESET mode. When in PRESET mode, the PROG light is on. Press TUNE/PRESET on the main unit to toggle TUNE and PRESET mode. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main system or PRESET PREV or PRESET NEXT on the remote control to access the previous or next preset station. The display first shows the preset program number and after a few seconds, the frequency will be displayed. (FMPR:01 is FM preset 1) Press CD DISPLAY/ FM ST to toggle between FM mono and stereo for stereo FM stations.

PR:01

11

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 15

Tape player
EN

Playing a Tape
Tip: You can play a tape from either deck. 1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TAPE. 2. Press STOP/EJECT to open cassette door. 3. Insert a tape into the door and push the door closed. 4. Press REW /F.FWD to position the tape to the desired starting position. (Deck 1 Only) 5. Press PLAY to start playback .

From CD
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD. 3. Insert the disc(s) to be recorded. 4. Select the track, CD, or program to be recorded. 5. Press RECORD to begin recording when CD begins to play. 6. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.

Tape to Tape

Continuous Play
1. Insert a tape into deck 2 and start playback. 2. Insert a tape into deck 1 and press PLAY and PAUSE together. 3. When the tape in deck 2 finishes playback, PAUSE at deck 1 will be released automatically and start playback.

1. Insert the destination tape in deck 1. 2. Insert the source tape into deck 2. 3. Press PAUSE and then RECORD on deck 1. 4. Press PLAY on deck 2. The playback and recording start simultaneously.

From an Auxiliary Input


1. Insert the cassette in deck 1. 2. Check that the auxiliary device has been connected correctly to the AUX connector on the back of the audio system. 3. Start playback on the auxiliary device. 4. Press RECORD on deck 1 to begin recording. 5. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.

Recording
From Tuner
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TUNER and press BAND to access the desired radio band. 3. Tune to the station to be recorded. 4. Press RECORD to begin recording. 5. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.

12

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 16

Troubleshooting Tips
EN
Problem Solution
System will Check power cord for a secure not turn on connection. Unplug the unit for a moment, and then plug into power source again. Check the outlet by plugging in another device. No sound Increase the volume setting. Check connection to speakers. Check that you have selected the appropriate function: CD, TAPE, Tuner. Make sure mute is off. Check antenna connection. Move antenna. Turn off nearby electrical appliances, such as hair dryer, vacuum cleaner, microwave, fluorescent lights. Check that CD is in the tray. Check that CD label is facing up. Check that PAUSE mode is not on. Check that CD function is selected. Use CD lens cleaner. Clean the disc. Clean the disc. Check disc for warping, scratches, or other damage. Check if something is causing the system to vibrate. If so, move the system. Make sure the speakers are at least 3 feet away or on a different surface from the main unit.

Problem Solution
CD button Switch to another function (TAPE, will not Tuner) and then back to CD. respond, or does not change discs when you press DISC SKIP MP3 disc does not play Only finalized MP3 CDR/CDRW disc is accepted. MP3 format burnt by some software (such as DIRECT CD) may not run properly.

Poor radio reception

Distorted or Inspect the tape heads, clean it if noisy tape necessary. recordings Remote control does not work Check that the batteries are properly installed. Replace weak batteries. Check that the system is plugged into power source. Point the remote directly at the systems front panel. Move closer to the system. Remove any obstacles between the remote and the system.

CD does not play

CD sound skips

13

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 17

Maintenance
Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.

Handling CDs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold CDs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. CDs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) CDs

EN

Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.

CD Player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician.

Cleaning CDs
Dirty CDs can cause poor sound quality. Always keep CDs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. If a CD becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on CDs. Also, never clean CDs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface

Tape Player
To prevent deterioration of sound quality, periodically open the door of each deck and clean the magnetic heads, pinch roller, and capstan with a cotton bud dipped in alcohol. Also, demagnetize the head by playing a demagnetizing cassette (available through an audio equipment store).
Side A Protection Side B Protection
B A

To protect recordings one or both sides of a tape, remove the corresponding tab. If you later want to record on the tape, affix a piece of adhesive tape over the hole.
A

CD Lens Care
When your CD lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a CD lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the CD lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.

Quit Slacking - A little bit of slack in your tapes can cause scratches on the tape, or worse yet, the tape could break. If you notice some slack in the tape, use a pencil to tighten it up before you insert it.

14

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 18

Important Information
EN Safety Precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not use your System immediately after transporting it from a cold place to a warm place, as condensation may cause the system to malfunction. Keep your unit away from humid areas and abnormally hot places. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This compact disc player uses a laser to read the music on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. To keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens, do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.

Important Battery Information


Remove the batteries to avoid leakage if you do not use your remote control for more than one month. Discard leaky batteries immediately as leaking batteries may cause skin burns or other personal injuries. Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to provincial and local regulations. Any battery may leak electrolyte under the following circumstances: - if mixed with a different battery type, - if inserted incorrectly, - if all batteries are not replaced at the same time, - if disposed of in fire, or - if an attempt is made to charge a battery not intended to be recharged.

Dont Infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia.

Technical Specification
Power supply: 120V~60Hz Dimensions ( H x W x D inches): Unit size - 13 x 12 x 15.4 inches Speaker - 13 x 9.4 x 9.3 inches Tape deck: Response curve: 125Hz-8kHz (-5dB) CD player: Response curve (+/- 2dB): 60Hz to 20 kHz Rating Plate: Look for it at the back of the set.

Headset Safety
Do not play your headset at high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use with extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air designed to let you to hear outside sounds, do not turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.

15

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 19

Limited Warranty (U.S.)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

EN

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts Warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

16

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 20

Limited Warranty (U.S.)


EN
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

How State Law relates to warranty:


Some states do not allow the exclusion nor limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state.

If you purchased your unit outside the United States:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information.

Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

17

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 21

Limited Warranty (Canada)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

EN

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside Canada. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

18

RS2605 EN

6/13/02

9:30 AM

Page 22

Limited Warranty (Canada)


EN
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

How Provincial Laws relates to warranty:


This warranty gives you specific legal rights which are in addition to statutory warranties that may vary from Province to Province.

If you purchased your unit outside Canada:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

19

10

11

12

P707 2 HNA-14LM01 55140480.S20 NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: to ground under no signal conditions 3. Replace transistors with type and volume control minimum specified from replacement parts list +FIL

FL701

-FIL -34V GND +12V JR01 C732 100uF 16V 0 MUTE

10

11

12 13

14 15 16 17

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

44 45

D730 5V6 1/2W

R703 10K R704 10K

R705 10K

6 5 4 D 3 2 1

DISC-SW PLAT-SW PLATTER+ PLATTERSLIDER2 SLIDER1

R768 1K R769 1K R770 1K R771 1K R772 1K R773 1K

DISCSW PLATTER-SW CAR-DIR-CW CAR-DIR-CCW SLIDE-UP SLIDE-DN ECODER VOLUME

FIP0

FIP2

FIP3

FIP4

FIP5

FIP6

FIP7

FIP10

FIP11

P80/FIP13

P82/FIP15 P83/FIP16 P84/FIP17 P85/FIP18 P86/FIP19

P81/FIP14

DRAW-OUT PLATTER-SW DISCSW

DRAW-IN

FIP12

GND

FIP8

FIP9

FIP1

R757 47K

R756 47K

R755 47K

R754 47K

R753 47K

R752 47K

R751 47K

R750 47K

100

99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 61 62 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 T-CLK

FOR OTP USE

D728 1N4148 R790 1K R795 22K R746 R786 R720 R791 1K 1K 1K R792 22K

TO POWER BOARD

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 9

VDD3 P37

P87/FIP20 P90/FIP21 P91/FIP22

P36/BUZ P35/PCL P34/TI2 P33/TI1

VLOAD

R921

47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K

R922 R923 R924 R925 R926 R927 R928 R929 R930 R931 R932 R933 R934 R935 R936 R937 R939 R941 R938 R940

CAR-DIR-CCW SLIDE-DN SLIDE-UP

CAR-DIR-CW

P92/FIP23 P93/FIP24 P94/FIP25 P95/FIP26 P96/FIP27 P100/FIP29 P101/FIP30 P102/FIP31 IC701 uPD780208GF P97/FIP28

R875 22K

TO MAIN BD AUX-MUTE FOR A3580

P32/TO2 P31/TO1 RESET X2 X1 P30/TO0

P706

TO CD MOUDLE CD-ENABLE CD-RESET MP3-MD MP3-SD GND MP3-CLK DRAWERDRAWER+ DRAW2

9 E 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

R861 1K R862 1K R863 0 R864 1K

3 CD-ENABLE CD-RESET EN701

COM

R802 R866 1K R868 1K R869 1K R766 1K R876 22K 56K

T-DATA R749 1K R722 680K MIX_H MIX_L

SDA

26 27 28 29 30

AVSS

P17/ANI7 P16/ANI6 P03/INTP3/CI0 P00/INTP0/TI0 P15/ANI5 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD P14/ANI4 P13/ANI3 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49

P116/FIP43 P117/FIP44 P121/FIP46 P120/FIP45 P122/FIP47 P123/FIP48

T_PW

D716 1N4148

D712 1N4148

D715 1N4148

SCL

R721 R788 68K R878 R873 22K R874 22K 22K R877 22K R815 15K

1K

ST_MONO (NC) 3 P801 6 SOLB GND HOUT2 R814 470 4 P802 7 GND HOUT1 4 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 1 2

P02/INTP2

Q710 KTC3875GR C802 68nf 50V

C725 1uF 50V R780 22

AVREF

P74

D718 1N4148

P73

R781 47K

P72

VSS

P71

D717 1N4148

P01/INTP1

C722 0.1uF 50V

TA-COU2

REC-SW

TAPE_MUTE JA719 D801 1N4148 Q709 2SA950Y CD_SYN

C724 1uF 50V

FOR OPTION USE

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

R811 150K

JP05 0

DRAWER-

DRAWER+

MP3-SD

TA-COU1

RDS-CLK

PWR-DET

STROBE

REMOTE

TA-DET2

TA-DET1

WR/EN

ST/MO

KEY3

KEY2

KEY0

KEY1

R870

R871 22K

GND

Q711 KTC3875GR

R812 100

R817 1K

KTC3875GR Q708 R819 100K

PROTECTION

TA-DET2 TA-DET1

R813 39K R855 R787 R785 1K 1K 1K

REC-SW

TA-COU2 C801 R801 10k AUDIO-MIX TA-COU1 R800 R798 22K 15K R858 22K R857 22K

TAPE-DETECT2

10nf 25V

RECORD-SW

H R764 22K R763 7K5 R762 4K7 R761 3K3 R760 2K2 R759 1K5 R758 1K2

KEY0 C708 1nF 50V 2

1 2 3 CD-ENABLE 8 SDA CD-RESET MUTE SYS-POWER 4 5 6 7 8

SW738 POWER

SW737

SW736

SW735

SW734

SW733

SW732

SW731

DEMO

SOURCE

REPEAT

DISC1 3 NC901 2

BAND 2 1

DISC_SKIP

TIME

R716 10K

STROBE DATA CLOCK Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 VSS IC704

VDD ENABLE Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 QS QS

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

47K R860

C730 100PF 50V C731 100PF 50V

Q707 KTC3875GR R797 100 R796 39K

R799 150K

R728 7K5

SW726

SW725 1 RIGHT

R727 4K7

SW724 1 DOWN

R726 3K3

SW723 1 LEFT

R725 2K2

SW728

R729 22K

SW727

SW722 1 PLAY_LIST

R724 1K5

SW721 ROCK 1

R723 1K2

KEY1 2 C713 1nF 50V

R807 1K C717 10uF 50V

GND ECO AUX-M VMAX

GND

R830 470 TAPE-DETECT1

UP 3 2 PC901

CUSTOM

X'SURROUND

R713 10K

BU4094BCF

1 2

10uF

OK

DISC2

DISC3

DISC4

DISC5

REVERSE

FILE_LIST

CD_DISP

10K

Sub board

SW718

SW717

SW716

SW715

SW714

SW713

SW712

SW711

R714 10K

VOUT 1

VCC

GND

R736 22K

R735 7K5

R734 4K7

R733 3K3

R732 2K2

R731 1K5

R730 1K2

KEY2 C714 1nF 50V 2 2 3

2 3 6 7

E0 E1

VCC

MODE

IC703 E2 M24C64-WMN6 SCL VSS

R706 100 D705 POWER LED

SW708 1 J OPEN/CLOSE

SW707 1 BBOOST

R743 22K

SW706 1 PROG

R742 7K5

SW705 1 PLAY

R741 4K7

SW704 1 FFWARD

R740 3K3

SW703 1 TUNE

R739 2K2

SW702 1 CLOCK

R738 1K5

SW701 POP 1

R737 1K2

KEY3 2 C715 1nF 50V

10K

R715 10K

IR701 PIC-21045TE2

R793 1K

R794 10K +5V

KTC3875GR

R805 22

1N4148

D719

47k

MP3-SD

24 25

P21/SO1 P20/SI1

P114/FIP41

P115/FIP42

CD-SYN

TAPE-MUTE

(VAUDIO-MIX)

AUDIO-MIX

C804 1uF 50V

1N4148

C805 1uF 50V

R806

MP3-CLK

MP3-MD

22 23

P23/STB

P22/SCK1

P112/FIP39 P113/FIP40

R719

1K

JP04 0

SCLK/CLK (NC)

C803

0.1uF 50V

R803 680k Q712

D720

ENCODER-A RDS-DATA

20 21

P25/S10/SB0 P24/BUSY

P110/FIP37 P111/FIP38

R718

1K

JP03 0

SDATA/DATA_IN (SCLK/CLK)

R804 1k

ENCODER-B

SDATA

18 19

P27/SCK0

P26/SO0/SB1

P106/FIP35 P107/FIP36

R717

1K

50V

(SDATA/DATA IN)

DATA_OUT

100PF 50V

47K

SCLK

16 17

P04/XT1 VDD2

P104/FIP33 P105/FIP34

R712

1K

C736

100PF

50V

(DATA-OUT)

CE

C720 100PF 50V C721

R776

47K R775

C716 33PF 50V

C718 33PF 50V

13 RDS-QUAL 14 15

TUNER_POWER R711 1K

IC(VPP) XT2

P103/FIP32

C735

100PF

WR_EN (CE)

(NC)

10

11

Y701 4.194MHz

RESET

FOR RS2605

JP10 0

(HP-MUTE)

(TUNER-POWER)

HP_IN

12

13 1K

12 P702

DRW1

DRAW-OUT

R702 4K7

Q706 KTC3875GR

C711 100nF 16V

R744 10K

Q703 KTC3875GR

R707

1K

D727 1N4148

PROTECT

11

P705

TO CD MOUDLE

R767 1K

R700 4K7

Q705 KTC3875GR

C712 4u7 50V

R745 100

C710 100nF 16V

C706 47nF 50V

R789

1K

10

RESET

C707 47nF 50V

C702 100nF 16V

C703 100uF 10V

C701 47uF 10V

D701 5V6 1/2W

X'SURROUND

PWR-DET

R748 10K

L701 100uH

C704 100uF 10V

C705 100nF 16V

R701 220 1/4W

N/A

SYSTEM-POWER

CPU-VCC

R901 R902 R903 R904 R905 R906 R907 R908 R909 R910 R911 R912 R913 R914 R915 R916 R917 R918 R919 R920

47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K

CPU-VCC

+5V

Q701 KTC3203Y

+10V

D729 1N4002

2. Voltages are positive with respect

B. All Capacitor values are in F

A. All resistor values are in ohms,1/16 W

P701

1 A
FM ANT NJ301
1

2
TP001
FM_IN

AM/FM DECODER

C004
4n7

C001
33pF

L001
XXX

C003
22p

FM-RF
RFGND TP001G 6 4 C099
4n7

TF005

AM ANT N002 6 5 4
AGND
1

TF001

AGND

3 2 1

TF008

4 6

2 3

TP003

1 2 3

AGND G

C007
AGND
10uf

IN

Y002
E

OUT

L007
47uH 0.1uF

C018
11p

IN AGND

Y001 OUT
E

TP004 1 2 3
AGND

C041

AM-MIXER

FM-MIXER

AM-IF2I/O

FM-IF1O

AM-IF1I

FM-IF2I

FM-IF1I

VSTABB

VSTABA

FM-RFI

RFGND

AGC

TP002

AGND
47pF

44 C008 RIPPLE

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34 33

AGND

3 2 1

TF007

4 6

C010 L003
XXX

18K 1/16W

R006

CV001
11p

100uf

AM-RFI

R035
18K 1/16W

D001

5p

C009 R005

FM-RFO SUBGND FM-OSC AM-OSC VCC1 TUNE VCO AFC-POS AFC-NEG FM-DEM AFO MUTE INDICATOR IC001

32 AFC-AM P1 31 30

NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/10W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performancesFM-ANT. and safety of this unit.

D003
33K 1/16W

CV002

R009 C020
470p 220K 1/16W

L004

XXX

R014

470nF

C019

220K 1/16W

R013

47K 1/16W

R008

18K 1/16W

11p

R007

100pF

C011

RFGND AGND

4 5 6 7 8 9

P0

10R 1/16W

C012
15pF

100nF

C013

WRITE-ENABLE 29 DATA 28 TP010 R036 C036


12pF AGND

470 1/16W 470 1/16W 470 1/16W

R046

WR_EN DATA_T CLOCK_T

R045 R047

D002

BUS-CLOCK 27 DGND 26 XTAL 25

VCC2 VDD

IFGND

PILFIL

MPXI LPF

6 4

TF003

4n7

C016

AF-RO

AF-LO

C
AGND

OSCGND AGND C015


1uF

150K 1/16W

470pF

C047
AGND

470pF

C045

C046
470pF

AGND

68K 1/16W

R010

R011
3

68K 1/16W

R012

91K 1/16W

10 C098
4n7

MO-ST 24 22 23 R030

TP005

TP006

75.0KHZ

X001

C025

C026

2 3

AGND

AGND

R097
150 1/16W

2K2 1/16W

C024
1uF

22nF

1uF

22nF

C021

RV001 1 2
AGND
47K

220nF

C014

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

AGND

R015

2.2uf

C027

C029
18pF

18

19

20

21

33uF

C034

100nF

C035

22R 1/16W

R034

Q008 R056

6.8V

470nF

C030

100nF

C031

1K0 1/16W

R031 C033
1uf

AGND
470nF

C032
1uf

1K 1/16W

470 1/16W

Q009

22K 1/16W

R058 10K 1/16W

R057

C022

470nF

C023

C028
150p

3 2 1

TF006

4 5

AGND

55103940.S20

TP007

AGND

N702

13 12 11 10 9

AUX-OUT_MUTE
H/P_MUTE H/P_IN TUNER_PWR WR_EN DATA_T CLOCK_T SDATA SCLK AUDIO_MIX ST_MONO TAPE_MUTE CD_SYNCHRO

AGND

8K2 1/16W

R017

TP008

TUNER_PWR

+10VA TUNER_R

AGND

R021

TUNER_L

8K2 1/16W

N702 FROM P702

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NOTES:

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list

4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

TAPE CONTROL/ AUDIO SWITCHING SCHEMATIC

7
AUDIO_L SDATA AUDIO_R

6.8n 50V

C309L

R311L 18K

C314L 2u2F 50V

TAPE_L

RECORD L
R304L 47R C308L 100pF 50V R305L 1K2 C310L 1n2F 50V R306L 1K2 C312 22uF 50V R312 1M5 R420 100 C409R 2u2F 50V

SCLK

WHITE GND RED

N304
1
3n3F C301L 50V 3n3F C301R 50V

L R
C304L 1uF 50V C304R 1uF 50V

R303L 680 C305L 100uF C306L 27nF 16V 50V C307L 1uF 50V

R311 56R R302L 120K C309 47nF 50V C311L 1uF 50V

C463 100uF
10V

DGND

DECK A

PLAYBACK

2 3

CRO/NOR

R_IN4 28

LOUT 27

ROUT 26

AGND 25

CREF 23

SDA 22

D-GND 20

PB/OUT

SCL 21

TREBLE(R) 19

TREBLE(L) 18

N.C. 17

N.C. 16

PB/EQL

ALC-L/CUT

PB/NFL

REC/INL

REC/PLAYBACK

A-I/PR

A-I/PL

N303
YELLOW

L302
470uH

ALC

HI/LO

A/Rec

RED

REC/OUTR

PB-OUTR

GND

8 MUXOUTL

AB/SW

B-I/PR

B-I/PL

12 BIN(R)

C303L 2n2F 50V

C351 100UF 50V

8
C311R 1uF 50V

10
R309 15K

11

12

R301L 15K

C302L 1n2F 50V

C315L 1uF 50V

C315R 1uF 50V

C305R 100uF 16V

R302R 120K

C306R 27nF 50V

C307R 1uF 50V

C319 10uF 50V

C317 22uF 50V

9 IN(L)

C303R 2n2F 50V

R303R 680 R301R 15K R305R 1K2 C310R 1n2F 50V R306R 1K2 R307 33K

C402R 2u2F 50V

C401R 2u2F 50V

C401L 2u2F 50V

C302R 1n2F 50V

R304R 47R

C308R 100pF 50V

C316 4u7F 50V

C402L 2u2F 50V

C453L 2u2F 50V

R410L 0 C410L 2u2F 50V

R410R 0 C410R 2u2F 50V

C407R 100nF 50V

C408R 100nF 50V

14 BIN(L)

2 R_IN2

1 R_IN3

3 R_IN1

5 L_IN2

6 L_IN3

7 L_IN4

WHITE

13 BOUT(R)

4 L_IN1

11 IN(R)

L303 470uH

Logic Rec/PB

10 MUXOUTR

DECK B

RIPPLE/FIL

+ PB Amp (L) IC300 AN7348K PB Amp (R) A/Rec + PB-EQR PB-NFR

MUTE MUTE Logic A/B

Rec AMP(L) Rec AMP(R) REC/INR AB/SWT

VS

BOUT(L) 15

REC/OL

BIAS OSC

VCC

ALC

24

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

C453R 2u2F 50V

C409L 2u2F 50V

C420 47uF 25V

R407 1K

R408 1K

C404R 5n6F 50V

C404L 5n6F 50V

24

Nor / Cro & Hi / Lo Logic Ripple Rejection P

IC401
TDA7440D

C408L 100nF 50V R411 5K6

O/PGND

REC/PB

C407L 100nF 50V

R410 5K6

FOR 2605

R308 27K

RECORD_L

AUX-OUT_R AUX-OUT_L

RECORD R
R341 56K Q305 R342 0R

R311R 18K

C314R 2u2F 50V

RECORD_R

AUX_L AUX_R TUNER_L

AGND

IC302

CTRL1

R340 47K C348 33nF 50V C341 6n8F 50V C342 68nF 50V

KTC3198GR

C309R 6.8n 50V

TAPE_R
R404
10K

C343 1uF 50V

CTRL2 3 4

R403
10K
R402L 10K R402R 10K R401L 10K

VCC

GND

TUNER_R
CD_L

P401
1

SW

R325 100

L301 220uH

TP60G

TP60

AUDIO_MIX CD_SYNCHRO
KTC3107S

GND

2 3

R324 100K R326 22K

CD_R

P401 TO P002

R401R 10K

RECORD

N301

C333 2u2F 50V

Q401 C411 220uF 16V

KTC3203Y
R401 470R C410 10uF 25V

Q307

+10VA

TAPE_A

AGND

D402 7V5

R350 10K

MOTOR_VCC
Q306

TAPE MOTOR

C901 1uF 50V

TAPE_MUTE MGND

R352 1k5

KTC3875GR

1
Headphone BD

AUDIO OUTPUT SCHEMATIC

C515 100uF 10V

6
AUX_L AUX_R
R414L 20K 1/16W R414R 20K 1/16W R413L 39K 1/16W R413R 39K 1/16W

NJ504

1 9 8 7 3 2 4 5 6

P513
4

N513
4
C605L 470uF 10V Vcc 8

C604 4.7uF 10V 7 OUT2 6 BIAS IN2 5

C611L 2u2F 50V

R611L 1K 1/16W

AUX IN AGND
NJ516

BH3544F

IC601
2 2
OUT1 1 MUTE 2 IN1 3 GND 4

NJ515
C605R 470uF 10V R601 R602 100K 1/16W

1
C611R 2u2F 50V R611R 1K 1/16W

FOR 2605

3 2 1 NJ518
C425R 100pF 50V

AUX_OR AUX_OL
C425L 100pF 50V C904 10uF 10V Q412R Q412L C604L 1UF 50V C604R 1uF 50V

10K 1/16W Q601 10K C601 1uF 10V 47K R421L 1K 1/16W R421R 1K 1/16W

SURROUND SPEAKER

AGND

C902 100uF 50V

C903 100uF 50V

P511
AUDIO_R

P511 TO N511

AGND

AUDIO_L
1

AUX_OUT_MUTE AUX-OUT_L AUX-OUT_R AUDIO_R AUDIO_L H/P_IN

D601

P502
6

PGND
5

6.8V H/P_MUTE MGND DGND

MN_SPK_R MN_SPK_L
AGND C603
25V 470uF

MOTOR_VCC +10VA SOURCE

+10V
1

AGND

FROM N502

P502

MP3 and DSP


TP9 TP8
NRESET NRESET

A{0-18}

A{0-18}

A{0-18}

A{0-18}

A{0-18}

VDD3D
A9 A1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A3 A2 A0 A11 A10 A12 A13 A15 A17 A18 A16 A14

CVCC
D15 D14

D{0-15}

D{0-15}

D11

D13

D12

D10

D9

R/W

CVCC

A1

A9

A0

A2

A3

A5

A6

A7

A8

A4

A4

D7

D8

D6

VDD3D 21 23 22 20 24 11 19 18 17 16 15 13 12 10 14 NC3 NC2 NC1 A1 WE NC0 BY/ RY A2 A3 A6 A5 A7 A4 RESET A9 A8 A11 A10 A12 A13 A17 A18 A15 A14 1 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 4

A21 142 CVDD5 141 A9 140

131

121

139

129

109

143

138

137

136

135

133

132

130

128

127

126

125

123

122

120

144

134

124

111

119

118

117

116

115

113

112

110

114

CVDD4

CVSS8

HDS1

DVDD5

DVSS7

DVSS6

CVSS7 A20

A1

DVDD3

HD6

HDS2

HD5

HD4

A7

A6

A5

A3

D9

A2

A0

D8

A4

D11

D7

D6

A19

A8

IC3 M29W800AT90N1 DQ15A-1 VDD3D


A10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 CVCC 15 16 17 18 19 R1
100pF 50V 33R

A22

CVSS

BYTE

CVSS0 DVDD A10 HD7 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

DVSS5 A16 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1

A18 A17

108 107 106 105 104 103 102 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 90 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 80 78 77 76 81 79 R40 R41
100K 100K 100K 1K D5 D4 D3 D2 D0 D1

D15

D13

D12

D10

D14

A18

A17

A16

VDD3D

DQ11

DQ10

DQ12

DQ13

DQ14

VSS1

VDD

DQ1

DQ9

DQ0

DQ8

DQ2

DQ3

DQ5

DQ6

VSS

DQ7

DQ4

CS

A0

OE

A16

16.9344

Y1

TP10

A{0-18}

GND1

D11

D10

D12

D13

D15

D1

D6

D0

D2

D3

D5

D4

D7

D14

D9

D8

GND1

VDD3D C1

A12 A13 A14 A15

101

R60

33pF 50V

33pF 50V

D{0-15}

D{0-15}

GND1

10nF 50V

CVCC

11

C19

CVDD HAS DVSS

X2\CLKIN

RS X1

GND1 NRESET

CVSS1 HCS

NOE NPS

CVDD0 HR/W PS IS

IC1 TMS320VC5416

CLKOUT HPIENA DVSS4

HD3

R50 CVCC

20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

READY DS R/W

CVDD3 CVSS6 TMS

91 89

GND1

R52

C8

21

R/W

R10
560 560 560

1 2 3 4 5

R12

BCKIN NC CAP IC2

DM NC2 NC1

12 11 10 9 8 R13
0

560

R7

DAC_DM

VDD3D

R16 R17 TP1

100K 33R

29 30 32 33 34 31

HOLDA IAQ HOLD BIO MP/MC DVDD0 BDR1 CVSS2 CVSS3 BCLKR1 BCLKR0 BLCKR2 BCLKX0 BCLKX2 HCNTL1 HCNTL0 CVDD1 CVDD2 BFSR0 BFSR2 DVDD1 CVSS5 CVSS4 BFSX0 BFSX2 DVSS1 DVSS0 BFSR1

CLKMD3 CLKMD2 CLKMD1

HPI16

HD2

100K

R42

WM8725ED

R78

MUTE

100K VOUTL

R14

C2 10uF

16V

VDD3D R15
0

6 7

BCLKX1 DVSS2

VOUTR GND C3 C4

VOUTL VCC
100nF 10uF 16V

N1
LRCK

BDR0

BDR2

HRDY

1 2 3 4

R18 R19
560 560

BSP_DR1

BSP_FSR1 BSP_CLKR1
GND1

35 36

BDX0

BDX2

DVSS3 75 DVDD2 74 BDX1 BFSX1 73

R39 R38 VDD3D

100K

9 11 13

9 11 13

10 12 14

10 12 14 GND1

IACK

HINT

GND1 R6

N1

to BC03GND1
DATA

BCK

BSP_CLKX1

INT1

HBIL

INT0

INT2

INT3

HD1

HD0

NMI

R36 SDA
330

N2 N2
1 2 3 4 5

VDD3D

GND1

16V

GND3
CLK_32F SDATA_OUT CLK_1F

VOUTR

R20

330

CVCC R25
0

R26

CVCC

100K 100K 100K

100K

GND1 R31 R30 R29

R75
0

GND1

R22 R23 R24 VDD5A 8 RR1 C24


10uF 16V

33R 33R 33R

VDD3D

100K

R28 R27

KTC3875GR

33R

330

R77

GND1

BSP_DX1

R34 SCL

GND1

GND1

Q1

N2 to

C5

41

51

61

70 71

39

49

59

69

37

38

40

42

43

45

46

47

48

50

52

53

55

56

57

58

60

62

63

65

66

67

68

72

44

54

64

BC01

100nF 16V

1K

TP5 R71
AUDIO_R
1
3 2 1

N4

NRESET
47k

VDD3D

100

25V 4700nF

25V 4700nF

VDD3D

VCC BA4558F GND 4 IC4


100nF 16V

RR2 10K CR1

1n5F 50V

47k

CR2

6 CR3 5

BA4558F 7 IC4

C23

7K5

RR3
10K

16V 10uF

CR5

50V 680pF

100pF 50V 1n5F 50V

47k

CL5

CR4

RR5

GND3

GND3

AUDIO_L VDD5V

to

N3

P004

to

N4

MD
4

R79

R70
470

25V 100pF

C68

1K

R72 GND1 R73


0

NRESET

R11

LRCIN DIN

SCKI FORMAT

14 13

GND3

R8

560

CLK_384FS

NOE

R2 R3

TRST TDI

TCK

1 3 5 7

10uF 16V

DO

GND1

10K

A11

C6

100K

31

41

29

39

25

26

27

28

30

32

33

35

36

37

38

40

42

43

45

46

47

48

34

44

R53

C7

TP2

N6 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8

2 4 6 8

33R 33R

MSTRB MSC XF

100K

R9

100uH

L4

VDD5A

IOSTRB

-OFF/EMU1

TDO

EMU0 TOUT

N5

SD GND1

25V 1000PF

C35

R67

100uH

C12

470uF 6V3

CVCC

GND1

1000pF 50V

C69

CL1

50V 680pF

VDD5A

L3

100pF 50V

CL3

100uH

CVCC

EN GND IN

C70

470uF 6V3

GND1 GND1 GND2

R65 C22
100uF 16V

10uF 16V

GND1

100K

C21

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

NC/FB

C16

TPS76301DBVR

47uF 16V

C18

47uF 16V

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

100nF 16V

ADJ

C20

27K

R61

OUT

C36

C37

C38

C39

C40

C41

C44

TP4

ON/OFF GND VIN

VOUT

GND2

GND3

5 4

IC5

GND3 1 2 3 VDD3D C17 IC6

C11

100nF 16V

GND1 TP3

10uH

L2

5 C15 4

1 2 3 GND2

100nF 16V

R62

GND1 GND2

TPS76333DBVR

C71

100nF 16V

GND2

1000PF

25V

GND3

RL1

RL2

RL3

IC4

100K

L1

100K

R66

100nF 16V

C34

100nF 16V

C33

100nF 16V

C32

100nF 16V

C31

100nF 16V

C30

100nF 16V

GND3
7K5 10K

10K

CL4

N3 N3

16V 10uF

CL2

RL5

VDD5V

P003

GND2

CLK C67 C66

R74
0

BA4558F

PROJECT NOTES

1
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. * and

2
3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list components. Replace only with those indicates critical safety

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum

to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.


C519L
1001/16W 24K1/16W 24K 1/16W 100 1/16W 50V 1NF GND2 1NF

specified from replacement parts list

WARNING SEE NOTE C518 3

R502L

100uF 25V 1uF 50V

-IN_B MUTE_A

MUTE_B

R504R

C502R
680PF 50V

C507R 680PF 50V

B
R525
15k 1/16W

C519R R507L

R507R

100K 1/16W

25V

C507L

N511

C504R
100K 1/16W

1NF 50V

12

+IN_B LM4766

VEE GND_B OUT_B

R502R

1uF 50V

C502L

1NF 50V

7 8

VCC_B

VCC_A

R504L

NC

NC

50V

C504L

C522L

9 14

2 15

47uF 50V

C516

100nF 50V

5pF 50V

C501L

R501L
10K 1/16W

C518L R512L L501L


10 1/4W 0.5uH 100nF 16V 4R7 1/4W

C521L
100nF 16V

-IN_A

+IN_A

C522R

13

IC501

OUT_A 5 GND_A 10 1
50V 1NF

1NF 50V

C520L
GND2

R510L

5uH

LY01 LY02 LY03


5uH

NJ501
1 2 3 4

L OUTPUT Speaker Connector


CY04
1000PF 16V

CY03

5uH

C520R

10

R510R

1/4W

LY04 C521R
5uH

6 11

Q503

KTA1504GR 1k

330 1/16W

R528

150 1/16W

R503

100nF 50V

C520

C519
47uF 50V

5pF 50V

C501R

R501R
10K 1/16W

L501R
470nF 16v

C505

0.5uH

R512R
4R7 1/4W

100nF 16V

OUTPUT

1000PF 16V

C518R
100nF 16V

R516R 22K 1/16W

R527

220nF 50V

C522

KTC3875GR

220nF 50V

R516L

Q516
10k 1/16W
R539

X-SURROUND CONTROL

KTA1504 10k 1/16W

10k 1/16W

R538

R540

22k 1/16W

R541

R502

1M 1/16W

2sk117y

R503L
12k 1/16W

3K3 1/16W

R517

100uF 25V

C510

R511

R503R
12k 1/16W

KTC3875GR KTC3875GR

Q504

Q517

Q501

10k 1/16W

R524

22K 1/16W

R526

1/16W

MN_SUPPLY

C523

15k 1/16W

C503R
47uF 50V

47uF 50V

C503L

FOR US VERSION

Q502

2.2k 1/16W

R537

KTC3875GR

Q519

56k 1/16W

N502

33k 1/16W Q518 KTC3875GR

R542

N502 to P502

RAY1 OSA-SS-212DM3 2 1 R507 R510 4 6 D503


10K1/16W
55048920.S20

MN_SUPPLY

KTA1273Y

Q510

3 5

R535

10K 1/16W

C509
470uF 16V

R536
560 1/2W

KTC3875GR

Q511

10K 1/16W

R508

10R 1/16W

1K 1/16W

R509

Q505

KTC3875GR

WARNING SEE NOTE

C525
100nF 4700uF 50V

C526
100nF 50V

C512

N701

JP504

to bottom panel

1N5402

US: 5S4.0A125V

JP501

100nF 50V

C517

D505

50V

D506

WARNING SEE NOTE F503


C513 4700uF 50V

100nF 50V

C527

1N5402

D507 1N5402 C529

100nF 50V

C528

1N5402

C511
100nF 50V

US: 5S4.0A125V

JW01 JW02 N801 TO P801 Power Transformer

D508

F504

JW03 N801

FIL+ FIL-30V GND1 +10V


MUTE STAND_BY X-SUUROUND ECO PROTECT
47K 1/16W 1K 1/16W

R518 R519
1 1

1/4W 1/4W

1000uF 16V

C508

100nF 50V

C530100nF 50V
1N4001 1N4001

TO FRONT BD

D513
7V5

R521 D514
30V 1/2W 1/4W 100

D515 C515
100uF 35V

R520 R513 R512


10K 1/16W

1/2W

1N4001

IC_P01

WARNING SEE NOTE

C532

100nF 50V

C531

100nF 50V

US: 5S1.6AL/250V

3300uF 16V/25V

C514

1N4001

D510 D512

1N4001

D511

D509

WARNING SEE NOTE F505

WARNING SEE NOTE

JW04 JW05 JW06 JW07 JW08


3

To Power Transformer

WARNING SEE NOTE

N805

11

12

N803

To AC Input Board

10

RS2605

SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: Crosstalk: Maximum Input: Power Output: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: Frequency Response: Stereo Separation @ 1kHz: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: TAPE Frequency Response: S/N Ratio (Playback): Channel Separation @1 kHz: Wow & Flutter: CD Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
MP3 Decoder Bit Rate: CD/RW

120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 40-20,000 Hz 20-20,000 Hz +0/-3dB 1m Vrms @ 6 ohms 65 db 65 db 60 db 2 Vrms 40W @ 10% THD 5 mW 530-1710 600 uV/m 40 db 1000 mV/m 87.5 107.9Mhz 26 dbf 125 10 KHz +/- 5 db 34 db 50 dbf 35 dbf 125 8 kHz +/-5 db 42 db 34 db 0.2% 20 20,000 Hz +3/-3 db 75 db
320 Kbps

Error Correctional: Black Dot Spot


ECCENTRICITY VERTICAL DEVIATION

0,6 mm 0.6 mm
140 um 780 um

RS2620 NOTES

RS2622 NOTES

RTD130 NOTES

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:08 AM

Page 1

FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture. one. Do not attempt to bypass this safety feature. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

For Your Records


In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. CRK76AJ1 Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No.

Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.

Product
Dolby Digital DVD Audio video receiver Brand: RCA Model: RTD101

Electrical current consumption


120V 60Hz 100 Watts IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la class B est conforme la norme du NMB-003 du Canada RFC: CTM-980723-KS5
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, D O N OT R E M OV E C OV E R ( O R BAC K ) . N O U S E R S E RV I C E A B L E PA RT S I N S I D E . R E F E R S E RV I C I N G T O Q UA L I F I E D S E RV I C E PERSONNEL. THE EXCLAMATION POINT WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF I M P O R TA N T INSTRUCTIONS A C C O M PA N Y I N G T H E P R O D U C T.

CAUTION

For Your Safety


The AC power plug is polarized (one blade is wider than the other) and only fits into AC power outlets one way. If the plug wont go into the outlet completely, turn the plug over and try to insert it the other way. If it still wont fit, contact a qualified electrician to change the outlet, or use a different

SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM / BACK OF PRODUCT

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL


SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:08 AM

Page 4

Thomson Multimedia Pack


RCA is among the first Consumer Electronics companies to have adopted the MP3 format, starting with the release of its MP3 player, Lyra, into the market. (www.rca.com and www.lyrazone.com). RCA is proud of its initial success and has developed the competencies to enlarge its offering to other products like Discman and this System. RCA thanks you for your purchase of this System which aims at giving you tremendous pleasure while listening to your favorite music. In addition to this great System, RCA is proud to offer you the Music Match CD-ROM, which will assist you in managing your MP3 music library!

The MusicMatch Jukebox


This music management software, to be installed on your PC, allows you to compress music files recorded from you audio CDs into MP3 format and stores them on your PC. It makes the search and download of Internet music easier, It allows for the management of compressed music and the creation of your own playlist, The Jukebox is a true audio player installed on your PC, It gives access to thousands of net radios available on the web today. You can download music files encoded in MP3 from several Internet sites like www.mp3.com, www.thomson-music.com.

PLAYING MP3
Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:08 AM

Page 5

Table of Content
FCC Information Thomson Multimedia Pack Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver . . . . . . . . .2 Unpacking the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Inserting Batteries into Remote Control .3 Set Up and Maintenance of the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Protect your Components from Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Disc Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Connecting to Audio-Visual Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Digital Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Connecting the Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . .6 Positioning your Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Front Speaker Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Preferred Surround Placement . . . . . . . .8 Advanced Surround Setting . . . . . . . . . .8 Test Tone / Channel Balance . . . . . . . . . .9 Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

CD/MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Playing an Audio CD . On-Screen Banner Display for CD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Display for MP3 playback . . .30 . . .30 . . .32 . . .35

EN

Radio
Operating the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . .39 Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . .41 Remote Codes


Cable Codes . . . . . VCR Codes . . . . . . TV Codes . . . . . . . Satellite Receivers Audio (RCA only) . Laser disc Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 .42 .43 .44 .44 .44

Language Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Limited Warranty

Operating your Receiver


Receiver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Switching On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Selection of Audio/Video Source . . . . . .13 Using the Remote to Control Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Advanced Sound Control


Sound Enhancement Systems Fine Setting of Components . Fine Setting of the Speakers . Advanced Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 .16 .17 .17 .19 .19 .19 .20 .20 .20 .25

DVD Player
Basic Playback Features . . . . . . . . . Quick Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeze Frame and Frame Advance Slow Motion Playback (DVD only) . Progressive Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Banner Display . . . . . . . Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 6

Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver
You should receive the following items:

+
D I G I T A L BAND/APP SOURCE A / V R E C E I V E R VOLUME RANDOM SURROUND

VCR

ON OFF

TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

mp3
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PHONES

POWER P

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

VOL

VOL

One pair of AA batteries One DVD receiver unit

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LUPD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

One Pig-Tail antenna wire

One external AM loop antenna

one video cable (single wire) with yellow connectors;

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

u n i v e r s a l

one instruction book; one safety leaflet; one Quick Connection Guide

One RCA Universal Remote Control (CRK76AJ1)

Unpacking The Speakers


one set of speakers including 1 set of left and right front speakers, 1 centre speaker, 1 subwoofer and 1 set of left and right rear speakers.

1 X green/black wire for center speaker


FRONT SPEAKERS CENTER SPEAKER

1 X red/black wire for front right speaker

SUBWOOFER

1 X white/black wire for front left speaker


REAR SPEAKERS (SURROUND SOUND)

1 X purple/black wire for subwoofer

1 X blue/black wire for rear left speaker

1 X gray/black wire for rear right speaker

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 7

Getting Started
Inserting Batteries into Remote Control
Insert two AA(R6) batteries according to the + and - signs on the battery compartment. To use the remote control, point it directly at your receiver.

Protect your Components from Overheating


Do not block ventilation holes in any component. Arrange the components so that air can circulate freely. Do not stack components directly on top of each other. Allow adequate ventilation when placing your components in a stand. Place the receiver near the top shelf of the stand so heated air rising from it will not affect other components.

EN

Disc Information Set up and Maintenance of the Receiver


IMPORTANT NOTE
Provide spaces for sufficient ventilation as indicated below. If the space is insufficient, the unit may overheat resulting in malfunction and shorter life time.
10cm/4
D I G I T A L BAND/APP SOURCE A / V R E C E I V E R VOLUME

About CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), DVD Video, DVD Audio
This model is compatible to play CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), Video Compact Disk (VCD) and DVD Audio.

RANDOM

SURROUND

mp3
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PHONES

POWER P

10cm/4

10cm/4

10cm/4 Front

NOTES ON CD-R/RW DISC


This unit is compatible with CD-RW/ CD-R discs for playback. Do not affix any type of labels to either side (recordable or labeled side) of a CD-R/RW disc as this may result in the unit malfunctioning. To avoid damages to the CD-R/RW disc, do not open the disc compartment door while the disc is being read. Do not load an unrecorded CD-R/RW disc into the unit. This may take a longer time to read the disc. Playback capability for CD-RW discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the CD-RW disc and the recorder used to create the disc.

Rear 5cm/2

Do not connect to the AC power cords until all connections are completed. Do not use your set immediately after transferring it from a cold place to a warm place: there is risk of condensation. Do not expose your set to water and excessively high temperatures. After having disconnected your set, clean the case with a soft cloth, or with a slightly damp leather chamois. Never use strong solvents.

Disc handling precaution:


Do not touch the recorded surface. Do not use record cleaning sprays, solvent or anti-static liquid. If the disc is dirty, clean it with a damp cloth and wipe from the center out. Wipe in straight line and not in circular motion. Do not attach stickers, label on the disc. Store the disc in its case after playing.

ATTENTION
This unit is incompatible with the following disc formats: DVD-ROM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD RAM, DVD-R, CDV, SACD, DVD Audio (High resolution tracks). JPEG pictures, Kodack disc, Divx video disc, photo CD, CD-G, S-VCD, Data part of CD Extra, disc with non standard shape (e.g. heart), disc with region code different from the one specified on the back of the unit.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 8

Getting Started
Connecting to Audio-Visual Components
ANALOG INPUT
Alternatively, if you have no VCR or SAT, you can connect any other compatible components like TAPE player, TV to your DVD receiver via the VCR/SAT input. VCR audio/video out will have output signal in SAT, DVD/CD and TUNER modes. When VCR (source) is selected, there will be no audio/video signal from VCR audio/video out. VCR
TO VIDEO IN (VCR)

DIGITAL INPUT
Connect components capable of outputing Dolby Digital (e.g. SAT) or standard PCM (CD) format digital signals. Read section on "Input Signal Setting" under "Advanced Sound Control" carefully to adjust the matching input settings.

TO VIDEO OUT (VCR)

TO AUDIO OUT (VCR)

TO AUDIO IN (VCR)

MONITOR OUT OUT

DVD ONLY Pr

OUT

IN

IN

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT
Connect components capable of recording digital signals (e.g. MD, CD recorder player) equiped with a optical input.
OPTICAL IN OPTICAL OUT

Pb L
L

AUDIO Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (480P/480I)

R OUT VCR IN IN SAT


VIDEO OUT (SAT) TO AUDIO OUT (SAT)

S-VIDEO OUT DVD ONLY

COMPONENT IN (TV)

OPTICAL OUT (SAT)

S-VIDEO IN (TV)

VIDEO IN (TV)

TV

SAT

S-VIDEO
S-video provides a better connection for the video portion of the signal than composite video (yellow color terminal). When connecting S-video cable, a Composite video cable (yellow RCA connector) must also be used. S-video will have video output for DVD playback only.

Component video output


Component video terminal provides the best connection for video. By seperating the color information (Pb/Pr) and the luminance signal (Y), the image is improved comparing with S-video or composite video connection (result may vary on different TV / monitor). If your TV is equipped with these terminals (e.g. Y/Pb/Pr, Y/Cb/Cr, Y/B-Y/R-Y), use an appropriate video cable (75 Ohm) and connect to the system. Make sure to match the terminal color.

Progressive Scan
It is neccessary to use component video connection to enjoy progressive scan. Connect to a TV that has 480P input terminal or compatible with copy guard system, else the image will not be displayed properly. If progressive scan is ON, there will be no video signal output at composite video (VCR OUT), s-video and composite video monitor output.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 9

Getting Started
Digital Connections
If you have a SAT receiver DVD player or CD player with a digital output, you can make use of an optical digital connecting cord (not supplied) to carry the audio portion of the signal and enjoy Dolby Digital or digital stereo sound quality. When optical cable is used, the analog audio cables are still needed if recording through a tape or VCR is desired. This receiver provides one optical input for the connection of your components. Please connect your components (e.g. DVD, SAT or CD) to the appropriate digital inputs and select the appropriate source (see below).

Connecting the Antennas


EN
MONITOR OUT OUT AM LOOP FM Cb L AUDIO Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (480P/480I)

DVD ONLY Cr

OUT

IN

IN FRONT(8) VIDEO CENTER (8)

GND

R OUT VCR IN IN SAT OPTICAL IN OPTICAL OUT REAR(8) SUB (4)

S-VIDEO OUT DVD ONLY

The AM and FM antennas connect to the AM and FM terminals on the systems back panel. They must be hooked up in order to receive clear reception.

AM Loop Antenna and FM Indoor Antenna

NOTE
Optical cables carry only the audio portion of the signal. A video connection must also be established by connecting a video cable to the (SAT) video input.

1. Uncoil the AM Antenna wire. 2. Press down on the Antenna tab to open the terminal Note: Make sure the white wire on the AM lop antenna is inserted into the left terminal.

Read instructions carefully when connecting components to the receiver. Digital In Jacks can accept DTS, Dolby Digital (AC-3), or PCM signals when compatible components are connected.

White GND

FM 75

AM LOOP

Ground White

OPTICAL DIGITAL IN (AUDIO) Optical Fiber Cable Connect to optical digital output of DVD, CD, SAT or other compatible devices. SAT / DVD / CD Player
SAT

OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Connect to recording device like CD, CDRW player, DVD recorder, mini disc etc.

OPTICAL IN

OPTICAL OUT

OUT Cr

OUT

IN

IN FRONT(8) CENTER (8)

AM LOOP

MON OUT
GND

VIDEO

FM Cb L AUDIO Y R OUT VCR IN IN SAT OPTICAL IN OPTICAL OUT REAR(8) SUB (4)

HINT
For FM reception, extend antenna to its full length and arrange the Antenna at different parts of the room until the reception is optimized. For AM reception, rotate the antenna horizontally to get better reception.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 10

Getting Started
Connecting the Speakers
FRONT SPEAKERS

LEFT

RIGHT

CENTER SPEAKER

To ease speaker connections, the speaker cords and the terminals are color-coded. White/Black (Front Left Speaker), Red/Black (Front Right Speaker), Green/Black (Center Speaker) Blue/Black (Rear Left Speaker). Grey/Black (Rear Right Speaker). Purple/Black (Subwoofer) Connect the speaker wire to the back of L, R front speakers and to the corresponding color terminals on the rear of the receiver. Do the same for center speaker, rear speakers and the subwoofer.

CENTER
FRONT

SUB WOOFER SPEAKER

REAR

REAR

SUB WOOFER

REAR SPEAKERS (SURROUND SOUND)

Speakers
There are 6 speakers equipped with the unit (2 front, 1 center, 2 rear, 1 subwoofer). In order to enjoy good surround effects all six speakers need to be connected to the receiver For better sound quality, center speaker, rear speakers and Subwoofer should also be connected. Adding center and rear speakers will enhance surround effects. Adding a Subwoofer will increase bass response. If you want to enjoy full range of sound effects, it is a must to use the subwoofer with the speakers to maintain adequate bass signal.

Speaker cords
1 for each speaker, is needed for connection. Twist the stripped ends of speaker cord about 2/3 inch (15 mm). Press down on the tab to open the terminal and insert the wire. Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.
Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection

Push Speaker terminal tab down to insert wire.

Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.


NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the Antenna and speaker wires at all connection points.

+ -

+ -

+ -

+ Black Black White Green Black

+ Red Gray Black Black Blue

Speaker Polarity
When connecting the speakers, make sure the polarities (+ speaker wire to + on the receiver) of speaker wires and terminals are matched. If the cords are reversed, the sound will be distorted and will lack bass (out of phase effect). Do not ground the output line, it will cause damage to the speaker.

Black

Purple

+ -

Connecting the Subwoofer


Connect the subwoofer with the speaker wire (purple/ black) provided.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 11

Getting Started
Positioning your speaker
1 Left, Right (Front Speakers)
They carry primarily music and sound effects

Alignment
Align the center speaker evenly with (A), or slightly behind (B), the left and right speakers, but not ahead of them.

EN

2 Center
In surround mode, the center speaker carries much of the dialogue as well as music and effects. It should be set between the left and right speakers.

3 Surround (Rear Speakers)


Their overall sound balance should be as close as possible to the front speakers. Proper placement is vital to establish an evenly distributed sound field.

Subwoofer
A subwoofer is designed to reproduce powerful low bass effects (explosions, the rumble of spaceships, etc.) which dramatically heightens involvement with the action on the screen. It is therefore recommended to connect subwoofers when small speakers are used.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Advanced Setting
Angle
Placing the left and right speakers to form a 45-degree angle with your favorite viewing position will duplicate the soundtrack mixer's perspective.

Magnetic shielding
Speakers placed less than two feet from the TV set must be magnetically shielded in order to prevent picture distortion. Front and center speakers provided with RTD101 are magnetically shielded to protect your TV set. It is not recommended to place the rear speakers near the TV set.

3 1

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

1 3

Height
The mid- and high-frequency drivers of the three front speakers should be as close as possible to the same height. This often requires placing the center speaker directly atop (A) or beneath (B) the TV set.
A

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Front Speaker Placement


Even if you can't duplicate this ideal home theater setup exactly, the suggestions for speaker placement that follow will help you get good results.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 12

Getting Started
Preferred surround placement
Location
If possible, place surround speakers to either side of the listening area, not behind it.

Advanced Setting Alternative Surround Placement


Rear wall
If rear wall mounting is the only choice, aim the speakers at each other (A), towards the front (B) or even towards the sidewalls (C, D). Experiment with placement until surround sounds seem to envelop you, rather than coming from behind you.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Height
If space permits, install surrounds 2-3 feet above viewers. This helps to minimize localization effects.

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

No adjacent walls
Surrounds can go on stands facing each other to approximate the preferred sidewall mounting (A), or to the sides or rear of the viewing area aimed upwards. In the latter case, they can go right on the floor, or preferably, a few feet off the floor such as on end tables (B).

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Aiming
Aiming surrounds straight across the room, not down at viewers, helps create a more open, spacious surround sound field.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 13

Getting Started
Test Tone / Channel balance
Channel balance
Your receiver is equipped with a test signal generator for balancing the channels. As the signal "travels" from channel to channel, adjust the level controls until each channel plays at the same loudness level.

Using Headphones
To listen privately through your audio system, use the PHONES jack on the receiver. However, make sure you turn down the volume before you put on the headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level after headphones are in place. Once headphones are connected, HEADPHONE DOWNMIX 2 CHANNEL will scroll on display. This feature automatically converts multi-channel outputs to 2 channel stereo for your listening pleasure.

EN

Hearing Comfort & Well-Being


Do not play your headset at a high volume. Hearing experts advise against continuous extended play. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use.

Factory Setting
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories

Level adjustment & surround channel level expectation


Even though you adjust the surround channel to be as loud as the others on the test signal, you'll find that on actual program material the surround channel is usually much lower than the front. Don't be tempted to readjust the surround level; program producers use surround mostly for subtle atmosphereics and ambience, and only rarely for special effects. A good surround mix doesn't call attention to itself; if it did, it would soon become distracting.

The unit is preset to the following setting when you first turn on the power Source = DVD/CD Volume setting = 25 dB Bass & Treble = 0 dB

Restore to Factory Settings


You can always restore all settings back to its original state. When the receiver is in STANDBY mode, press accordingly on the main unit to restore all settings back to factory default : STOP SURROUND BAND / APP

NOTE
The system is equipped with Dolby Digital, and manufactured under License from Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under License from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world wide patents issued and pending. DTS Digital Surround, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Pro Logic II and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

NOTE
All preset radio stations and surround sound setting will be lost after factory setting is restored.

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 14

Operating Your Receiver


1 6 2 7
8

13

11

10

BAND/APP

SOURCE

BASS/TREBLE

RPT/PROG.

VOLUME

RANDOM SURROUND PROGRESSIVE POWER PRESET PRESET +

PHONES

15
9. EJECT Press to eject the disc.

14

12

Receiver Controls
1. POWER / STANDBY To turn the unit on/ off. When the system is turned on, the unit will go to Standby mode (red led will lit), then press the SOURCE button on the unit to power the unit up in the last mode used. When the unit is in standby mode, press the Source button to power on the unit. 2. Source Buttons To select input source. For example, DVD/CD, VCR, etc. 3. SURROUND Press repeatedly to select the surround sound setting or Digital Sound Processor (DSP) mode you want. Refer to Advanced Sound Control on page 16.) 4. PRESET - / SKIP REVERSE To move back to the beginning/previous preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the beginning/previous track in CD mode and the beginning/previous chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 5. PRESET + / SKIP FORWARD To go to the next preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the next track in CD mode and the next chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 6. BAND / APP / RANDOM In Tuner mode, press to select between radio BANDS or press and hold to enter AUTO PROGRAM mode. In DVD/CD mode, press to activate Random function. 7. BASS / TREBLE / PROGRESSIVE To adjust BASS / TREBLE, press this button once to choose either bass or treble, then press preset + and preset - to adjust level. (Bass/ treble adjustment is not allowed for DTS source) Press and hold for progressive scan ON/OFF in DVD mode. 8. OPEN / CLOSE Slightly touch to open / close the front panel.

10. VOLUME Turn the knob to adjust volume level. 11. PLAY/PAUSE To play and pause DVD/CD playback. 12. STOP To stop DVD/CD playback. 13. REPEAT (RPT) / PROGRAM (PROG) Press to choose different play mode in DVD/CD playback. In CD mode : refer to CD / MP3 player section. In DVD mode: refer to DVD player section. 14. PHONES Plug your headphones (not supplied) into it for your private enjoyment. Speakers will be off when phones are inserted. 15. BLUE LED When progressive scan is turned on, the blue led will lit. When in protection mode, the blue led will blink continuously, During panel up/down and power up, the led will blink for a few seconds.

10

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 15

Operating Your Receiver


Remote Control
Please be sure you have inserted the batteries into the remote control (see relevant section on page 3.) You can test it by pressing any button. If it works, the red LED will light.
4. VOL (Volume Buttons) To adjust the volume. 5. MUTE To mute all audio outputs. 6. Panel up / down Toggle the front panel up / down.

EN

1
VCR ON OFF TV

2
DVDCD TAPE AMFM SATCABLE

MUTE

SURROUND
CH +

5
VOL

17
VOL

7. Adjustment Buttons In all mode except DVD, press OK key will enter into function setting mode, for DVD mode, press and hold the OK key is needed. When the display shows the setup you want to change (preset EQ / ,Sleep mode / DIM mode / night mode), press the left and right arrow buttons to choose, and press up and down buttons to make changes, then press OK to finalize your choice. 8. Number Buttons In Tuner mode, to select a preset station. In DVD/CD mode, to select a track to be played (Audio CD only). 9. MENU In Tuner mode: - Press AM/FM - Press to store desired frequency in memory. The flashing word PROG in red will appear in display. Input your desired channel number while the word is still flashing and the frequency will be stored. (For details, refer to "Storing Radio Stations under Manual Preset on page 38) In DVD mode, press for menu setup for DVD title. 10. Operation Buttons TUNER, press AM/FM on the remote to enter tuner mode. Press REVERSE and FORWARD keys to tune down or up the radio frequency. DVD/CD, press DVD to enable PLAY,, STOP and PAUSE keys. The remote control currently operates most Thomson, RCA and GE products, but it can be programmed to operate devices from other manufacturers (For details, refer to Using the Remote to Control Additional Components. 11. SUBTITLE (DVD only) Press SUBTITLE to adjust the subtitle function. 12. AUDIO Press to select the audio channel you like.

4 19 16
OK
CH

3 20 6 15 7

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LUPD N INFO

9
MENU CLEAR

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

18
FORWARD

REVERSE PLAY

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

10

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

14 13
u n i v e r s a l

13. ANGLE (DVD only) Press to select different screen display angles. 14. ZOOM (DVD only) Press to select the zoom ratio. 15. INFO Press to display playback information. 16.GUIDE Press to go to the title menu at DVD mode. 17. SURROUND Press to change the surround sound settings. The display will toggle among any stereo modes (for DTS (DTS stereo), for DOLBY DIGITAL signal (Dolby Digital, 3 Stereo, Stereo), DOLBY PL II MOVIE, DOLBY PL II MUSIC, DOLBY PRO LOGIC EMULATION, DOLBY 3 STEREO, ARENA, JAZZ, CLUB, THEATER, STADIUM, DISCO, STEREO) 18. ANT-FMS (FM only) In Tuner mode, press this button to switch from ST to MONO mode and vice-versa. 19. LEVEL Press to adjust level of individual speaker, press repeatedly and the display will toggle among different channels, press the left and right arrow button for adjustment. 20. GO BACK Press to go back to previous menu or exit setup menu completely.

12 11

NOTE
The remote button INPUTSEEK does not work.

1. ON/OFF To turn on or off the receiver and other auxiliary components (see page 14 Using the Remote to Control Additional Components). 2. Source Buttons To turn on and select various audio/ video sources. 3. CH+, CH- (Channel Buttons) To select programmed stations in TUNER mode. To skip to the next or previous chapter or track in DVD, CD & MP3 mode.

11

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 16

Operating Your Receiver


Display

DIGITAL CD ProLogic II DVD VCD DTS RANDOM MP3 pro

SLEEP

ST

RDS
L

FOLDER
C R

LS LFE RS

DVD / VCD / CD / MP3


Unit in DVD, VCD, CD or MP3 mode.

CHAP
Chapter location at which DVD is currently at.

PROG. D I G I TA L
Program mode is activated. Audio output is in Dolby Digital mode. (For DVD and SAT optical inputs only) TUNED

PRO.LOGIC II
Audio output is in Dolby PL II Movie, Dolby PL II Music or Dolby Prologic Emulation mode.

Tuner station detected.

ST
Tuner stereo signal detected.

DTS
Audio output is in DTS mode. (For DVD and SAT optical input only)

REPEAT / REPEAT TRACK / REPEAT CHAP / REPEAT A.B. / REPEAT FOLDER (MP3 only)
CD, MP3 and DVD in repeat mode.

RANDOM
Random playback mode activated.

KHz / MHz
Tuner frequency unit. Currently in playback mode.

Currently in pause mode. Speaker Icons.

PARENTAL LOCK
Parental lock is on and a password is required to view DVDs above a specific rating level.

SLEEP
Sleep mode is activated.

TITLE
Title number for DVD playback.

TRACK
Track number being played.

12

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 17

Operating Your Receiver


Switching on /off
To switch on the receiver, press POWER button on the receiver once to enter standby mode. Press SOURCE button on the receiver or one of the source buttons or ON/OFF on the remote control to power on the receiver. (See illustration below)

Selection of Audio/Video source


When one of the audio/video source is selected, the audio and video input corresponding to the name will be activated. The receiver acts as a switching device between all the sources that are plugged into it.

EN

BAND/APP

BAND/APP

SOURCE

BASS/TREBLE

VCR
RANDOM

ON OFF

TV
RANDOM SURROUND

VCR

ON OFF

TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM


POWER

SATCABLE

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

BAND/APP

SOURCE

BASS/TREBLE

VCR
RANDOM SURROUND

ON OFF

TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

Example 1: If you connect a VCR player to the VCR input (audio + video) on the receiver and press the SOURCE button until VCR shows on the display. You will be able to have the sound and image transmitted by the VCR.

Standby: when the receiver is on, press the ON/OFF on the remote to return to standby mode. To switch off the unit completely, press the POWER button on the receiver.

BAND/APP

SOURCE

BASS/TREBLE

VCR
RANDOM SURROUND

ON OFF

TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

NOTE
Your receiver has a back up memory to keep your settings like preset radio station for about 2 weeks in case electricity cut occurs. If the receiver is unplugged for more than 2 weeks, all the settings will be lost and re-setting will be necessary.

13

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 18

Operating your Receiver


You can connect up to 2 audio/video sources to this amplifier: Source button (remote control) DVD/CD FM/AM SAT VCR Corresponding connector (receiver back panel) built-in built-in SAT IN (audio / video) VCR IN (audio / video)
VCR ON OFF TV

3. Press and hold the corresponding Source Button (like VCR, SAT/CABLE, TV) on the remote while entering the code from the code list using the Number Buttons.
MENU CLEAR

1 4

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

7
MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

WHOINPUT

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

When a source is selected, the source name will be shown on the display. Example: Press VCR to select VCR as the source to the amplifier. 4. Release the component button, then press ONOFF to see if the component will turn off.
VCR ON OFF TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

5. If this does not work, repeat steps 3 and 4 by trying to use the next code (if available) listed for the brand of your component until the component responds to the remote command.

NOTE
1. Your receiver has a built in tuner. Just connect the appropriate antenna on the back of the receiver and you will be able to listen to radio stations. (See details in Tuner section) 2. The receiver is also equipped with DVD/CD player. Press the SOURCE button on the main unit or DVD button on the remote to activate the feature. 3. Other sources (TV,tapes,etc) can be connected to this unit provided that the connections are compatable. 4. Refer to the "Connecting To Audio-Visual Components" section for details on connection.

NOTE
Once your remote is encoded, you can press ON/OFF on the remote once to turn off the component and then followed by the second time quickly to turn off the receiver (i.e. this unit). If you only want the receiver to be turned off, select FM/ AM or DVD/CD while the unit is ON before pressing ON/OFF.

HINT
This remote may not operate all models of the brands shown. If batteries are removed from the battery compartment of the remote control, all memory will be lost. You need to re-enter all previously programmed codes again. The buttons on the remote may not work correspondingly with those on other brand components. Experiment with the remote and your components to see which buttons work. If only a few functions operate, check to see if another code set will work with more buttons.

Using the Remote to Control Additional Components


You can set your remote to control other components (like TV, VCR, etc.). What you need is to encode them in advance (not necessary for recent RCA & Proscan models). 1. Turn on the component to be programmed. 2. Look up the brand and corresponding code number in the code list.

14

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 19

Advanced Sound Control


Sound Enhancement Systems
This receiver is equipped with several built-in sound enhancement systems.

Dolby Digital
The Dolby Digital mode lets you enjoy full digital surround from software processed in the Dolby Digital format. Dolby Digital provides better sound quality and more powerful presence than conventional Dolby Surround. This unit is equipped with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel so that you can enjoy enhanced full digital surround sound. Being different from Dolby Pro Logic in which only four channels ( Front Left, Front Right, Centre and Rear ) are used, the new system provides stereo separation of the rear speakers (Rear-Right, Rear-Left ). These 5 channels, together with the subwoofer channel for bass sounds ( counted as 0.1 channel ), constitute as 5.1-Channel ( or 6 Channels ) Input for Dolby Digital that brings you the most sophisticated sound enjoyment.

EN

Dolby Pro Logic II


The Pro Logic II mode uses the built-in circuit to steer the Left, Center, Right and Surround left and right channel audio signals and uses all five speakers to play both stereo and Dolby Pro Logic program source, such as TV and VCR. Dolby Pro Logic II includes Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Music and Dolby Pro Logic Emulation. You can use this mode to suit any stereo program source (such as VCR / TV / CD) to enjoy multi-channel sound experience).

Digital Theater Systems (DTS))


DTS is a digital surround system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio. It offers five full-range channels plus a special low frequency effect (LFE) channel for subwoofer, resulting commonly know 5.1 channels. It can be applied with existing 5.1 speaker configurations.
Front Left Speaker Center Speaker Front Right Speaker

DTS is available in DVD, SAT/CAB and CD mode.

Subwoofer

Listening Zone

Front Left Speaker

Center Speaker

Front Right Speaker

Rear Left Speaker

Rear Right Speaker

Dolby 3 Stereo
The 3 Stereo mode will redirect the Surround signals to the front left and right speakers when only the front and center speakers are used. Listening Zone

Subwoofer

Rear Left Speaker

Rear Right Speaker

Front Left Speaker

Center Speaker

Front Right Speaker

Listening Zone

15

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 20

Advanced Sound Control


Stereo
The Stereo mode uses the two main channel outputs from the front speakers. SOURCE SAT DVD/CD VCR TUNER AVAILABLE INPUT ANL/Optical Built-in ANL Built-in

Fine Setting of the Components


The receiver has pre-selected the best surround mode for you once you turn on the unit by pressing the SOURCE Buttons (like DVD/CD, SAT) directly. The default surround modes for different components are as tabled below. If you decide to change the surround mode, you can press the SURROUND repeatedly to toggle among the different surround mode choices and select the one you want. For Digital Signal (2ch PCM), or analog signal , VCR, Tuner: Dolby PL II Movie Dolby PL II Music Dolby PL Emulation Dolby 3 Stereo Arena Jazz Club Theater Stadium Disco Stereo For Digital Signal (Dolby Digital) Dolby Digital Dolby 3 Stereo Stereo Dolby PL II Movie Dolby PLII Music Dolby PL Emulation For DTSl Signal DTS Stereo

Digital Input: Optical (OPT)


Select this setting to play digital signals from a DVD, CD, LD player, or SAT. (SAT mode only)

Analog Input
Select this setting to play analog signals from a cassette deck, VCR or SAT.

DSP (Digital Sound Processor)


These digital sound effects resemble sounds in a real environment such as Arena, Jazz Club, Theater, Stadium and Disco. DSP automatically converts analog audio signals to digital ones which enables you to adjust the sound without degrading the sound quality. Different modes will give you different feel of size and type of listening environment. (Not available in Dolby Digital and DTS (DVD))

Night Mode
By using Dynamic Range Compression technology, you can enjoy enhanced Dolby Digital sound quality at night without interrupting your roommates or neighbors. Night Mode will compress the difference in volume between normal voices and sound like explosions, while still enjoying a Dolby Digital enable component (DVD, SAT). Night Mode can be activated by press and hold the OK button, DRC SOFT (Default) will appear on the display. While DRC SOFT (Default) is still on the display, press the LEFT or RIGHT Adjustment buttons l,around the OK button, until you select the desired mode. There are three modes (OFF, SOFT, SOFTER) for you to choose the extents of compression.

Default Settings
The receiver will keep the last selection in memory as long as it doesnt enter standby mode.

Input Signal Setting


The receiver defaults to the most convenient settings for your easiest use (see table).
Source/ Source/ Input DVD/CD SAT VCR TUNER If Digital Input (optical or coaxial) is selected Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/ N/A N/A

If PCM bitstream PRO-LOGIC II MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II MOVIE N/A N/A

If Analog Input selected N/A PRO-LOGIC II MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II MUSIC

By default, SAT (satellite) is set to analog input. If you wish to change the input formats, follow the steps below: 1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until SAT appears on the display or press the SAT/CAB source buttons on the remote control. 2. Press AUDIO on the remote control to toggle among optical analog to match your connection. Your selection will be stored automatically. Every time you press the source button, the input setting SOURCE DEFAULT INPUT (as seen on display) SAT Analog (SAT/ ANL) VCR Analog (VCR) FM/AM Built-in Tuner DVD/CD Built-in (e.g. SAT/ ANL) will be shown on display for a few seconds. Note: Only SAT input can be changed to optical input.

NOTE
SAT and VCR are just generic names. You can connect other compatible audio/video components to these inputs like TV, TAPE, MINI DISC, CD-RW player, etc.

16

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 21

Advanced Sound Control


Fine Setting of the Speakers
If you use all the speakers provided, all the basic settings have been set. However, to make the surround sound more effective and suit the acoustic conditions in your listening room, you need to delay the signal from some of the speakers. Such channel delay compensates for center or surround speakers that are closer to listening position than the front speakers. You may setup the speaker channel by channel, first press MENU button in stop mode to enter the setup menu, then choose Speaker Setup.

NOTE
Always use the subwoofer for optimum sound quality.

EN

Advanced Setting
Factory Default Setting
The receiver speaker distance default settings are the following:
Front Left Front Right

Center

Cch Lch Rch

SPEAKER SETUP

L/S
EXIT

R/S

Rear Left

Rear Right

To change the speaker size In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select speaker, when the speaker picture is selected, you can press up/down buttons to adjust speaker size. To change the speaker distance In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select speaker, when the speaker distance column is selected, you can press up/down buttons to adjust the distance of front, rear and center speaker individually. To change the speaker level In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select speaker, when the speaker volumn column is selected, you can press up/down buttons to adjust the level of front, rear, center speaker and subwoofer individually. To test the speaker setting In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select the test column, then press OK the activate. A short noise will then be heard in the speakers one by one.

Front speakers (L/R) Center speaker (Cch) Rear speaker (SUR)

15 ft 15 ft 10 ft

17

RTD101-EN

receiver

11/25/02

10:09 AM

Page 22

Advance Sound Control


Speaker Icons
The receiver shows you the speaker settings on the display with the following icons:

Front Speakers
C

Center Speaker Rear Speakers

LFE

Subwoofer Present

Displaying Program Formats


When a digital source is playing, the receiver will automatically switch to the proper surround mode and indicates on the speaker icons on the right-hand side of the display. (See diagram)

It is important to note, however, that not all Dolby Digital sources are encoded with the full complement of five channels plus LFE*. Speaker icons show how many and which speaker you have enabled (See Fine Setting of the Speakers) and the letters inside the speaker icons show which channel is present in the source information. For example, the diagram shown means you have all the five speakers and subwoofer enabled and the digital sources you played have five channels plus LFE complemented. (Dolby Digital 5.1 Channels) * LFE stands for Low Frequency Effect. The indication LFE appears if the digital source contains LFE information. In this case, the bass signal will be delivered to the subwoofer, offering more dynamic deep bass sound effects. If the letter is flashing, the signal is either too weak or just gone.

18

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 1

DVD Player
Basic Playback Features
1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until DVD/CD appears on the display or DVD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source.
ESET + BAND/APP SOURCE BASS/TREBLE RP VCR 1 RANDOM SURROUND DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE ON OFF TV PHONES

Press STOP once to stop playback and go into resume mode.


WHOINPUT ANTFMS

EN

0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

CD
/C H+

TAPE

NOTE
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3 L C R LS LFE RS

RESUME MODE: The next time PLAY is pressed, the unit will begin playback at the location where it was last stopped. Press STOP key again to cancel the resume mode.

2. Open disc tray for loading discs with label side facing up. Press again to close it.
PHONES

VOLUM

Quick search
1. While playing a disc, press REVERSE on the remote control to scan backwards through the disc. Press FORWARD on the remote for scanning forward. Press repeatedly to change searching speed to 1,2 or 3 times for VCD and 1,2,3 or 4 for DVD. 2. Press PLAY at any time to resume normal playback.
7 8 0
REPEAT
RANDOM

3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PLAY on the remote control to start playback Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PAUSE to pause playing during playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback.
PROGRAM

9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD
PRESET +

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

RECORD STOP

PAUSE
PHONES

PRESET +

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

PHONES

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

u n i v e r s a l

Press SKIP REVERSE to go back to the previous chapter or SKIP FORWARD to move to the next chapter.

Freeze frame, frame advance


1. Press PAUSE on the remote control to freeze picture during playback. Each time you press it again, the picture advances one frame. 2. Press PAUSE repeatedly to move forward in still frame. 3. Press PLAY to resume normal playback.
0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

MUTE
CH +
PRESET PRESET +

SURROUND

VOL

VOL

PHONE

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO

8 0

9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

u n i v e r s a l

19

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 2

DVD Player
Slow motion playback
1. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE in the remote control to freeze the picture during playback.
WHOINPUT ANTFMS

On-screen banner display


You can access the on-screen banner display during playback to select many playback features. Each feature is illustrated with an icon. However, each banner display feature is available only if the disc was created with that particular feature. An invalid icon appears on the screen when you select an icon that does not function. Also, the icon is grayed out to tell you so. Title Audio Chapter Camera angles Disc type

0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

PRESET +

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM


PHONES

2. Advance picture in slow motion. Press FORWARD on the remote control for slow motion in forward direction and REVERSE (DVD only) in reverse direction. Press repeatedly to change speed to 1/16 times, 1/8 times, 1/4 times and 1/2 times.
7 8 0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

Subtitles

Playmode

9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

Title icon is being highlighted in this example

Time indicator

3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote control to resume normal playback.
7
REPEAT

General use
1. Press INFO on the remote control during playback to show on-screen banner.
VOL
VOL

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PRESET + RECORD STOP P AUSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

PHONES

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

CH

SUBTITLE LANG

ANGLE

FRAME

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

Progressive scan
1. Make sure the component output is connected to a TV which accept the progressive signal. To enable progressive scan, press and hold bass / treble for 3 seconds in STOP mode. 2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows on the remote control to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
CH
BASS/TREBLE RPT/PROG.

SOURCE

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

SURROUND PROGRESSIVE

MENU

CLEAR

2. The display will show Progressive scan ON/OFF request, press the key to toggle between ON and OFF and wait for 3 seconds to exit, the blue led will lit if the progressive scan function is active. Note: Progressive Scan function can only be selected in STOP mode.

3. Press OK to open menu under selected feature.


GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

20

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 3

DVD Player
Selecting a title
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter title number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit title number (e.g. 9 = 09). You can also use UP/ DOWN key to change title number.
1

2. Press the UP/DOWN key to select the audio channel you want, then press OK to confirm.
CH CH

EN

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

NOTE
Some discs have one title only.

NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple audio tracks.

Selecting a chapter Selecting subtitle language


1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter chapter number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit chapter number (e.g. 9 = 09). You can also use UP/ DOWN key to change title number.
MENU CLEAR

1. Refer to previous page General use to open the subtitle menu, or press SUBTITLE button on the remote.

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

1
C

2
C

3
C

4
C

5
C

u n i v e r s a l
9
PROGRAM

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

2. Press the UP/DOWN key to select the audio channel you want, then press OK to confirm.
CH

NOTE
The chapter feature will not work if the disc is not formatted with separate chapters.

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU

CLEAR

Selecting audio language


1. Refer to previous page General use to open the subtitle menu, or press AUDIO on the remote control to select the audio channel.

CLEAR

NoteL To exit the OSD banner, press the INFO key.

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

u n i v e r s a l

NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with subtitles.

21

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 4

DVD Player
Selecting camera angle
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the camera angle menu, or press ANGLE button on the remote.

Using bookmarks
The bookmark feature allows you to mark a point on the disc that you can go to quickly. You can store up to 9 bookmarks.

Adding bookmarks
2. Press the UP/DOWN key to select the audio channel you want, then press OK to confirm.
CH CH

1. Refer to Page 20 General use to open the bookmark menu.

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

2. Use the arrows on the remote to move the cursor (yellow frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the scene you want to do so.
CH CH

3
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

NOTE
MENU CLEAR MENU CLEAR

This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple angles.

Selecting zoom ratio


1.Press ZOOM button on the remote to select the zoom ratio.

3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right with arrow button and then press OK when you reach another scene you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

Recalling bookmarks
RECORD STOP PAUSE
SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to move cursor (yellow frame) to the Go To check line and to the bookmarked scene you want to recall.

u n i v e r s a l

2. There are wo zoom ratio available, press the zoom key to access the following zoom sequence. NORMAL > ZOOM 1 > ZOOM 2 > NORMAL

3. Press OK to recall bookmarked scene. 4. Move cursor by using the arrows to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new scenes but the previous bookmarks will be erased starting from the earliest one.

22

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 5

DVD Player
Play mode
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the playmode menu. 2. Press the up/down buttons to select among : Normal >Program edit/ Program play > Repeat AB > Repeat Disc > Repeat Title > Repeat Chapter > Normal 3. Press OK to confirm setting. 2. The box under Title will be highlighted automatically.

EN
CH CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

Use the arrows on the remote to select title and chapter.


CH CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

3. Add will be highlighted automatically after chapter is selected. Press OK to add selected track and chapter(s) onto playlist.
CH

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

NOTE
Random playback is not available in DVD mode.

MENU

CLEAR

4. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return normal playback with program saved), then press OK to start program playback or return to stop mode.

Program playback Edit program


1. Refer to previous page General use to open theplaymode menu, or press and hold RPT/PROG. button on the main unit to enter program mode. Note: Program edit can only be activated during STOP / Resume mode. However, if there is program saved already, program play can be activated during plaback mode.

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

NOTE
You can select at maximum 32 items by repeating steps 2 - 3.

23

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 6

DVD Player
Delete program
1. Select the program menu from the OSD banner, or press and hold the RPT/PROG. button on the main unit to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to select and highlight the programmed item you want to delete on the playlist.
CH CH

3. Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to select Title or Chapter, then the UP and DOWN arrows to select the number.
CH CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

4. Use the LEFT and DOWN arrows to highlight Insert and then press OK.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

3. Highlight Delete and then press OK to delete item.


CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

5. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to delete additional items. 5. Use the arrows to select and highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

Cancel program
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode.

Insert chapter
1. Select the program menu from the OSD banner, or press and hold the RPT/PROG. button on the main unit to display program edit playlist.

2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a chapter before it.
CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

24

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 7

DVD Player
Set up menu
General use
1. Press MENU in STOP mode to display the set up menu on screen. The menu shows current settings.

Audio language
This step will define the default audio language. Choosing an audio language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily.

EN

NOTE
if you press during disc playback, only the discs own menu will be displayed.

NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated as default by each disc will be selected..

1. Open audio language menu.


OK

MENU

CLEAR

1 4

2 5

3 6

2. Use UP and DOWN arrows to select language and then press OK.

For languages other than options available: 2. Use arrow buttons to highlight options and press OK to open selected menu.
CH

3. Press DOWN to select Other and then press OK. 4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK on the remote.
MENU CLEAR GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

1 4
MENU CLEAR MENU CLEAR

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

MENU

CLEAR

1
FORWARD

2 5

3 6

REVERSE PLAY

3. Press LEFT arrow to go back to the previous menu or press GO BACK to exit the setup menu completely.
IDE GU

CH +
OK

VOL

VOL

FUNCTION

MENU

CLEAR

CH

1
C

2
C

3
C

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

4
C

5
C

25

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 8

DVD Player
Subtitle language
This step will define the default subtitle language. Choosing a subtitle language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily.

Menu language
This step will define the language of menus and other short messages shown on screen. 1. Open menu language menu.

NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated by each disc as default will be selected.

1. Open subtitle language menu.

2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll the selections and select the language and then press OK to return to main menu.
CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU

CLEAR

2. Press UP and DOWN arrow to select language and then press OK.
CH

CLEAR

1 1 2 3 4

2 5

3 6

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

1 4

2 5

3 6

For languages other than options available:


3. Move down and select Other and then press OK. 4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK button on the remote.

CH

MENU

CLEAR

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

WHOINPUT

MENU FORWARD

CLEAR

REVERSE PLAY

26

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 9

DVD Player
Rating (Parental control)
This step will disable the playing of some DVDs (especially U.S. type) which are not suitable for some audience, e.g. children. Such kind of DVDs is encoded with a specific rating level. If the rating level of the disc is higher than the preset level (to be set in this step), the playing will be prohibited unless the password (see next step) is entered. 1. Open the rating menu.

Password Set password


To disable the viewing of rated DVDs, a four-digit password must be selected. 1. Open the Set Password menu.

EN

8 7 5 6R 4 PG-13 3 PG 2 1G

2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to highlight the rating that would require a password to play. Press OK to return to main menu. Ratings highlighted in blue require password.
CH

2. Select Set Password and press OK. 3. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

The rating systems is based on information encoded on the DVD disc being played, so movies may carry a rating symbol, the disc may or may not contain that rating in its software. In addition to the five standard (MPAA) rating symbols of G (level 2), PG (Parental Guidance, level 4), PG13 (Parental Guidance and 13 years old, level 4), R (Restricted, level 6) and NC17 (from 17 years old, level 7), the DVD will accommodate a total of 8 rating steps, as set by the DVD makers. These additional steps allows for more critical control of program playback for all audiences. Level 8: All DVDs can be played (Factory preset). Level 7 to 2: DVDs for general audiences/ children can be played. Level 1: DVDs for children can be played, DVDs for adults/ general audiences are prohibited.

4. Repeat step 3 to confirm password.

Note:

will be displayed on the VFD once password is set.

27

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 10

DVD Player
NOTE
When incorrect password is entered, new password menu appears and you can enter and confirm password again. A lock icon shows on unit display when password is required to view rated discs. Important: keep the password in a safe place or remember it reliably as access to rated discs or rating/ password menus requires the correct password. 4. Use the number buttons to enter new password and then press OK. 5. Repeat the above step to confirm password and return to password menu. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.

Clear password
1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the password menu. 2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK. 3. Move up or down the menu using the UP or DOWN arrows and select Clear Password. Press OK to clear password. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.

Change password
Current password must be entered first to change password. 1. Open the password menu.

Set Password Change Password

2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.
MENU CLEAR GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

MENU

CLEAR

1
FORWARD

2 5

3 6

REVERSE PLAY

3. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to select Change Password and then press OK.
CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU MENU CLEAR

CLEAR

28

RTD101-EN DVD

11/25/02

10:23 AM

Page 11

DVD Player
TV aspect
This step selects the TV aspect, wide-screen (16:9) or conventional (4:3). 1. Open the TV aspect menu.

Dynamic range
1. To disable/enable the dynamic function, enter the dynamic range menu.

EN

Soft Softer

2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select TV aspect and then press OK to return to main menu. If you have a wide-screen (16:9) TV, choose 16:9 Widescreen. - For 16:9 movie you will get (Do not select 16:9 widescreen setting if you are using a 4:3 TV set. or the image may look distorted with some DVD disc.) - For 4:3 movie you will get

2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select Dynamic Range and then press OK to return to main menu.
CH CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

Digital audio out


1. To select digital audio out, enter the digital audio out menu.

If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, - if you select 4:3 letterbox for 16:9 movie, you will get

- if you select 4:3 Pan Scan for 16:9 movie, you will get (the left and right edges are hidden)

Off Compressed PCM

- for 4:3 movie, for both selections, you will get 2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select Dynamic Range and then press OK to return to main menu.
CH CH

Note: You may need to deactivate progressive scan when viewing a video program recorded in 4:3 aspect. Some 16:9 TV set will not be able to adjust to 4:3 when progressive scan is ON. If this happened, try to disable progressive scan.

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

29

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 2

CD / MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations
Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference. Many common CD creator softwares can make files compatible for the system but do not forget to finalize your disc after creation. This set cannot read DirectCD recordings. In order to get audio CD quality, you need to record your MP3 CD at 128 kbps. You can record up to 256 kbps. Beyond 256 kbps, the unit might not read the CD. Do not combine CD Audio and MP3 tracks onto a CD-R(W) or CD-ROM. The player will only playback CD audio tracks from mixed CD formats.

Loading and playing an audio CD


1. Press EJECT button on the front panel to open the disc tray. Place disc on the disc tray with the label side facing up. Press EJECT again to close disc tray.

T+

PHONES

The disc will be read to detect whether an audio CD or MP3 CD has been inserted.

NOTE
If the CD is a MP3 audio CD, reading may take up to 2 minutes.

NOTE
If over 400 items (songs/folders) are on the disc, only the first 400 songs can be played. Resume function does not operate in MP3 mode. 2. Playback begins automatically after the disc has been read. An audio CD CD or MP3 icon MP3 will show on the display. 3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE on the remote control to pause playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE again on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback. The CD/MP3 playback function works in a similar way as the features available for DVD . Press SOURCE on the main unit or DVD/CD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source.
PRESET +

0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

PHONES

u n i v e r s a l
BAND/APP SOURCE BASS/TREBLE RPT/PR

VCR
RANDOM SURROUND

ON OFF

TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

30

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 3

CD / MP3 Player
4. Press SKIP REVERSE on the main unit or CH- on the remote to return to the previous track. Press SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or CH + on the remote to go to the next track.

Quick scan
1. Press FORWARD or REVERSE on the remote to scan through a track quickly during playback. To change speed to 1, 2 or 3 times, press repeatedly during scan. Quick scan does not work on MP3 music.
7 8 0 9
ANTFMS

EN

MUTE
CH +
PRESET PRESET +

SURROUND

VOL

VOL

WHOINPUT
PHONES

CH

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

5. Press STOP on the main unit or STOP on the remote control to end playback.
0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
C C

7
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

9
PROGRAM

0
SET PRESET +

RECORD STOP

PAUSE

PRESET +

INPUT SEEK REVERSE

PLAY

ANT-FMS FORWARD

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM


PHONES PHONES

RECORD

STOP

P AUSE

AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL

SURR

u n i v e r s a l

NOTE
When playback is interrupted, the location at which it stopped will be memorized. Playback will resume at the position it was last stopped. Resume playback does not work on MP3 music.

2. Press PLAY on the main unit or the remote to resume normal playback.

31

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 4

CD / MP3 Player
On- screen banner display for CD playback
Track Bookmark Playmodes Disc type

Selecting a track
1. Refer to General use to open the track menu. 2. Enter track number. Add 0 in front of single-digit track number (e.g. 9 = 09).

MENU

CLEAR

1 4

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

Time display mode

Time indicator

WHOINPUT

General use
1. Press INFO on the remote control to hide and show on- screen banner. (Only audio CD banner)
VOL
VOL

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

NOTE
You must be in playback mode for track selection.

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

Playmode selection for CD


There are several options for this feature. 1. Standard normal CD playback 2. Program plays the programmed tracks (usable in stop mode only) 3. Repeat Disc plays the disc you have selected or being played at the moment over repeatedly. 4. Repeat Track plays one track over repeatedly. 5, Random plays all the tracks in the disc randomly.

2. Use the LEFT / RIGHT arrow keys to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

Program
MENU CLEAR

Program edit - can be activated in STOP mode only. Program play - can be activated during playback mode if there is saved program in the program list.

3. Press OK to open menu under selected feature.


GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

32

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 5

CD / MP3 Player
Bookmarks (Audio CDs Only) Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new points but the previous bookmarks will be erased. The bookmark feature allows you to select certain points on the disc where you want to jump to quickly. 9 bookmarks can be selected.

EN

Time display (Audio CDs Only)


1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the time display menu. 2. Press OK repeatedly to switch among "Track Elapsed", "Track Remain" , Disc Elapsed and Disc Remain time during playback. Selected mode shows on banner.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

Adding Bookmarks (Audio CDs Only)


1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the bookmark menu.

2. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (green frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the point you want to do so.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK OK GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR MENU CLEAR

1 4

2 5

3 6

3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right and then press OK when you reach another point you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

Recalling bookmarks
1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the UP arrow to move the cursor (green frame) to the Go To check line and use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to the bookmarked point you want to recall. 3. Press OK to recall bookmarked point.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK OK
CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO

MENU

CLEAR

3 1

MENU

CLEAR

4. Use the arrow buttons to move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.

33

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 6

CD / MP3 Player
Program playback Edit program
1. In STOP mode, press RPT/PROG. on the main unit or enter the OSD banner to display program edit playlist. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional tracks to the program. 5. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK to confirm program playback or return to the stop mode.

NOTE
You can select at maximum 32 items

Delete Program
1. In stop mode, press RPT/PROG on the main unit or enter the OSD banner to display program edit playlist. 2. The box under TRACK will be highlighted. Press UP or DOWN arrow buttons or number buttons to select track. Press OK.
CH

2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to select Playlist, then use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight the programmed track you want to delete on the playlist. 3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Delete and then press OK to delete track. 4. Highlight Play (to start program playback) or Done (to return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

MENU

CLEAR

3
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

REVERSE PLAY

FORWARD

Insert track
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT/PROG. on the main unit or enter the OSD banner to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows to highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a track before it.

MENU

CLEAR

3. Add will be highlighted automatically after track is selected. Press OK to add selected track onto playlist.

3. Refer to Edit program to select a track to be inserted. 4. Highlight Insert and then press OK 5. Highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.

Cancel program
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode. Nevertheless, the program will remain in memory and can be recalled by pressing PROGRAM again.

34

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 7

CD / MP3 Player
On- screen display for MP3 playback
Standard Play File mode
1. In the playmode window, press UP or DOWN arrow buttons on the remote to select the standard mode. CH 2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons on the remote to toggle between different MP3 windows.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
PHONES TPRESET +

2. Press OK to enter the folder and PLAY when in stop mode or OK when currently playing to begin playback of all the files in the folder. Playback stops when all files have been played. 3. To exit a folder, use the arrow buttons to select the <..> then press OK.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

EN

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

3. In the file window, use the UP or DOWN arrow buttons on the remote to select the file you wish to begin playing.

Playmode selection for MP3


1. You can select your desire playmode in MP3 menu. i. Standard - normal playback ii. Playlist - play your programmed tracks iii. Random - play tracks randomly iv. Track repeat - repeat desired track v. Folder repeat - repeat desired folder vi. Disc repeat - repeat the whole disc vii. Playlist repeat - repeat programmed tracks viii. Playlist random - play programmed tracks randomly

2. Press PLAY on the main unit or OK on the remote control to start playback. If you are currently playing, then press OK button to select a different MP3 to play. All the files or folders will be played starting with the one you have selected.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
TPRESET +

PHONES

MENU

CLEAR

Playback stops when all files have been played.

2. When Play Mode window is hi-lighted and blinking, use the Up/Down arrow keys to toggle different playmodes, then press OK button to confirm.
CH CH

Folder mode
1. Use the arrow buttons on the remote to select the folder you wish to play.

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

35

RTD101-EN

CD_MP3

11/25/02

10:26 AM

Page 8

CD / MP3 Player
Playlist
1. In the playmode setting window, press UP or DOWN arrow button to select playlist mode. 4. Once all the files have been selected, move the cursor to the file in the playlist and press OK to begin playlist playback.
CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK MENU CLEAR

MENU

CLEAR

5. Press STOP to end playlist playback.

Delete a specific File from Program List


1. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows to select program list, then use the UP or DOWN arrows to select file to be deleted and move to delete icon and press OK to delete.

Delete All
H

2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows on the remote to select file on the left that you wish to add to the playlist.

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

1. In stop mode, use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows to select DELETE ALL icon and press OK to clear all.
MENU CLEAR
MENU CLEAR

3. Press OK to move the file to the right playlist.


GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK

MENU

CLEAR

36

RTD101-EN Radio

11/25/02

10:28 AM

Page 1

Radio
Operating the Radio
The receiver has a built-in tuner that allows for AM/FM radio function. 5. Tune the stations by pressing FAST FORWARD or FAST REVERSE on the remote control repeatedly until the desired station is found. Alternatively, you can press and hold the respective buttons for about one second to activate the automatic SEARCH function. In this mode the receiver will automatically tune frequencies until it finds a station.
7 8 0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD

EN

Manual tuning
1. Connect the FM and AM antenna accordingly (see "Connecting the Antenna" on page 5 section for details) 2. Press POWER on the main unit.

9
ANTFMS

WHOINPUT

RECORD STOP
BAND/A

PAUSE

SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM

RANDO

POWER
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

3. Press SOURCE until tuner mode is selected or press AM/FM on the remote control.

6. Repeat steps 5 to tune another radio station.

BAND/APP

SOURCE

BASS/TREBLE

Select sound effect if needed by pressing SURROUND.


VCR ON OFF TV
DVDCD TAPE AMFM SATCABLE

RANDOM

SURROUND

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND
DVDCD TAPE AMFM
BAND/APP SOURCE BASS/TREBLE PLAY M

SATCABLE

MUTE
RPT/PGM SURROUND

SURROUND
CH +

4. To select band, press the BAND/APP on the main unit or AM/FM button on the remote again to toggle between AM/FM mode. When an FM station broadcast Stereo sound, ST is displayed.

VOL

VOL

CH

BAND/APP

SOURCE

VCR
RANDOM SURROUND

ON OFF

TV

NOTE
1. If there is interference, modify the location of the antenna until the optimal sound is heard. TV and other electronic devices could be the cause of interferences so try to position the antenna away from them. 2. Weak signal can affect the "auto Search function". Adjust the antenna for better reception for more efficient search.

POWER

DVDCD TAPE AMFM

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

37

RTD101-EN Radio

11/25/02

10:28 AM

Page 2

Radio
Storing radio stations:
The receiver can store up to 40 radio stations in memory. You can enter every single radio station yourself or the receiver can store all available radio station automatically in an ascending order.
MENU

3. Press MENU on the remote control. "PROG" will appear on the display
OK

CLEAR

Automatic preset storing :


1. Press BAND/APP on the main unit or AM/FM repeatedly on the remote control to select the FM band.
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

1 4

2 5

3 6

BAND/APP

SOURCE

LS LFE RS

VCR
RANDOM SURROUND

ON OFF

TV

DVDCD TAPE AMFM


POWER

SATCABLE

MUTE
CH +

SURROUND

4. While the word "PROG " is still flashing, input your desired preset number (1-40) using the numeric keys on the remote control to store the radio station.
MENU CLEAR

2
C

3
C

2- Press and hold BAND/APP for 3 seconds to start automatic preset programming. AUTO will be flashing during the automatic storing process.

4
BAND/APP SOURCE
C

5
C

6 9
PROGRAM

7
RANDOM SURROUND
REPEAT

8
RANDOM

0
POWER INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD

D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3 D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3

LS LFE RS

LS LFE RS

Radio frequencies will be browsed and radio stations stored automatically. When all available radio stations are stored or if all 40 memory locations are full, the auto preset will stop.

Retrieving preset stations


1. Press SOURCE on the unit or AM/FM on the remote control to enter tuner mode 2. Press PRESET + or PRESET - on the unit or CH+ or CH on the remote control to tune up or down preset channels.
MUTE SURROUND
CH +

NOTE
Weak signal can affect the "Automatic Preset Storing function" efficiency. Adjust the antenna for the best reception for more efficient search. No APP function for AM mode.

VOL

VOL

PRESET -

PRESET +

PHONES

CH

GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO

Manual preset
1. Select the band by pressing AM/FM repeatedly 2. Tune to a radio station (see "Manual tuning" on page 37 above for details)

38

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 1

Troubleshooting Tips
Power
No power ?
Correctly connect the AC Power Cord to an AC Outlet.

No audio from one channel.


Check the speaker level setting. Check the speaker wire or cable connections.

EN

Power is switching off automatically ?


If the player is not used, i.e. no key pressed for 30 minutes, it automatically switches to standby (Auto Power Off). Press the SOURCE key to switch the player on again.

Remote control
The remote control does not work ?
Load the batteries with their polarities (+ and ) aligned correctly. Batteries are low. Replace with new ones. Point the remote control to the front of the player. Operate the remote control within an 26 ft range from the player. Remove any obstacles between the remote control and the red LED on the player.

The keys do not activate the functions they control (unit and / or remote control).
Set the STANDBY key to OFF (red light on) and back to ON again. Alternatively, turn off the power, disconnect the power plug and then re-connect it (The player may not be operating properly due to lightning, static electricity or some other external factors). If keys still do not activate the functions they control even when the above mentioned corrective actions are taken, contact your RCA retailer. During protection such as OCP, OVP, OTP,the unit may already go into the Latch mode, and the unit will need sometime to power on again. And the blue led will blink continously for indication, you have to restart the unit by press the POWER/ECO button on the main unit.

The invalid icon appears on-screen ?


When invalid icon appears on-screen, it indicates that you have pressed the wrong key, because : 1. The DVDs does not allow it. 2. The DVD's does not propose this option /e.g., angles. 3. The function is not available on that part of the disc. 4. You have requested a title or chapter number or search time that is not available.

Video and audio


There is no picture ?
Turn on the TV set. Check connections. Make the correct input selection on the TV set. If progressive is on, no picture from composite video and S-video output in DVD/CD mode.

TV or video recorder cannot be operated with the remote control.


Not all models can be operated with the supplied universal remote control.

No picture or the picture shown is not that of the DVD player.


Switch off the other video device connected to the AV jack of the player.

The picture is distorted or shakes during search, forward or reverse.


Search, forward or reverse playback generates a slight distortion, but this is not a malfunction.

Playback
Playback does not start when the PLAY key is pressed ?
Make sure that the disc (single sided) is loaded correctly with the title label facing up. Make sure you are in the proper source mode.

There is no sound or it can hardly be heard ?


Make sure the speakers are connected. Make sure the MUTE button is not on. Check connections. Make the correct audio input selection and volume adjustment on the TV set or hifi system (e.g. AV selector). There is no sound during a pause (still picture), still picture advance, or slow playback. Disc is defaulted to DTS.

Playback stops immediately after the PLAY key is pressed ?


This player can play DVDs, Video CDs and Audio and MP3 CDs only, check that your disc corresponds to one of these formats. If the disc is dirty, wipe it with a soft and clean cloth. Condensation occurred inside the player. Leave it at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours.

No "Surround" sound ?
Check speaker configuration in the menu.

Disc cannot be played. Noise interference appears on the TV, while watching a TV program and the DVD player is left on ?
Turn off DVD player. The TV is too close to the audio system. Wipe the disc clean. Use a RCA lens cleaner. The disc's region No. differs from your player's region No.

Search forward & reverse playback does not work ?


Some DVDs have segments where search forward & reverse playback functions do not work.

Volume level differences playing different disc types (DVDs, audio / video CDs).
Adjust the master volume .

39

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 2

Troubleshooting Tips
Subtitle, language, camera angle etc.
Disc menu operation and contents may differ from disc to disc. Please refer to the instructions accompanying the disc.

Equipment Specifications:
AMPLIFIER SECTION:
Stereo mode: each 65W at 8 ohm. 10% THD @1 kHz Subwoofer channel: 125w at 4 Muting Attenuation: 65dB Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz +/-1dB Signal to Noise Ratio: 65dB (Bypass mode)

There are no subtitles ?


Check that the subtitle is recorded on the disc. Subtitles disappear from the TV screen. See page 21 to display subtitles.

Subtitle (or language) setting cannot be changed ?


The disc being played has been recorded in only one language. Depending on the type of DVD, some segments limit language selection.

VIDEO SECTION:
Input ( Sensitivity/ Impedance ):1Vp-p/ 75ohm Output (Level/ Impedance): 1Vp-p/ 75 ohm Frequency Response: 10Hz to 6MHz at +/- 3dB Signal to noise ratio: 40dB Crosstalk @3.58MHz: 40dB

The picture is not displayed in the correct format on the TV (4 x 3 or 16 x 9)


According to your TV, make the correct "TV Screen" setting in the set-up menu (page 29).

AM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 80Hz 2kHz +/-6dB Usable Sensitivity: 5000uV/m @ S/N 20dB Signal to Noise: 30dB Image Ratio: 20dB @ 1000kHz IF Rejection: 35dB

The camera angle cannot be changed with the angle button ?


This function does not work when a DVD has not been recorded with a multi-camera angle system. Some DVDs use a multi-camera angle system only in certain portions of the DVD.

FM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 40Hz 15kHz +/-3dB Quieting: 24dBu Signal to Noise: 60dB(stereo) / 65dB(mono) Image Ratio: 40dB IF Rejection: 50dB

The menu language is not the one you want ?


The menu language for your player has not been set during set-up. Your preferred menu language on a DVD disc (if available) has not been set during set up.

Dimensions (H x W x D inch) :
Unit - 2.4 x 17 x 14 Speaker - 5.3 x 3.5 x 4.1 Subwoofer - 14.3 x 9.3 x 11.4

Audio (spoken) and / or subtitle language is not the one selected during the initial player set-up ?
If the audio or subtitle language is not available on the DVD disc, the language selected during initial player set-up will not be heard or seen. The disc's priority language (default language) is selected automatically. If you want another language, press menu during playback, if the disc has its own language selection menu (Refer to page 21).

Radio
STEREO indicator is off.
Adjust the antenna.

The signal is Mono. Severe hum or noise.


The signal is too weak. Connect an external antenna.

40

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 3

Care and Maintenance


Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.

Safety precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This player uses a laser to read the data on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. Also, to keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. This apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.

Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.

EN

The player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician. Never move the player during playback. Never put more than one discs on a tray or put a disc slipping out of the guide area.

Handling discs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold discs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. Discs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs.
T
son Digita hom
V id e o D i s c

Cleaning discs
Dirty discs can cause poor sound and visual quality. Always keep discs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. Never wipe the disc in a circular motion since circular scratches are likely to occur and could cause noise during playback. If a disc becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on discs. Also, never clean discs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface

Headset safety
Do not play your headset at a high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air type designed to let you hear outside sounds, dont turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.

Dont infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia Inc.

Disc lens care


When your disc lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound and visual quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a disc lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound and visual quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the disc lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.

Important battery information


Remove the batteries to avoid leakage if you do not use your remote control for more than one month. Discard leaky batteries immediately as leaking batteries may cause skin burns or other personal injuries. Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to provincial and local regulations. Any battery may leak electrolyte if mixed with a different battery type, if inserted incorrectly, if all batteries are not replaced at the same time, if disposed of in fire, or if an attempt is made to charge a battery not intended to be recharged.

The descriptions and characteristics given in this document are given as a general indication and not as a guarantee. In order to provide the highest quality product possible, we reserve the right to make any improvement or modification without prior notice. The English version serves as the final reference on all products and operational details should any discrepancies arise in other languages.

41

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 4

Remote Codes
CABLE CODES
ABC ANTRONIX ARCHER CABLETENNA CABLEVIEW CENTURY CITIZEN COLOUR VOICE COMTRONICS CONTEC EASTERN GARRARD GC ELECTRONICS GEMINI GENERAL INSTRUMENT HAMLIN HITACHI HYTEX JASCO JERROLD MAGNAVOX MEMOREX MOVIE TIME NSC OAK PANASONIC PARAGON PHILIPS PIONEER PULSAR RCA REALISTIC REGAL REGENCY REMBRANDT RUNCO SAMSUNG SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA SIGNAL SIGNATURE SL MARX SPRUCER STARCOM STARGATE STARQUEST TANDY TELEVIEW TOCOM TOSHIBA TUSA TV86 UNIKA UNITED ARTISTS UNITED CABLE UNIVERSAL VIDEOWAY VIEWSTAR ZENITH 5002, 5008, 5008, 5008 5008 5011 5011 5012, 5014, 5016 5017 5011 5009 5018, 5003 5020, 5003 5002 5011 5003, 5024, 5025 5026 5002, 5002, 5002, 5048, 5026 5011, 5030, 5033, 5026 5047, 5009, 5022, 5017 5003 5026 5014, 5006, 5014, 5003 5014 5052 5007, 5014, 5018 5040 5014 5004, 5026 5018 5027 5008, 5002 5053 5008, 5044 5015, 5026, 5003, 5004, 5005, 5006, 5009, 5053 5009 5009, 5010, 5011

VCR CODES
ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 2113 AMERICAN HIGH ASHA AUDIO DYNAMICS AUDIOVOX BELL & HOWELL BEAUMARK BROKSONIC CALIX CANDLE CANON CAPEHART CARVER CCE CITIZEN COLORTYME COLT CRAIG CURTIS-MATHES CYBERNEX DAEWOO DAYTRON DBX DIMENSIA DYNATECH ELECTROHOME ELECTROPHONIC EMERSON 2131 2026 2027 2002, 2026 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2111, 2112, 2021 2013 2009, 2014 2011 2013 2012, 2014 2013, 2018, 2021, 2020, 2062 2027, 2013, 2018, 2009 2061 2013, 2000, 2018, 2013 2015, 2027, 2110 2009, 2000 2002, 2014, 2014 2002, 2026, 2029, 2037, 2038, 2047, 2065, 2011, 2118 2021, 2002, 2026 2000, 2120 2009, 2026 2026 2009 2061 2011 2002, 2111, 2023 2021 2021 2009, 2021, 2059, 2055, 2009, 2111, 2009, 2058, 2061 2014, 2002, 2061 2014 2021, 2108, 2013 2009, 2021, 2014 2021 2021

5013 5015

2010

2025 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019 2022, 2114 2110 2061 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019, 2027

5019, 5049 5021, 5022, 5035, 5045

5005, 5007, 5018, 5023, 5046, 5053

5027, 5028 5027, 5028 5016, 5029 5052 5012, 5013, 5019, 5025, 5031, 5032 5034 5049, 5052 5049 5035

2014, 2023, 2061 2002, 2009, 2013, 2016, 2021, 2022, 2024, 2115 2017, 2019, 2025, 2026, 2028, 2110 2010 2026 2029 2012, 2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2025, 2030, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2036, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2044, 2045, 2105, 2113, 2116, 2117, 2130 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2119 2026 2001, 2013, 2021, 2022, 2053, 2115, 2014, 2018, 2054, 2121

5034 5036, 5037, 5038 5018

FISHER 5018, 5053 5018 FUJI FUNAI GARRARD GE GOLDSTAR GRADIENTE HARLEY DAVIDSON HARMAN KARDON HARWOOD HEADQUARTER HITACHI HI-Q INSTANT REPLAY JCI JC PENNEY

5023, 5041

5009, 5011

5009, 5010, 5011 5025, 5027, 5040 5050, 5051

2055, 2056, 2057, 2107, 2120, 2122

JENSEN JVC KENWOOD KLH KODAK LLOYD LOGIK LXI MAGNAVOX MAGNIN MARANTZ MARTA MASUSHITA MEI

2010, 2022, 2060, 2056, 2010, 2123 2010, 2111, 2021 2026

2011, 2055, 2107, 2111 2011,

2013, 2014, 2056, 2058, 2118 2018, 2058,

2011, 2016, 2018, 2123

2022, 2062, 2063, 2104, 2124 2010, 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2062, 2064

42

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 5

Remote Codes
MEMOREX MGA MGN TECHNOLOGY MIDLAND MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 2002, 2104, 2029, 2013 2053 2055, 2029, 2070, 2123 2075, 2021, 2002, 2002, 2009, 2076, 2014 2013 2021 2014, 2096 2035 2021, 2016, 2018 2021, 2021, 2014 2010, 2016, 2000, 2061 2104 2011 2011 2021, 2000, 2082, 2089, 2002, 2026, 2014 2014 2128 2104 2005, 2104, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2093, 2011, 2051, 2002, 2004, 2013 2002, 2021, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2124 2002, 2002, 2014 2058, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2013, 2015, 2013, 2013 2009, 2010 2009, 2013 2002, 2029, 2103, 2021, 2009, 2004, 2011, 2013, 2014, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2131 2065, 2113

TV CODES
ABEX ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AKAI ALLERON AMTRON ANAM NATIONAL AOC AUDIOVOX BELCOR BELL & HOWELL BRADFORD BROKWOOD CANDLE CAPEHART CELEBRITY CENTURION CITIZEN CLAIRTONE COLORTYME CONCERTO CONTEC/CONY CRAIG CROWN CURTIS MATHES CXC DAEWOO DAYTRON DIMENSIA DUMONT DYNATECH ELECTROBAND ELECTROHOME EMERSON 1172 1001, 1174 1016 1002 1046 1038 1003, 1004, 1038 1004 1001, 1038 1004 1004, 1175 1002 1009 1004, 1174, 1176 1004, 1004, 1012, 1038 1038, 1000, 1038 1004, 1171 1004, 1000 1004, 1178 1002, 1003, 1004, 1025, 1031, 1038, 1047, 1179, 1004, 1048, 1046 1038, 1038 1000, 1055, 1181 1004, 1004, 1058, 1038, 1004, 1038 1004, 1135, 1142, 1179 1038 1062 1174 1062 1002 1000, 1054, 1128, 1004, 1012, 1089, 1173

EN

2056, 2107 2055, 2056, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2069, 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074, 2106, 2113, 2131 2131 2013, 2013, 2010, 2078,

MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH NEC NIKKO NOBLEX OLYMPUS OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PENTAX PENTEX RESEARCH PHILCO PHILIPS PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PROSCAN PROTEC PULSAR QUARTER QUARTZ QUASAR RCA

1038 1005, 1006, 1007, 1175, 1176

2026 2016, 2026, 2053, 2061 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2064, 2079, 2111, 2123

1083, 1162

1006, 1008, 1174

2131

2022, 2109, 2125, 2126, 2127 2055, 2056, 2107, 2120 2022, 2062, 2063 2062, 2096, 2124 2055, 2080, 2081, 2123 2017, 2019, 2110 2001

1006, 1008, 1016, 1038, 1105, 1171, 1177 1006 1006 1013, 1014, 1038, 1176 1171 1004, 1006, 1015, 1105, 1162, 1171 1005,1006, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1127, 1006, 1171 1151 1176 1004, 1006, 1026, 1032, 1039, 1123, 1191 1006 1049, 1046 1003, 1004, 1006, 1022, 1052, 1054, 1087, 1164, 1165, 1166, 1167, 1168, 1151 1005, 1006, 1012, 1019, 1056, 1057, 1155, 1156, 1171, 1172 1046, 1171 1006 1006, 1012, 1013, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1136, 1137, 1138, 1139, 1140, 1141, 1143, 1144, 1145, 1146, 1148, 1150,

RADIOSHACK/REALISTIC RADIX RANDEX RICOH RUNCO SAMSUNG SANKY SANSUI SANYO SCOTT SEARS SHARP SHINTOM SHOGUN SIGNATURE SINGER SONY STS SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC TANDY TASHIKO TATUNG TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVSION UNITECH VECTOR RESEARCH VICTOR VIDEO CONCEPTS VIDEOSONIC WARDS

2022, 2001, 2083, 2090, 2011, 2029,

2125 2003, 2084, 2091, 2013, 2049,

2013, 2085, 2107, 2014, 2050,

2021, 2086, 2115, 2021, 2096,

2055, 2087, 2120, 2022, 2131

2056, 2088, 2125 2023,

1006, 1012, 1027, 1033, 1041, 1124,

1019, 1014, 1028, 1034, 1042, 1162,

1022 1023, 1029, 1035, 1043, 1171,

1024, 1030, 1036, 1037, 1044, 1046, 1176, 1177,

2013, 2131 2092, 2013, 2015, 2116 2014, 2055, 2017, 2056,

2015, 2033, 2053, 2112 2111, 2123 2023 2025, 2032, 2035, 2038, 2065, 2021, 2056, 2029, 2061, 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2107, 2118 2094, 2095, 2096, 2131 2098

ENVISION FISHER FUJITSO FUNAI FUTURETEC GE

1050, 1051, 1162, 1180

GIBRALTER GOLDSTAR GRUNDY HALLMARK HARVARD HITACHI

2131 2061, 2128 2004, 2098, 2099, 2119, 2128 2107 2021, 2022, 2026, 2062, 2063, 2065, 2026 2011 2111 2026, 2109 2014, 2024, 2049, 2014

2058, 2085, 2111 2021, 2026, 2100, 2129 2047 2051, 2055, 2065, 2093, 2116

IMA INFINITY JANEIL JBL JCB JC PENNY

JENSEN JVC

2010, 2015, 2016 2010, 2015, 2016, 2113 2013, 2055, 2107, 2026, 2010, 2098, 2014, 2056, 2116, 2061 2011, 2104, 2015, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2061, 2096, 2101, 2102, 2131 2018, 2058, 2111 2119, 2128

1004, 1058, 1171, 1006 1013, 1157,

1005, 1006, 1008, 1022, 1052, 1063, 1064, 1072, 1087, 1105, 1172, 1181 1054, 1060, 1065, 1066, 1067, 1158, 1159, 1182

XR-1000 YAMAHA ZENITH

43

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 6

Remote Codes
KAWASHO KAYPANI KENWOOD KLOSS NOVABEAM KTV LOEWE LOGIK LUXMAN LXI MAGNAVOX 1002, 1175 1004, 1068, 1038, 1062 1083 1004, 1000, 1162, 1004, 1074, 1131, 1083 1062 1004, 1006, 1176 1001, 1004, 1080, 1054, 1052 1004, 1080, 1083 1003, 1004, 1038, 1084 1006, 1003, 1006, 1016 1038 1185 1095, 1035, 1003, 1003, 1062, 1184 1003, 1069, 1089 1004, 1004, 1004, 1105 1054 1000, 1004, 1151 1004 1003, 1000, 1162, 1000, 1096, 1129, 1176 1151 1004, 1004, 1105, 1171 1191 1004, 1162, 1006 1004, 1000, 1049, 1110, 1004, 1113, 1004 1001, 1004, 1006 1006, 1019 1069, 1174, 1183 1070, 1171, 1176, 1177 SIMPSON SONIC SONY SOUNDESIGN SQUAREVIEW SSS STARLITE SUPRE-MACY SUPREME SYLVANIA 1008 1176 1002 1004, 1189 1004, 1038 1174 1002 1004, 1074, 1183, 1033, 1173 1003, 1054 1004, 1004, 1038, 1171 1117 1004, 1049, 1118, 1171 1052, 1066, 1004, 1174 1000, 1033, 1076, 1184 1004, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1038, 1046 1038

1006 1006, 1181 1006, 1075, 1132,

1049, 1062, 1071, 1072, 1073, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1089, 1130, 1133, 1134, 1183, 1184

MAJESTIC MARANTS MARANTZ MEGATRON MEI MEMOREX MGA MIDLAND MINUTZ MITSUBISHI MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH MULTIVISION NAD NEC NIKKO NTC ONWA OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PHILCO

1006, 1062, 1078 1059 1006, 1082, 1083, 1162 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1082 1151, 1171, 1172, 1181 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1081, 1082, 1082, 1083, 1125 1173 1005, 1006, 1105, 1176, 1178 1178 1071, 1072, 1185 1004, 1005, 1006, 1089 1016

SYMPHONIC TANDY TATUNG TECHNICS TECHWOOD TEKNIKA

1006, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1116, 1161, 1184 1038, 1189 1178 1006, 1054 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1013, 1016, 1046, 1076, 1082, 1083, 1105, 1170,

TELECAPTION TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVISION UNIVERSAL VICTOR VIDTECH VIKING WARDS

1006 1071, 1072, 1089, 1105, 1109, 1117, 1160, 1162 1087 1182 1005, 1006 1001, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1019, 1024, 1046, 1052, 1062, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1083, 1087, 1088, 1095, 1119, 1120, 1005, 1006, 1019 1083, 1151, 1152, 1153, 1154

YAMAHA ZENITH 1173 1191 1054, 1062, 1170 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1068, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1077, 1183, 1004, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1171 1006, 1090, 1091, 1092, 1179, 1185 1005, 1006, 1016, 1171

Satellite Receivers
CHAPPARAL 5056, DRAKE 5058, GE SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, GENERAL INSTRUMENTS 5060, PANASONIC SATELLITE RECEIVER 5075 PRIMESTAR DBS 5076 PROSCAN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, RCA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, REALISTIC 5063 SONY SATELLITE RECEIVER 5072 STS1 5064 STS2 5065 STS3 5066 STS4 5067 TOSHIBA 5068 TOSHIBA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5073 UNIDEN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5069 5057 5059 5001 5061, 5062

PHILIPS

PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PRICE CLUB PRISM PROSCAN PROTON PULSAR PULSER QUASAR RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC RCA

1181 1006, 1012, 1093, 1175

5001 5001

1054, 1004, 1171, 1003, 1098, 1179,

1070, 1006, 1172 1004, 1099, 1181,

1094 1012, 1038, 1049, 1095, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1019, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1103, 1187, 1188, 1190

RHAPSODY RUNCO SAMPO SAMSUNG SAMSUX SANSUI SANYO SCOTCH SCOTT SEARS

1006, 1171, 1172, 1175 1005, 1006, 1012, 1015, 1019, 1104, 1106, 1171, 1172

Audio (RCA/Dimensia only)


AM/FM AUX PHONO CD TAPE 4003 4004 4005 4007 4006

1048, 1049, 1050, 1080, 1107, 1108, 1169, 1180, 1189 1006, 1004, 1050, 1162, 1006, 1122, 1012, 1006, 1051, 1180, 1012, 1171, 1024, 1013, 1066, 1181, 1029, 1173 1035, 1019, 1071, 1189 1095, 1038, 1046 1046, 1048, 1072, 1109, 1111, 1112,

Laser disc Players


PROSCAN RCA 2001 2001

SHARP SHOGUN SIGNATURE

1083, 1115

44

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 7

Language Codes
For audio track and subtitle selection, see p.25,26. Abkhazian Afar Afrikaans Albanian Amehanie Arabic Armenian Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Basque Bengali, Bangla Bhutani Bihari Bislama Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Cambodian Catalan Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Dutch English Esperanto Estonian Faeroese Fiji Finnish French Frisian Galiean Georgian German Greek Greenland Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiaic Irish Italian Japanese Javanese Kannada 6566 6566 6570 8381 6577 6582 7289 6583 6588 6590 6665 6985 6678 6890 6672 6673 6682 6671 7789 6669 7577 6765 9072 6779 7282 6783 6865 7876 6978 6979 6984 7079 7074 7073 7082 7089 7176 7565 6869 6976 7576 7178 7185 7265 7387 7273 7285 7383 7378 7365 7369 7375 7165 7384 7465 7487 7578 Kashmiri Kazakh Kanyarwanda Kirghiz Kirundi Korean Kurdish Laothian Latin Latvian, Leltish Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Malay Malayalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Naru Nepali Norwegian Occitan Oriya Oroma (Atan) Punjabi Pashto, Pushao Persian Polish Portuguese Quechua Ahaero- Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sangbo Sanskrit Sents Gaelic Serbian Servo-Croatian Sesotho Setswana Sindhi Singhalese Siswati Slovak Slovenian Somali Spanish Sudanese Swahili Swedish Tagalog Tajik Tamil 7583 7575 8287 7589 8278 7579 7585 7679 7665 7684 7678 7684 7775 7771 7783 7776 7784 7773 7782 7779 7778 7865 7869 7879 7967 7982 7977 8065 8083 7065 8075 8084 8185 8277 8279 8285 8377 8371 8365 7168 8382 8372 8384 8478 8368 8373 8383 8375 8376 8379 6983 8385 8387 8386 8476 8471 8465 Tatar Telugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya Tonga Tsonga Turkish Turkmen Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Welsh Wolaf Xhosa Yiddish Yoruba Zulu 8484 8469 8472 6679 8473 8479 8483 8482 8475 8487 8575 8582 8590 8673 8679 6789 8779 8872 7473 8979 9085

EN

45

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 8

Limited Warrranty (US)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

How State Law relates to warranty:


Some states do not allow the exclusion nor limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside the U.S.A. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

If you purchased your unit outside the United States:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

46

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 9

Limited Warranty (Canada)


What your warranty covers:
Defects in materials or workmanship.

Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

For how long after your purchase:


One year from date of purchase for labor and parts The warranty period for rental units begins with the first rental or 45 days from date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

EN

What we will do:


Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center the labor charges to repair your unit. Pay any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center for the new or, at our option, refurbished replacement parts required to repair your unit.

How you get service:


Take your unit to any Authorized RCA Audio Service Center. To identify your nearest Authorized RCA Audio Service Center, ask your dealer, look in the Yellow Pages, or call 1-800-336-1900. Show the Authorized Service Center Representative your evidence of purchase date or first rental. Pick up your unit when repairs are completed. Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale or receipted invoice which is evidence that the product is within the warranty period must be presented to obtain warranty service. For rental firms, proof of first rental is also required.

How Provincial Laws relates to warranty:


This warranty gives you specific legal rights which are in addition to statutory warranties that may vary from Province to Province.

If you purchased your unit outside Canada:


This warranty does not apply. Contact your dealer for warranty information. Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.

What your warranty does not cover:


Customer instruction. (Your Owners Manual describes how to install, adjust, and operate your unit. Any additional information should be obtained from your dealer.) Installation and related adjustments. Signal reception problems not caused by your unit. Damage from misuse or neglect. Cleaning of audio heads. Batteries. A unit that has been modified or incorporated into other products or is used for institutional or other commercial purposes. A unit purchased or serviced outside Canada. Acts of nature, such as but not limited to lightning damage.

Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.

47

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 10

Limited Warrranty(Mexico)
Centro de Servicios Autorizados Express (servicio en 24 horas) Mxico, D.F. Monterrey. N.L. Guadalajara, Jal.
Digital Ser vice Av. 3 A No. 12, Local 2 Col. Santa Rosa Mxico , D.F. Tel 01 53889621 55877599 55878971 55673972 Audio Estreo Aguilar Servicio Especializado de Jalisco Gral. Zuazua 738 Nte . Enrique Daz de Leon No . 821 Col. Centro Col. Sagrada Familia Monterrey. N.L. Guadalajara, J al. Tel 01 (8) 3724989 Tel 01 (3) 1267431 3755440 1267430 3755884 8253229 82582

AGUASCALIENTES
Electrnica JIMSA Av. Adolfo Lpez Mateos No . 230 ote . Col. Centro Aguascalientes, Ags. C.P. Tel. (01-49) 15 51 81 / 78 07 57 Fax.(01-49) 15 81 00

Serv. Elec. Especializado Cuahutemoc No. 2A Col. Centro, C.P. 29200 San. Cristbal de las Casas, Chis. Tel/Fax.(01-967)8-1355 Fax.(01-967)8-1355

onica Rico Electr Iturbide y Manuel Acua Col. Centro. Cd. Acua, Coahuila. C.P. 26250 Tel. (877) 236 23 Vacom Av. Morelos 1016 ote . Col. Centro Torren, Coah. C.P. 27000 Tel. (01-17) 18 39 05, 22 15 51 Fax.(01-17) 18 11 98 Electr o Vision Allende No. 114 esq.Xicotencatl Zona Centro Piedras Negras, Coahuila. C.P. Tel. (878) 21875 Fax.(878) 21875 Multiser vicios del Nor te 5 de Mayo 295sur . Col. Centro Sabinas, Coahuila. C.P. 26700 Tel. (861) 264 31 Fax.(861) 264 31

DURANGO
Macroservicios. Calle Patoni No. 105 sur . Col. Centro Durango, Dgo. Tel. (01-18) 12 26 86 Fax.(01-18) 12 26 86

Ele Aplicada Ser v Digitales 4a. Av., Sur No. 51 BAJA CALIFORNIA NORTE Col. Centro, C.P. 30700 Electrnica General Internac Blvd. Insurgentes No. 16174, Loc. 2AC. Tapachula, Chis. Tel. (01-962)6-9998 Plaza de Abastos Los Almos Fax.(01-962)5-4578 Tijuana, BCN C.P. 22440 Tel. ( 01-66 ) 21 22 15 CHIHUAHUA Tel. / Fax: ( 01-66 ) 21 22 15 Zener Electrnica Trasvia y Retes No. 3503A Baja Electr onics Col. Sn. Felipe Hacienda de Corralejo No. 2099 Chihuahua, Chih. C.P. 31240 Col. Hidalgo Tels. ( 01-14 ) 14 01 16; 26 50 41 Mexicali, B .C.N. C.P. 21389 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-14 ) 26 50 41 Tel. (01-65) 619818, 619808 Fax.(01-65) 619808, 619818 vox Magna Tlaxcala 1161 Serv. Electrnico Ensenada Col. Hidalgo Calle 4ta No. 1050, Local B Cd. J uarez, Chihuahua.C.P. 32010 Col. Centro. Tel. (01-16)12 40 31 Ensenada, B.C.N. C.P. 22800 Fax: (01-16)12 40 31 Tel. (01-61) 740 0532 Fax.(01-61) 788356

ESTADO DE MEXICO
Electrnica Alcntara. Reforma No. 36 Col. Centro Chalco, Edo. de Mex.C.P. 56600 Tel. ( 01-597 ) 51 847 Fax: ( 01-597 ) 51 847 Ctro Serv. Electrnicos L. Portillo, esq. Blvd. Coacalco Col. Villa de las Flores Coacalco, Edo. de Mex.C.P. 55710 Tels. 879 3404; 874 6006 Fax: 898 2464 SHUREE Electrnica Av. De los Maestros No. 113A Col. Centro, C.P. 50060 Toluca, EDM. Tel. (01-72)14-9330, Fax.(01-72)13-3424 TV Servideo Oriente 9 No. 182 Col. Reforma Cd. Neza, Edo . De Mex.C.P. 57840 Tel. 5857 2547 Fax.5857 6399 Servicio Sony Visin Prensa No. 1253 Col. Prensa Nal. Ind. Vallejo. Tlanepantla, E.D.M. C.P. 54170 Tel. 587 75 99 Fax: 587 89 71 GUANAJUATO Tecnologa Electrnica Blvd. Adolfo Lpez Mateos No . 2834A Col. Haciendas El Rosario Len, Gto. C.P. 37130 Tel:(01 4) 773 6634 Fax.(01 4) 773 6634 Mar Electr onic's Brisas No. 999 Col. Las Reinas, C.P. 36660 Irapuato, Gto. Tel. (01-462)4-7140 Fax.(01-462)4-7 140 Tele Ser vicio Chucho. Blv Adolfo Lpez Mateos No 510 Pte Col. Centro, C.P. 38000 Celaya, Gto. Tel. (01-461) 2-4714, Fax.(01-461) 3-0591 Tele Radio Or tega. Av. 16 de Septiembre No . 1076 Col. Centro, C.P. 38600 Acambaro, Gto. Tel. (01-417)2-0780 Fax.(01-417)2-0780

COLIMA
Elec. Saturno de Colima Nigromante No. 138 Col. Centro Colima, Col. C.P. 28000 Tel. ( 01-331 ) 4 55 54, 4 50 00 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-331 ) 4 55 54 Lab.Elect. De la Mora Allende No. 110 Col. Centro Manzanillo , Col. C.P. 28200 Tel. ( 01-333 ) 2 30 04 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-333 )

BAJA CALIFORNIA SUR


Digital Sound 16 de Septiembre No . 390 Col. Centro La Paz, Baja Calif ornia Sur Tel. (112) 32017 Fax.(112) 32017 Video Ser vicio Beluz Carretra a todos Santos No. 32 Col. Infonavit Las Brisas. Los Cabos san Lucas, BCS C.P. 23410 Tels. (01-114) 313 65 Fax.(01-114) 313 65

Electr onica T ony Priv. De la calle 6ta oriente No. 7 Col. Centro Cd. Delicias, Chihuahua Tel. (01-14) 74 30 26 Fax.(01-14) 74 30 26

Taller Electrnico Tony 20 de Noviembre No. 1521 Col. Centro. Cd. Camargo, Chihuahua. C.P. Tel. (146) 234 67 Fax.(146) 234 67

DISTRITO FEDERAL
SIMEL Ro Churubusco No. 2215 Col. Agrcola Oriental Mxico , D.F. C.P. 08500 Tel. 756 0883 Fax: 756 0883

COAHUILA CAMPECHE
Videoservicio Av. Lpez Matees No . 24 Col. Barrio Sn. Roman, C.P. 24040 Campeche, Camp. Tel. (01-981) 6-3333 Fax.(01-981) 1-0664 Electrnica Pr of esional Blvrd. Francisco Coss No. 450-1 Col. Centro Saltillo, Coah C.P. 25000 Tels. ( 01-84 ) 10 03 00 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-84 ) 12 30 44 Audio y Video Electr onica Miguel Blanco 307-A Col Zona Centro. Monclova, Coahuila. C.P. 25700 Tel. (01-86) 33 94 06 Fax.(01-86) 33 94 06 o Visin Electr J uan Aldama No. 6 y Presid. Carranza Col. Centro Nueva Rosita, Coahuila. C.P. Tel. (86) 14 58 44 Fax.(86) 14 58 44

CHIAPAS
KC Vdeo 10a.Norte Oriente No. 153A Col. Centro Tuxtla Gutirrez, Chis . C.P. 29000 Tel. ( 01-961 ) 8 19 08; 8 36 43 Fax.( 01-961 ) 8 19 08

Novatron. Diag. San Antonio No. 1213 Col. Narvarte Mxico , D.F. C.P. 03020 Tel. 639 0812 Fax: 639 1184 Electrnica Rang el. San Felipe No. 157 Col. Pedregal de Santa Ursula Mxico D .F. C.P. 04800 Tel. 619 3213 Fax: 619 4565

RTD101-EN

last

11/25/02

10:30 AM

Page 11

Limited Warranty (Mexico)


GUERRERO
Nueva Elec. Auditron Aquiles Serdan No. 14B Col. Centro Acapulco, Gro. C.P. 039300 Tels. ( 01-74 ) 82 62 42 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-74 ) 83 20 62

NUEVO LEN
Audio Estereo Aguilar Gral. Zuazua 738 Nte . Col. Centro Monterrey, Nvo. Len. CP. 64000 Tels. ( 01-8 )372-4989 / 375-5440 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-8 ) 375-5884 Teleservicio Murillo Allende No. 595 Sur. Col. Centro Cd. Linares, Nvo Len. C.P. 67700 Tel. (01-821) 266 50 Fax. (01-821) 266 50

Reparaciones Electrnicas J .Jose Ros No . 178 ote. Col. Centro. Culiacan Sinaloa. C.P. 81200 Tel. (01-67) 16 81 32, 16 51 45 Fax.(01-67) 16 81 32, 16 51 45 Electrnica Morelos . Morelos No. 201 ote Col. Centro. Los Mochis, Sinaloa. C.P. 81200 Tel. (01-68) 12 05 88 Fax. (01-68) 12 05 88

Micronics Calle 10 No. 607. Col. Jardin 20 de No viembre Madero, Tamps. C.P. 89440 Tels. ( 01-12 ) 15 96 89 Fax: ( 01-12 ) 10 38 82 Laboratorio Electrnico Washington 3142 Col. Juarez (Centro) Nuevo Laredo, Tamps. C.P. 88000 Tel. (01-87) 14 95 92, 14 98 52 Fax. (01-87) 14 71 71 Electronica Emmanuel Obregon No. 205A Zona Centro Cd. Mante, Tamaulipas. C.P. 89800 Tel. (01-123) 290 81 Fax. (01-123) 290 81

HIDALGO
Tec.Electrnica Digital Blvd. Valle de San. Ja vier No. Col. Fracc. Valle de San. Ja vier Pachuca, Hgo. C.P. 42086 Tel. ( 01-771 ) 3 24 36 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-771 ) 3 24 36 Electrnica Especializada Independencia No. 102 Loc.C Col. Centro, C.P. 43600 Tulancingo, Hgo, Tel. (01-775)5-2654 3-9120 Fax. (01-775)5-2654 3-9120

NAYARIT
Electrnica Show San Luis No. 118 sur Col. Centro Tepic, Nay. C.P. 63000 Tel. ( 01-321 ) 4 58 00 Tel. / Fax: (01-321) 4 58 00

SONORA
Wong's Electrnicos Monteverde No. 267 esq. Balderr ama Col. Balderrama Hermosillo, Son. C.P. 83180 Tels. ( 01-62 ) 10 54 95; 10 05 86 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-62 ) 10 54 95 Dasetronik . Guerrero No. 308-A este. Col. Centro. Navojoa, Sonora. C.P. 85800 Tel. (01-642) 240 64, Fax. (01-642) 136 64 Audio video Electrnica Av. Zaragoza No . 516 pte. Col. Centro. Cd. Obregon, Sonora. C.P. 23000 Tel. (01-64) 14 38 28 Fax. (14 75 75) Electrnica Univer sal. Calle 29 A v. Alfonso Idberry No. 401 Col. Centro Cd. Guaymas, Sonora. C.P. 85400 Tel. (01-622) 29 411

VERACRUZ
Grupo Digital I. Zaragoza No. 212 Col. Centro Coatzacoalcos, Ver. C.P. 96400 Tel. ( 01-921 ) 2 02 29 Fax.( 01-921 ) 2 02 29 Serv Tcnicos Prof. Av. 13 No.400 Esq. Calle 4 Col. Bella Vista Crdoba, Ver. C.P. 94500 Tel. ( 01-271 ) 2 73 22 Fax. ( 01-271) 2 25 39 Electrnica Arizona Bustamante No. 46 Col. Centro J alapa, Ver. C.P. 91000 Tel. ( 01-28 ) 18 78 68 Fax. ( 01-28 ) 12 25 34 Com. y Electrnica Miguel Hidalgo No. 103 Col. Buena Vista Sur Minatitlan, Ver. C.P. 96730 Tel. ( 01-922 ) 3 15 65 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-922 ) 3 15 65 Electrnica Digital BORR Av. J urez No . 516 Col. 27 de Septiembre Poza Rica, Ver. C.P. 93320 Tel. ( 01-782 ) 3 69 49 Fax.( 01-782 ) 3 69 49 Electrnica DICA F. del Paso y Troncoso No. 908 Col. Centro Veracruz, Ver. C.P . 91700 Tels. ( 01-29 ) 31 20 33; 31 22 96 Tel. / Fax:( 01-29 ) 31 2 33 Seguridad Plus. Oriente 4 No. 187 Esq. Sur 5 Col. Centro, C.P. Orizaba, Ver. Tel. (01-272) 5-0235

JALISCO
Serv. Esp. De Jalisco Ignacio Ramirez No . 567 S.H. Sta. Teresita Guadalajara, J al. C.P. 44200 Tels. ( 01-3 ) 825-3229, 827-0721 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-3) 825-3229 Electrnica Integral Candelaria No. 202, Esq. Analco Col. Sta. Mara Puerto Vallarta, J al. C.P. 48348 Tels. ( 01-322 ) 4 37 36 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-322 ) 4 85 90 Setesa 5 de Febrero No. 2786 Col. Rancho Blanco Tlaquepaque, Jalisco. C.P. 44890 Tel. (01-3) 635-4404, 635-1875 Fax. (01-3) 635-4404, 635-1875

OAXACA
El Francistor Hsares No. 207 Col. Centro Oaxaca, Oax.C.P. 68000 Tel. ( 01-951 ) 6 47 37 Fax. ( 01-951 ) 472 97

PUEBLA
Serv. Express Electrnico Prol. Reforma No. 6908A Col. La Libertad Puebla, Pue. C.P. 72130 Tels. (01-22 ) 49 78 19; 37 02 82 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-22 ) 31 32 93

QUERETARO
Blauton Industrial Av. Universidad No. 44B Col. Pathe Quertaro, Qro. C.P. 76020 Tels. ( 01-42 ) 23 22 66; 23 49 34 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-42 ) 23 22 67

MICHOACAN
Alka Electrnica Garca de Len No. 271 Col. Chapultepec Sur. Morelia, Mich. C.P. 58260 Tels. ( 01-43 ) 14 55 21; 15 90 36 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-43 ) 15 94 25 Centro Electrnico Son y J usto Mendoza No . 12 Col. Centro Uruapan, Mich. C.P. 60000 Tels. ( 01-452 ) 4 37 78; 4 08 38 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-452 ) 4 59 09 Multiserv Prof.amora Z 5 de Mayo No. 699A Col. El Duero Zamora, Mich. C.P. 59690 Tel. ( 01-351 ) 5 54 16 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-351 ) 5 54 16

QUINTANA ROO
Electrnica Beta Av. Sun Yax Chen No . 43 Loc.4 Col. Centro Cancun, Q. Roo. C.P. 77508 Tel. ( 01-98 ) 84 54 12 Fax. ( 01-98 ) 87 38 13 Electr onicos y Mas Ignacio Zaragoza No . 204-A Col. Centro. C.P. 77000 Chetumal, Q. Roo Tel. (983) 26663, 24622, 21562 Fax. (983) 26014

Electr onica Castillo Noche Buena # 37 Col. El rastro Nogales, Sonora. C.P. 84000 Tel. (16) 314 6857 Fax.(16) 312 3087

TABASCO
Elec. Sigma de Tabasco Av. Gregorio Mndez No.2819 Col. Atasta Villahermosa, Tab. C.P. 86100 Tels. ( 01-93 ) 54 00 33; 54 20 30 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-93 ) 54 00 33

TAMAULIPAS
Electrnica Digital Independencia No. 112 esq. 11 Col. Centro Matamoros, Tamps. C.P. 88000 Tel. ( 01-88 ) 13 50 13 Tel. / Fax.( 01-88 ) 13 50 13 Centr o de Servicio Lugo Rosalinada Guerrero No. 285 Col. Prol. Longoriiia Reynosa, Tamps. C.P. 88699 Tel. ( 01- 89 ) 24 92 43 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-89 ) 24 92 43 Esp. Electrnicas Matamoros poniente 225 Col. Centro Cd. Victoria, Tamps. C.P. 87000 Tel. (01-131) 299 45 Fax. (01-131) 251 93

SAN LUIS POTOSI


Electronica Especializada Manuel J. Clouthier No . 212C Col. Las aguilas San Luis Potos, SLP. C.P. 78270 Tels. ( 01-48 ) 17 62 79 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-48) 14 19 02 Estereo Car Negrete No. 612 Col. Centro Cd. Valles, SLP. C.P. 79000 Tel. (01- 138) 206 51 Fax. (01- 138) 206 51

MORELOS
Electrnica Hertz Insurgentes No. 190 Col. Emiliano Zapata Cuautla, Mor. C.P. 62744 Tel. ( 01-735 ) 3 84 10 Fax. ( 01-735 ) 3 84 10 Electrnica Her tz Libertad No. 108 Col. La Carolina Cuernavaca, Mor. C.P. 62190 Tel. ( 01-73 ) 13 90 92 Fax. ( 01-73 ) 13 09 49

YUCATAN
Cinescopios Calle 70 No. 443, oc.7 por 49 Col. Centro Mrida, Yuc. C.P. 97000 Tels. ( 01-99 ) 28 54 8, 2 28 59 05 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-99 ) 28 59 05

SINALOA
Serv. Electrnico del Pacifico Mariano Escobedo No. 1022 Col. Centro Mazatln, Sin.C.P. 82000 Tel. ( 01-69 ) 82 01 55 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-69 ) 82 01 55

ZACATECAS
Electronica Mario. Morelos Poniente No. 1214 Col. Centro Zacatecas, Zac. C.P . Tel. (01-492) 275 61 Fax.(01-492) 27 5 61

DATOS DEL PRODUCTO

Sistema De Audio 5CD PRODUCTO: ___________________________________________________

Receptor de audio/vdeo Dolby Digital DVD

RTD101 RS2601/RS2602/RS2603 MODELO: _________________ NO.DE SERIE: _______________________

POLIZA DE GARANTIA
.A de C.V. garantiza este producto Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico S en todas sus partes y mano de obra, contra cualquier defecto de fabricacin y funcionamiento, a partir de la fecha de entrega al cliente final. Bajo el siguiente trmino: Producto
Televisores c/cinescopio de 36,6 cm. (14 pulgadas) y menores Televisores c/cinescopio de 48,3 cm (19 pulgadas) y mayores. Televisin de Proyeccin Videocaseteras Videocmaras Equipos de Audio Reproductor de DVD Accesorios 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao . 2 aos cinescopio as partes. 2 aos otr 2 aos. . 2 aos cinescopio 1 ao otras partes. 1 ao

DATOS DEL CLIENTE

EXPEDIDA A: __________________________________________________

DIRECCION: ___________________________________________________

Partes

Mano de Obra

__________________________________________________________________

NOMBRE: _____________________________________________________

DIRECCION: ___________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

FECHA DE COMPRA: ___________________________________________ SELLO Y FIRMA DEL VENDEDOR

CONDICIONES
actura de 1. Para ser efectiva esta garanta se requiere presentar esta pliza y/o f compra, junto con el producto en cualquiera de nuestros Centros de Servicios ido. xa), o en el lugar donde fu adquir Autorizados, (que se indican en la hoja ane ar y/o reponer las 2. Comercializadora Thomson de Mexico se compromete a repar ectuosos sin cargo al consumidor, o en caso de que a piezas y componentes def criterio de dicha empresa no sea posible la reparacin, cambiar por uno nuevo, . Los gastos de transportacin dentro de exactamente del mismo modelo o su similar anta, la red de servicios, que se deriven del cumplimiento de esta pliza de gar .A de C.V. a Thomson de Mxico S sern cubiertos por Comercializador odos los productos debern ser llevados a cualquier Centro de Servicio Autorizado, 3. T , los cuales excepto los televisores con pantalla de 63,5 cm (25 pulgadas) o mas sern reparados en el domicilio del cliente. 4. El tiempo de reparacin en ningn caso ser mayor a 30 das, contados a partir de la recepcin del producto en el Centro de Servicio Autorizado. 5. Para la adquisicin de partes y accesorios, contactar al 01-800-1117221 o acudir a ,. Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico NOTAS: ir a su distribuidor para En caso de extravo de la pliza, el consumidor debe recurr su reposicin, previa presentacin de la factura o nota de compra. Para su comodidad, solicite informes sobre la localizacin del Centro de Servicio , llamando al: Autorizado mas cercano a su domicilio

Page 12

ESTA GARANTIA NO TIENE VALIDEZ EN LOS SIGUIENTES CASOS

Si el producto no ha sido operado de acuerdo con el instructivo de uso en espaol


que acompaa al producto.

10:30 AM

Si el producto ha sido utilizado en condiciones distintas a las normales y/o se hacen

caso omiso de los cuidados y advertencias que se sealan en el manual de usuario.

11/25/02

Si el producto ha sido alterado, modificado o sufrido daos por causas ajenas al fabricante u ocasionadas por el consumidor.

Si se ha tr atado de reparar el aparato por personas no autor izadas por


01-800-1117221
Comercializadora Thomson de Mexico

last

RTD101-EN

Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5

No. Poliza:

RTD130 NOTES

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY. READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETYRELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. DESIGN ALTERATION WARNING - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturer's warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacings between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-ofplace or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis' normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis' are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis' have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords which do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used. PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING - The picture tube in this receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.

Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some "in-line" picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such "permanently attached" yokes from the picture tube. X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued Xradiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an X-radiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturer's specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the Xradiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called "horizontal disable" or "hold-down" circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by closetolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action. ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the "on" position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the "off" position.
reading should be < 0.5mA

DEVICE UNDER TEST

probe all exposed metal surfaces

LEAKAGE CURRENT TESTER + -

2-wire cord

also test with plug reversed (use ac adapter plug as required)

earth ground

LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a non-polarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the "on" position and then in the "off" position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.

Page 1-2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY . READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETY-RELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some in-line picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such permanently attached yokes from the picture tube.

X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture

DES I GNAL T E RATI ONWARNI NG- Do not alter or add to the mechanical or

electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturers warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacing between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-place or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords that do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used.

tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued X-radiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an Xradiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturers specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the X-radiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called horizontal disable or hold-down circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by close-tolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action.

ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC

plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the on position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the off position.

LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled,

PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING

receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.

- The picture tube in this

plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a nonpolarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the on position and then in the off position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY . READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETY-RELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some in-line picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such permanently attached yokes from the picture tube.

X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture

DES I GNAL T E RATI ONWARNI NG- Do not alter or add to the mechanical or

electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturers warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacing between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-place or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords that do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used.

tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued X-radiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an Xradiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturers specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the X-radiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called horizontal disable or hold-down circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by close-tolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action.

ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC

plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the on position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the off position.

LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled,

PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING

receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.

- The picture tube in this

plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a nonpolarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the on position and then in the off position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY. READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETYRELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. DESIGN ALTERATION WARNING - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturer's warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacings between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-ofplace or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis' normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis' are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis' have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords which do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used. PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING - The picture tube in this receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.

Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some "in-line" picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such "permanently attached" yokes from the picture tube. X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued Xradiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an X-radiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturer's specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the Xradiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called "horizontal disable" or "hold-down" circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by closetolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action. ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the "on" position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the "off" position.
reading should be < 0.5mA

DEVICE UNDER TEST

probe all exposed metal surfaces

LEAKAGE CURRENT TESTER + -

2-wire cord

also test with plug reversed (use ac adapter plug as required)

earth ground

LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a non-polarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the "on" position and then in the "off" position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.

Page 1-2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY. READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETYRELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. DESIGN ALTERATION WARNING - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturer's warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacings between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-ofplace or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis' normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis' are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis' have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords which do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used. PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING - The picture tube in this receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.

Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some "in-line" picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such "permanently attached" yokes from the picture tube. X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued Xradiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an X-radiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturer's specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the Xradiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called "horizontal disable" or "hold-down" circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by closetolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action. ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the "on" position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the "off" position.
reading should be < 0.5mA

DEVICE UNDER TEST

probe all exposed metal surfaces

LEAKAGE CURRENT TESTER + -

2-wire cord

also test with plug reversed (use ac adapter plug as required)

earth ground

LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a non-polarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the "on" position and then in the "off" position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.

Page 1-2

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.

 
   6 CHANNELS VOLUME CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The SM7346 is 6 channels electric volume controlled 3-wire serial data. The IC is suitable for use in DVD systems and AV.

SM7346

FEATURES
* 4 Output ports * Built-in microcomputer interface circuit controlled by 16-bit serial data. * Electric volume Volume level......0dB~-79dB, - dB(1dB/ step) * Tone control Bass/Treble, 0dB~+10dB(2dB/step)

APPLICATION
* DVD * Home Audio equipment * AV

PIN ASSIGNMENTS

OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 AVDD SWin GNDS SRin SLin GNDC Cin GNDR Rin GNDL Lin BYPASSR BYPASSL LTRE LBASS3 LBASS2 LBASS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 SDIP 42PIN

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

DVDD OUT4 CLK OUT3 DATA OUT2 LATCH OUT1 DGND AVDD AGND SWin SW out GNDS SRout SRin SLout SLin Cout GNDC Rout Cin Lout GNDR AVSS Rin CL1 GNDL CL2 Lin CR1 BYPASSR CR2 BYPASSL RTRE LTRE RBASS3 LBASS3 RBASS2 LBASS2 RBASS1 LBASS1 NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TSOP 44PIN

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23

DVDD CLK DATA LATCH DGND AGND SW out SRout SLout Cout Rout Lout AVSS CL1 CL2 CR1 CR2 RTRE RBASS3 RBASS2 RBASS1 NC

Page 1

V.1.0

 
   6 CHANNELS VOLUME CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The SM7346 is 6 channels electric volume controlled 3-wire serial data. The IC is suitable for use in DVD systems and AV.

SM7346

FEATURES
* 4 Output ports * Built-in microcomputer interface circuit controlled by 16-bit serial data. * Electric volume Volume level......0dB~-79dB, - dB(1dB/ step) * Tone control Bass/Treble, 0dB~+10dB(2dB/step)

APPLICATION
* DVD * Home Audio equipment * AV

PIN ASSIGNMENTS

OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 AVDD SWin GNDS SRin SLin GNDC Cin GNDR Rin GNDL Lin BYPASSR BYPASSL LTRE LBASS3 LBASS2 LBASS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 SDIP 42PIN

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

DVDD OUT4 CLK OUT3 DATA OUT2 LATCH OUT1 DGND AVDD AGND SWin SW out GNDS SRout SRin SLout SLin Cout GNDC Rout Cin Lout GNDR AVSS Rin CL1 GNDL CL2 Lin CR1 BYPASSR CR2 BYPASSL RTRE LTRE RBASS3 LBASS3 RBASS2 LBASS2 RBASS1 LBASS1 NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TSOP 44PIN

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23

DVDD CLK DATA LATCH DGND AGND SW out SRout SLout Cout Rout Lout AVSS CL1 CL2 CR1 CR2 RTRE RBASS3 RBASS2 RBASS1 NC

Page 1

V.1.0

THE SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) Schematic and replacement parts are not available. Order complete board assembly, stock number 257176.

Power Supply
CON5A WARNING SEE NOTE POWER SWITCH WARNING SEE NOTE FB507 2 XXX F501 TH501 1 4A 125V SCK-1R37 1R3 1/4W L501 1 4 L503 2 3 1 4 L506 2 AC2 3 330nF 275v C601 3 D511 C560 C525 47uF 50V 50V BYV27-200 T501 C524 R596 10R 1/2W 1N5822 D512 C598 R598 10R 1/2W 50V 220R 1W R591 R585 10K 1/2W Z508 7V5 1.3W -27V 13 50V 470pF C591 ~FIL+ 12 100R 1/4W R589 ~FIL11 STBY 50V 50V 1W P501 AGND 9 3.3VM 8 1000uF 25V 470R 1W C547 R555 3 5VZ 7 AGND 6 Q509 2sc3746 D513 MBR745 C529 AGND 7 13 14 0.27R 1/2W R546 10R 1/2W C530 R553 220 1/16W 1000UF 25V 2200uF 16V C531 R565 470R 1W 50V +9V 2 12VM 1 470pF C590 100uF 16V C561 P502 38V PWR_DN R581 47K 1/4W D514 1 3 AGND 2 100nF 50V C542 C528 TX13/7.9/6.4-3E25 1 4 XXX L505 1nF 50V 2 3 R506 1K 2W C546 10nF 50V 38V 12 GND_AMP 11 500mW 39V Z503 Q508 BC817 1/16W 1/16W R575 R513 10 R559 47K 47K 12VM 8 3.3VM AGND AGND 1 2 1 2 OP502 AGND OUT IC503 2 -IN OUT 7 VCC 10K 1/16W 1 2M2 1/16W 100pF 50V R529 8 R535 R601 1/4W 220R AGND +12V 5 4 3 EL817 AGND 4 R569 330 1/4W -12V 3 PWR_DN 2 10K 1/16W C536 1nF 50V R606 R605 1K 1/16W AGND TL431ACLP IC506 220K 1/16W 5K6 1/16W R568 R603 C3 50V 100nF C537 1 R 2 A R550 0.27R R551 0.27R 3W 3W 3W 0.27R R552 AGND 1 BC807 Q527 1 3k 1/4W R563 C506 3 +IN -IN 6 C563 50V 100uF C562 100nF 50V 4 GND +IN 5 27K 1/16W R548 +5VZ C540 470NF 63V 1/16W 15K R583 7K5 1/16W +3.3VZ 1/16W 1/2W 1/16W C555 1000uF 10V 2 N501 GND_D OP503 EL817A DRAIN FQP7N40 Q507 D510 1N4148 GATE SORC 1. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performance and WARNING SEE NOTE safety of this unit. 6K8 1/16W C522 68nF 16V R539 2. All ground use screw fix to chassis ground except AMPGND. NOTES: NOTES: 5K6 1/16W R576 COMPONENTS DESIGNATED BY THE SAFETY WARNING SEE NOTE R564 3 C516 50V 100NF MC33072D WARNING SEE NOTE (All the above parts in the block are safety parts) C554 9 8 7 R574 50V 150R 1/2W 470pF MBR-745 D522 D523 SBL10L25 C574 45V R579 3K9 1/16W 45V R592 R514 150R 1/2W 470R 1/2W R519 4K7 1 R C551 GND_D 1nF 50V 1000uF 470R 100K 2k2 390 470pF 50V C552 1000uF 10V 1/16W R515 R572 1/16W R571 R570 C553 10V 6 7 9 1/4W 33K 1/4W GND_AMP 10 BC817 Q525 2200uF 50V 2200uF 50V C535 C534 GND_AMP R558 GND_AMP R597 33K 1/16W 38V 13 14 68K 1/4W R557 100R 1/2W 1/16W 75K R567 R562 C527 10nF 50V C538 10nF 50V 5VZ 4 AGND 3 500mW 9V9 Z506 1nF 50V AGND 3.3VM 5 2 1 10 N503 2 T50-52B 162UH EE-42X20 +38V + 330nF 275V C501 GBU8J 4 1 1.5KZ200A 3W 100R 200V DB501 1 18 12 0.27R 1/2W +12VA 470pF 50V D520 1UF 100NF 1N5822 AGND 16 17 0.27R FIL+ 11 9 33R 1/2W 15 Q520 BC817 C505 10 FIL0.27R 1/2W C539 1nF 50V D503 1/2W 33R R577 100uF 16V C541 1/2W -12VA C599 470pF 50V R599 10R 1/2W 100NF C587 C586 C588 470pF 50V 1 TVR10221 220V 2 RV501 2 1 R501 470uf 1 R503 GND R500 3M3 1/2W C592 1N5F 1N5F CHASSIC_GND C593 WARNING SEE NOTE GND 100R 3R3 250V 250V R507 2K2 1/4W Z501 18V GZ18-2 82K 1/4W R508 3W R509 C504 Z502 82K 470uF 200V AC1 C502 POWER CORD 2 N504 D507 EGP30G 400V 3N3F 500V FB503 XXX 3 1 FQP13N50 12.5UH L507 2 D501 BAV21 C548 2200uF 25V AGND 12V FB509 R587 1/2W 12R R586 1/2W 12R 12V R511 1/4W DRAIN GATE 1/4W R518 820R 1/4W R590 1W 120K 0.22R 3W 2 1 4 SORC 470 -27_V R556 3M9 100pF 50V C526 R502 1K5 1/4W

T50-52B

FB508

2 1 L510 WARNING SEE NOTE

BYV27-200 +12VA

1nF 50V

P505

Q521

BC807

-12VA +38V C532 R547 15R 1/2W

IN4004

R588 1/4W 15K

R528 50V 47uF

R517 1/4W 100R

OP_2

1 2

EL817

4 3

R580 1/4W 1K

5VZ

1nF 50V

R593

2 D504 MMBD7000 3 2.2UF 35V 1

R536 5K6 1/16W 1 50V 100nF C571 8 R524 22K 1/16W 7 TH502 TTC03-154 150K OP505 EL817

AGND R554 1K2 1/4W

STPS20H100CT BAV21 D519 D526 IN4148

C597

1K 1/16W

4 COMP IC501 2 Vfb UC3843B R523 Isense OUT 10K 1/16W 3 6 220NF 50V C566 Vi Vref 3

1 2

820 1/16W

R533 3K3 1/16W 2n2F 50V

R532

R531 68K 1/16W 68K 1/16W

R530 3K3 1/16W

R525

GND

IN4148 D524

R526 2n2F 50V 56K 1/16W

C515 10nF 50V

47K 1/16W

Rt/Ct

GND

5 R522

R520

R528 2K7 1/16W C512 100nF 16V

2K2

1/16W

IN4148 D502 C558 100nF 16V C508 1000UF 35V

Q503 BC817

Q504

C513

R527 C511 10nF 50V C510 3n3F 50V C509 560pF 50V

2K2 1/16W R573

220R

Q506 KTC3203

1/16W

C514

Q502

BC807

IN4148

D525

3N3F 250V C550

R602 220 1/16W 4 3

OP501 EL817

35V C507 220NF 50V C517 47UF 10 6 ER-28 T502 4 1 2 3 Z507 500mW

BC817

BC817

Q505

GND

P6KE200 200V

Z505

470K 2W C523

R544

3N3F 500V

F502 1/2W WARNING SEE NOTE AC1 R560

FB502 XXX EGP10G D508 R538 3R3 1/4W L504 1 2 15uH T50-52B D509 BAV21 R578 33R 1/2W 1

33R

500mA 125V 4

R611

1W

DB502 B380R AC2

220K

FB504 XXX

N505

R584 6K8 1/4W 200V

C570

47uF

D560

C565 GND 8k2 1/16W D540 R545 1 35V 2U2F

COMP IC502

Vref

3 R594 1K 1/16W 7 2 C580

Vfb UC3843B

Vi

R540 6 100R 1/4W

3 1/16W 8K2 R595 50V 1N5F

Isense

OUT

R541 5 100R 1/16W 10K 1/16W R542

Rt/Ct R537 510

GND

1nF

50V

GZ18-2

18V

C595 470pF 50V C557 2n2F 50V C519

1/16W R549 430 1/4W 100nF 16V

4V3 IC505 TL431ACLP

1nF 50V C559

10nF 50V

C518

47uF 35V

C520

GND

C521

R543

2R2 1/2W

GND

2K2 3 C A2

1/16W R521

THE SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) Schematic and replacement parts are not available. Order complete board assembly, stock number 257176.

RTD101

SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Subwoofer: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: THD: Input Sensitivity: Power Output: Subwoofer Power Out: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: DVD/CD CVBS Video Frequency Response: S-Video Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity CD: Eccentricity DVD:

120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 20-20,000 Hz 20-20,000 Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 20-100Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 0.5m Vrms @ 6 ohms 65 db 70 db 0.05 % 450 mV +/- 30 mV 32W @ 10% THD 38W @ 10% THD 30Hz 1000 +/- 100 mV 530-1710 +/- 5 kHz 600 uV/m 40 db 60 db 87.5 108 +/- 0.1 Mhz 46 dbf 60 db 28 dbf 40 IRE Multi burst 0.1 Mhz/4 Mhz +/- 2.5 db 0.1 to 3.8 Mhz +/- 2.5db 60 db

Black Dot CD & DVD: Finger Print CD & DVD:

0.6mm 65um

+/- 140um +/- 100um

RTD130

SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Subwoofer: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: THD: Input Sensitivity: Power Output: Subwoofer Power Out: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: DVD/CD CVBS Video Frequency Response: S-Video Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity CD: Eccentricity DVD:

120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 20-20,000 Hz 20-20,000 Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 20-100Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 0.5m Vrms @ 6 ohms 65 db 70 db 0.05 % 450 mV +/- 30 mV 32W @ 10% THD 38W @ 10% THD 30Hz 1000 +/- 100 mV 530-1710 +/- 5 kHz 600 uV/m 40 db 60 db 87.5 108 +/- 0.1 Mhz 46 dbf 60 db 28 dbf 40 IRE Multi burst 0.1 Mhz/4 Mhz +/- 2.5 db 0.1 to 3.8 Mhz +/- 2.5db 60 db

Black Dot CD & DVD: Finger Print CD & DVD:

0.6mm 65um

+/- 140um +/- 100um

RS2622
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: Crosstalk: Maximum Input: Power Output: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: Frequency Response: Stereo Separation @ 1kHz: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: TAPE Frequency Response: S/N Ratio (Playback): Channel Separation @1 kHz: Wow & Flutter: CD Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity: Vertical deviation:

120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 60-20,000 Hz 60-16,000 Hz +0/-3dB 1m Vrms @ 6 ohms 70 db 65 db 65 db 2 Vrms 75W @ 10% THD 6 mW 530-1710 600 uV/m 40 db 1000 mV/m 87.5 107.9Mhz 26 dbf 100 10 KHz +/- 5 db 26 db 55 dbf 35 dbf 125 8 kHz +/-5 db 45 db 34 db 0.2% 60 20,000 Hz +0/-3 db 75 db
140 um 780 mm

Page 1-3

RS2620
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: Crosstalk: Maximum Input: Power Output: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: Frequency Response: Stereo Separation @ 1kHz: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: TAPE Frequency Response: S/N Ratio (Playback): Channel Separation @1 kHz: Wow & Flutter: CD Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity: Vertical deviation:

120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 60-20,000 Hz 60-16,000 Hz +0/-3dB 1m Vrms @ 6 ohms 70 db 65 db 65 db 2 Vrms 40W @ 10% THD 6 mW 530-1710 600 uV/m 40 db 1000 mV/m 87.5 107.9Mhz 26 dbf 100 10 KHz +/- 5 db 26 db 55 dbf 35 dbf 125 8 kHz +/-5 db 45 db 34 db 0.2% 60 20,000 Hz +0/-3 db 75 db
140 um 780 mm

Page 1-3

SPECIFICATIONS
Power source Load impedance Reference output 10% THD output Speaker Recording system Erase system : : : : : : : AC 120 V, 60 Hz 4 ohm 1V 5WX2 4 ohm X 2 AC Bias Magnet Erase

BAND: AM 1 KHz 30% MOD.


Characteristic Frequency Range Intermediate Frequency Usable Sensitivity (S/N 20dB) Selectivity 20 KHz Low High 600 KHz 1400 KHz 999 KHz Unit KHz KHz KHz dB dB dB Limit 520 1720 450 3 68 68 15

BAND: FM 1 KHz 22.5 KHz DEV.


Characteristic Frequency Range Intermediate Frequency Usable Sensitivity (S/N 30 dB) S/N at 1mV Input Low High 89.1 MHz 106.1 MHz 98.1 MHz Unit MHz MHz MHz V V dB Limit 87.5 107.9 10.7 0.15 8 8 45

TAPE RECORDER
Characteristic Play Frequency Response 125 Hz-8 KHz S/N Ratio MTT-112B Track cross talk (W/Band Pass Filter) Tape speed (3 KHz/-10 dB) Wow & Flutter (3 KHz-JIS WTD) Channel separation (1 KHz/-10 dB) Unit dB dB dB % % dB Limit -5/5 42 50 -2/+3 0.35 26

CD
Test disc EQ Functions Display : : : : PHILIPS test disc 444A Flat Play/Pause, Stop. Skip (<</>>), Repeat Play LCD Multi-Display Beam laser Cross Interleaved Reed-Solomon Code 16-bit linear 2 Times Unit dB dB m m m dB dB Limit -4/+2 54 600 600 60 45

Digital signal processing Optical pick/up : Error correction : Digital filter : Sampling rate :

Item Frequency Response 100 Hz /16 KHz S/N Ratio Interruption in information layer Black dot Eccentric disc Dynamic range Channel separation (W/Band Pass Filter)

SYSTEM CONTROL SCHEMATIC


SHUFFLEMIX REPEATALL 1 DISCS INTRO PROG ST

F1_1

P24

P23

P22

P20

NP1

P21

P19

P18

P17

P16

P15

P14

P13

P12

GAME_IN/MP3_IN AUX_L AUX_R R414L


1/16W 20K 1/16W 39K 1/16W 39K 1/16W 20K

F1_2

P10

P11

2G

3G

4G

5G

6G

7G

8G

9G

P9

P8

P7

P6

P5

P4

1G

MW FM LW AM PM

RDS BASS CD TUNER TAPEAUX ATS SURROUND

DP01

D718(HB) D717(LB) D714(LB) D715(HB) D712(HB) D707(LB) D713 D711

POWER-ON DEFAULT VOLUME SET, 11-8,10-10,01-12,00-14 AM AUTO-SCAN THRESHOLD SET FM AUTO-SCAN THRESHOLD SET

MHz KHz

11-1000uV, 10-63uV, 01-40uV, 00-28uV 11-150uV, 10-30uV, 01-10uV, 00-5uV

NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, B. All Capacitor values are in uF

1/16w

FOR EU VERSION---24/12 HOURS 1-24HR, 0--12 HR FOR EU VERSION---LW/MW 1--LW/MW, 0--AM FOR EU VERSION---AM 9K/10K 1--9K, 0--10K FOR RDS 1--RDS AVAILABLE, 0--RDS N/A

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

P3 P2 P1 NP2F2_1 F2_2

D708 D709 D710

FOR EU VERSION---FM 50K/200K 1--50K, 0--200K

R413L R413R

1 2 3 NJ504

C707
47nF 50v

C708
47nF 50V

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit. MOTOR

GND

AGND

R414R

GND

FOR LOGIC DECK

REC_A_B REC_SW

+10V FILFIL+

KTC3198GR Q702
R701
330 1/16W

L701 100uH

1N4148

D704

+5V

MOTOR_VCC

-30V

D701
6V2 1/2W

C701
47uF 10V

C702
100uF 10V

C704
100nF 50V

1N4148

D703 C705
100nF 50V

C706
220uF 10V

GND H/P_MUTE H/P_IN

GND

P80/FIP13

RDS-CLK RDS-QUAL

ECO

1N4148 D705

1 R7821K 1/16W R783


1K 1/16W

P82/FIP15 P83/FIP16 P84/FIP17 P85/FIP18 P86/FIP19

P81/FIP14

FIP0

FIP2

FIP3

FIP4

FIP5

FIP6

FIP7

FIP8

FIP10

FIP9

FIP12

FIP1

FIP11

4.7K 1/16W

R721

1/16 47N

C750

100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 P87/FIP20 80 VLOAD 79 P90/FIP21 78 P91/FIP22 77 P92/FIP23 76 P93/FIP24 75 P96/FIP27 72 P97/FIP28 71 P100/FIP29 70 P101/FIP30 69 P102/FIP31 68 P103/FIP32 67 P104/FIP33 66 P105/FIP34 65 P106/FIP35 64 P107/FIP36 63 P110/FIP37 62 P111/FIP38 61 P112/FIP39 60 P113/FIP40 59 P114/FIP41 58 P115/FIP42 57 P116/FIP43 56 P117/FIP44 55 P120/FIP45 54 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49 P121/FIP46 53 P122/FIP47 52 P123/FIP48 51 P94/FIP25 74 P95/FIP26 73 R739

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

VDD3 P37

RDS-DATA

P36/BUZ P35/PCL P34/TI2 P33/TI1

68K 1/16W

TUNER-POWER CD_SYNCHRO CLOCK-T STAND_BY

MUTE

1N4148

D706

R784

1K

1/16W

R7874.7K

1/16W

D718 D717 D714 D715

1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148

P32/TO2 P31/TO1

P30/TO0 10 RESET 11 X2 C711


33pF 50V 4M19HZ

D708 D710 D711

D709

1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148

Y701

C712
33pF 50V

C715 33pF 50V

Y702 32768Hz

12 X1 13 IC(VPP)

D713 D707 D712

ST-MONO DATA-T WR-EN SDATA SCLK

R716

R788

1K

R717 3.3K R718 3.3K

1K

1/16W

C714 33pF 50V

14 XT2 15 P04/XT1

16 VDD2 17 P27/SCK0

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

18 P26/SO0/SB1 19 P25/S10/SB0 20 P24/BUSY 21 P23/STB 22 P22/SCK1 23 P21/SO1 24 P20/SI1 25 AVSS 26 P17/ANI7 27 P16/ANI6 30 P13/ANI3 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD 28 P15/ANI5 29 P14/ANI4

uPD780205GF

IC701

PROTECTION

TAPE_MUTE
XSURR +10V +5V C725 33pF 50V

R708
10K 1/16W

R703
10k 1/16W

C726
33pF 50V

P03/INTP3/CI0

P00/INTP0/TI0

GND R734

10k 1/16W

10k 1/16W

10k 1/16W

P74

KTC3198GR

R707
10K

P73

P72

VSS

P71

1/2W

AVREF

R785 R714 R789

6V2

12k 1/16W

KTC3198GR

Q704

1N4148

D721

C721A
1UF 50V

R738 1K 1/16W

P01/INTP1

Q703

P02/INTP2

D702

R709

1K 1/16W

B8
1K 1/16W

4.7k 1/16W

R706

R705
4k7 1/16W

1/16W

R700
22k 1/16W

R786

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

POWER RED C730 10V 47uF


C751
100N 1/16

D716

IR701 GP1U287R
3 1 2
GND 10uF 10K

GND +5V
22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 47K 1/16W 10K 1/16W 10K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W

C753

50V 100nF
100R R7021/16

OUT

VCC

10K

R760

R762

R763

R764

R765

R766

R767

R768

R769

R770

R761

R771

To CDM5B
8

4K7 1/16W

R781
10K 1/16W

CD-REST
7

1K 1K

R712

R790

1/16W 1/16W

R795 1.2k 1/16W C790 100nF 50V SW706


PROG/SET

R796 1.5k 1/16W


2 1

R791 2K 1/16W

R792 8.2K 1/16W SW704


SOURCE

7.5K 1/16W
2 1 SW705 BAND
2

R744

22K 1/16W

R741

47k 1/16W
EQ PRESET

R780

10K 1/16W

10K 1/16W

1/16W

CD-DATA

R746

2 1

SW707

CLOCK

AUTO PROG

SW701

2 1

R794

P706

CD-CLK

1K 1K 1K 1K

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

DRW-DIR-CW
3

R748 R749 R750

R735

GND

R797 10K

R747

C791 100nF 50V SW708


REWOARD

R798 1.2k 1/16W


2 1

R799 1.5k 1/16W


2 1
STOP TUNE/PRESET

R742 2.2k 1/16W


2 1

R743 3.3k 1/16W


2 1

DRW-DIR-CCW

SW709

FORWARD

SW710

SW711

PLAY PAUSE

SW712

VOL_DOWN

2 1

DRAW-IN DRAW-OUT

DISC-SW PLATTER-SW

1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K

R752 R753 R754 R755 R756 R757

1K

R751

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

C792 100nF 50V SW715


REPEAT

R728 2.7K 1/16W


2 1

R740 2.2k 1/16W


SW713
TIMER

R736 3.3k 1/16W SW716


DIMMER DEMO

R737 4.7k 1/16W


2 1

SW717

POWER /ECO

2 1

P705

CAR-DIR-CW CAR-DIR-CCW

100nF 50V
SW703
2 BASS/ BOOST

C793

1.2K 1/16W
SW714
2 VOL_UP

R759

R729 1.5k 1/16W


SW702
2 OPEN/ CLOSE

82K 1/16W

R745

4.7K 1/16W SW718


DISK SKIP

R793

SLIDER-UP
2

2 1

SLIDER-DN

To CDM5B

GND

PAGE 9-2

PAGE 9-2

TDA7296
70V - 60W DMOS AUDIO AMPLIFIER WITH MUTE/ST-BY
VERY HIGH OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE (35V) DMOS POWER STAGE HIGH OUTPUT POWER (UP TO 60W MUSIC POWER) MUTING/STAND-BY FUNCTIONS NO SWITCH ON/OFF NOISE NO BOUCHEROT CELLS VERY LOW DISTORTION VERY LOW NOISE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION THERMAL SHUTDOWN DESCRIPTION The TDA7296 is a monolithic integrated circuit in Multiwatt15 package, intended for use as audio class AB amplifier in Hi-Fi field applications (Home Stereo, self powered loudspeakers, Topclass TV). Thanks to the wide voltage range and Figure 1: Typical Application and Test Circuit MULTIPOWER BCD TECHNOLOGY

Multiwatt 15 ORDERING NUMBER: TDA7296V

to the high out current capability it is able to supply the highest power into both 4 and 8 loads even in presence of poor supply regulation, with high Supply Voltage Rejection. The built in muting function with turn on delay simplifies the remote operation avoiding switching on-off noises.

C7 100nF R3 22K C2 22F +Vs R2 680 C1 470nF R1 22K IN+MUTE R5 10K MUTE STBY R4 22K C3 10F C4 10F 4 10 9 IN2 7 -

+Vs

C6 1000F

+PWVs 13 14 OUT C5 22 F 6 BOOTSTRAP

IN+

VM VSTBY

MUTE STBY 1 STBY-GND 8

THERMAL SHUTDOWN

S/C PROTECTION 15 -PWVs C8 1000F


D93AU011

-Vs C9 100nF -Vs

September 1997

1/13

TDA7296
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS


Symbol VS IO Ptot Top Tstg, Tj 2/13 Supply Voltage Output Peak Current Power Dissipation T case = 70C Operating Ambient Temperature Range Storage and Junction Temperature Parameter Value 35 5 50 0 to 70 150 Unit V A W C C

TDA7296
70V - 60W DMOS AUDIO AMPLIFIER WITH MUTE/ST-BY
VERY HIGH OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE (35V) DMOS POWER STAGE HIGH OUTPUT POWER (UP TO 60W MUSIC POWER) MUTING/STAND-BY FUNCTIONS NO SWITCH ON/OFF NOISE NO BOUCHEROT CELLS VERY LOW DISTORTION VERY LOW NOISE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION THERMAL SHUTDOWN DESCRIPTION The TDA7296 is a monolithic integrated circuit in Multiwatt15 package, intended for use as audio class AB amplifier in Hi-Fi field applications (Home Stereo, self powered loudspeakers, Topclass TV). Thanks to the wide voltage range and Figure 1: Typical Application and Test Circuit MULTIPOWER BCD TECHNOLOGY

Multiwatt 15 ORDERING NUMBER: TDA7296V

to the high out current capability it is able to supply the highest power into both 4 and 8 loads even in presence of poor supply regulation, with high Supply Voltage Rejection. The built in muting function with turn on delay simplifies the remote operation avoiding switching on-off noises.

C7 100nF R3 22K C2 22F +Vs R2 680 C1 470nF R1 22K IN+MUTE R5 10K MUTE STBY R4 22K C3 10F C4 10F 4 10 9 IN2 7 -

+Vs

C6 1000F

+PWVs 13 14 OUT C5 22 F 6 BOOTSTRAP

IN+

VM VSTBY

MUTE STBY 1 STBY-GND 8

THERMAL SHUTDOWN

S/C PROTECTION 15 -PWVs C8 1000F


D93AU011

-Vs C9 100nF -Vs

September 1997

1/13

TDA7296
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS


Symbol VS IO Ptot Top Tstg, Tj 2/13 Supply Voltage Output Peak Current Power Dissipation T case = 70C Operating Ambient Temperature Range Storage and Junction Temperature Parameter Value 35 5 50 0 to 70 150 Unit V A W C C

TDA7440D
TONE CONTROL DIGITALLY CONTROLLED AUDIO PROCESSOR

INPUT MULTIPLEXER - 4 STEREO INPUTS - SELECTABLE INPUT GAIN FOR OPTIMAL ADAPTATION TO DIFFERENT SOURCES ONE STEREO OUTPUT TREBLE AND BASS CONTROL IN 2.0dB STEPS VOLUME CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS TWO SPEAKER ATTENUATORS: - TWO INDEPENDENT SPEAKER CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS FOR BALANCE FACILITY - INDEPENDENT MUTE FUNCTION ALL FUNCTION ARE PROGRAMMABLE VIA SERIAL BUS DESCRIPTION The TDA7440D is a volume tone (bass and treble) balance (Left/Right) processor for quality audio applications in Hi-Fi systems. BLOCK DIAGRAM
MUXOUTL L-IN1 4 100K 5 L-IN2 100K 6 100K 7 100K 0/30dB 2dB STEP 100K 2 100K 1 G VOLUME 8 INL 9

SO28 ORDERING NUMBER: TDA7440D

Selectable input gain is provided. Control of all the functions is accomplished by serial bus. The AC signal setting is obtained by resistor networks and switches combined with operational amplifiers. Thanks to the used BIPOLAR/CMOS Technology, Low Distortion, Low Noise and DC stepping are obtained

TREBLE(L) 18

BIN(L) 14 RB

BOUT(L) 15

L-IN3

TREBLE

BASS

SPKR ATT LEFT

27

LOUT

L-IN4

21 I CBUS DECODER + LATCHES


2

SCL SDA DIG_GND

R-IN1

22 20

R-IN2

VOLUME

TREBLE

BASS

SPKR ATT RIGHT VREF

26

ROUT

R-IN3

100K 28 R-IN4 100K INPUT MULTIPLEXER + GAIN 10 MUXOUTR INR 11 19 TREBLE(R) 12 BIN(R) SUPPLY RB 13 BOUT(R) 23 CREF
D98AU883

24 25

VS AGND

April 1999

1/16

TDA7440D
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)

R_IN3 R_IN2 R_IN1 L_IN1 L_IN2 L_IN3 L_IN4 MUXOUTL IN(L) MUXOUT(R) IN(R) BIN(R) BOUT(R) BIN(L)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
D98AU884

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

R_IN4 LOUT ROUT AGND VS CREF SDA SCL DIG-GND TREBLE(R) TREBLE(L) N.C. N.C. BOUT(L)

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS


Symbol VS Tamb Tstg Operating Supply Voltage Operating Ambient Temperature Storage Temperature Range Parameter Value 10.5 -10 to 85 -55 to 150 Unit V C C

THERMAL DATA
Symbol R th j-pin Parameter Thermal Resistance Junction-pins Value 85 Unit C/W

QUICK REFERENCE DATA


Symbol VS VCL THD S/N SC Supply Voltage Max. input signal handling Total Harmonic Distortion V = 1Vrms f = 1KHz Signal to Noise Ratio V out = 1Vrms (mode = OFF) Channel Separation f = 1KHz Input Gain in (2dB step) Volume Control Treble Control Balance Control Mute Attenuation (1dB step) (2dB step) 1dB step 0 -47 -14 -14 -79 100 Parameter Min. 6 2 0.01 106 90 30 0 +14 +14 0 0.1 Typ. 9 Max. 10.2 Unit V Vrms % dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

Bass Control (2dB step)

2/16

TDA7440D
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (refer to the test circuit Tamb = 25C, VS = 9V, RL= 10K, RG = 600, all controls flat (G = 0dB), unless otherwise specified)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Min. Typ. Max. Unit

SUPPLY
VS IS SVR Supply Voltage Supply Current Ripple Rejection 6 4 60 9 7 90 10.2 10 V mA dB K Vrms dB 1 31 2.5 dB dB dB K dB dB dB dB dB dB dB mV mV dB

INPUT STAGE
R IN V CL SIN Ginmin Ginman Gstep Input Resistance Clipping Level Input Separation Minimum Input Gain Maximum Input Gain Step Resolution THD = 0.3% The selected input is grounded through a 2.2 capacitor 70 2 80 -1 29 1.5 100 2.5 100 0 30 2 130

VOLUME CONTROL
Ri C RANGE AVMAX ASTEP EA ET VDC Amute Gb BSTEP RB Input Resistance Control Range Max. Attenuation Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error Tracking Error DC Step Mute Attenuation AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB adjacent attenuation steps from 0dB to AV max 80 20 45 45 0.5 -1.0 -1.5 33 47 47 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 100 50 49 49 1.5 1.0 1.5 1 2 3

BASS CONTROL (1)


Control Range Step Resolution Internal Feedback Resistance Max. Boost/cut +12.0 1 33 +14.0 2 44 +16.0 3 55 dB dB K

TREBLE CONTROL (1)


Gt TSTEP Control Range Step Resolution Max. Boost/cut +13.0 1 +14.0 2 +15.0 3 dB dB

SPEAKER ATTENUATORS
C RANGE SSTEP EA VDC Amute Control Range Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error DC Step Mute Attenuation 70 0.5 -1.5 -2 80 76 1 0 0 0 100 82 1.5 1.5 2 3 dB dB dB dB mV dB

AV = 0 to -20dB AV = -20 to -56dB adjacent attenuation steps

NOTE1: 1) The device is functionally good at Vs = 5V. a step down, on Vs, to 4V doest reset the device. 2) BASS and TREBLE response: The center frequency and the response quality can be chosen by the external circuitry.

3/16

TDA7440D
TONE CONTROL DIGITALLY CONTROLLED AUDIO PROCESSOR

INPUT MULTIPLEXER - 4 STEREO INPUTS - SELECTABLE INPUT GAIN FOR OPTIMAL ADAPTATION TO DIFFERENT SOURCES ONE STEREO OUTPUT TREBLE AND BASS CONTROL IN 2.0dB STEPS VOLUME CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS TWO SPEAKER ATTENUATORS: - TWO INDEPENDENT SPEAKER CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS FOR BALANCE FACILITY - INDEPENDENT MUTE FUNCTION ALL FUNCTION ARE PROGRAMMABLE VIA SERIAL BUS DESCRIPTION The TDA7440D is a volume tone (bass and treble) balance (Left/Right) processor for quality audio applications in Hi-Fi systems. BLOCK DIAGRAM
MUXOUTL L-IN1 4 100K 5 L-IN2 100K 6 100K 7 100K 0/30dB 2dB STEP 100K 2 100K 1 G VOLUME 8 INL 9

SO28 ORDERING NUMBER: TDA7440D

Selectable input gain is provided. Control of all the functions is accomplished by serial bus. The AC signal setting is obtained by resistor networks and switches combined with operational amplifiers. Thanks to the used BIPOLAR/CMOS Technology, Low Distortion, Low Noise and DC stepping are obtained

TREBLE(L) 18

BIN(L) 14 RB

BOUT(L) 15

L-IN3

TREBLE

BASS

SPKR ATT LEFT

27

LOUT

L-IN4

21 I CBUS DECODER + LATCHES


2

SCL SDA DIG_GND

R-IN1

22 20

R-IN2

VOLUME

TREBLE

BASS

SPKR ATT RIGHT VREF

26

ROUT

R-IN3

100K 28 R-IN4 100K INPUT MULTIPLEXER + GAIN 10 MUXOUTR INR 11 19 TREBLE(R) 12 BIN(R) SUPPLY RB 13 BOUT(R) 23 CREF
D98AU883

24 25

VS AGND

April 1999

1/16

TDA7440D
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)

R_IN3 R_IN2 R_IN1 L_IN1 L_IN2 L_IN3 L_IN4 MUXOUTL IN(L) MUXOUT(R) IN(R) BIN(R) BOUT(R) BIN(L)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
D98AU884

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

R_IN4 LOUT ROUT AGND VS CREF SDA SCL DIG-GND TREBLE(R) TREBLE(L) N.C. N.C. BOUT(L)

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS


Symbol VS Tamb Tstg Operating Supply Voltage Operating Ambient Temperature Storage Temperature Range Parameter Value 10.5 -10 to 85 -55 to 150 Unit V C C

THERMAL DATA
Symbol R th j-pin Parameter Thermal Resistance Junction-pins Value 85 Unit C/W

QUICK REFERENCE DATA


Symbol VS VCL THD S/N SC Supply Voltage Max. input signal handling Total Harmonic Distortion V = 1Vrms f = 1KHz Signal to Noise Ratio V out = 1Vrms (mode = OFF) Channel Separation f = 1KHz Input Gain in (2dB step) Volume Control Treble Control Balance Control Mute Attenuation (1dB step) (2dB step) 1dB step 0 -47 -14 -14 -79 100 Parameter Min. 6 2 0.01 106 90 30 0 +14 +14 0 0.1 Typ. 9 Max. 10.2 Unit V Vrms % dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

Bass Control (2dB step)

2/16

TDA7440D
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (refer to the test circuit Tamb = 25C, VS = 9V, RL= 10K, RG = 600, all controls flat (G = 0dB), unless otherwise specified)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Min. Typ. Max. Unit

SUPPLY
VS IS SVR Supply Voltage Supply Current Ripple Rejection 6 4 60 9 7 90 10.2 10 V mA dB K Vrms dB 1 31 2.5 dB dB dB K dB dB dB dB dB dB dB mV mV dB

INPUT STAGE
R IN V CL SIN Ginmin Ginman Gstep Input Resistance Clipping Level Input Separation Minimum Input Gain Maximum Input Gain Step Resolution THD = 0.3% The selected input is grounded through a 2.2 capacitor 70 2 80 -1 29 1.5 100 2.5 100 0 30 2 130

VOLUME CONTROL
Ri C RANGE AVMAX ASTEP EA ET VDC Amute Gb BSTEP RB Input Resistance Control Range Max. Attenuation Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error Tracking Error DC Step Mute Attenuation AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB adjacent attenuation steps from 0dB to AV max 80 20 45 45 0.5 -1.0 -1.5 33 47 47 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 100 50 49 49 1.5 1.0 1.5 1 2 3

BASS CONTROL (1)


Control Range Step Resolution Internal Feedback Resistance Max. Boost/cut +12.0 1 33 +14.0 2 44 +16.0 3 55 dB dB K

TREBLE CONTROL (1)


Gt TSTEP Control Range Step Resolution Max. Boost/cut +13.0 1 +14.0 2 +15.0 3 dB dB

SPEAKER ATTENUATORS
C RANGE SSTEP EA VDC Amute Control Range Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error DC Step Mute Attenuation 70 0.5 -1.5 -2 80 76 1 0 0 0 100 82 1.5 1.5 2 3 dB dB dB dB mV dB

AV = 0 to -20dB AV = -20 to -56dB adjacent attenuation steps

NOTE1: 1) The device is functionally good at Vs = 5V. a step down, on Vs, to 4V doest reset the device. 2) BASS and TREBLE response: The center frequency and the response quality can be chosen by the external circuitry.

3/16

TROUBLESHOOTING
Circuit General Symptom No sound AM No sound, weak sound (Low sensitivity) FM No sound, weak sound (Low sensitivity) Tape No sound/recording, unsteady tape sound, weak sound Cause and Remedy Speakers are not connected: Check the speaker connection. Wrong function is selected: Set switch to the proper position. Defective volume control: Set the volume control to a proper sound level. Defective earphone jack: Replace the earphone jack. Mute function is active: Release it by remote control. Improper location of unit: Rotate or reposition the unit. Defect in T402: Check resistance, voltage, and current. Replace as needed. Defect AM antenna coil or oscilloscope coil: Replace if necessary. Intermediate Frequency tuning faulty: Readjust (see Alignment and Adjustment). RF tracking faulty: Readjust (see Alignment and Adjustment). Defective IC401 (LA1844): Check voltages. Replace if necessary. Poor contact in antenna circuit: Check resistance and resolder. FM antenna not connected: Connect the built-in or external antenna. Defective band selector switch: Replace or repair the switch. Defective IC401 (LA1844): Check voltages. Replace if necessary. Intermediate Frequency tuning faulty: Readjust (see Alignment and Adjustment). Poor contact in FM antenna circuit: Resolder or repair as required. Dirty capstan or head: Clean the capstan or head with alcohol. Irregular cassette tape winding: Replace tape. Defective IC302 (AN7312): Check voltages. Replace if necessary. Cassette erasure prevention tabs broken out: Replace tape or cover tab openings with adhesive tape.

13

Circuit CD

Symptom Cannot read the table of contents. no display, no sound.

Cause and Remedy Disc is inserted upside down: Insert disc correctly. Disc is dirty: Wipe clean with a soft cloth. Disc is scratched: Use a new disc. Disc is seriously warped: Use a new disc. A non-standard disc has been inserted: Use only a brand name disc. Moisture has formed inside the CD deck: Wait about 20 to 30 minutes. Defect in the servo control board: Replace or repair as required. Defect in the CD pickup mechanism: Replace as required.

14

TUNER SCHEMATIC
NOTES: TTT TF005
TP011 JR02
0R 1/16W

FM-ANT.

JP005 TP001
50V 100R 1/16W

TP003

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF

R099 R065 C040


100nF 50V

33pF

C004
50V 33p 33PF 50V

JR01

0R 1/16W

L001

C001

TP001G C007

180R 1/16W

TF007 TTT
IN OUT SFECV10.7MS3E

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum
C041

C003 TP002
GND

TP004

FM-RF

RFGND

10V 4u7F

SFECV10.7MS3IN OUT E

4.5T

Y001

Y002

100nF 50V

3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position

L003 4.5T

N001

100nF 16V

C051

C049
33PF 16V

D001 SVC201SPA C011


2.5T

5p 50V

47K 1/16W

R007

100pF 50V

L004
G CV002 11pF

JP008

47K 1/16W

R009

1/16W

R010 SVC348 D003


220K 1/16W 2K2

AFC-POS

AFC-NEG

AF-LO

VCC2 VDD

IFGND

PILFIL

MUTE

C020
470p 10V

R014

1/16W 1UF 10V

C019

C019A
470nF 10V

470nF 10V

R013
220K 1/16W

RV001

47K

1/16W

91K

MPXI LPF

1/16W

R012

AF-RO

C016

68K

FM-DEM

0.1uF 10V

470nF16V

AFO

INDICATOR

C015

VCO R011

XTAL MO-ST

TP005 TP006

X001

75.0KHZ

R035

1/16W

JP006

R008
47K

SVC201SPA

D002

15pF 50V

C012

10R 1/16W

R005

SUBGND

AGND

IC001

P0 WRITE-ENABLE DATA BUS-CLOCK DGND TP010 TP010G R036


150K 1/16W

L007

47uH

TF001

TTT

47K 1/16W

R006

47pF 50V

C010

C008 C009

100uf 10V

RIPPLE

AM-RFI

TP009G

FM-RFO

AFC-AM P1

TF008 TTT

5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

AM-MIXER

FM-MIXER

AM-IF2I/O

FM-IF1O

AM-IF1I

FM-IF2I

FM-IF1I

VSTABB

VSTABA

AGC

FM-RFI

RFGND

FM-OSC C013 AM-OSC VCC1 TUNE

R046470 R045

100nF 16V

TEA5757H

1/16W 470 1/16W

WR_EN DATA_T CLOCK_T

R047 470 C036

1/16W

12pF 50V

18K

470pF 50V

C047

C045
470pF 50V

C046
470pF 50V

C014 R015
2K2

selection TP012

TTT

10V

22p

C021

470nF

22nF

22nF

TTT

TF003

JP002

C022
10V

C023

1/16W

470nF 10V

C024
1uF 16V

2.2uf 16V

C027

C029
15pF 10V C028 100p 10V

470nF 10V

C030

C031
100nF 16V

C025 C026

1uf 16V

C032

1K0 1/16W

R030

1K

33uF 16V

C034

22R 1/16W

R034 C043
100nF 16V

J113

ST_MONO +6.5V +7V

16V

1uf

C033

1/16W

R031

100nF 16V

C035

TP004G

CDACV10.7MG4A-A R017 R021


8K2 1/16W 8K2 1/16W

TF006

TP007 TP008

VT

JP001

C039 C042

1uF 16V

TUNER_R TUNER_L

1uF 16V

PAGE 9-4

PAGE 9-4

TUNER SCHEMATIC
NOTES: TTT TF005
TP011 JR02
0R 1/16W

JP005
100R 1/16W

TP003

1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF

FM-ANT. P003 1

R099 R065 C040


100nF 50V

TP001

33pF

50V

C004
50V 33p 33PF 50V

JR01

0R 1/16W

L001

C001

TP001G C007

180R 1/16W

TF007 TTT
IN OUT SFECV10.7MS3E

2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum
C041

C003 TP002
GND

TP004

FM-RF

RFGND

10V 4u7F

SFECV10.7MS3IN OUT E

4.5T

Y001

Y002

100nF 50V

3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position

L003 4.5T

N001

100nF 16V

C051

C049
33PF 16V

D001 SVC201SPA C011


2.5T

5p 50V

47K 1/16W

R007

100pF 50V

L004
G CV002 11pF

JP008

47K 1/16W

R009

1/16W

R010 SVC348 D003


220K 1/16W 2K2

AFC-POS

AFC-NEG

AF-LO

VCC2 VDD

IFGND

PILFIL

MUTE

C020
470p 10V

R014

1/16W 1UF 10V

C019

C019A
470nF 10V

470nF 10V

R013
220K 1/16W

RV001

47K

1/16W

91K

MPXI LPF

1/16W

R012

AF-RO

C016

68K

FM-DEM

0.1uF 10V

470nF16V

AFO

INDICATOR

C015

VCO R011

XTAL MO-ST

TP005 TP006

X001

75.0KHZ

R035

1/16W

JP006

R008
47K

SVC201SPA

D002

15pF 50V

C012

10R 1/16W

R005

SUBGND

AGND

IC001

P0 WRITE-ENABLE DATA BUS-CLOCK DGND TP010 TP010G R036


150K 1/16W

L007

47uH

TF001

TTT

47K 1/16W

R006

47pF 50V

C010

C008 C009

100uf 10V

RIPPLE

AM-RFI

TP009G

FM-RFO

AFC-AM P1

TF008 TTT

5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.

AM-MIXER

FM-MIXER

AM-IF2I/O

FM-IF1O

AM-IF1I

FM-IF2I

FM-IF1I

VSTABB

VSTABA

AGC

FM-RFI

RFGND

FM-OSC C013 AM-OSC VCC1 TUNE

R046470 R045

100nF 16V

TEA5757H

1/16W 470 1/16W

WR_EN DATA_T CLOCK_T

R047 470 C036

1/16W

12pF 50V

18K

470pF 50V

C047

C045
470pF 50V

C046
470pF 50V

C014 R015
2K2

selection TP012

TTT

10V

22p

C021

470nF

22nF

22nF

TTT

TF003

JP002

C022
10V

C023

1/16W

470nF 10V

C024
1uF 16V

2.2uf 16V

C027

C029
15pF 10V C028 100p 10V

470nF 10V

C030

C031
100nF 16V

C025 C026

1uf 16V

C032

1K0 1/16W

R030

1K

33uF 16V

C034

22R 1/16W

R034 C043
100nF 16V

J113

ST_MONO +6.5V +7V

16V

1uf

C033

1/16W

R031

100nF 16V

C035

TP004G

CDACV10.7MG4A-A R017 R021


8K2 1/16W 8K2 1/16W

TF006

TP007 TP008

VT

JP001

C039 C042

1uF 16V

TUNER_R TUNER_L

1uF 16V

PAGE 9-4

PAGE 9-4

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

1) PIN CONFIGURATION

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 4 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

2) BLOCK DIAGRAM

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 5 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

3) ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 6 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

4) PACKAGE DIMENSIONS

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 7 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

1) PIN CONFIGURATION

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 4 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

2) BLOCK DIAGRAM

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 5 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

3) ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 6 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

Family Code

These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.

4) PACKAGE DIMENSIONS

All Revision See sht 1

Page No. 7 OF 7

IC MICROCONTROLLER MOS 8 BIT

Document ID:

This Section is currently not available. Look for new or revised information on CD Updates.

Power Supply Schematic


IC655 Pin 1 2 3 7.8 0 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 Q655 0 -21.1 -15 E B C -27.6 -26.9 -26.3 E B C IC656 7 3.3 0 7 Pin 1 2 3 IC657 20.2 0 15

IC658 Pin 1 2 3

Q751 0 5.1 0.7

Fan Board Schematic Q701 E B C 0 0 25.8 E B C Q702 0 0.1 25.5 E B C Q703 25.8 25.5 0

Frontboard and Keyboard Schematic


Q401 E B C 4.9 5.18 0

DVD Schematic
CN201 Pin 1 4.12 2 5.12 3 5.23 4 0 CN203 5.35 Pin 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 CN202 Pin 1 1.56 2 0 CN204 Pin 1 0 2 0

Pin 1 2 3 4 5

0.45 0 0.66 0 0.4

Pin 1 2 3 4 5

CN205 5.25 Pin 6 0 7 12.57 8 5.59 9 3.26 10

0 2.55 5.24 12.56 0

CP205 Pin 1 -15.55 2 14.98

Microprocessor System Control Schematic


NC5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 5.41 0 5.35 5.4 5.39 0.04 0.04 4.95 4.97 NC8 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0.11 0 0.06 0 0 0 0 Pin 8 9 10 11 12 13 0 0 0.01 11.58 0.09 0.04 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC12 5.3 5.12 5.06 5.4 5.18 5.53 0 1.66 Pin 1 2 3 4 4.12 5.12 5.23 0 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 4.97 5.13 4.38 0 0 0.01 5.35 5.36 5.38 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NC9 5.38 5.39 1.52 5.39 5.31 3.47 5.46 0 0.01 0 0.01 11.58 5.46 0.02 0 0 0.01 0 NC7 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0.1 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NC11 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Video Schematic
IC550 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 2.24 5.23 2.95 0 2.97 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC554 1.32 0 1.31 0 1.31 5.21 1.53 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1.64 0 1.42 0 1.32 5.21 2.15 0 IC551 1.66 0 1.47 0 1.42 5.21 2.18 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC552 1.64 0 1.45 0 1.42 5.21 2.21 0

IC553 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Power Amplifier Schematic


IC610 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.04 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0.04 14.9 IC613 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 25.7 0 -25.7 0 -3.4 0 0 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 NC 0 -3.4 0 0 NC 25.7 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 25.7 0 -25.7 0 -3.4 0 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 25.7 0 -25.7 0 -3.4 0 0 IC612 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 NC 0 -3.4 0 0 NC 25.7

IC614 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 NC 0 -3.4 0 0 NC 25.7

Q601L E B C Q635FR E B C Q670 E B C Q681 E B C Q685 E B C Q689 E B C 0 0 3.4 E B C 4.42 4.26 0 E B C 5.1 5.38 0 E B C 0 0.12 0.1 E B C 0 0 0 E B C 0 0 0 E B C

Q601R 0 0 0 Q635SL 0 0.69 0 Q671 0 -0.57 -0.1 Q682 4.42 4.26 0 Q686 0 5.29 0 Q690 0 0 3.4 E B C E B C E B C E B C E B C

Q635C 0 0 0 Q635SR 0 0.69 0 Q672 25.6 25.1 0.12 Q683 2.02 4.13 0.7 Q687 0 5.29 0 E B C E B C E B C E B C E B C

Q635FL 0 0 0 Q635SW 0 0 0 Q673 25.6 25.1 25.1 Q684 4.42 4.26 0 Q688 0 5.29 0

Main Board Schematic


IC74 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.02 0.01 0.01 -15.5 0.01 0.01 0.02 15 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC86 0.02 0.01 0.01 -15.5 0.01 0.01 0.02 15 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC87 0.02 0.01 0.01 -15.5 0.01 0.01 0.02 15 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC88 0.02 0.01 0.01 -15.5 0.01 0.01 0.02 15

IC84 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 0 0 0 0 6.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pin 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -6.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 5.45 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0

IC75 Pin 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 0 0 13.6 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DSP Schematic
IC1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1.02 0 1.05 1.2 1.37 1.42 0 3.29 3.22 1.14 0 0 3.23 5.36 IC3 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 0 IC5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2.13 0 1.04 0 2.13 0 0 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.13 0 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.38 2.11 2.11 2.11 0 Pin 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 2.14 0 1.04 1.07 1.71 1.04 1.08 1.13 0 0 1.41 2.19 0 4.58 2.13 2.13 0.73 1.64 0 1.67 1.66 0.85 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2.83 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IC6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC7 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0 15 2.6 5.32 5.32 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.55 3.22 3.22 0 Pin 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 2.28 2.28 3.47 2.29 2.29 4.28 0 2.47 2.42 2.01 2.56 2.42 2.79 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 0 IC2 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 2.82 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22

IC4 Pin 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.57 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 0 2.6 2.63

IC8 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0 15 IC14 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1.57 3.32 0 0.06 0 4.99 0 0 4.02 1.25 0 0 0.1 0 IC19 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 0.88 4.4 0 4.41 0 0 0 0 0 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 0 0 0 2.59 0 2.68 4.4 0 4.4 Pin 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1.5 1.62 0 0 0 1.45 0 3.23 0 0.02 0 0 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IC11 2.28 2.28 2.28 -15.5 2.28 2.28 2.28 15 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IC12 2.28 2.28 2.28 -15.5 2.28 2.28 2.28 15 IC18 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 5.38 2.64 0 0 0 2.64 5.38 0 0 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1 2.65 1.69 0 0.1 0 5.38 2.65 0 2.65

IC VOLTAGE CHARTS
IC401 LA1844 2.29 V 4.74 V 2.29 V 2.27 V 0V 0V 4.72 V 4.73 V 4.73 V 0.04 V 3.6 V 3.68 V 3.04 V 3.02 V 2.22 V 2.28 V 2.03 V 2.96 V 0V 0.23 V 2.28 V 2.28 V 4.73 V 3.21 V IC403 TC4052BP 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.83 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 8.03 V IC402 BU2616F 2.24 V 0.51 V 0V 0V 4.95 V 0.05 V 0.05 V 0V 0.05 V 0V 3.31 V 0.03 V 0.01 V 2.10 V 4.83 V 1.12 V 0.14 V 0V IC302 AN7312 0V 0V 0V 3.66 V 1.38 V 1.29 V 0.03 V 0.03 V 1.29 V 1.38 V 3.63 V 0V 7.15 V 7.24 V IC404 PT2253A 0V 4.33 V 4.33 V 4.39 V 4.34 V 4.35 V 8.76 V 8.71 V 7.98 V 8.66 V 4.35 V 4.34 V 4.39 V 4.34 V 4.34 V 8.76 V U601 LA4270 1.2 V 0.7 V 11.6 V 0V 0.7 V 1.2 V 11.5 V 0V 23.6 V 11.5 V U1 PT2222 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 2.12 V 0V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.05 V 0V 0V

PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 12 PIN 13 PIN 14 PIN 15 PIN 16 PIN 17 PIN 18 PIN 19 PIN 20 PIN 21 PIN 22 PIN 23 PIN 24

PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9

IC405 TA7291S 4.8 V 8.86 V 0.56 V 0V 0V 8.86 V 0.56 V 6.63 V 4.81 V

IC406 TA7291S 4.8 V 8.86 V 0.56 V 0V 0V 8.86 V 0.56 V 5.47 V 4.8 V

U802 ST24C02 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.91 V 4.91 V 0V 4.91 V

IC643 BD4742G 0V 0V 4.9 V 5V

IC641 L7809CV 15.0 V 0V 8.85 V

IC642 L7805CV 14.75 V 0V 4.98 V

U600 L7812C 24 V 0V 12 V

52

PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 12 PIN 13 PIN 14 PIN 15 PIN 16 PIN 17 PIN 18 PIN 19 PIN 20 PIN 21 PIN 22 PIN 23 PIN 24 PIN 25

4.88 V 4.88 V 4.87 V 0.39 V 4.91 V 0.05 V 4.67 V 4.91 V 4.91 V 4.91 V 4.91 V 0V 4.91 V 1.11 V 4.8 V 4.88 V 0V 4.91 V 0V 0V 0V 4.86 V 2.19 V 2.11 V 2.19 V

PIN 26 PIN 27 PIN 28 PIN 29 PIN 30 PIN 31 PIN 32 PIN 33 PIN 34 PIN 35 PIN 36 PIN 37 PIN 38 PIN 39 PIN 40 PIN 41 PIN 42 PIN 43 PIN 44 PIN 45 PIN 46 PIN 47 PIN 48 PIN 49 PIN 50

IC801 UPD780306 2.19 V PIN 51 4.91 V PIN 52 4.59 V PIN 53 2.88 V PIN 54 1.45 V PIN 55 0V PIN 56 2.23 V PIN 57 2.27 V PIN 58 2.25 V PIN 59 2.26 V PIN 60 2.26 V PIN 61 2.26 V PIN 62 2.25 V PIN 63 2.27 V PIN 64 2.18 V PIN 65 2.14 V PIN 66 2.21 V PIN 67 2.24 V PIN 68 2.21 V PIN 69 2.14 V PIN 70 2.14 V PIN 71 2.14 V PIN 72 2.14 V PIN 73 2.14 V PIN 74 2.2 V PIN 75

2.16 V 2.17 V 2.17 V 2.17 V 2.17 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.91 V 4.91 V

PIN 76 PIN 77 PIN 78 PIN 79 PIN 80 PIN 81 PIN 82 PIN 83 PIN 84 PIN 85 PIN 86 PIN 87 PIN 88 PIN 89 PIN 90 PIN 91 PIN 92 PIN 93 PIN 94 PIN 95 PIN 96 PIN 97 PIN 98 PIN 99 PIN 100

0.06 V 4.91 V 0V 2.62 V 1.58 V 4.9 V 0V 4.81 V 4.88 V 4.74 V 4.76 V 4.5 V 1.78 V 0V 4.84 V 0V 4.49 V 4.49 V 0.3 V 0V 0V 0.35 V 0.35 V 0V 4.88 V

53

TRANSISTOR
Ref. No. Q301 Q302 Q303 Q304 Q305 Q306 Q307 Q308 Q309 Q310 Q311 Q312 Q313 Q314 Q315 Q316 Q317 Q318 Q319 Q320 Q401 Q402 Q403 Q420 Q440 Q441 Q442 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 733 945 945 945 945 2999 945 945 733 945 PIN E 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 2.25 V 0V 0V 11 V 0V 0.03 V 0V 5V 9V 0V PIN B 0V 0V 0.65 V 0.65 V 0.7 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0.7 V 0.7 V 0.7 V 0.7 V 1.59 V 0V 0.65 V 11.4 V 0V 0.72 V 0V 5.6 V 8V 0V PIN C 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.5 V 0.03 V 0.03 V 0V 0V 0V 0.03 V 0.03 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 2.17 V 4.87 V 0V 12 V 0V 9V 11.4 V 9V 8.7 V 9V Ref. No. Q443 Q444 Q460 Q461 Q462 Q463 Q464 Q465 Q466 Q467 Q468 Q601 Q602 Q603 Q642 Q645 Q646 Q647 Q648 Q649 Q800 Q802 Q803 Q804 Q805 Q806 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 733 343 343 343 343 945 945 945 928 928 945 945 945 733 945 945 945 945 PIN E 0.62 V 0V 0.68 V 0.68 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.9 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 12 V 9V 0V 0V 0V 3.32 V 0V 0V 0V 0V PIN B 1.11 V 0.62 V 1.26 V 1.26 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.7 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0.7 V 0V 11 V 8V 0.7 V 0.7 V 0V 4.3 V 4.9 V 0V 0V 0V PIN C 2.51 V 2.51 V 2.95 V 2.95 V 0.03 V 0.03 V 8.6 V 7.9 V 8.6 V 0V 0V 0.03 V 0.03 V 12 V 0.03 V 8V 11.7 V 8.7 V 0V 0V 4.9 V 0V 4.7 V 3.3 V 0V 0V

54

RS2620 Voltage Charts


IC001 (Tuner) FM 0.96 0 1 1.1 1.1 1.9 11.4 6.9 0.3 1.4 0 0 4.7 0 0

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

FM 2 0 0 0 0 0 7 6.9 1 0.69 1.2 0.79 0.76 0.61 0.61

AM 2.1 0 0 0 0 0 7 2.2 1.3 0.84 1.2 0.16 0.77 0.61 0.66

Pin 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

AM 1 0 0.19 1.1 1.1 0.73 11.4 6.9 5.3 1.4 0 4.7 4.7 0 6.3

Pin 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

FM 0 1.4 0.74 1.4 0.69 1.4 0.5 1.2 0.99 1.2 1.2 0 0.78 0.22

AM 0 1.4 0 1.4 0.96 1.4 0.79 1.2 0.95 1.2 1.2 0 0.77 0.15

IC001 (CD) Pin 1 0 2 0.41 3 0.48 4 1.6 5 1.5 6 11 7 11 8 0.42

IC002 (CD) Pin 1 0 2 0.42 3 0.28 4 1.6 5 1.6 6 11 7 11 8 0.42

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Play 0 0 0.7 3.5 2.8 0 0 0.1 0 0 4.5 0

IC300 Rec Pin 1.9 13 1.9 14 0.7 15 3.4 16 2.7 17 2.8 18 0 19 3 20 2.9 21 0 22 4.4 23 0 24

Play 6.1 0 0 0 0.1 0 0.15 2.7 3.4 0.7 0 0

Rec 6 0 0 0.1 2.9 0 3.7 2.6 3.3 0.7 0 0

Page 5-1

RS2620 Voltage Charts


IC302 Play 6.5 0 0 0 0

Pin 1 2 3 4 5

Rec 6.9 0 0 2.4 0

IC401 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 0 3.3 3.3 0 Pin 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 4.7 3.3 6.6 0 2.6 2.6 3.3

IC501 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 IC502 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27

Page 5-2

RS2620 Voltage Charts


IC701 Pin 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 2.2 1.9 0 2.2 1.7 4.7 5.1 4.7 0 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0

Pin 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0.02 4.7 4.5 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 0

0 4.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.6 -4.6 -8.7 -6.7 -6.8 -8.2 -6.2 -9.1 -8.5 -12.8

Pin 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

-8.4 -12.7 0 -27.8 -8.7 -10.1 -7.9 -8.2 -9 -2.2 -0.2 -7.6 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -25.6 -25.6 -25.6 -25.5 -25.5 -25.5 -25.2 -25.5 -25.5

E B C

Q305 Play 0 0 0 Q306 0 0.69 0 Q602L 0.13 0.8 0.9

Rec 0 -2.4 4.2 Q307 0 0 4.7 Q602R 0.12 1.4 0.8 Q401 7 7.7 11.3 Q603L 4.6 5.3 7 Q402 11.3 10.6 11.3 Q603R 4.6 5.3 7 Q403 0 0.69 0 Q702 5.4 6.1 11.4 Q501 0 0 4 Q703 0 0 4.7 Q704 0 0.7 0

E B C

E B C

Page 5-3

VOLTAGES

VOLTAGES
IC302 Play 6.5 0 0 0 0

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

FM 2 0 0 0 0 0 7 6.9 1 0.69 1.2 0.79 0.76 0.61 0.61

AM 2.1 0 0 0 0 0 7 2.2 1.3 0.84 1.2 0.16 0.77 0.61 0.66

Pin 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

IC001 (Tuner) FM 0.96 0 1 1.1 1.1 1.9 11.4 6.9 0.3 1.4 0 0 4.7 0 0

AM 1 0 0.19 1.1 1.1 0.73 11.4 6.9 5.3 1.4 0 4.7 4.7 0 6.3

Pin 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

FM 0 1.4 0.74 1.4 0.69 1.4 0.5 1.2 0.99 1.2 1.2 0 0.78 0.22

AM 0 1.4 0 1.4 0.96 1.4 0.79 1.2 0.95 1.2 1.2 0 0.77 0.15

Pin 1 2 3 4 5

Rec 6.9 0 0 2.4 0

IC401 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 0 3.3 3.3 0 Pin 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 4.7 3.3 6.6 0 2.6 2.6 3.3

IC001 (CD) Pin 1 0 2 0.41 3 0.48 4 1.6 5 1.5 6 11 7 11 8 0.42

IC002 (CD) Pin 1 0 2 0.42 3 0.28 4 1.6 5 1.6 6 11 7 11 8 0.42

IC501 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 IC502 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Play 0 0 0.7 3.5 2.8 0 0 0.1 0 0 4.5 0

IC300 Rec 1.9 1.9 0.7 3.4 2.7 2.8 0 3 2.9 0 4.4 0

Pin 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Play 6.1 0 0 0 0.1 0 0.15 2.7 3.4 0.7 0 0

Rec 6 0 0 0.1 2.9 0 3.7 2.6 3.3 0.7 0 0

Page 5-1

Page 5-2

VOLTAGES

WAVEFORMS
IC701 Pin 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 2.2 1.9 0 2.2 1.7 4.7 5.1 4.7 0 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0

Pin 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0.02 4.7 4.5 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 0

0 4.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.6 -4.6 -8.7 -6.7 -6.8 -8.2 -6.2 -9.1 -8.5 -12.8

Pin 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

-8.4 -12.7 0 -27.8 -8.7 -10.1 -7.9 -8.2 -9 -2.2 -0.2 -7.6 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -25.6 -25.6 -25.6 -25.5 -25.5 -25.5 -25.2 -25.5 -25.5

E B C

Q305 Play 0 0 0 Q306 0 0.69 0 Q602L 0.13 0.8 0.9

Rec 0 -2.4 4.2 Q307 0 0 4.7 Q602R 0.12 1.4 0.8 Q401 7 7.7 11.3 Q603L 4.6 5.3 7 Q402 11.3 10.6 11.3 Q603R 4.6 5.3 7 Q403 0 0.69 0 Q702 5.4 6.1 11.4 Q501 0 0 4 Q703 0 0 4.7 Q704 0 0.7 0

E B C

E B C

Page 5-3

Page 5-4

RTD130 Waveforms

RM431 Pin 2 IC501 Pin 40 IC501 Pin 39

CP551 Pin 10 CP551 Pin 6 CP551 Pin 8

IC551 Pin 7 IC554 Pin 7 IC553 Pin 7

CP550 Pin 3 CP550 Pin 1

Page 1-6

RS2620 WAVEFORMS

IC701 Pin 11

IC701 Pin 12

IC701 Pin 19

IC701 Pin 18

IC701 Pin 9

TP007

TP008

IC401 Pin 5

IC401 Pin 2

IC401 Pin 8

IC401 Pin 10

IC302 Pin 2

IC401 Pin 27

IC401 Pin 26

RS2622 WAVEFORMS

IC701 Pin 11

IC701 Pin 12

IC701 Pin 19

IC701 Pin 18

IC701 Pin 9

TP007

TP008

IC401 Pin 5

IC401 Pin 2

IC401 Pin 8

IC401 Pin 10

IC302 Pin 2

IC401 Pin 27

IC401 Pin 26

WIRING DIAGRAM

WIRING DIAGRAM

Potrebbero piacerti anche